Shelf. 


PRINCETON,  N.  J. 

Division 

Section . ...>C31 

Number 


WAVSIDK  TKA-HOUSK. 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom; 

OR, 

LIFE  AND  SCENES  IN 

JAPAN, 

AND 

WOMAN’S  WORK  FOR  WOMAN  THERE. 


BY 

Mrs.  JULIA  D.  CARROTHERS. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

PRESBYTERIAN  BOARD  OF  PUBLICATION, 

No.  1334  CHESTNUT  STREET. 


Copyright j i8yg,  by 

THE  TRUSTEES  OF  THE 

Presbyterian  Board  of  Publication. 


Westcott  & Thomson, 
Stereotypers  and  Electrotypers,  Philada. 


'f^PERTy  0^ 

PBIRGETOH 
,ft£C.  SEP  18K2 
THEOLOGICAL^, 


TO 

THE  MEMBERS  OF 

yHE  '^OMAN'S  j^OREIGN  ^AiSSIONARY  ^OCIETY 


OF  THE 


PRESBYTERIAN  CHURCH, 

IN  REMEMBRANCE  OF  THEIR  EARNEST  PRAYERS  FOR  JAPAN 
AND  THEIR  FAITHFUL  CO-OPERATION  IN  “ WOMAN’S 
WORK  FOR  WOMAN  THERE,” 

THIS  BOOK  IS  AFFECTIONATELY  DEDICATED  BY 


ONE  OF  THEIR  MISSIONARIES. 


.•* 


':’  > 


• 'VHV 


tV’  » 

- . i» 

U'- 

4T 

-.y  • ' -?AV 

‘ ■*'  .♦  « nVl#»  '” 

-4  t " ■■  - ► 

\j 

•‘  -fo  h: 

■ .V-. 

rf 


r.M/.’v  V^'(,.  . . 

V.  iiAlihf^'  *'^^ 


0 

1Ul  V 


''■k^  ■ 

iriUr  V* 


. A;..  rcyoAi'  I'r 

^ l*»-/ 

‘ *.  - ..  ■ ■ ■ 

V4i^fei  • .UMf>  c’V> «S( . . ‘';*ru t; 

1 ,1^  B» 

1* . »'i ' :^,  ijt Vi ;:  • i . . 

i'  r:#  v>/f4  :V.J  4 ^ 

' Kl&i 

v.i  Oi^ijf^wa-a  j /Ci»  * » . '* 

' ^ ’2E 

j‘m'- 


PREFACE. 


If  they  who  walk  beside  me  as  seven  years 
of  missionary  life  are  retraced,  find  the  Master 
near  as  I find  him  ; if  they  who  stand  beside 
me  as  the  seed  is  sown  over  Japan  realize  the 
care  of  the  Father,  the  power  of  the  Spirit,  the 
preciousness  of  the  seed  and  the  blessedness 
of  the  sower  as  I do ; if  any,  being  themselves 
“heirs  of  the  kingdom,”  are  led  to  seek  with 
redoubled  zeal  to  lead  others  to  the  same 
heritage, — then  shall  I feel  that  my  work  has 
not  been  in  vain. 

To  the  members  of  the  society  with  which  I 

was  most  nearly  connected,  and  under  whose 

care  my  work  was  done  and  is  still  carried  on, 

this  book  is  dedicated.  But  it  goes  forth  with 

6 


6 Preface. 

greetings  to  All  Societies,  Mission  Circles 
and  Boards,  and  to  all  Missionaries  who  in 
any  clime  and  among  people  of  any  tongue 
are  laboring  to  sow  the  seed  of  the  kingdom. 

J.  D.  C. 

Chicago,  Sept.,  1878. 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  following  pages  are  a picture  of  seven 
years  of  missionary-life  in  Japan. 

Looking  upon  the  incidents  and  events  here 
recorded,  the  reader  may  enter  in  some  degree 
into  the  experiences  of  such  a life,  and  under- 
stand, dimly  at  least,  the  richness  and  beauty 
which  may  be  found  in  it.  The  simplicity  and 
steadfast  adherence  to  the  one  aim  and  pur- 
pose of  mission-work,  turning  aside  neither  to 
the  right  hand  nor  the  left  for  earthly  pleasure 
or  reward,  may  have  seemed  to  some  like  a 
monotonous  treading  of  the  mill  of  duty.  This 
little  book  will  perhaps  show  to  such  that  there 
are  endless  sources  of  delight  and  interest  ever 
open  to  the  earnest  missionary  in  the  minds  and 
souls  of  those  among  whom  he  is  laboring. 

And  as  we  go  in  and  out  with  the  writer  of 

7 


8 


Introduction. 


this  familiar  account  of  her  own  knowledge  of 
the  Japanese  people  and  intercourse  with  them, 
we  shall  see  fresh  evidence  of  the  ever-new 
power  of  the  old  gospel,  and  realize  the  silent 
yet  wonderfully  transforming  influence  which  it 
carries  with  it  wherever  it  takes  possession  of 
the  heart  of  man. 

The  writer’s  hope  is  that  the  simple  story  of 
what  she  saw  and  heard  during  her  residence 
in  Japan,  when  she  had  unusual  opportunities, 
which  she  diligently  improved,  of  gaining  ac- 
cess to  the  homes  and  hearts  of  the  people, 
may  answer  the  questionings  of  some  doubters 
as  to  the  benefit  of  mission-work,  and  may 
show  what  present  reward  the  Master  often 
gives  his  servants  in  the  labor  to  which  he 
calls  them. 

She  trusts  also  that  it  will  lead  many  who 
have  never  before  done  so  to  lift  up  heart  and 
voice  to  God  in  prayer  for  this  beautiful  “ Sun- 
rise Kingdom,”  which  is  just  beginning  to  turn 
its  face  toward  the  “Sun  of  righteousness,” 
and  to  feel  the  blessed  “ healing  in  his  wings.” 

M.  H.  P. 


CONTENTS 


BOOK  I. 


CHAPTER  I. 

PAGB 

“ O-Hay-0  “ Good-Morning  ” 17 

First  Sight  of  Land. — Voyage. — General  Appearance  of 
Coast. — Junks,  Fishing- Vessels,  Sailors,  Harbor,  Sampans. — 
Yokohama. — O-hay-0.” 

CHAPTER  II. 

A Look  at  the  People 25 

Different  Classes  of  Japanese. — Mikado. — Kugis. — Dai- 
mios. — Samurai. — Judges. — Priests. — Doctors. — Merchants. 

— Mechanics. — Barbers. — Coolies. — Beggars. — Religions  of 
the  Country. — Work  of  Missionaries. 

CHAPTER  HI. 

Summer  Days  in  Yokohama 37 

Climate.  — Walks  through  the  Rice-Paddies. — Trees. — 
Flowers. — Fruits. — Birds. — Animals. — Farmers. — A Pedes- 
trian Tour. 

9 


lO 


Contents. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

A Winter  in  Tokio 

Tokio. — Its  Situation. — The  Castle. — Emperor’s  Garden. — 
0-hama-go-ten. — Temples. — A-sa-ku-sa. — Shi-ba. — ^Japanese 
Houses. — Large  Fires. — The  To-ri. — Canals. — Bridges. — 
The  Foreign  Concession. — Mu-ko-ji-ma. — Sku-da-ji-ma. — 
Winter  Climate. — Flowers  and  Fruit. — Missionary  Life  in 
Tokio. 

CHAPTER  V. 

Home  and  School 

Morning  in  Tokio. — Interior  of  a Japanese  House. — 
Breakfast. — Going  to  School. — The  Written  Language. — 
What  a Japanese  Girl  Learns. — The  Baby  0-ya-su-mi-na- 
sai. — Japanese  Homes. — Position  of  Women. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Going  to  V See  Flowers  ” 

Japanese  Holidays.  — A Letter. — Dressing  the  Hair. — 
The  Bath-House. — A Little  Girl’s  Dress. — Fans,  Shoes  and 
Umbrellas. — Meeting  Friends. — Worship  at  the  Temple. — 
Mu-ko-ji-ma. — The  Feast. — Going  Home. — Social  Life. — 
Spoken  Language. — May  Days. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

Ro-ku-ban 

The  New  Mission- House. — The  Typhoon. — A Class  of 
Boys. — Young  Samurai. — The  Bible  Class. — The  Ya-cu- 
nins. — Our  New  Year. 


Contents. 


1 1 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

PAGE 

Pictures  and  Books 98 

Ancient  Warriors. — Court-Ladies. — Daimios. — Ha-ra-ki-ri. 

— Jo-ro-rei. — Japanese  Books.  — Religious. — Historical. — 
Encyclopaedias. — Allegory. — Moral  Teachings. — Poetry. — 
Novels. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

Games  and  Toys no 

Japanese  New  Year. — Division  of  Time. — Mo-chi. — Orna- 
ments.— O-mi-so-ka. — Money. — Driving  away  Evil  Spirits. — 

New  Year’s  Festivities. — The  Dolls’  Feast. — Games. — Toy- 
shops.— Japanese  Children. 


CHAPTER  X. 

What  Little  Children  Read  120 

The  Names  of  their  Books : — “ The  Ape  and  the  Crab.” — 

“ The  Rat’s  Wedding.” — “ Mo-mo-taro.” — “ Kin-ta-ro.” — 
“The  Tail-Cut  Swallow.” — “Story  of  Sho-set-su.” — “The 
Treasure.” 


CHAPTER  XL 

A Journey  from  Tokio  to  0-da-wa-ra 128 

'a  Letter. — Political  Divisions. — Postmen. — Setting  out  on 
a Journey. — The  To-kai-do. — Tea-Houses. — Ka-gos. — No-n- 
mo-no. — The  Road  to  Fu-ji-sa-wa. — The  Hotel. — A Day’s 
Journey. — Night  at  O-da-wa-ra. 


12 


Contents, 


CHAPTER  XII. 

PAGE 

On  the  Ha-ko-nes 139 

Sai-o-na-ra. — Mountain  Scene. — Ha-ta-ji-ku. — Up  to  Ha- 
ko-ne. — The  Lake. — The  Temple. — Ji-go-ku. — A-shi-no-yu. 

— Mi-ya*no-shi-ta. — Yu-mo-to. 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Pilgrims  on  Fu-ji 146 

Pilgrims  come  to  Ha-ko-ne. — Descent  of  the  Mountain. — 
Mi-shi-ma. — Yo-shi-wa-ra. — The  Base  of  Fu-ji. — The  Cin- 
der Cone. — The  Huts. — Going  up  to  the  Crater. — The  Storm. 


BOOK  II. 

CHAPTER  I. 

An  Open  Door 153 

CHAPTER  II. 

Midsummer  Holidays 163 

CHAPTER  III. 

The  Gospel  in  Japanese 172 


Contents. 


3 


CHAPTER  IV. 

PAGE 

Loaves  and  Fishes i8i 

CHAPTER  V. 

The  Holy  Spirit  Alone 190 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Christmas  at  Ro-ku-ban 197 

CHAPTER  VII. 

The  “Peep  of  Day” 204 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

The  Woman  at  the  Well 210 


BOOK  III. 

CHAPTER  I. 

“The  Churches  of  Asia  salute  You” 219 

CHAPTER  II. 

Eno-Shima 227 

2 


14 


Contents. 


CHAPTER  III. 

PAGE 

The  Strait  Gate  and  the  Narrow  Way 234 

CHAPTER  IV. 

A JiN-Ri-Ki-SHA  Journey 246 

CHAPTER  V. 

The  Two  Capitals  in  1875 254 

CHAPTER  VI. 

“The  Poor  have  the  Gospel  preached  to  Them”.  . 267 
CHAPTER  VII. 

Coming  into  the  Kingdom 278 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

“ Our  Father  which  art  in  Heaven  ” 287 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Little  Children 294 

CHAPTER  X. 


The  Hem  of  the  Garment. 


302 


Contents.  1 5 

BOOK  IV. 

CHAPTER  I. 

PAGE 

Women’s  Work  for  Women 307 

CHAPTER  II. 

“The  Christian’s  Shining  Light” 341 

CHAPTER  III. 

The  Regions  Beyond 365 

CHAPTER  IV. 

“The  Lord  showed  him  all  the  Land” 379 

CHAPTER  V. 

Sai-o-na-ra 403 


'foc-'i 


Hb* 


r'»^  :i,'.  '' 


* i jWH^  .V 


: -'  !t£»  -\^  > a ■ ' 

S“l|;---'^‘-^-  -■' 


*ii* 


: . ■:'  -‘iS 

. . , ■ 1 
'.i  ^ t;-  . 

•^'  ■^  »■■  -%'‘4‘)i5*  ♦i*  J-'  ' , ^ 

< r.  • ' 4**’V  ki  'jtill  ‘- 


’ .'T." 


V ; h r'»t 


«?fr-»'  .• 


"it,,. 


#. 


„r.,*  .■'^'  -:-  . ; ' . . 

*.  " ■*,-  • ■•■  » -laii: 


»5i' 

.7.=^* 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


BOOK  I. 


CHAPTER  I. 


“ O-JIA  Y-0  r— ^^GOOD-MORNING  /” 


First  Sight  of  Land — Voyage— General  Appearance  of 
Coast — Junks,  Fishing-Vessels,  Sailors,  Harbor,  Sam- 
pans— Yokohama — “ 0-hay-o  !” 

HE  sun  was  just  rising  over  the  islands 


of  Japan  when  we  saw  them  for  the  first 
time.  It  was  a beautiful  hour  in  which  to  arrive 
in  Zi-PAN-GU,  “The  Sunrise  Kingdom.” 

The  voyage  across  the  Pacific  Ocean  had  been 
long  and  dreary.  Day  after  day  sea  and  sky 
were  of  the  same  dull  and  leaden  hue.  Only 
once  or  twice  did  the  mists  roll  away  to  disclose 
the  blue  sky  and  the  still  bluer  sea.  One  even- 
ing the  breeze  freshened  a little,  and  there  were 
white  caps  on  the  waves.  The  Chinese  in  the 
steerage  threw  out  square  pieces  of  paper  with 
strange  characters  printed  on  them  to  appease 


B 


17 


i8 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1869 


the  gods  of  the  storm.  But  the  wind  soon  died 
away,  the  sea  became  as  smooth  as  ever,  and 
there  was  not  even  a gale  to  vary  the  monotony 
of  our  voyage. 

The  people  on  shipboard  were  not  favorable 
to  missionary  enterprise  in  Japan.  They  said 
that  it  was  contrary  to  the  treaty,  and  that  mis- 
sionaries had  no  right  to  go,  as  such,  to  Japan 
at  all.  We  thought  differently,  and  looked  above 
the  treaty  to  One  who  has  commanded  his  dis- 
ciples to  go  into  all  the  world. 

The  Japanese  have  a pretty  legend  concerning 
the  origin  of  their  country.  They  say:  “A  god 
once  dipped  his  spear  into  the  sea,  and  as  he 
lifted  it  again  the  drops  which  fell  from  it  con- 
gealed, and  Japan’s  four  thousand  isles  were 
formed.” 

But  we,  in  our  Western  wisdom,  cannot  ad- 
mit any  such  poetic  and  peaceful  origin  to  these 
islands.  Our  science  rather  suggests  that  they 
were  broken  off  from  the  great  Asiatic  conti- 
nent in  some  violent  convulsion  of  Nature, 
and  frequent  earthquakes  still  proclaim  the 
existence  of  restless  internal  fires. 

The  coast-line  of  the  Japan  islands  is  broken 
and  irregular,  with  many  bays  and  inlets. 
There  is  little  of  the  sublime  to  mark  the  scene- 
ry, but  the  islands  are  fair  and  sunny,  and  di- 
versified by  mountain  and  valley  and  wide-ex- 


1 869]  “ Good- Morning  / ” 19 

tended  plains.  Over  the  plains  broad,  shallow 
rivers  flow  peacefully  in  their  channels,  and 
down  from  the  mountain-sides,  into  the  pleas- 
ant valleys,  come  wild  little  streams,  making 
up  in  swiftness  and  impetuosity  what  they  lack 
in  size. 

As  you  travel  among  the  mountains  the  mur- 
mur and  gurgle  of  waterfalls  hidden  from  sight 
fall  upon  the  ear  as  they  tumble  over  the  rocks 
and  down  the  precipices.  Mountains,  valleys 
and  plains  are  clothed  in  the  richest  green,  and 
exhibit  in  pleasing  combination  the  productions 
of  both  temperate  and  semi-tropical  climes. 

Japan  bears  traces  of  the  curse  in  the  earth- 
quake and  the  tempest,  the  brier  and  the  thorn, 
but  there  is  little  here  that  is  hurtful ; few 
poisonous  plants  or  reptiles  are  found.  The 
Japanese  are  justly  proud  of  their  land,  whose 
beauty  they  celebrate  in  many  a song  and  poem. 

All  around  the  islands  sweeps  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  dashing  in  white  foam  upon  the  rocks 
and  murmuring  against  the  low  shores.  Some- 
times it  grows  rough  and  angry,  and  appears  as 
if  threatening  to  submerge  the  whole  land. 
But  it  is  only  a threat,  for  even  the  tiniest  isles 
are  safe.  After  all,  the  sea  loves  the  land,  and 
delights  in  whispering  to  it  pleasant  stories  and 
in  casting  its  lovely  treasures  upon  its  shores. 

As  we  neared  our  port  we  passed  some  Jap- 


20 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1869 


anese  junks.  These  clumsy,  ill-contrived  ves- 
sels do  not  often  venture  far  from  land,  but  are 
used  in  transporting  manufactures  and  products 
from  one  part  of  the  country  to  another  through 
rivers  and  inland  seas.  Nearer  the  shore  were 
smaller  fishing-vessels,  in  whose  construction 
and  the  shape  of  the  sails  you  would  observe 
a wide  difference  from  those  dotting  our  own 
waters. 

The  Japanese  are  very  dependent  upon  their 
supply  of  fish  ; as  they  eat  no  meat,  it  forms  a 
principal  article  of  their  diet.  In  the  morning, 
when  the  wind  is  fair,  the  fishing-boats  go  out 
to  sea,  and  all  day  long  their  white  sails  glitter 
far  out  upon  the  water.  Usually  the  fish  are 
plentiful  and  cheap.  The  smaller  ones  are 
eaten  by  the  poorer  classes,  while  the  rich 
choose  the  delicious  tai  and  bora.  Sometimes 
the  fishermen  bringf  home  sharks  and  enormous 
cuttle-fish. 

Japanese  sailors  are  very  expert  in  the  man- 
agement of  their  boats,  seldom  meeting  with  ac- 
cidents. They  are  good  swimmers  and  divers, 
and  this  renders  them  all  the  more  fearless  in 
the  water. 

The  harbors  are  very  shallow.  Ships  are 
obliged  to  anchor  far  from  the  shore,  and 
passengers  and  freight  are  landed  by  means 
of  small  open  boats,  called  sampans.  These  are 


1869] 


‘ ‘ Good- Morning  ! ’ ’ 


21 


worked  by  a single  oar,  as  in  sculling,  and  the 
boat  is  rapidly  propelled  with  a peculiar  hissing 
on  the  part  of  the  oarsman. 

When  our  steamer  dropped  anchor  in  the 
harbor  of  Yokohama,  we  were  immediately  sur- 
rounded by  these  sampans.  From  the  deck  we 
saw  the  small,  frail  vessels  and  the  almost  naked 
boatmen,  with  their  skin  bronzed  by  constant  ex- 
posure to  the  sun  and  wind.  The  first  view 
of  the  Japanese  is  not  prepossessing,  nor  are 
the  tones  of  their  voices,  when  first  heard, 
agreeable  to  the  ear.  But  we  could  not  dwell 
upon  these  early  impressions,  as  we  were  anxious 
to  reach  the  city  of  Yokohama,  that  lay  just  a 
mile  from  us.  So  bidding  adieu  to  the  officers 
of  the  Great  Republic  and  to  our  fellow-pas- 
sengers, whose  destination  was  still  farther  on 
— to  China,  the  Flowery  Kingdom — we  descend- 
ed the  ladder  by  the  side  of  the  steamer,  stepped 
cautiously  into  a sampan,  and  with  our  baggage 
were  soon  landed  on  the  shore. 

Yokohama  was  not  the  first  foreign  settle- 
ment on  this  side  of  the  island.  The  name  of 
the  city  signifies  “ opposite  shore,”  as  it  lies 
directly  opposite  Kanagawa,  where  foreigners 
were  first  allowed  to  live.  English  and  French 
troops  are  stationed  here,  each  nation  striving 
to  gain  the  ascendency  and  to  obtain  a monop- 
oly of  trade  with  a people  so  recently  opened 


2 2 The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1869 

to  commerce.  In  speaking  of  the  city,  for- 
eigners use  the  terms  native  town,  settlement 
and  blujf.  In  the  “ settlement,”  houses  are 
mostly  built  in  the  European  style,  and  in  its 
stores  you  can  purchase  almost  anything  in  the 
way  of  clothing  and  furniture.  Here  also  are 
the  various  churches,  mission-houses,  hotels, 
consulates  and  many  residences  belonging  to 
the  foreign  population,  now  numbering  about 
five  thousand. 

The  most  beautiful  part  of  the  city  is  the 
bluff.  Across  the  bridge,  near  the  mission- 
house,  the  road  leads  along  the  bank  of  a canal 
for  a few  steps,  and  then,  making  a sudden  turn, 
takes  its  course  up  the  hill,  which  rises  gradu- 
ally to  about  two  hundred  feet  above,  the  level 
of  the  ocean  and  extends  several  miles.  This 
road  is  very  pretty,  with  embankments  on  one 
side,  and  on  the  other  views  of  the  Buddhist 
cemeteries,  and  occasional  glimpses  of  the  sea. 
The  foreign  residences  on  the  bluff  are  very 
pleasant,  and  some  are  even  elegant.  Here  also 
are  tea-houses,  where  we  can  sit  and  enjoy  the 
view  of  the  settlement  and  the  harbor  whilst  drink- 
ing the  cup  of  tea  which  is  always  offered  to  the 
casual  visitor  by  the  smiling  Japanese  girl. 

The  foreign  cemetery  on  the  bluff  is  a sweet, 
quiet  spot,  more  home-like  than  anything  else 
in  this  strange  land. 


1869]  “ Good - Morning  / ” 23 

In  the  native  city  the  principal  street  is  called 
Curio  street  by  the  foreigners,  and  To-ri  by  the 
natives.  Here  the  curious  China  lacquer  and 
native  woodenware  are  temptingly  arranged. 

We  have  already  learned  a few  words  of 
their  language,  such  as  i-ku-ra  (“how  much  ?”), 
arigato  (“  thank  you  K'),  yo-ro-shiu  (“  all  right  ”), 
and  others.  But  o-hay-o  (“  good-morning  !”)  has 
the  clearest,  most  winning  sound  of  all,  and  is  the 
word  we  oftenest  hear.  O-hay-o  T say  the  ser- 
vants early  in  the  morning;  ''O-hay-o  f'  call  out 
the  children  in  the  streets  ; "O-hay-o  de  goza-i 
masud  politely  say  the  men  and  women  we 
meet  on  the  hillside  and  in  the  native  city. 

All  this  means  simply  “ early,”  but  to  us  is 
something  more  than  a mere  salutation.  And 
how  strange  it  all  seems  to  us ! It  is  indeed 
o-hay-o  — “ good-morning  ” — with  this  people. 
For  many  centuries  they  have  lived  in  seclusion, 
and  in  a state  of  somnolence  with  regard  to  the 
rest  of  the  world.  Ever  following  the  same 
customs,  with  fashion  of  dress  unchanged,  they 
have  pursued  the  same  beaten  track  of  nation- 
al habit.  But  now  they  are  just  waking  from 
their  sleep  ; and  stepping  forth  into  the  light  of 
a new  morning,  they  are  pleasantly  and  happily 
saying  to  the  world  at  large,  " O-hay-o  T 

And  the  prayer  of  God’s  children  is,  “That 
this  land,  which  catches  the  first  beams  of  the 


24 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1869 


morning  sun  when  it  comes  to  light  up  the 
eastern  hemisphere,  may  soon  rejoice  in  the 
light  of  the  Sun  of  righteousness.”  And  thus 
do  the  people  of  the  West  hold  out  the  hand 
to  this  newly-awakened  land,  and  with  earnest 
congratulations  call  out  to  them  in  the  same 
cheering  tones, 

^'0-hay-o  K (“  Good-morning  !”) 


CHAPTER  II. 


A LOOK  AT  THE  PEOPLE. 


Different  Classes  of  Japanese — Mikado — Kugis — Daimios 
— Samurai  — Judges — Priests  — Doctors — Merchants — 
Mechanics — Barbers — Coolies — Beggars — Religions  of 
THE  Country — Work  of  Missionaries. 


HENEVER  we  stop  to  examine  any 


object,  a crowd  collects  around  us. 


We  soon  learn  to  distinguish  the  different 
classes  of  people  by  their  dress.  Although 
there  has  been  a great  revolution  in  Japan,  and 
the  distinctions  of  caste,  hitherto  so  marked,  are 
passing  away,  we  still  observe  great  differences 
in  the  appearance,  manners  and  dress  of  the 
people  we  meet.  It  may  be  well  just  here  to 
note  the  various  classes  that  gradually  became 
known  to  us. 

At  the  summit  stands  the  Mikado,  or  em- 
peror. His  person  was  formerly  considered 
very  sacred.  He  was  kept  almost  in  seclusion. 
No  one  was  permitted  to  look  upon  him  except 
the  very  highest  nobles.  It  is  said  that  he  had 
to  submit  to  many  tiresome  forms,  such  as 
sitting  motionless  for  hours  on  his  throne, 

3 26 


26  The  Smirise  Kmgdom,  [1870 

with  a heavy  crown  upon  his  head.  He  wears 
richly-embroidered  robes  of  silk,  on  which  is 
stamped  the  chrysanthemum,  the  emblem  of 
royal  sovereignty.  No  one  but  members  of 
the  royal  family  or  those  nearest  his  person  is 
allowed  to  wear  this  badge.  It  is  probable  that 
the  use  of  this  emblem  grew  out  of  this  flower’s 
resemblance  to  the  sun,  which  was  once  an  ob 
ject  of  worship  among  this  people,  traces  of 
which  worship  are  to  be  seen  in  relics  of  Sin- 
tooism  still  existing. 

Next  to  the  emperor  come  the  great  lords, 
or  Kugis.  They  wait  in  the  sacred  presence 
of  the  Mikado  and  kneel  around  the  throne. 
In  the  pictures  they  are  represented  as  wearing 
very  high  hats  and  robes  with  long  trains. 
They  are  but  few  in  number,  and  their  places 
in  the  empire  or  exact  prerogatives  are  not 
distinctly  defined. 

The  Daimios  are  the  feudal  chiefs,  whose 
authority  was  very  great  until  the  revolution, 
when  the  progressive  party,  led  by  the  Mikado 
(legitimate  emperor),  drove  from  his  castle  the 
Tycoon  (usurping  emperor)  and  completely 
broke  up  the  feudal  system,  which  had  for  many 
centuries  prevailed  throughout  the  empire. 
These  daimios,  although  deprived  of  their 
special  prerogatives,  still  retain  the  names  of 
their  provinces.  There  is  the  prince  of  To-sa, 


27 


1870]  A Look  at  the  People. 

of  Sat-su-ma,  the  princes  of  Aid-zu,  Su-ru-ga, 
and  others. 

Until  the  revolution  the  daimios  had  as  their 
retainers  the  Samurai,  or  Two-sworded  men. 
These  men  were  supported  by  the  government, 
and  had  no  employment  except  that  of  war. 
They  spent  their  idle  hours  in  various  pastimes 
— fishing,  hunting,  wrestling,  reading  and  play- 
ing with  their  children.  With  their  wives  and 
children  they  occupied  low  houses  around  the 
daimio’s  residence,  forming  a large  square 
enclosure,  like  barracks.  Many  of  these  still 
exist,  and  cover  large  spaces  of  ground. 

Where  there  were  so  many  independent  chiefs 
there  was,  of  course,  much  fighting,  and  the 
Samurai  were  expected  to  be  always  ready  to 
go  to  war.  They  were  devoted  to  the  interests 
of  their  lords,  often  dying  with  them  or  for 
them. 

Although  the  Samurai  have  been  deprived  of 
their  support  (except  a small  pension  from  the 
government  for  a limited  term  of’ years),  and 
the  wearing  of  the  swords  is  no  longer  au- 
thorized, many  of  them  retain  their  peculiar 
dress,  which  consists  of  a tunic  and  a wide 
skirt.  They  also  retain  their  swords,  wear- 
ing the  long  one  on  the  left  side  and  the  short 
one  concealed  in  their  broad  belts.  They  are 
the  class  with  which  we  are  brought  most  in 


28  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1870 

contact.  Our  teachers  and  scholars,  and  even 
some  of  the  servants,  are  Samurai.  They  are 
the  gentry  and  the  literati  of  the  country,  and 
walk  the  streets  with  an  air  of  conscious  supe- 
riority. 

The  judges  [ya-cu-nin)  are  greatly  feared  and 
reverenced  by  the  common  people.  They  wear, 
in  addition  to  the  garments  of  the  Samurai,  a 
coat  of  peculiar  cut,  which  comes  high  up  over 
the  shoulders,  but  without  sleeves. 

The  priests  {bo-san)  form  a large  portion  of 
the  community.  Their  dress  differs  little  in 
style  from  that  of  the  Samurai,  but  their 
shaven  heads  give  them  an  unmistakable  ap- 
pearance. Besides  those  in  regular  priestly 
office,  there  are  monks  and  nuns,  who  live  in 
and  about  the  temples,  and  whose  duty  is  to  as- 
sist in  the  ministrations  there.  Also  mendicant 
friars  are  numerous,  who  go  about  the  country 
drawling  their  prayers  in  low,  monotonous  tones 
and  waiting  at  the  doors  of  the  houses  until  a 
few  copper^  are  given. 

Japanese  doctors  traverse  the  streets  in  long 
robes,  looking  very  solemn  and  wise.  A boy 
walks  behind  them,  carrying  their  boxes  of 
medicines,  consisting  principally  of  powders  and 
pills.  They  use  blisters  and  the  moxa  to  a very 
great  extent.  Their  fees  are  very  moderate. 

Merchants  are  privileged  to  wear  one  sword. 


CO(JLlKS  DRAWINT,  CHARCOAL. 
BUDDHIST  PRIEST 


SAMURAI. 

Pages  27,  28  and  30. 


'*ifiJ*.VS  , • * ■•  ..-f.  •- 

_t,.v- ■•  ' . ••  I .VT*,*  > - J.tMfflf’ ■ 3fiMjfj00IS^ 


\ 


K’ 


. '-A 


»,»■  * V !►*  5 * ,i 


^ ?»* 


1870]  A Look  at  the  People,  29 

They  form  the  most  solid  and  reliable  part  of 
the  community.  Silk-merchants  occupy  the 
largest  stores.  The  beautiful  silks  and  crapes 
manufactured  in  this  country  are  not  exposed 
to  view  like  the  more  common  cotton  fabrics, 
but  are  kept  shut  up  in  the  storerooms.  At 
the  other  dry-goods  stores  the  goods  are  dis- 
played on  the  shelves,  the  floor,  or  are  hung  up 
by  the  door-post.  There  are  shops  where  more 
trifling  articles  are  kept  for  sale,  such  as  hair- 
pins, combs,  powders  and  paints,  and  articles 
used  in  worship.  There  are  large  tea  and 
rice  establishments,  and  groceries,  where  beans, 
eggs,  etc.,  are  sold.  Confectioners’  shops  may 
be  found,  where  children  buy  candy  made  of 
rice,  beans  and  paste  colored  with  seaweed. 
We  see  large  china-stores,  and  are  interested  in 
the  toy-shops  filled  with  pretty  things  for  the 
children,  and  in  the  book-stores,  where  the 
curious  literature  of  the  country  is  sold  to 
those  who  wish  to  read. 

We  find,  too,  a class  in  which  the  merchant 
and  the  artisan  mingle  their  callings — those  em- 
ployed in  the  manufacture  and  sale  of  umbrel- 
las, shoes,  fans,  lamps,  tables,  chests  of  drawers, 
mats  and  other  things,  all  exhibiting  great  skill 
and  exquisite  neatness.  There  are  carpenters 
and  smiths,  masons,  stone-cutters,  lapidaries, 
and  carvers  in  wood  and  ivory.  Many  are 


30  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1870 

employed  in  making  the  beautiful  lacquered 
articles,  turning  bronzes  and  manufacturing 
china-ware  in  every  conceivable  style. 

Barbers  form  a numerous  class,  and  do  an 
extensive  work  in  keeping  the  faces  of  the  men 
smooth  and  a bald  place  on  the  top  of  the 
head,  while  the  heads  of  priests,  old  women  and 
babies  are  often  completely  shorn. 

In  the  cities  are  jugglers,  who  perform  won- 
derful tricks,  and  acrobats,  who  amuse  the  peo- 
ple by  tumbling  and  wrestling,  and  geishas,  or 
girl-minstrels,  who  sing  and  play  upon  the 
samisen,  a species  of  guitar,  and  a popular  in- 
strument in  Japan.  At  night  blind  men,  called 
a-mas,  blow  their  shrill  whistles  in  the  streets, 
and  are  called  on  to  rub  sick  or  tired  people. 
They  profess  to  cure  diseases  by  manipulation, 
in  the  same  way  that  magnetic  physicians  have 
undertaken  to  do  in  our  land,  and  they  have  a 
regular  school  for  instruction, 

Nin-so-kus  (coolies^  are  the  most  numerous,  and 
form  the  lowest,  class  in  the  social  life  of  Japan. 
These  are  they  who  bear  the  heavy  burdens, 
draw  the  carts  and  perform  the  most  menial  oc- 
cupations. Even  among  them,  however,  distinc- 
tions may  be  found,  as  those  who  work  in  hides 
and  leather  are  looked  upon  by  the  coolie  race 
itself  with  great  disdain,  and  are  kept  separate 
from  all  others.  We  presume  this  is  owing  to 


31- 


1870]  A Look  at  the  People. 

the  fact  of  their  coming  in  contact  with  the  dead 
bodies  of  animals  and  being  thus  defiled,  ac- 
cording to  the  strict  rules  of  Buddhism. 

Beggars. — Beggary  is  a profession  in  Japan. 
The  beggar  is  doomed  to  beg  all  his  life  long, 
and  to  do  nothing  else.  He  besets  the  trav- 
eler on  the  highways,  and  waits  about  the  tem- 
ple-gates to  receive  alms  from  those  who  are 
going  up  to  worship.  He  sleeps  where  he 
can,  and  when  death  comes  lies  down  by  the 
roadside,  few  hearing  or  pitying  his  dying 
groans. 

Such  is  a description  of  the  people  we  meet 
in  Japan.  Let  us  now  look  at  the  religions  of 
the  people.  There  are  two  principal  religions 
in  the  land,  Buddhism  and  Sintooism. 

Buddhism  is  an  imported  religion,  coming 
through  China  from  India.  It  was  at  first  very 
simple  in  its  details.  Its  founder,  the  first 
Buddha — the  Sha-ka-sa-ma  of  the  Japanese — 
taught  mercy  and  tenderness.  The  first  Buddha 
died,  and  his  followers  said  that  a great  many 
wonderful  scenes  took  place  at  his  death.  He 
and  his  five  hundred  disciples  were  deified,  and 
images  of  them  were  made  and  worshiped. 
These  are  beautiful  statues  with  mild,  placid 
countenances,  touchingly  suggestive  of  mercy. 
Some  of  them  are  represented  with  three  heads 


32  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1869 

and  six  arms,  that  “ they  might  better  help  men,” 
says  a Japanese. 

Some  of  these  images  are  called  Ho-to-kes,  a 
name  applied  to  such  as  are  not  yet  deified,  but 
are  on  the  calendar  for  that  high  distinction  and 
retain  all  the  elements  proper  to  such  a result. 
The  gods  Bin-dzu-ru,  whose  image  we  see  in  the 
temples  as  the  Pain-god,  and  Gi-zo,  who  is  in 
shrines  by  the  wayside  as  the  special  protector 
of  travelers,  and  in  the  cemeteries  as  the  god 
who  cares  for  the  souls  of  the  dead,  are  Ho- 
tokes.  Mothers  believe  that  the  god  Gi-zo 
watches  over  their  dead  infants  in  paradise. 

The  Buddhist  priests  talk  of  abstractions, 
contemplations,  absorptions  and  annihilations. 
Many  sects  have  arisen,  and  the  whole  system 
has  become  very  complicated.  It  is  hard  for 
the  women  and  children  to  understand  anything 
about  it.  And  yet  Buddhism  is  a wonderful 
system,  and  has  a powerful  influence  over  the 
human  mind.  Sometimes  it  appears  in  a refined 
and  cultivated  form  and  its  votaries  are  schol- 
arly men.  Even  Christian  missionaries  cannot 
fail  to  commend  the  humanizing  influences  of 
this  system. 

Sintooism  is  the  native  religion  of  Japan.  Its 
probable  origin  is  in  the  worship  of  the  sun  ((9- 
Ten-to-sama.)  The  moon  (Tsu-ki-sama)  is  also 
an  object  of  worship.  The  emperor  (Ten-ski- 


THE  SEVEN  HAPPY  HODS.  Page  33. 


9^< 


<?XOk 


;ri 

- . 7^  J4f**&‘rf  j 

-JLv 


‘■s::lHi^ 


•T,f' 

«i  . ^tifTtO  * I ^ 


V -r 


■■  -*.-■  ■»|^.4||^ili^  W -.i'^  .Awpilip-^'  ' '] 

'£  rv*flltou  /feA  . ^lk».  li;  ' ^ *" 


1869] 


A Look  at  the  People. 


33 


sama)  is  regarded  as  the  direct  descendant  of  the 
sun.  Some  deity  must  have  made  Japan,  they 
say,  and  thus  their  fables  and  stories  of  gods  were 
invented  and  images  formed.  Japan  is  filled 
with  these  images.  We  see  them  in  the  tem- 
ples and  in  shrines  by  the  wayside,  on  the  tops 
of  the  highest  mountains  and  in  the  farthest  re- 
cesses of  the  caves.  Every  house  has  its  shrine, 
and  the  people  carry  about  with  them  pictures 
or  exceedingly  small  images  of  the  gods.  There 
is  Ha-chi-man-sama,  the  god  of  war,  and  I-na- 
ri-sama,  the  god  of  rice,  and  Ye-be-su-sama  and 
Dai-ko-ku-sama,  the  gods  of  riches,  and  many 
others.  The  image  of  the  fox  is  worshiped  as 
a servant  of  I-na-ri,  because  the  animal  is  a de- 
vourer  of  the  insects  that  are  apt  to  feed  upon 
the  rice.  The  snake  is  one  form  under  which 
the  god  Ben-ten  appears.  The  horse,  the  image 
of  which  is  seen  in  many  temples,  is  the  servant 
of  Ha-chi-man-sama.  These  images  are  of 
all  sizes,  from  the  tiny  Dai-ko-ku-sama,  which  we 
can  scarcely  hold  in  our  fingers,  to  the  colossal 
Dai-ButsUy  on  whose  thumb  we  can  sit  with 
ease. 

Some  of  these  gods  are  merry-looking  fellows. 
There  are  seven  who  are  called  the  “ happy 
gods”  of  Japan,  and  they  all  have  smiling  faces  ; 
while  others  are  hideous  in  their  appearance, 
such  as  the  red  and  green  monsters  who  stand 

c 


34 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1869 


at  the  gates  of  the  temples  to  protect  the  other 
gods,  and  the  frightful  representations  of  Satan 
and  his  attendants. 

Now,  the  people  say  that  these  gods  are  in 
Paradise,  and  these  images  are  only  used  as 
aids  in  worship.  The  most  intelligent  among 
the  people  deny  that  they  are  idolaters  at  all. 
However  this  may  be,  we  find  in  Japan  a min- 
gling of  sentiments  and  ideas  drawn  from  these 
two  religions,  so  that  Buddhism  and  Sintooism 
often  blend  in  the  eyes  of  the  worshiper.  In 
one  respect  both  sects  agree.  They  all  wor- 
ship their  ancestors^  and  thus  show  a Mongo- 
lian origin  in  common  with  the  vast  neighbor- 
ing nation,  the  Chinese. 

The  writings  of  Confucius  are  much  read  in 
the  empire.  Confucianism  is  a system  of  moral 
teaching. 

Long  years  ago  some  Roman  Catholic  mis- 
sionaries were  in  Japan,  and  a great  many  peo- 
ple heard  of  God  and  of  the  Lord  Jesus.  For 
a time  the  missionaries  were  allowed  to  teach 
and  the  people  to  believe  and  worship  as  they 
pleased.  But  one  of  the  Roman  priests  was 
foolish  enough  to  tell  of  the  power  of  his  lord 
the  pope,  whose  aim  was  universal  sovereignty 
of  civil  as  well  as  spiritual  power.  Upon  this  the 
government,  fearing  that  the  pope  would  come 
with  a great  army  and  take  possession  of  the 


1869] 


A Look  at  the  People, 


35 


country,  entered  upon  a course  of  the  severest 
persecution.  They  banished  from  the  land  all 
foreign  priests  and  tortured  the  native  Chris- 
tians, putting  men,  women,  and  even  little  chil- 
dren, into  the  prisons,  or,  still  worse,  pitching 
them  into  the  crater  of  a burning  volcano. 
They  threw  the  converts  from  the  great  rock 
Shima-bara,  which  rises  almost  perpendicularly 
out  of  the  water  in  the  harbor  of  Nagasaki. 

The  Christian  religion  was  prohibited,  and 
the  edicts  to  that  effect,  written  in  large  charac- 
ters and  nailed  to  high  boards,  were  placed  in 
conspicuous  localities  throughout  the  whole 
empire.  A large  cross  of  wood  was  made, 
and  every  year  was  brought  out  for  the  people 
to  trample  upon.  Some  of  the  earliest  ideas 
we  have  connected  with  Japan  are  drawn  from 
pictures  in  which  mothers  are  represented  as 
bringing  their  children  forward  to  trample  upon 
this  cross.  Such  was  the  effect  of  Jesuitical  in- 
trigue on  the  one  hand  and  governmental  jeal- 
ousy on  the  other  that  Japan  for  three  cen- 
turies became  closed  to  all  Christian  efforts, 
and  held  herself  aloof  from  all  civilized  inter- 
course. 

But  since  the  visit  of  Commodore  Perry  of 
the  U.  S.  Navy  in  1854  the  gates  of  Japan 
have  been  thrown  open  once  more,  and  foreign- 
ers are  again  allowed  to  dwell  here.  Following 


36  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1869 

upon  the  soldiers,  the  sailors  and  the  merchants 
came  the  missionaries,  ready  to  spread  the  truths 
of  the  gospel,  ar;d  to  tell  the  Japanese,  not  of 
the  power  of  the  pope,  but  of  the  power  of  the 
Lord  Jesus,  whose  kingdom,  though  not  of  this 
world,  is  yet  an  everlasting  kingdom  whose 
dominion  hath  no  end. 

These  missionaries  are  learning  the  manners 
and  customs  of  the  natives,  and  gradually 
winning  their  confidence.  Much  of  their  time 
is  occupied  in  studying  the  difficult  language 
and  preparing  grammars  and  dictionaries ; also 
in  translating  the  Bible  and  other  books  for 
popular  use.  They  are  now  distributing  Bibles 
in  the  Chinese  tongue,  and  also  teach  English 
to  those  who  apply,  using  Christian  books,  and 
sometimes  the  Scriptures  themselves,  for  that 
purpose.  The  missionary  doctor  treats  the 
physical  diseases  of  his  patients  and  tries  to 
lead  them  to  the  Great  Physician.  The  mis- 
sionaries are  watching,  praying  and  waiting  for 
the  time  to  come  when  the  gospel  may  be  pub- 
licly proclaimed  in  Japan,  and  its  people  allow- 
ed full  liberty  to  worship  as  they  please. 


CHAPTER  III. 


SUMMER  DAYS  IN  YOKOHAMA. 


Climate — Walks  through  the  Rice- Paddies — Trees— 
F LOWERS — F RUITS  — BiRDS  — AnIM  ALS  — FARMERS — A PE- 
DESTRIAN Tour. 


HE  August  days  pass  rapidly  in  this  new, 


strange  land.  The  weather  is  warm,  but 
we  have  usually  a pleasant  breeze  from  the  sea. 
Some  days  the  rain  comes  down  in  torrents,  for 
this  is  the  rainy  season  in  Japan.  The  damp- 
ness and  heat  make  the  vegetation  very  rank, 
and  everything  is  fresh  and  bright  and  green  as 
in  early  spring.  There  is  little  danger  here  of 
long-continued  drought,  and  consequent  famine. 

We  often  take  long  walks  over  the  bluff  to 
the  rice-paddies  and  the  fields  where  the  farm- 
ers labor.  The  country  immediately  around 
Yokohama  is  rolling,  and  green  bottoms  and 
high  grounds  are  beautifully  variegated  by 
clumps  of  trees  and  small  forests,  among 
which  we  recognize  firs,  cedars  and  oaks.  In 
some  places  on  the  hillside  the  shade  is  so 
dense  that  the  rays  of  the  sun  never  penetrate. 
In  the  low,  damp  places  fern  and  moss  and  ivy 

4 37 


38 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1869 


hide,  and  quantities  of  tiny  wild  flowers  carpet 
the  ground.  Groves  of  graceful  bamboo,  their 
leaves  stirring  in  the  slightest  breeze,  give  a 
peculiar  charm  to  the  landscape. 

Just  now  the  beautiful  white  lilies  are  bloom- 
ing far  up  on  the  mountain-side,  and  we  see 
the  hydrangea  with  its  great  flowers  of  pale 
pink  and  blue.  The  lotus-flowers  of  red  and 
white  lie  on  their  immense  umbrella-like  leaves 
upon  the  frequent  ponds.  These  flowers  are 
sacred  to  the  Japanese;  the  Buddhas  are  repre- 
sented as  sitting  upon  them,  and  golden  lotus- 
flowers  are  found  in  the  temples.  We  have 
many  varieties  of  the  chrysanthemum,  which 
blooms  from  the  early  part  of  July  until  far  into 
the  mild  Japan  winter.  While  these  flowers  are 
beautiful  to  the  eye,  they  are,  for  the  most  part, 
odorless. 

The  summer  fruits  are  pears,  peaches  and 
plums,  also  apples  and  apricots,  but  all  of  these, 
unless,  it  may  be,  the  plum,  are  very  inferior  to 
the  same  in  our  own  country,  being  hard  and 
tasteless  ; cooking  alone  brings  out  the  distin- 
guishing flavor  of  the  pears  and  peaches. 
Later  in  the  season  we  shall  have  grapes,  figs 
and  pomegranates,  and  in  the  winter  manda- 
rin-oranges and  persimmons.  These  fruits  are 
more  decided  in  flavor.  The  oranges  are  small, 
but  sweet,  while  the  persimmons  are  large,  and 


1869]  Summer  Days  in  Yokohama,  39 

hang  upon  the  trees  in  the  autumn  like  great 
golden  balls.  Why  foreigners  should  call  this 
fruit  “ persimmon  ’’  is  not  evident,  for  it  in 
no  way  resembles  the  fruit  of  that  name  in 
America. 

Rice  is  to  be  found  here,  as  in  every  country, 
in  low,  wet  lands,  and  where  the  water  is  not  on 
the  ground  and  the  fields  are  irrigated  from  the 
nearest  springs.  It  is  cultivated  with  great 
care,  being  the  chief  object  of  agricultural 
labor  and  the  principal  staple  of  food  for  the 
entire  population.  On  the  high  ground  we  see 
millet,  wheat,  barley,  buckwheat  and  other 
grains,  mostly  of  an  inferior  quality.  They 
are  raised  solely  for  the  support  of  such  ani- 
mals as  may  be  in  use  among  them.  The 
Japanese  do  not  eat  bread,  but  there  are  now 
bakers  who  make  a good  article  for  the  use 
of  foreigners,  and  it  is  apparent,  from  the 
name  they  give  to  it  (pan),  that  the  French 
must  have  given  them  the  first  idea  of  so  doing. 
They  get  their  flour  from  California. 

There  is  a great  variety  of  native  potatoes 
besides  the  “ Irish,”  the  latter  being  very  small, 
but  palatable,  while  the  native  kinds  are  muci- 
laginous, and  not  acceptable  to  foreigners. 
Roots  of  the  lily,  lotus  and  bamboo  are  large- 
ly used  by  the  natives.  The  radish  (dai-kofi) 
grows  to  a remarkable  size,  and  is  eaten  by  all 


40 


[1869 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 

classes  of  the  people.  Often  it  is  hung  up 
until  it  begins  to  decay,  and  is  then  salted  down 
for  use.  Egg-plants,  onions  and  pumpkins  are 
known,  but  the  Japanese  do  not  use  vegetables 
as  freely  as  we  do,  rice,  the  dai-kon  and  fish 
being  their  chief  articles  of  diet. 

Grass,  in  this  land,  is  of  a very  coarse  quality, 
unfit  for  animal  use,  and  we  are  not  surprised, 
therefore,  at  seeing  no  sheep  browsing  upon  the 
hillsides  nor  cattle  feeding  in  the  meadows. 
Owing  to  this,  all  attempts  at  grazing  have 
hitherto  failed,  sheep  and  cattle  dying  from 
throat-disease  produced  by  the  coarseness  of 
the  grass.  Still,  we  may  hope  that  in  the  future 
even  this  great  drawback  may  be  overcome, 
and  the  time  arrive  when  all  over  this  green 
and  lovely  island  flocks  and  herds  will  rejoice 
the  eye. 

Tea  {cha)  forms  the  principal  export  of 
Japan,  and  is  the  universal  beverage  of  the 
people.  It  is  a low  shrub,  whose  cultivation 
requires  great  care  ; and  when  the  time  of  pick- 
ing comes,  it  is  leaf  by  leaf,  close  selection  be- 
ing required.  Cotton  grows  on  the  southern 
plains  of  good  quality,  but  it  is  only  manufac- 
tured into  coarse  cloths,  owing  to  imperfect 
native  machinery. 

Tobacco  of  a mild  quality  is  cultivated  and 
largely  used.  The  mulberry  and  the  silkworm 


1869]  Summer  Days  in  Yokohama.  41 

are  found  in  profusion.  The  silks  of  Japan 
are  very  beautiful  and  durable,  and  its  crapes 
are  unsurpassed. 

Animals. — In  a countr^^  of  so  limited  an  area, 
with  over  thirty  millions  of  people,  it  is  not  to 
be  expected  that  many  wild  animals  would  be 
found.  Cultivation  often  extends  to  the  high- 
est hilltops,  terrace  rising  above  terrace,  the 
land  being  tilled  in  the  high  places  wholly  by 
hand  and  without  the  plough.  But  sometimes 
bears,  wolves  and  monkeys  are  seen.  A 
wretched  breed  of  dogs,  small,  scrubby  horses 
and  a few  bullocks,  with  tailless  cats,  are  the 
only  domestic  animals  of  the  land. 

Birds  twitter  in  the  branches  of  the  trees, 
but  do  not  sing.  Pheasants  and  cranes  are 
here.  The  latter  bird  is  national,  and  is  con- 
sidered a sacred  emblem  ; their  pennons,  lac- 
quer-work, china-ware  and  fans  are  all  embla- 
zoned with  its  figure.  In  the  dense  shade  of  the 
thickets  we  sometimes  hear  the  plaintive  notes 
of  the  un-gui-so,  the  Japanese  nightingale. 
There  are  a few  parrots,  while  swallows,  rob- 
ins and  crows  are  numerous. 

Farmers. — The  farmers  are  a simple-hearted 
and  industrious  race.  They  have  rakes,  spades 
and  ploughs  of  rude  construction.  Sometimes 
the  ploughs  are  drawn  by  oxen,  but  just  as 
frequently  by  men,  women  or  children.  They 


42  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1869 

show  their  kindness  to  animals  by  constructing 
awnings  over  their  heads  to  protect  them  from 
the  rays  of  the  sun.  Tea,  tobacco,  cotton  and 
the  various  grains  are  packed  in  strong  bags  by 
the  farmers,  and  sent  to  the  cities  on  pack- 
horses. 

Work  in  the  rice-fields  is  no  easy  task,  for 
the  men  and  women  are  obliged  to  stand  in 
the  water,  while  the  sun  beats  down  upon 
them,  causing  intense  headaches. 

The  rice-plant  has  a bright,  peculiar  green  of 
its  own,  and  from  the  time  the  young  rice  (i-ne) 
springs  up  until  the  ripened  grain  {ko-me)  bends 
the  stalk,  the  fields  are  very  beautiful.  The 
thatched  farmhouses  in  the  valleys  and  on  the 
hillsides,  the  roofs  sometimes  scarcely  distin- 
guishable from  the  hill  itself,  with  trees  and 
shrubs  hiding  their  want  of  beauty,  make  pretty 
pictures.  In  the  summer  evenings  the  farmers 
sit  on  benches  at  the  doors  of  their  houses  and 
smoke  pipes,  tell  stories  and  exchange  greetings 
with  the  passers-by.  These  farmers  are  very 
heavily  taxed,  and  often  rebel,  causing  much 
trouble  to  the  princes  and  the  general  gov- 
ernment. 

Some  of  the  missionaries  have  lately  returned 
from  a short  pedestrian  tour,  and  give  a pleas- 
ant account  of  their  trip.  They  have  much  to 
say  concerning  the  beauties  of  the  land — its 


1869]  Summer  Days  in  Yokohama,  43 

mountains  and  valleys,  green  fields  and  bright 
waters ; but  our  interest  is  chiefly  centred  in 
speaking  and  hearing  of  the  people,  especially 
with  reference  to  their  preparation  for  the  re- 
ception of  the  gospel  which  is  to  be  given  them. 
Much  of  interest  and  encouragement  has  been 
obtained.  Bibles  in  the  Chinese  for  the  upper 
classes,  all  of  whom  read  in  this  language,  are 
being  circulated  throughout  the  country.  Many 
are  inquiring  for  them,  and  are  anxious  to  study 
them.  The  teacher  of  one  of  the  missionaries, 
who  has  just  come  from  the  capital,  brings  word 
that  one  of  the  Japanese  there  has  a school  of 
ninety  persons  expressly  for  the  purpose  of 
teaching  the  Bible,  and  that  he  is  determined  to 
teach  it  even  at  the  risk  of  his  life.  He  is  con- 
stantly armed  and  prepared  to  resist  any  attack. 
He  also  tells  us  that  a man  high  in  authority 
expressed  a wish  to  have  a Bible,  and  that  he 
presented  one  to  him. 

For  these  things  especially  are  we  praying — 
viz.,  that  the  laws  against  Christianity  may  be 
repealed,  that  the  native  converts  may  prove 
faithful,  that  the  reading  of  the  word  may  be 
blessed  to  the  people,  and  that  the  work  of 
translation  may  progress  rapidly.  We  ask 
God’s  people  at  home  to  unite  with  us  in  these 
petitions.  Starting  forth  with  these  hopeful 
views  in  the  very  beginning  of  our  missionary 


44  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1869 

efforts  among  this  interesting  people,  and  en- 
couraged by  what  has  already  been  accom- 
plished, we  wait  upon  our  heavenly  Father, 
asking  him  to  crown  our  future  labors  with 
great  success,  that  Japan  may  yet  be  the 
Lord’s. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


A WINTER  IN  TOKIO. 

Tokio— Its  Situation — The  Castle — Emperor’s  Garden — 
O-Hama-go-ten  — Temples — A-sa-ku-sa  — Shi-ba — Japan- 
ese Houses — Large  Fires — The  To-ri— Canals — Bridges 
— The  Foreign  Concession — Mu-ko-ji-ma — Sku-da-ji-ma 
— Winter  Climate — Flowers  and  Fruit — Missionary 
Life  in  Tokio. 

COMING  into  Japan  is  like  going  back  a 
few  centuries  in  the  world’s  history.  Es- 
pecially has  it  so  appeared  since  our  home  has 
been  this  little  Japanese  house,  right  among  the 
people.  We  are  glad  to  live  in  the  great  capital, 
although  cut  off  from  the  privilege  of  intercourse 
with  our  own  people  enjoyed  in  Yokohama. 

The  city  of  Tokio — the  old  Yedo  or  Jeddo — 
is  on  the  east  coast  of  the  island  of  Niphon,  the 
largest  and  most  important  of  the  Japan  group, 
about  eighteen  miles  north  of  Yokohama.  The 
latitude  of  the  city  is  36°  N.  (about  that  of 
Raleigh,  N.  C.,  and  Nashville,  Tenn.),  and  lon- 
gitude 138°  E.  from  Greenwich;  its  mean  an- 
nual temperature  being  42°  Fahrenheit,  it  is 
subject  to  no  extremes  of  heat  or  cold.  Except 

45 


46 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1870 


when,  during  some  parts  of  the  months  of  June 
and  July,  the  heat  and  rain  bring  dampness  and 
mould  and  swarms  of  mosquitoes,  or  occasion- 
ally in  the  winter,  when  cold  and  snow  send  the 
people  in-doors  to  wrap  themselves  in  thickly- 
wadded  garments  and  shiver  over  charcoal 
braziers,  the  climate  is  remarkably  pleasant,  and 
the  inhabitants  can  live  most  of  the  time  in  the 
open  ain 

Yedo  Bay  lies  to  the  east  of  the  city.  From 
the  water  the  land  rises  into  tolerably  high 
wooded  hills  on  the  west.  The  river  Su-mi-da 
comes  over  the  plains  from  the  north,  and  flows 
through  the  city  to  the  bay.  The  river  inter- 
sects the  city,  but  the  largest  and  most  import- 
ant part  is  on  its  west  bank.  Mountains  bound 
the  horizon  on  every  side.  To  the  south-west, 
just  where  the  sun  sets  in  the  winter,  rises 
Fu-ji,  the  pride  of  the  Japanese,  the  grandest 
thing  the  people  know.  Every  one  who  pos- 
sesses Japanese  pictures,  fans  or  vases  is  fa- 
miliar with  the  peculiar  truncated  cone  of  Fu- 
ji-yama.  It  is  an  object  of  special  reverence, 
and  the  shrine  to  which  thousands  of  pilgrims 
resort  every  year  to  pay  their  devotions  at  its 
summit 

Below  Fu-ji  is  the  Ha-ko-ne  range,  and  still 
farther  to  the  west  the  mountains  of  0-i.  Across 
the  bay  are  Ka-dzu-sd s hills,  and  farther  to  the 


1870] 


A Winter  in  Tokio. 


47 


north,  when  the  day  is  very  clear,  we  can  see 
the  sacred  mountains  of  Nik-ko. 

The  emperor’s  palace  or  castle,  surrounded 
by  a moat  and  three  walls,  stands  on  the  high 
ground  in  the  western  part  of  the  city.  With- 
in the  two  outer  walls  are  the  low,  unsightly 
houses  of  the  princes.  Here  we  see  kugis 
and  daimios  riding  on  gayly-caparisoned  horses, 
and  occasionally  a retainer  {Samurai)  running 
by  their  side,  calling  out  loudly  for  all  to  make 
way  as  the  master  rides. 

Inside  the  third  wall  lives  the  Emperor,  or 
Mikado,  surrounded  by  his  high  officers.  The 
house  is  built  in  the  general  style  of  all  the 
houses,  but  is  much  larger  and  more  elegantly 
finished.  But  to  foreign  eyes  it  is  almost  in- 
visible. Sentinels  keep  watch  at  some  distance, 
and  none  are  allowed  to  approach  the  sacred 
threshold  but  the  favored  princes  and  great 
dignitaries  of  the  empire. 

There  are  a great  y as  hi- kis  (residences 

of  daimios)  in  Tokio,  for  the  daimios  were,  until 
the  time  of  the  revolution,  obliged  to  spend  six 
months  of  the  year  in  the  capital.  Most  of  these 
ya-shi-kis  are  now  vacant,  which  is  a great  relief 
to  foreigners,  as  we  can  go  about  the  city  with 
more  freedom.  There  is  less  danger  of  meeting 
the  trains  of  the  daimios  and  the  dreaded  two- 
sworded  men,  who,  under  the  influence  of  sa-ki 


48 


The  Sum'ise  Kingdom. 


[1870 


(the  national  liquor),  are  ready  at  any  moment 
to  draw  their  swords  upon  the  hated  foreigner 
in  the  streets. 

Near  the  castle  are  extensive  pleasure- 
grounds  for  the  exclusive  use  of  the  Mikado 
and  his  courtiers.  Here  he  can  hunt  and  fish 
without  fear  of  intrusion  or  of  being  seen  by 
unlicensed  eyes. 

Near  the  Foreign  Concession  is  the  sea-side 
palace,  0-Ha-ma-gote7i,  another  delightful  place 
of  recreation  for  the  Emperor.  He  passes  from 
one  to  the  other  in  a no-ri-mo-no,  a close  sedan- 
chair.  In  the  same  manner  he  is  carried  to  the 
field  to  review  his  troops,  so  that  no  foreign  eye 
can  catch  the  slightest  glimpse  of  majesty. 

The  finest  buildings  in  Tokio,  as  indeed 
throughout  all  the  empire,  are  the  te-ras,  or 
temples.  These  are  large  wooden  buildings, 
usually  painted  red,  with  steep  tiled  roofs,  turn- 
ing up  at  the  eaves  with  a peculiar  curve. 
They  are  almost  invariably  built  in  groves, 
where  the  shade  is  very  dense.  This  gives 
them  an  additional  solemnity. 

The  gates  of  Buddhist  temples  are  very 
large,  and  ornamented  with  dragons  and  ser- 
pents, flowers  and  leaves,  in  rude  carving, 
while  those  of  the  Sintoo  temples  are  plain  and 
simple,  with  no  attempt  at  ornament  or  decora- 
tion. It  is  only  by  this  distinctive  difference 


i87oJ 


A Winter  in  Tokio. 


49 


that  one  can  tell  the  character  of  the  temple  he 
is  approaching. 

A-sa-ku-sa  is  one  of  the  most  noted  of  the 
temples  in  Tokio.  It  is  quite  near  the  river,  in 
the  north-eastern  part  of  the  city.  The  people 
throng  its  gates,  and  a broad  stone  walk  which 
leads  up  to  the  temple  resounds  with  the  clatter 
of  their  wooden  shoes.  The  way  to  the  temple 
is  lined  with  toy-shops,  and  the  people  who  go 
up  to  worship  stop  to  buy  the  frail  playthings 
for  the  little  ones  they  lead  by  the  hand.  We 
sometimes  mingle  with  the  crowds  and  watch 
the  worshipers  as  they  give  alms  to  the  beg- 
gars who  crouch  at  the  gates,  then  wash  their 
hands  in  the  stone  basins  near  the  steps  of 
the  main  temple,  throw  their  “ cash  ” between 
the  bars  of  a large  contribution-box  close  by, 
pull  a bell  which  hangs  at  the  door,  clap  their 
hands  and  bow  before  the  idols. 

The  whole  scene,  though  one  of  pagan  idol- 
atry, cannot  fail  to  remind  us  of  the  description 
given  us  of  that  greater  temple  originally 
designed  as  God’s  “ house  of  prayer,”  but 
degenerated  at  the  time  of  our  Saviour’s  com- 
ing into  a “house  of  merchandise”  and  “a  den 
of  thieves.”  There  are  the  money-changers, 
the  flocks  of  doves,  the  sellers  of  all  kinds 
of  merchandise,  the  same  bartering  and  selling, 
and  the  ostentatious  devotions  of  the  worship- 

5 D 


50 


The  Simrise  Kingdom, 


[187c 


ers,  with  the  casting  of  gifts  into  the  treasury 
over  against  the  temple  ; in  all  this  you  could 
well  imagine  how  similar  the  scene  to  that  in 
our  Lord’s  day,  when,  “ eaten  up  ” by  zeal  for  his 
Father’s  house,  he  indignantly  drove  the  sacri- 
legious crew  from  the  sacred  precincts.  It  will 
require  the  same  divine  Hand  to  cleanse  these 
pagan  counterfeits  of  a holy  temple  and  make 
them  truly  houses  for  the  Lord. 

Within  the  building,  taking  off  our  shoes,  we 
approach  the  altar,  and  are  strikingly  reminded 
of  Roman  Catholic  churches  by  the  gilded  im- 
ages of  the  Buddhas,  the  burning  tapers  and 
artificial  flowers.  A table  stands  before  the 
altar,  on  which  are  pyramids  of  candies,  with 
carrots  and  radishes  cut  so  as  to  show  the 
inside  of  these  vegetables : these  are  ofierings 
to  the  gods.  Here  we  see  the  worshipers  pros- 
trate before  the  shrines,  and  mothers  teaching 
their  babes  to  clasp  their  little  hands  and  bow 
before  the  idols.  We  watch  the  suffering  ones 
going  up  to  the  Ho-to-ke  Bin-dzu-ru  (the  “pain- 
god”)  and  rubbing  him  for  the  purpose  of  ob- 
taining relief  from  pain. 

At  A-sa-ku-sa  is  the  only  pagoda  in  Tokio. 
Around  the  larger  building  are  small  ones,  call- 
ed mt-yas,  which  are  the  shrines  of  particular 
deities.  Within  the  temple-enclosure  are  ex- 
hibitions of  dancing-bears,  mountebanks,  wax 


A Winter  in  Tokio. 


51 


1870J 

figures  and  feats  of  jugglery.  There  are  also 
booths  where  story-tellers  amuse  the  crowd 
with  strange  and  marvelous  tales,  recited  in  a 
nasal,  sing-song  style.  You  can  tell  how  deep- 
ly interested  the  people  are  by  their  applause 
and  shouts  of  laughter  greeting  the  ear. 

Shi-ba,  with  its  groves  of  magnificent  trees 
and  long  avenues,  lovely  flowers,  beautiful  tem- 
ples and  mi-yas,  is  the  most  attractive  spot  in 
Tokio.  This  is  a long  distance  from  A-sa-ku-sa, 
being  in  the  south-western  part  of  the  city. 
These  two  temples  just  mentioned  are  the 
most  noted  in  the  city,  but  there  are  many 
others. 

Japanese  houses  are  constructed  of  timbers 
from  tolerably  heavy  wood,  put  together  with- 
out nails  and  set  right  upon  the  ground.  In- 
stead of  doors,  windows  or  partitions,  slides 
are  used,  the  outer  ones  made  of  plain  paper 
pasted  only  on  one  side  of  the  framework, 
while  the  inner  ones,  which  serve  to  make  sep- 
arate rooms,  are  made  of  beautifully-figured 
paper  pasted  on  both  sides  of  the  framework. 
The  whole  house  may  be  thrown  into  a single 
room  by  the  removal,  at  pleasure,  of  these 
slides. 

For  protection  against  thieves  and  the  inclem- 
encies of  the  weather  there  are  heavy  wooden 
slides,  which  shut  up  the  house  effectually. 


52 


[1870 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 

making  it  close,  dark  and  warm.  The  roofs 
of  the  houses  are  tiled  or  thatched,  with  pro- 
jecting eaves.  The  rain  runs  easily  from  these 
roofs,  which  project  so  far  as  often  to  exclude 
the  light.  Around  the  houses  are  little  veran- 
das, the  wood  of  which  is  very  highly  polished, 
and  it  is  the  pride  of  a good  housekeeper  to 
keep  it  bright  and  clean.  The  floors  are  cov- 
ered with  white  mats,  which  the  people  call 
ta-ta-mi,  to  distinguish  them  from  the  ordinary 
matting  [go-zd).  These  houses  are  generally 
one  story  and  a half  high,  or  from  twelve  to 
fifteen  feet.  Back  of  the  houses  are  pretty 
little  gardens,  with  artificial  lakes  and  rivers 
crossed  by  tiny  bridges.  The  Japanese  are  real 
landscape-gardeners,  and  contrive,  by  making 
artificial  hills  on  their  grounds,  to  put  a great 
deal  in  a small  space. 

The  gardens,  like  the  houses,  are  kept  beau- 
tifully neat ; but  as  they  are  all  concealed  from 
view,  of  course  they  add  no  beauty  to  the  gen- 
eral appearance  of  the  city.  And  it  must  be 
admitted  that  from  the  irregularity  of  the 
streets,  the  lowness  of  the  houses  and  the 
entire  want  of  artistic  taste  in  their  construc- 
tion, Tokio  cannot  well  be  reckoned  among  the 
beautiful  cities  of  the  world.  The  light  material 
out  of  which  the  houses  are  built  ignites  very 
rapidly ; and  as  the  Japanese  have  no  means  of 


NIPHON  BASHT 


-'  • jf' 1 '-  '■■■  ■ ■ ■•  • **"'  «'  • JrtY 


^^jiy^l  ■“••'  . '■'#N  - 


i 


. . ■< 


■ *t 


'^OR 


1870] 


A Winter  in  Tokio. 


53 


extinguishing  fire,  almost  every  night  we  hear 
the  clanging  of  the  fire-bells,  and  look  out  to 
see  the  horizon  red  with  the  flames  of  some 
extensive  conflagration. 

All  of  the  merchants  have  fireproof  buildings, 
called  ku-ra,  in  which  their  large  stocks  of 
goods  are  kept.  These  are  made  of  adobe, 
or  mud-plaster,  and  so  smoothly  polished  as  to 
resemble  marble ; and,  though  quite  near  the 
wooden  houses,  if  a fire  breaks  out  the  light 
material  quickly  burns  away,  and  the  ku-ra 
remains  untouched. 

The  principal  street  is  called  the  To-ri,  as  in 
Yokohama.  It  runs  through  the  centre  of  the 
city  from  north  to  south,  and  is  part  of  the  To- 
kai-do,  or  east  sea-road,  which  connects  the  two 
capitals,  Tokio  and  Kioto,  a distance  of  three 
hundred  miles,  and  may  be  called  the  great 
national  road  of  the  empire. 

The  city  is  intersected  by  canals,  in  which 
pass  up  and  down  boats  loaded  with  rice,  saki 
and  charcoal.  These  canals  are  constantly 
crossed  by  arched  bridges,  in  the  construction 
of  which  great  skill  is  exhibited.  The  most 
famous  bridge  in  Tokio  is  Ni-phon  Ba-shi,  which 
crosses  one  of  these  canals  on  the  To-ri.  From 
this  bridge  all  the  distances  throughout  the 
empire  are  reckoned,  and  here  the  famous 
edicts  against  the  Christians  are  posted. 


54 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1870 


Across  the  river  Sumida  are  many  long 
bridges — Ye-tai  Ba-shi,  0-Ha-shi,  the  great 
bridge,  Ri-yo-go-ku  Ba-shi  and  A-dzu-ma 
Ba-shi. 

The  Foreign  Concession  is  in  the  eastern 
part  of  the  city,  lying  along  the  bay.  Its  name 
{Tskiji)  signifies  “made  land,”  and  it  has  been 
conceded  by  the  government  for  the  use  and 
residence  of  foreigners.  At  present  the  only 
European  building  there  is  the  hotel,  which  is 
an  object  of  great  interest  to  the  natives.  It  is 
of  foreign  construction,  though  built  by  native 
mechanics  under  the  superintendence  of  a 
European  architect. 

On  the  east  side  of  the  river  Sumida  is 
Mu-ko-ji-ma,  where  the  famous  cherry  trees 
grow  along  the  bank.  In  the  spring,  when  the 
bloom  is  out,  crowds  of  Japanese  go  over  the 
river  to  see  the  flowers,  to  drink  tea  made  of 
the  blossoms,  and  thus  celebrate  the  return  of 
the  cheerful  season.  Opposite  the  city  is  Sku- 
da-ji-ma,  a little  island  where  the  fishermen  live 
who  supply  the  great  city  with  the  products  of 
their  labor. 

Our  first  winter  in  Tokio  is  quickly  passing 
away,  and  yet  we  have  never  been  without 
flowers,  and  the  trees  have  been  always  green. 
Only  once  or  twice  has  snow  fallen,  and  then 
to  melt  away  almost  as  soon  as  it  touched  the 


A Winter  in  Tokio. 


55 


1870] 


ground.  The  days  are  almost  always  bright, 
the  sky  of  a deep  soft  blue,  and  the  waters  of 
the  bay  sparkle  in  the  sunshine.  Sometimes, 
however,  the  wind  blows  a perfect  gale,  the  bay 
is  rough  and  dark,  the  windows  rattle,  and  the 
cold  penetrates  with  chilling  effect.  The  wo- 
men in  the  streets  have  their  heads  wrapped 
up  in  their  dzukins,  or  hoods,  leaving  only  their 
eyes  exposed,  and  hurry  along  to  reach  some 
place  of  shelter. 

Watchmen  patrol  the  foreign  settlement  all 
night,  striking  their  staves  upon  the  ground  as 
they  walk,  making  a jingling  noise : they  are 
expected  to  detect  thieves  or  give  warning  in 
case  of  fire.  A strong  guard  is  placed  at  the 
gate  of  Ts’kiji.  We  have  heard  something  of 
the  guard  being  attacked  and  one  of  them 
killed  by  outsiders.  Tales  of  Ro-nins  (out- 
laws from  the  provinces)  ready  to  do  anything 
desperate  to  drive  foreigners  from  the  country 
have  reached  our  ears. 

Those  who  come  into  Ts’kiji  have  little 
blocks  of  wood  with  Chinese  characters  upon 
them  hanging  from  their  belts.  These  blocks 
answer  to  cards  of  admission,  and  no  native 
can  enter  the  lines  without  such  blocks,  which 
are  given  them  by  some  official  of  the  govern- 
ment. 

In  the  midst  of  all  these  dangers  and  alarms 


56 


[1870 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 

come  pleasant  little  tokens  of  esteem  from  the 
few  friends  we  have  made  among  the  people 
during  the  short  time  we  have  lived  here. 
They  bring  the  pretty  winter  flowers  of  the 
country — camellias  and  chrysanthemums  and 
the  bright  red  berry  (nan-ten)  which  we  ad- 
mire so  much.  Then  they  bring  also  oranges  in 
neat  boxes  and  baskets  ornamented  with  sprigs 
of  evergreens,  or  boxes  of  eggs  and  native 
sweetmeats ; and  all  these  evidences  of  kindly 
feeling  on  their  part  are  very  gratifying  to  us, 
who  are  so  recently  come,  and  still  are  stran- 
gers in  a strange  land. 

Our  little  house,  which  is  rendered  comfort- 
able by  outside  doors  and  windows,  a small 
stove  and  a few  other  articles  of  foreign  fur- 
niture, is  crowded  every  day  with  the  pupils, 
who  come  to  learn  English.  One  of  my  pupils, 
a bright,  pleasant  boy  of  fifteen,  has  learned  to 
read  this  winter,  and  on  Sundays  studies  Line 
upon  Line.  He  has  a great  many  questions  to 
ask  concerning  our  religion,  and  seems  much 
interested.  One  day,  not  long  ago,  he  said, 
“God  must  be  very  angry  with  the  Japanese 
because  they  worship  idols.” 

One  Saturday  he  said,  “ To-morrow  I shall 
come  to  read  the  Bible.”  We  asked  him  if  the 
Japanese  hated  the  Bible.  “ Oh  no,”  he  replied; 
“ they  did  once,  but  not  now.” 


1870] 


A Winter  in  Tokio. 


57 


With  him  comes  a little  boy  about  six  years 
of  age.  He  wears  straw  shoes,  which  he  slips 
off  when  he  enters  the  house,  and  a queer  coat 
tied  in  front  with  a cord  and  with  very  wide 
long  sleeves ; these  sleeves  are  his  pockets. 
His  books,  when  not  using  them,  are  carefully 
wrapped  in  a square  cotton  cloth  which  he  calls 
a fu-ru-shi-ki.  These  fu-ru-shi-kis  are  some- 
times made  of  crape  or  silk. 

A few  days  ago  his  mother,  with  her  little 
babe  on  the  back  of  the  nurse,  came  to  call 
upon  us.  She  was  neatly  dressed  and  of  very 
ladylike  deportment.  We  put  the  baby  in  a 
chair,  and  his  black  eyes  danced  as  he  lisped 
out  in  a clear,  shrill  voice,  I- jin- san  a-na-ta 
tai-san  peg-gy  !”  which  means,  “ You  foreigner, 
go  away  r This  he  repeated  over  and  over, 
greatly  to  the  annoyance  of  his  polite  mother, 
whom  we  endeavored  to  reassure.  We  enter- 
tained the  lady  by  showing  her  articles  of  dress 
and  furniture,  and  she  presented  to  us  two 
handsome  silk  card-cases. 

A late  steamer  from  Nagasaki  brings  the 
news  that  seven  hundred  Roman  Catholic 
Japanese  have  been  banished  from  their  homes. 
In  spite  of  edicts  and  persecutions,  sometimes 
very  bloody,  this  faith  has  had  its  adherents  in 
that  part  of  the  empire  through  these  centuries 
past.  We  cannot  refrain  from  sympathizing 


58  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

with  these  banished  ones,  although  we  know 
their  creed  is  a sadly  perverted  one. 

When  we  think  of  those  who  in  years  gone 
by  have  undergone  all  the  tortures  of  Japanese 
prisons  and  suffered  martyrdom  for  their  faith, 
we  are  hopeful  that  all  those  who  now  profess 
Christianity  among  this  people  will  prove  faith- 
ful even  to  the  end. 


CHAPTER  V. 


HOME  AND  SCHOOI^. 


Morning  in  Tokio — Interior  of  a Japanese  House — 
Breakfast — Going  to  School — The  Written  Language 
— What  a Japanese  Girl  Learns — The  Baby  0-ya-su- 
Mi-NA-SAi — Japanese  Homes — Position  of  Women. 

O one  who  has  stood  on  the  shore  of  the 


sea  waiting  for  the  sunrise,  and  has  seen 
the  water  taking  on  a pale  pink,  then  deepening 
into  crimson  as  the  grand  luminary  comes  forth 
above  the  horizon,  and  waited  still  longer  to  see 
it  mount  higher  and  higher,  pouring  down  floods 
of  light,  until  the  sea  catches  up  the  glory  and 
breaks  in  golden  waves  against  the  shore,  can 
wonder  at  the  homage  paid  to  an  object  so  full 
of  wondrous  beauty.  There  are  those  who 
know  not  the  One  whose  servant  the  sun  is. 

The  worship  of  the  heavenly  bodies  seems  to 
us  the  purest,  most  natural  form  of  idolatry  ; 
yet  in  the  religion  of  the  people  around  us 
we  have  evidence  of  the  degrading  effect  of  all 
worship  of  the  creature  instead  of  the  Creator. 

We  have  pictures  of  great  sunrise-festivals 
where  crowds  of  people  are  assembled,  with 


59 


6o 


[1870 


The  Sttnrise  Kin q; don 

banners  and  strange  emblems  held  on  high 
poles.  Some  are  beating  drums  and  -some  are 
praying,  while  others  manifest  their  joy  in  songs 
and  dances.  Whether  these  festivals  are  still 
held  in  these  islands  we  are  not  informed.  Fre- 
quently, in  our  walks  near  the  seashore,  we  see 
ropes  stretched  between  two  poles,  to  which 
long  strips  of  paper  are  attached,  and  this 
seems  to  be  connected  somewhat  with  the  old 
form  of  Sintoo  worship.  There  is  a story  or 
legend  of  a to-ri-ye  (Sintoo  temple-gate)  emit- 
ting a peculiar  sound  when  the  first  beams  of 
the  morning  sun  fall  upon  it.  The  Mikado  is 
supposed  by  the  people  to  be  the  lineal  descend- 
ant of  the  sun.  His  name  [Ten-shi-sa-md)  sig- 
nifies “ child  of  the  sun  ” or  “ son  of  Heaven.” 

This  bright  March  morning  in  Tokio  found 
very  few  people  up  to  greet  their  0-ten-to-sa- 
mds  rising.  The  wind  was  from  the  north,  and 
fishing-boats  were  coming  down  the  river  to  go 
out  on  the  bay.  Some  fishermen,  standing  up 
to  their  knees  in  water,  were  washing  their  nets. 
The  To-ri  was  all  quiet  and  deserted ; the  busy 
traffic  of  the  day  had  not  yet  begun.  In  the 
temples  a few  devotees  lay  prostrate  before  the 
altars,  while  over  the  city  at  nearly  regular 
intervals  fell  the  deep  rich  tones  of  Shi-ba’s 
bell. 

But  it  made  no  difference  to  the  sun  whether 


TEETH-BRUSHING.  OLD  MAN  AT  WELL.  Page  6i. 


■"i'-'l  ■ s.‘  = 


.V®  . 


y*' 


tf- 


■- 


I 


. '*'2  V 

'irriL’/'*  *' 

■'  i r--,*»^f^j^nc'. 

U ■ • ' 

• *»  - >r7  >g(^-«^TTtd 

' --  ’•  ' 

If!  ""''  •' 

1^*  , '=<  '’•”  ' 

i 


mn  •’"<■■■  *W«Sl'  ■ • '■■  ■■■'■■’■'■%  "" 

• 'Hi  -*r  'iir  re. 


•’  -•■<  - 

*'  , — - . .- 

i 4,.*  -•  ^-.■  «i|^'-'^'.:' 

— ■ 4 r 'tr-^  p--.-^  -v«^  J ‘r  > d'  ■f  >' 


«'.  r 


\ ^ ^r^f'  u**  ^ 

' ’ - "•  -'  Hfti^-*^-'^-  l^y  • ’ 

■ 

#il-  '•'rtR’.ar-  ■/•«,.  •.. 


1870] 


Ho7ne  and  School. 


61 


there  were  many  or  few  to  welcome  him  as  he 
brightened  Fu-ji’s  snow-crowned  head,  sent  a 
long  path  of  red  light  across  the  water,  and 
shone  upon  the  great  city  and  on  the  house 
where  our  little  neighbor  O I-ne  san  lay  asleep 
on  her  futon  in  a corner  of  a dark  room.  Her 
bed  was  made  of  blue  cloth  stuffed  with  cot- 
ton. These  mattresses  the  people  call  futons. 
Her  neck  rested  on  a cushion  on  top  of  a 
wooden  pillow. 

Just  outside  of  the  house,  in  an  open  court, 
an  old  man  was  drawing  water  from  a deep 
well.  The  water  of  Tokio  is  carried  by  pipes 
into  cisterns  or  wells  from  a river  near  the  city. 
It  is  tolerably  good,  but  sometimes  becomes 
brackish,  from  the  salt  water  in  the  bay,  which 
gets  into  the  pipes.  The  old  man  drew  the 
water  slowly  by  means  of  buckets  attached  to 
each  end  of  a long  rope  which  ran  over  a pulley. 
Two  crows  kept  flying  about  his  head : these 
birds  in  Tokio  are  the  great  scavengers,  carry- 
ing off  all  the  refuse.  They  are  very  bold,  and 
will  snatch  fish  from  a man’s  hand.  They  build 
their  nests  in  the  trees  even  by  the  palace,  and 
look  down  unrebuked  upon  the  emperor  and  his 
court.  They  have  meetings  upon  the  tops 
of  the  houses,  and  caw  and  clap  their  wings 
and  twist  their  heads  from  side  to  side,  until  we 
look  up  to  see  what  all  the  commotion  is  about. 


62  The  Sunrise  Kingdo7u.  [1870 

They  are  not  afraid  of  man,  for  man  never 
injures  them. 

Near  the  well,  O Cho  (“Miss  Butterfly”)  stood 
brushing  her  teeth.  Her  toothbrush  was  a 
straight  stick  made  soft  at  one  end,  and  she 
had  a box  of  tooth-powder.  She  made  a noise 
as  if  some  one  were  choking  her.  Inside  the 
house,  O Kin  (“  Miss  Gold  ”)  was  opening  the 
wooden  slides,  which  run  in  grooves  cut  in  the 
veranda.  She  began  with  the  farthest  one,  and 
ran  along,  pushing  it  before  her,  until  it  was 
stopped  by  the  end  of  the  house.  Then  she 
started  for  the  second,  and  disposed  of  that 
in  the  same  manner,  until  all  the  slides  were 
at  one  end  of  the  small  veranda. 

The  creaking  of  the  well-rope,  the  caw-caw- 
ing of  the  crows,  the  toothbrushing  process  and 
the  opening  of  the  slides  made  noise  enough  to 
arouse  any  one,  and  O I-ne  san  opened  her 
little  almond-shaped  eyes  to  see  the  sunshine 
pouring  into  the  house.  Then  she  remembered 
that  she  was  going  to  school  for  the  first  time 
that  day.  O I-ne  san  was  six  years  old,  and  it 
was  time  for  her  to  begin  to  go  to  school. 

She  got  up  from  her  bed  and  went  into  the 
kitchen,  which  is  in  the  front  of  the  house  and 
is  the  most  completely  furnished  part.  Beside 
the  ranore  are  large  kettles  for  rice  and  hot 
water.  There  are  immense  earthen  jars  for 


JAPANESE  KnX'HEN.  Pa^c  62. 

a S uK'c-hottIc.  C'liina  jar,  4.  (Xiphoani . Slirine.  Fruit  howl.  7.  Sa-ki-lnntlc.  8.  Ear^e  plate.  ^ tiiid  to,  K iite-hoxc'^. 
ater  kettl.,-,  12.  Ran;e.  lioiliuL^-kettle.  14  (hiiliron  15.  Saltiui^-ho.x.  16.  Kettle,  17.  tkittiiii:;  radish.  18  Plao-  where  fne-wo.  ni 

19.  Water-jar,  20.  Wasli-liasin.  .m  . W.iti  r-pail.  I >ipper. 


I 


ii- 


V«<»  -aei'-biH 

^ - t ; - '4'-Sfc*(*.C''r  „"tflP^ 

V^,..  ■ 

m-  Mr 

:!Ts.'  ^ : ..*  . ■ '■“'  ' 

■<o.j  ..  •■  • jji<iiiii>ir-*.nii«fcn- '-  ^ 

.■;  • -tisi#  l'-  , VfO'  '^.^'lilM'^  ''=**®*"  C" 

>.t  Vi-.  .^.-  r - 

.^0^ ... . ,5^ .-  - ■ ■{  ^ Ji. 


-I  •• 


.1 


HI  -i  -‘ 


S’^W  - '^  -Id  .•  »..' 

% r '■'  - ^ ■ ■ , ■ 3 


1870] 


Home  and  School. 


63 


cold  water,  and  wooden  buckets,  dippers  and 
ladles.  Where  the  earthen  jars  are  kept  the 
floor  slants,  so  that  the  water  is  easily  carried 
off  into  drains.  Here,  also,  is  usually  found 
the  shallow  copper  basin  which  serves  as  a 
wash-bowl  for  the  whole  family.  On  shelves 
are  platters  and  bottles,  and  hanging  on  the 
wall,  sieves  and  a variety  of  strainers. 

When  O I-ne  san  went  into  the  kitchen,  O Kin, 
with  her  cheeks  all  puffed  out,  was  kneeling  at 
the  range,  trying  to  make  the  charcoal  burn  by 
blowing.  O Cho  was  cutting  dai-kon  (radishes) 
on  a little  table,  using  a large  knife.  When  she 
saw  O I-ne  san  she  got  up  to  take  her  some 
water  in  a basin,  and  handed  her  a toothbrush, 
with  the  pink  powder.  O I-ne  san  sat  down  on 
the  veranda  and  washed  her  face  and  hands, 
wiping  them  with  a little  blue  towel,  and  brushed 
her  teeth.  Then  she  slipped  off  her  blue  night- 
dress— Japanese  always  use  blue  where  we 
prefer  white — and  O Cho  helped  her  to  dress. 
There  were  no  buttons  to  fasten,  no  hooks  and 
eyes,  pins  or  strings,  to  render  the  process  of 
dressing  tedious.  The  loose  garments  of  the 
Japanese  are  confined  only  by  the  broad  belt. 

When  O I-ne  san  was  ready,  she  went  in  to 
say  “ 0-hay-o  ” (“  Good-morning  ”)  to  her  father 
and  mother.  She  found  them  sittino^  on  the 

o 

floor  in  a large  room  at  the  side  of  the  house. 


64 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1870 


The  best  apartment  in  Japanese  houses  is 
always  at  the  farthest  side  or  the  extreme  rear, 
opening  into  the  pretty  garden.  We  have  here, 
as  in  many  other  Japanese  customs,  the  reverse 
of  our  own  style — kitchen  in  front  and  parlor 
in  the  back.  The  clean  white  mats  constitute 
the  only  furniture  of  a Japanese  parlor.  Byway 
of  ornament  there  are  pictures  in  crayon,  or  long 
scrolls  with  poems  written  on  them  in  Chinese 
or  Japanese  character.  There  are  also  vases 
for  flowers.  No  chairs,  ornamental  tables,  mir 
rors,  book-cases,  or  anything  of  that  sort,  can 
be  found  in  a purely  native  house. 

The  futons  and  pillows  are  carefully  put  away 
in  the  daytime.  There  are  a great  many  little 
closets  in  these  houses ; the  people  have  a 
wonderful  way  of  economizing  space,  and  even 
make  drawers  in  their  steep,  narrow  staircases. 
Tables  which  they  use  for  meals,  writing,  or 
any  other  purpose,  are  small  and  only  about  a 
foot  high  from  the  ground.  Some  families  have 
chests  of  drawers,  and  all  possess  baskets  and 
boxes  of  all  sizes  and  shapes. 

The  charcoal  brazier,  or  hi-ba-chi,  is  the  only 
stove  used  by  the  people.  These  are  made  in 
various  shapes,  some  of  them  being  highly 
ornamented.  They  are  invariably  made  of 
copper.  They  give  more  heat  than  one  would 
suppose ; but  the  Japanese  are  very  dependent 


T 8 

I-  box.  I 3.  Pillow.  I 5.  Rice-boxes.  7.  Tea-pot. 

2.  Paper  of  tea.  , 4.  Hibachi.  6.  Lantern.  8.  Breakfast-table. 

Page  64. 


'■  S’;- -•' 


m 


^ .. ,;: 
' '"•""***  -^ii^-’' 

; :ii“ 

*.^<111^  : ■ u - ■*■  ■ ■<-  .'; r.rti 

'» 'jt|  " W ' 


»tC> 


5i» 


•ill-  ^*V 


..Vi 


’♦V 


I 


j'4";  ’’ ’ 

•'■■'  ■*  - ^-ti^ffff--  ••  _K..i»,';i  ■ i'^M»s  ;'{(■  ^**^--'  ■«l.t^|_  /"„ 


'(4  '.«^ 


MM  '.•  <r  • , 'V'  '•!  ■<  ; JR- ■■'  ' 


. A'l  .S  ■ <41 


i, 


"■1 


-fli 


1870] 


Home  and  School. 


65 


upon  the  sunshine  for  warmth,  and  throw  open 
their  houses  to  admit  it  even  in  midwinter.  It 
is  only  on  damp,  cloudy  days  that  the  people 
really  suffer  from  the  cold. 

Were  the  houses  like  ours,  these  open  char- 
coal fires  would  be  dangerous,  but  the  free 
ventilation  here  renders  suffocation  almost 
impossible.  As  it  is,  however,  the  constant  in- 
halation of  charcoal-fumes  cannot  be  other- 
wise than  injurious. 

Even  the  paper  slides  were  open  in  the  sit- 
ting-room of  the  Ka-ji-ma  family  this  morning, 
and  the  light  and  air  poured  through  the  house. 
On  the  veranda  hung  pieces  of  glass,  which 
tinkled  pleasantly  as  the  wind  swayed  them  to 
and  fro.  O I-ne  san  calls  her  father  and  mother 
O Tot  san  and  O Ka  san.  I-ne  means  “ young 
rice.”  It  is  a pretty  name  for  a little  girl,  for 
young  rice  is  something  very  tender  and  pre- 
cious, and  requires  great  care  in  its  culture.  O 
means  “honorable,”  and  san,  “miss,”  so  this 
little  girl’s  name  all  signifies  “ Honorable  Miss 
Young  Rice,”  And  this  is  no  unusual  designa- 
tion. It  is  in  accordance  with  the  common 
habit  of  the  land  to  give  such. 

O Cho  and  O Kin  brought  in  the  breakfast. 
O Cho  carried  the  little  tables — one  for  each  of 
them — and  tiny  china  cups  and  plates.  On  these 
tables  they  placed  chopsticks,  and  blue  bowls 

6 * E 


66 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1870 


for  the  rice.  O Kin  brought  the  large  wooden 
rice-box  and  the  tea-pot.  On  a platter  there 
were  fish,  cooked  in  the  Japanese  sauce,  sho-yu, 
and  some  of  the  radish.  O Kin  helped  to  the 
rice  with  a wooden  spoon,  and  poured  tea  into 
the  little  tea-cups.  Then  O Tot  san  and  O Ka 
san  and  O I-ne  san  took  their  chopsticks  in  the 
right  hand  and  pushed  the  rice  into  their  mouths, 
eating  as  fast  as  they  could  swallow,  washing 
down  the  food  with  cups  of  hot  strong  tea. 
The  radish  and  the  fish  they  also  took  up  with 
their  chopsticks.  The  radish  had  been  cut  into 
little  pieces  in  the  kitchen,  and  the  fish  was  soft, 
so  no  knives  were  needed. 

When  the  breakfast  was  over,  O Cho  and 
O Kin  tied  up  their  heads  in  kerchiefs.  O Kin 
took  a straight  stick  with  long  strips  of  paper  at 
the  end  for  a dusting-brush,  and  slapped  away 
at  the  slides  inside  the  house.  O Cho  carried 
away  the  breakfast-things,  then  got  a broom  to 
sweep  the  mats.  Housekeeping  in  Japan  is  an 
easy  matter  compared  to  the  care  of  our  larger 
houses,  filled  with  so  much  furniture,  but  per- 
haps it  would  be  better  for  the  women  if  they 
had  more  duties  to  employ  their  time. 

It  was  now  nearly  nine  o’clock.  O Tot  san 
went  away  to  his  business,  and  O Ka  san  and 
O I-ne  san  started  for  the  school.  O Cho 
walked  a little  way  behind  them,  carrying  some 


WRITING  A COPY.  SWEEPING  AND  DUS'l'ING.  Page  67, 


‘ *N 


c 2 *» 

■\* 


: ^ C ‘r, 

*y*  •'■  *\ 


'.i^ 


. rWlSl*-* 

< - *■  J 

> .',.•  r • i!  V- ;- 

. 

.•  .N  ■ .^ -V.  ^<ll|  'ciili# 

iq|  r.--.  ...  ■ ■■•■  If  '•  '*03 

* ■'*  > '>—■»•'  ■■■* 
f _ •,'  • ■ >-  •■  , ■ . •'.-■s.  ;;.m  ’f? 

i ••:  • 

f*--#'  ‘L!!‘ *•  ' ! t;. 

% i:v.  .»*-i;|,  v i 

•■■^i  ' -If*:;  ♦' 

•3t-  i'i*'.--  ^>,  --„  • 'f  T i '«?<&! 


I 


■: 


1870] 


Home  and  School. 


67 


paper  and  the  ink-box,  which  contains  the 
camel-hair  brushes  and  the  India-ink.  The 
school-house  was  just  around  the  corner.  Long 
before  they  reached  it  they  heard  the  sound  of 
children’s  voices  as  they  all  read  together.  The 
noise  in  a Japanese  school  is  deafening  to  us,  but 
they  do  not  seem  to  mind  it.  The  black  so-shi 
were  hanging  up  before  the  door,  where  the 
children  had  put  them  to  dry.  These  are  their 
copy-books,  originally  of  white  paper,  but  writ- 
ten over  so  often  that  they  become  perfectly 
black. 

O Ka  san  called  out  at  the  door,  “ 0-go-men- 
na-sair  (“Beg  pardon!”)  The  schoolmaster 
opened  the  sliding  door  to  admit  his  patron, 
and  the  noise  suddenly  ceased.  O Ka  san  and 
O I-ne  san  made  the  usual  courtesy,  getting  down 
upon  their  knees  and  touching  the  floor  with 
their  hands  and  foreheads.  Their  limbs  are 
flexible,  and  from  the  power  of  habit  they  do 
this  with  perfect  ease  and  grace. 

O Cho  went  down  in  the  same  prostrate 
manner  a little  way  behind  them.  O Ka  san 
told  the  teacher  that  her  little  daughter  was 
six  years  old ; that  she  was  very  backward  and 
had  a very  bad  memory,  but  she  wanted  her 
to  come  to  school.  The  teacher  said,  I shall 
be  very  happy.”  Then  O Ka  san  took  the 
money,  which  was  nicely  folded  up  in  a piece 


68  The  Sunrise  Kmgdom.  [1870 

of  paper,  from  O Cho,  and  gave  it  to  the  teach- 
er. This  was  a private  school,  and  the  charge 
for  tuition  was  only  a few  cents  per  month, 
paid  in  advance. 

O Ka  san  then  went  back  to  the  house,  leav- 
ing O I-ne  san  with  O Cho  at  the  school.  The 
scholars  who  were  learning  to  write  sat  around 
the  teacher  with  their  copy-books  on  the  floor. 
They  held  their  brushes  straight  up  in  their 
hand  and  made  long  broad  marks.  O Cho 
untied  the  bundles  she  had,  and  gave  O I-ne  san 
some  paper  and  her  pen-brush.  Then  she  got 
some  water  and  poured  it  on  the  ink-stone,  and 
rubbed  the  stick  of  India-ink  in  it. 

The  teacher  sat  by  O I-ne  san’s  side  and 
showed  her  how  to  hold  the  pen.  The  little 
girl  tried  hard  to  copy  the  strange  character 
given  her.  She  felt  lonely  and  a little  fright- 
ened when  she  saw  the  other  children  gazing 
curiously  at  her.  But  a little  girl  whom  she 
knew  looked  up  and  smiled  at  her,  then  crept 
to  her  side  and  said,  “You  have  well  come.” 

It  is  a dififlcult  task  even  for  Japanese  chil- 
dren to  master  their  own  language.  There 
are  forty-eight  letters  in  the  Japanese  alpha- 
bet, and  two  distinct  sets  of  characters,  the  ka- 
ta-ka-na  and  the  hi-ra-ga-7ia.  Besides  these, 
Chinese  characters  are  extensively  used.  Some 
books  are  written  almost  entirely  in  Chinese. 


*870] 


Home  and  School. 


69 


The  men  among  the  higher  classes  all  read 
this  language,  and  even  women  and  many  of 
the  lower  orders  are  taught  the  particular  cha- 
racters most  generally  in  use.  All  the  signs 
about  the  shops  and  the  proper  names  used 
are  written  in  Chinese  character,  and  we  always 
see  the  same  on  lanterns  and  fans,  and,  indeed, 
upon  almost  everything  that  is  used  by  the 
people. 

The  written  language  is  entirely  different 
from  the  spoken,  so  that  it  is  almost  like  learn- 
ing another  language  for  a child  to  learn  to 
read,  even  after  it  can  talk  with  fluency.  The 
words  used  in  /^/f/^r-writing  differ  both  from 
the  books  and  the  colloquial,  thus  making 
another  language  for  the  children  to  learn ; 
and  if  they  do  not,  after  all  this  is  accomplished, 
attend  the  poetry-school,  they  cannot  under- 
stand at  all  the  poems  of  the  country. 

The  girls  are  taught  how  to  sew  and  em- 
broider and  make  pretty  little  fancy  articles, 
such  as  purses,  chopstick-cases,  bags  and  other 
things.  Their  needles  are  clumsy  compared  with 
ours,  and  they  have  thimbles  open  at  both 
ends,  and  silk  and  cotton  thread  wound  on 
pieces  of  wood.  They  also  learn  to  play  on 
the  musical  instruments  of  the  country,  the 
samisen,  a three-stringed  guitar,  the  bi-wa,  a 
four-stringed  guitar,  and  the  ko-to,  a thirteen- 


70  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1870 

stringed  harp ; also  they  are  taught  to  play  on 
the  fife  and  drum. 

There  are  also  tea-schools y where  little  girls 
are  taught  how  to  make  tea  and  present  it 
gracefully  to  guests.  We  will  say  more  of 
these  hereafter. 

In  the  afternoon,  when  O Tot  san  had  come 
home  from  his  business  and  O I-ne  san  and 
O Cho  had  come  from  the  school,  O I-ne  san 
was  sitting  idly  on  the  floor  by  O Ka  san’s  side. 
The  mother  was  sewing  in  a way  that  appeared 
left-handed  to  us.  The  little  girl  heard  voices 
at  the  door,  and  some  one  spoke  out:  “ 0-ta-no- 
mo-shi-ma-su  (“  I call  ”).  This  practice  of  call- 
ing at  the  door  is  owing  to  the  fact  that  no 
one  can  knock  at  these  paper  doors.  It  was 
a neiorhbor  who  had  come  in  to  have  a lit- 

o 

tie  chat,  and  behind  her  was  a servant  with  baby 
Kin-ta-ro  on  her  back.  The  baby’s  hair  was  all 
shaved  from  his  head,  and  his  eyelashes  and 
eyebrows  plucked  out.  His  eyes  were  bright 
and  his  little  brown  face  clean.  He  wore  a lit- 
tle red  crape  cap  and  a long  silk  dress  with  wide 
sleeves.  He  would  have  been  a funny-looking 
little  man  to  us,  but  O I-ne  san  thought  him 
very  pretty.  She  looked  for  his  hands  and 
feet,  and  he  lay  quietly  and  laughed  at  her. 
But  soon  the  neighbor  said  it  was  late,  and 
went  away,  after  they  had  all  drank  tea  and 


1870] 


Home  and  School. 


71 


had  ku-wa-shi  (“  sweetmeats  ”).  Then  the  house 
was  shut  up  for  the  night,  and  O Cho  brought  in 
the  lamps. 

These  lamps  (an-don)  are  quite  high,  with  a 
drawer  in  the  bottom,  where  wicks  are  kept. 
Over  the  drawer  is  a place  for  the  oil-can,  and 
above  that  still,  and  protected  by  paper  slides, 
is  the  little  saucer  in  which  the  oil  is  put  and 
the  wick  for  burning.  They  are  rather  cum- 
brous, and  not  handsome.  They  stand  about 
two  feet  and  a half  from  the  ground,  and  are 
about  fifteen  inches  square,  all  enclosed,  with 
a sliding  paper  door  which  may  be  drawn  up 
or  down  to  increase  or  to  subdue  the  light  at 
pleasure.  Besides  these,  the  Japanese  have 
tall  wooden  candlesticks  with  a sharp  iron  at 
the  top,  on  which  tallow  candles  are  stuck. 

The  lamp  in  the  sitting-room  gave  but  little 
light,  but  the  charcoal  in  the  hi-ba-chi  was  red 
and  glowing,  O Ka  san  having  just  fanned  it. 
O Cho  and  O Kin  brought  in  supper,  which  is 
the  principal  meal  in  a Japanese  family.  O Cho 
had  made  some  nice  soup  of  fish,  with  rice  and 
other  things  stirred  in  while  it  was  boiling. 
After  supper  the  futons  were  brought  out,  and 
O I-ne  san  was  undressed  and  put  on  her  own 
little  bed.  O Ka  san  covered  her  with  another 
futon,  said,  “ 0-ya-su-mi-ma-sai''  (“rest”),  and 
O I-ne  san  was  soon  fast  asleep. 


72 


The  Sunrise  Kingdo^n. 


[1870 


Now  the  night  has  come,  and  O Tot  san  is 
writing  at  the  little  low  table,  occasionally  read- 
ing aloud,  and  O Ka  san  is  finishing  the  little 
garment  she  began  to-day.  What  is  she  think- 
ing about  ? 

As  we  sometimes  close  our  eyes  and  en- 
deavor to  realize  the  actual  condition  of  the 
blind,  so  do  I try  to  shut  the  eyes  of  my  soul 
from  the  light  of  truth  and  form  some  concep- 
tion of  the  darkness  in  which  these  heathen 
women  are  living.  It  has  been  said  that  Japan 
has  “no  home.”  ‘Like  the  French,  the  language 
has  no  word  corresponding  to  our  “home;”  it 
is  simply  “ house  ” or  “ place  of  habitation.” 
In  a country  where  the  houses  are  all  so  open, 
it  is  needless  to  look  for  such  domestic  life  as 
we  find  in  our  more  favored  land.  The  early 
marriages  contracted  by  the  parents,  or  “ go- 
betweens,”  and  entered  upon  often  without 
love  or  previous  knowledge  on  the  part  of 
those  married,  must  naturally  produce  more 
or  less  unhappiness. 

Where  the  system  of  concubinage  exists,  and 
the  children  in  a family  scarcely  know  who  is 
their  own  mother,  and  the  women  quarrel  for 
the  possession  of  the  children,  the  picture  of 
domestic  life  cannot  but  be  far  from  pleasing. 
But  there  are  some  things  in  Japanese  families 
which  are  very  pleasant  to  us.  The  children 


1 870]  Home  ajid  School.  73 

are  taught  implicit  obedience,  and  are  polite 
and  respectful  to  their  parents.  They  are 
petted  and  seldom  punished.  Fathers  carry 
their  little  babies  very  tenderly  and  soothe 
them  when  they  cry,  and  when  they  come 
from  their  work  or  office  often  bring  home 
pretty  toys  for  their  little  ones. 

Although  the  position  of  woman  in  Japan  is 
superior  to  that  in  other  heathen  lands,  it  is  by 
no  means  an  enviable  one.  Woman  in  the 
family  occupies  an  entirely  subordinate  place. 
A girl  is  subject  to  her  father’s  wishes.  There 
is  1I0  such  thing  as  “ coming  of  age  ” for  a girl 
in  Japan.  She  is  all  her  lifetime  a mere  sub- 
ject. When  married  she  must  obey  her  hus- 
band and  father-in-law,  and  when  a widow  her 
son  becomes  her  master.  The  baby-boy  clings 
close  to  his  mother’s  side,  and  lays  his  little  cheek 
against  hers,  and  talks  a language  which  she 
alone  can  understand.  But  as  he  grows  up,  too 
often  he  learns  to  despise  her.  There  are 
happy  exceptions  to  these  statements,  where 
the  family-life  seems  pure  and  peaceful,  and 
woman  appears  to  have  her  rightful  place. 

Yet  with  all  this  fathers  seem  to  take  great 
care  of  their  little  daughters.  The  best  cloth- 
ing they  can  afford  is  bought  for  them  ; they 
send  them  to  school  and  are  interested  in  their 
education,  paying  liberally  whatever  is  required. 

7 


74 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1870 

In  Japanese  history  every  woman  who  has  dis- 
tinguished herself  in  any  way  is  given  due 
credit,  and  mothers  of  great  men  are  men- 
tioned with  praise.  And  I know  that  the  little 
O I-ne  san,  who  lies  sleeping  so  quietly  on  her 
futon,  is  very  tenderly  loved  and  cherished,  and 
that  her  education,  as  well  as  her  comfort,  occu- 
pies her  mother’s  thoughts  continually. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


GOING  TO  *<SEE  EL  O WEE  ST 

Japanese  Holidays — A Letter — Dressing  the  Hair — 
The  Bath-House — A Little  Girl’s  Dress — Fans,  Shoes 
AND  Umbrellas — Meeting  Friends — Worship  at  the 
Temple — Mu-ko-ji-ma  — The  Feast — Going  Home — So- 
cial Life— Spoken  Language — May  Days. 

The  Japanese  knew  nothing  until  lately  of 
the  Sabbath,  the  holy  seventh  day  of  rest, 
which  our  heavenly  Father  gave  to  the  world, 
when  he  created  it.  But  they  know  that  it  is 
necessary  for  man  to  rest,  so  they  have  always 
had  a great  many  holidays.  They  celebrate 
the  first  day  of  the  first  month,  the  third  of 
•the  third,  the  fifth  of  the  fifth,  the  seventh 
of  the  seventh,  and  so  on  throughout  the 
year. 

Then  there  are  the  I-chi-ro-ku.  I-chi  means 
“ one,”  and  ro-ku,  “ six.”  Every  day  in  the 
month  which  has  a one  or  a six  in  it  has  been 
a rest-day.  The  first,  sixth,  eleventh,  sixteenth, 
etc.,  are  of  that  character.  There  are  also  the 
great  religious  festivals,  which  come  principally 
in  the  summer. 


75 


76  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1870 

The  feast  of  I-na-ri  sama,  the  “ rice-god,”  is 
just  over.  It  lasted  three  days,  and  in  the 
temples  drums  were  beaten  without  cessation. 
Once  during  the  festival  the  god  I-na-ri  was 
brought  out  in  his  car,  which  was  carried  by 
people  dressed  in  fantastic  style,  who  were 
shouting,  singing  and  dancing.  Crowds  fol- 
lowed the  car,  adding  to  the  noise  and  con- 
fusion. If  the  god  was  really  in  the  car,  he 
must  have  been  well  shaken  up,  as  it  was 
rocked  violently  and  turned  almost  upside 
down. 

Now  the  warm  spring  days  have  come.  The 
trees  2XMu-ko-ji-ma  are  white  and  pink  with  blos- 
soms. The  camellias  have  just  ceased  bloom- 
ing, and  in  their  place  azaleas  cover  the  hill- 
sides. Soon  the  wisteria  and  the  purple  iris 
will  make  the  gardens  beautiful.  The  people 
are  all  going  out  to  “ see  flowers,”  and  yester- 
day O Tot  san,  O Ka  san  and  O I-ne  san  went 
with  the  others. 

The  Ka-ji-ma  family  belong  to  the  merchant 
class — by  far  the  most  reliable  part  of  the 
community.  The  father  has  an  interest  in  ex- 
tensive salmon  and  cod-fisheries  at  Ha-ko-da- 
diy  a seaport-town  of  the  island  of  Yeso,  which 
lies  a little  to  the  north  of  Niphon.  Besides 
the  city  home,  they  have  a country-house  at 
0-jiy  a beautiful  place  in  the  suburbs  of  Tokio. 


1870]  Going  to  *'See  Flowers!'  77 

There  O I-ne  san’s  grandmother,  O Ba  san,  lives, 
and  with  her  several  aunts  and  a little  uncle, 
Sen-ki-chi. 

A few  days  ago  O Ka  san  sent  a letter  to 
O Ba  san  to  ask  if  she  and  the  aunts  and  Sen- 
ki-chi  would  meet  them  on  the  morning  of  the 
twenty-sixth  (April)  at  a relative’s  house  near 
A-sa-ku-sa,  and  go  with  them  to  Mu-ko-ji-ma. 
O Ka  san  sat  down  on  the  floor  by  a little  table 
to  write  her  letter,  took  from  a drawer  some 
strips  of  fine  white  paper,  and  with  a delicate 
camel’s-hair  brush  wrote  in  a fine  hand  the 
beautiful  characters.  There  were  a great  many 
yo-ro-shi-kus  and  so-ro-so-ros  and  so-ro-do-mos  in 
the  letter — words  which  mean  nothing,  but  which 
require  great  care  in  their  use.  These  polite, 
meaningless  w^ords  occupy  much  space,  so  that 
a letter  may  be  two  or  three  yards  long  without 
really  containing  much  information. 

When  O Ka  san  had  finished  writing,  she 
pasted  the  several  strips  of  paper  together, 
then  folded  them,  turning  down  the  corners  in 
a peculiar  way.  Then  she  took  from  a little 
closet  a lacquered  box,  put  the  letter  inside, 
tied  around  the  box  a silken  cord  which  had 
a pretty  tassel  at  each  end,  and  sent  it  by  a 
messenger  to  O-ji.  The  answer  soon  came. 
O Ba  san  and  all  thanked  O Ka  san  very  much, 
and  would  be  very  happy  to  go  with  her.  The 


[1870 


yS  The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 

answer  came  in  the  same  box  in  which  the  letter 
was  sent. 

O I-ne  san  went  to  bed  thinking  of  the  pleas- 
ant time  she  would  have  going  to  “see  flowers” 
with  her  little  playmate  and  uncle,  Sen-ki-chi. 
She  was  very  anxious  for  fear  it  might  rain, 
and  the  last  thing  at  night  looked  out  to  see 
the  stars  shining  in  the  sky,  and  the  first  thing 
in  the  morning  to  find  the  day  bright  and  clear. 

The  hairdresser  came  early  with  little  bottles 
of  oil  and  wooden  combs  and  strings  and  pads. 
She  combed  O I-ne  san’s  long  hair,  oiled  and 
twisted  it,  and  rolled  it  over  pads.  O Ka  san 
brought  some  red  crape,  all  crinkled  and 
dotted  with  white.  It  looked  very  pretty  in 
O I-ne  san’s  black  hair.  The  little  girl  sat  very 
still  until  the  hairdresser  had  finished.  Then 
O Cho  took  her  to  the  bath-house,  which  was 
quite  near.  The  steam  poured  through  the 
roof,  looking  almost  as  if  the  house  were  on 
fire.  Inside,  people  were  in  a large  tank, 
laughing,  talking  and  splashing  the  water.  O 
Cho  put  O Tne  san  into  the  tank  with  the 
women  and  children. 

The  Japanese  use  very  hot  water  for  theif 
baths ; we  could  not  endure  such  heat.  They 
have  no  soap,  but  depend  entirely  upon  the  hot 
water  to  make  them  clean.  They  are  a very 
cleanly  people  in  this  respect,  using  the  bath 


1870]  Going  to  ''See  Flowersy  79 

often.  Yet  the  fact  that  many  bathe  in  the 
same  water  no  doubt  may  account  for  much 
of  the  cutaneous  disease  so  prevalent. 

When  O Cho  took  O I-ne  san  to  her  home, 
she  put  on  the  little  girl  her  pretty  new  clothes 
— a dark  silk  dress  and  a broad,  long  red  sash. 
This  sash  was  five  or  six  yards  long,  and  was 
wrapped  round  and  round  the  girl’s  waist,  and 
looped  behind.  Then  O I-ne  san’s  face  was 
powdered  until  it  was  quite  white.  Her  lips 
were  stained  a brighter  red  than  their  natural 
hue,  and  her  finger-nails  were  colored  brown. 

Clean  white  stockings — or,  rather,  very  low 
socks — made  of  cotton  cloth,  with  a separation 
for  the  large  toe,  so  as  to  be  adapted  to  the 
shoe,  were  tied  around  the  ankles.  Pretty 
hairpins  were  stuck  in  her  head,  and  a little 
bag,  serving  as  an  amulet  or  charm,  was  fas- 
tened to  her  belt. 

O I-ne  san’s  toilet  was  now  complete.  O Ka 
san’s  dress,  except  being  plainer  in  color,  was 
like  her  little  daughter’s.  It  is  a remarkable 
thing  that  Japanese  women  wear  no  jewelry. 
The  belt  and  the  hairpins  are  the  only  orna- 
ments they  wear.  Some  of  the  hairpins  are  of 
amber  and  very  costly,  and  the  belts,  or  broad 
sashes,  are  of  heavy  brocade  silk  with  gold 
and  silver  threads  beautifully  inwoven.  No 
woman’s  toilet  is  complete  without  a fan, 


8o 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1870 


which  they  learn  to  use  very  gracefully.  In 
their  sleeves  the  women  carry  their  paper 

handkerchiefs  and  purses  made  of  silk,  and 

sometimes  little  bags  or  cases  for  tobacco, 
snuff  or  chopsticks. 

Fans,  shoes  or  sandals,  and  umbrellas  are 
an  Important  part  of  out-door  attire.  They 

have  two  kinds  of  fans — u-chi-wa,  answering 
to  our  palm-leaf,  and  o-gi,  those  which  open 
and  shut.  They  are  mostly  made  of  paper 
and  bamboo,  some  very  cheap  (half  a cent 

apiece)  ; while  others  are  of  a much  higher 
price,  and  some,  made  of  silk,  will  cost  two  or 
three  dollars.  They  are  painted,  ornamented 
with  gold  and  silver  paper,  and  embossed 
with  fine  silken  figures,  some  very  beautiful. 
All  persons,  men,  women  and  children,  carry 
fans. 

Three  pairs  of  shoes  were  waiting  in  the 
vestibule.  Japanese  never  wear  shoes'  in  the 
house.  O Tot  san’s  were  made  simply  of 
wood,  with  a plain  strap  for  the  toes.  O Ka 
san’s  and  O I-ne  san’s  were  made  soft  by  straw- 
work  on  top,  and  had  velvet  straps.  They 
wore  no  hats,  but  all  carried  umbrellas.  There 
are  two  kinds  of  ka-sa  (umbrellas) — the  oiled, 
which  are  used  to  protect  against  the  rain,  and 
those  not  oiled,  used  only  as  sun-shades.  The 
umbrellas  for  men  and  women  are  black  and 


1870]  Going  to  ''See  Flowers!'  81 

white,  while  those  for  little  girls  are  often  of 
bright,  pretty  colors. 

O Cho  and  O Kin,  in  clothing  made  in  the 
same  style,  but  of  plainer  and  coarser  texture, 
walked  a little  behind  them.  So  they  all  went 
away  from  the  house,  which  was  carefully  shut 
and  put  under  the  charge  of  a neighbor,  and 
went  down  a side  street  on  to  the  To-ri,  O I-ne 
san  keeping  tight  hold  of  her  mother  s hand. 
They  crossed  Niphon  Bashiy  and  saw  the  large 
boards  which  had  written  on  them  the  edicts 
against  Christianity.  Then  they  turned  off  the 
To-ri,  and  went  to  the  east,  toward  A-sa-ku-sa. 
It  was  warm,  and  O I-ne  san  was  glad  when 
they  reached  their  relative’s  house.  They 
found  the  party  from  O-ji  waiting  for  them, 
and  O Ba  san  came  out  to  greet  them.  She 
wore  a dark-gray  dress  and  a black  belt.  She 
smiled  pleasantly,  and  called  O I-ne  san  " Bo- 
ya!'  which  means  “darling.” 

By  this  time  all  the  party  had  gathered 
together,  and  they  bowed  many  times  and 
said:  “Well  come,  compliments,  pleasant  weath- 
er ; and  for  yesterday,  day  before  yesterday, 
and  the  favors  of  long  ago,  thanks !” — words 
sounding  very  disconnectedly  to  our  ears,  and 
yet  no  doubt  perfectly  intelligible  to  the  par- 
ties addressed,  as  conveying  expressions  of  po- 
liteness and  good-will. 


¥ 


82 


[1870 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 

Cups  of  tea  were  now  brought,  that  all  might 
refresh  themselves  before  going  to  the  temple. 
The  crowd  kept  increasing  as  they  neared  A-sa- 
ku-sa — people  of  all  classes,  dressed  in  their 
best,  going  to  Mu-ko-ji-ma.  O Ba  san  bought 
a fan  for  O I-ne  san.  She  took  it  and  touched 
it  to  her  forehead ; this  was  her  way  of  thank- 
ing her  grandmother.  They  all  went  under  the 
large  red  gate,  up  the  broad  walk  to  the  steps 
of  the  temple.  O I-ne  san  saw  the  bell  and  the 
idols  and  the  flocks  of  doves.  They  threw 
money  into  the  contribution-box,  went  up  the 
steps  into  the  temple,  bowed  low  before  the 
altar,  and  clapped  their  hands.  This  was 
doubtless  to  call  the  god’s  attention  to  the 
fact  of  their  worship. 

After  they  had  performed  their  devotions, 
which  were  very  brief,  their  only  prayer  being 
a repetition  of  the  name  of  the  god,  they  left 
the  temple  and  went  on  down  to  the  river. 
This  they  crossed  in  a low,  flat-bottomed  boat, 
in  which  were  many  fellow-passengers.  The 
name  Mu-ko-ji-ma  signifies  “ opposite  island,” 
but  it  is  really  a part  of  the  main  land.  The 
cherry  and  peach  tree  walk  was  lovely  in  the 
sweet  spring  sunshine.  The  trees  were  one 
mass  of  blossoms,  and  their  branches  interlaced 
over  the  broad  avenue.  O I-ne  san  looked  up 
to  see  the  pink  and  white  flowers,  catching 


JAPANESE  HOTEL. 


Page  83. 


m 


..,.  V- 1 * tmi'  — 


' V ^ ; >V~* 


■J  ■ ’ "■‘•3V 


- V*  ■ - ^ a 

lf|i<i^- 3 ,*•  V ■’  "*■  '^■ 


3^' 


■ t ^ ^ • ’*'*^*'  ' 

.4ni  t ^ 

, '^'i-'  -i  ^ '*m  •♦^‘‘•V  \f' V> 


4j*> 


^ > f - ^ V'Vr-^ 

^ . T. 

•••f  •'  ■' . 

J^.|f  ;-.-V  lil^;  '- 

« - '■.  . •**  * - 

f -J  ■“>j^  >•*'  ■ '■ 

is  ’ "*'^*j||  ' •‘“*^  rr^r-‘  -*'•'■  *^{t[  . ’> 

KT^  -.'-v  ^ ' 


5-," 

»«• 

. vA 

'-3  ^;vf  .-4S>r  • ■-' 


...  -•’ic::^ 


...  r 

"■^i 


83 


iSyo]  Going  to  ''See  Flowers S 

occasional  glimpses  of  the  blue  sky.  She  saw 
the  river  flowing  peacefully  along,  and  the  sail- 
boats gliding  swiftly  by.  She  watched  the 
crowds  of  men,  women  and  little  children  like 
herself.  Some  of  the  women  carried  large 
dolls  in  their  arms,  dressed  like  real  babies. 
Perhaps  they  had  no  children  of  their  own,  and 
so  played  with  dolls  to  occupy  the  time.  Many 
of  the  people  carried  branches  of  the  trees. 
They  laughed  and  talked  and  sang,  and  ap- 
peared to  be  very  happy.  It  would  all  have 
been  beautiful  if  they  had  sung  and  spoken 
sweet,  pure  words,  but  their  language  was 
often  very  low  and  obscene.  So  we  see  that 
flowers  and  beautiful  things  in  nature  do  not 
lead  people  to  holiness. 

Our  party  now  went  into  a large  hotel  upon 
the  river-bank.  The  landlord  came  out  to 
meet  them  with  many  bows,  and  told  the  ser- 
vants to  take  them  all  up  stairs.  The  servants 
asked  what  they  would  have  for  dinner,  and 
they  ordered  tai,  a kind  of  fish  much  prized, 
an  omelette  and  eels.  Some  tea  was  brought, 
and  candy  made  of  rice  and  sugar,  to  eat  while 
they  were  waiting  for  dinner.  They  opened 
the  slides  and  sat  where  they  could  see  the 
river  and  the  boats. 

In  less  than  an  hour  the  servant  brought  the 
little  tables  and  the  rice-box  and  some  more 


84  The  Smtrise  Kmgdom.  [1870 

tea.  On  an  immense  platter  they  had  the  fish 
and  omelette,  with  side-dishes  consisting  of 
potatoes  and  red  and  yellow  beans.  The  eels 
were  served  in  lacquered  boxes,  with  sharp 
skewers  run  through  them,  and  dai-kon  (rad- 
ish) and  horse-radish  were  brought  on  small 
plates. 

They  all  ate,  drank  and  talked,  and  had  a hap- 
py time,  after  which  O Tot  san  paid  the  bill — 
about  a boo  (twenty-five  cents)  for  each  member 
of  the  party — and  then  they  all  returned  to  the 
uncle’s  house.  It  was  now  growing  dark,  but 
the  uncle  said  they  must  come  in  to  hear  O Tsu- 
ru  san  sing  and  play  on  the  ko-to.  They  ac- 
cepted the  invitation,  went  in  and  listened  to  the 
song.  It  was  called  E-no-shi-nia,  the  name  of  a 
beautiful  island  on  the  coast,  and  was  about  the 
trees  and  mountains  and  little  children. 

And  now  it  was  time  for  O Tot  san  and  O Ka 
san  and  their  happy  but  tired  little  girl  to  go 
home.  O Cho  took  O I-ne  san  on  her  back. 
She  held  flowers  tightly  in  one  hand,  and  the 
new  fan  she  had  carefully  put  away  in  her 
sleeve.  The  sun  had  gone  down  ; O I-ne  san 
saw  the  people  carrying  lanterns.  No  one 
is  allowed  to  go  out  at  night  without  a lantern. 
She  heard  the  whistle  of  the  blind  a-mas,  and 
looked  at  the  lights  in  the  houses  as  she  passed. 
She  was  warm  and  comfortable,  and  tenderly 


1870]  Going  to  ''See  Flowers S 85 

carried  because  she  was  tired.  She  saw  the 
stars  in  the  sky,  but  did  not  know  very  well 
what  they  were.  Long  before  they  reached 
home  she  was  fast  asleep  with  her  head  on 
O Cho’s  shoulder  and  the  pink  blossoms  still 
held  in  her  hand. 

It  does  not  seem  that  the  Japanese  have  any- 
thing corresponding  to  our  large  social  in-door 
gatherings.  The  bath-houses  are  places  of 
meeting  and  gossiping,  and  we  see  the  people 
going  in  pleasure-boats  on  the  Sumida  or  to 
the  temples  and  public-gardens.  The  religious 
festivals  give  them  frequent  opportunities  of 
meeting  in  a social  way. 

It  is  easy  to  tell  when  a festival  is  in  progress, 
for  the  usually  neglected  children  in  the  streets 
have  their  faces  washed  and  powdered  and  hair 
smooth,  and  are  neatly  dressed.  The  babies 
have  clean  faces  and  look  very  smiling.  The 
streets  are  ornamented  with  lanterns,  and  from 
the  tops  of  high  poles  gayly-colored  papers  are 
flying,  and  the  gates  of  the  temples  are  throng- 
ed by  crowds  of  worshipers  dressed  in  their 
best. 

The  people  appear  to  be  very  happy,  but  it 
is  not  pleasant  to  find  that  under  the  politeness 
and  courtesy  so  lavishly  displayed  are  hidden 
depths  of  corruption.  They  drink  and  quarrel, 
and  the  women  have  sore  troubles,  and  bitter 


86  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1870 

tears  to  shed,  and  often  take  their  own  lives 
to  end  the  misery  for  which  they  know  no 
remedy. 

There  is  no  such  thing  in  Japan  as  plain, 
honest  dealing  between  man  and  man.  Every- 
thing must  be  done  by  means  of  a “go- 
between  ” (na-ka),  through  whom  all  bargains 
and  sales  on  business,  marriage,  and  everything 
else,  are  conducted. 

The  language  itself  discovers  many  peculiari- 
ties in  the  character  of  the  people.  It  is  syl- 
labic, each  syllable  being  distinctly  pronounced. 
The  distinctions  of  caste,  and  the  relation  of 
the  speaker  as  a superior,  inferior  or  equal  of 
the  person  he  addresses,  are  expressed  by  the 
use  or  omission  of  honorific  prefixes  and  affixes. 
The  humility,  real  or  affected,  professed  by 
them  is  evinced  by  such  expressions  as  “ I reach 
it  up  to  you  ” and  “You  reach  it  down  to  me,” 
as  expressive  of  “your  superiority”  compared 
with  “ my  inferiority and  then  they  add  to 
this  the  free  use  of  the  honorific  O. 

Another  peculiarity  of  the  Japanese  charac- 
ter is  clearly  brought  out  in  the  polite  phrases 
and  circumlocutions  by  which  a disagreeable 
conclusion  is  reached.  Those  who  have  lived 
in  the  country  know  well  the  meaning  of  “ I 
have  had  a bad  cold,”  “ My  father  is  sick,”  as 
an  excuse  for  absence  or  neglect  of  duty. 


1870]  Going  to  ''See  Flowers!'  87 

Such  expressions,  and  many  other  expletives 
or  redundant  phrases  commonly  used,  they  do 
not  consider  as  falsehoods,  because  they  are  in 
such  common  use,  and  not  intended  to  be  taken 
literally.  Thus,  “ It  is  poison  to  my  soul  that  I 
could  not  do  more  for  you,”  and  “ I have  made 
a great  noise,”  said  on  leaving  the  house  one 
has  been  visiting,  are  expressions  that  no  one 
would  accept  as  other  than  simple  courtesy. 

There  are  no  abstract  nouns  and  no  words 
to  express  delicate  shades  of  meaning.  As  an 
instance  of  the  latter,  the* word  na-ku  (“to 
cry  ”)  is  used  for  all  the  sounds  made  by  dumb 
animals,  as  well  as  to  express  the  crying  of  a 
human  being.  The  word  ne-ru  means  “ to 
sleep,”  or  merely  “ to  lie  down,”  and  is  used  to 
convey  the  idea  of  grass  being  laid  prostrate 
by  the  wind. 

Words  are  merely  arbitrary  forms  used  to 
express  our  ideas.  Where  the  idea  is  insignif- 
icant, there  can  be  no  depth  of  meaning  in  the 
word ; and  when  we  consider  the  comparative 
littleness  of  the  things  which  Japanese  words 
signify,  we  can  gain  some  idea  of  their  value. 
What  are  their  ideas  of  truth,  virtue  and  love  ? 
and  what,  consequently,  do  these  words  convey 
to  them  ? In  natural  objects  take,  for  instance, 
our  word  “ star.”  Does  their  corresponding 
word  ho-shi  mean  to  them  a great  central  sun 


88 


[1870 


The  Sum'ise  Kingdom, 

with  planets  revolving  around  it,  or  merely  a 
little  taper  in  the  sky  ? And  apply  their  word 
for  “god”  (ka-mi)  to  the  Sintoo  deities,  and 
consider  the  meaning  it  conveys  to  them.  We 
have  already  seen  how  low  and  degraded  that 
idea  is,  and  “ god  ” only  represents  that  thought 
of  their  minds. 

Although  there  is  no  special  depth  to  the 
spoken  language,  it  is  like  music  in  its  sweet- 
ness and  rhythm.  There  are  no  harsh  com- 
binations of  syllables,  and  the  words  flow  easily 
from  the  lips  even  of  little  children.  And  their 
manners  correspond  with  their  language ; for 
when  they  meet,  they  bow  low,  and  with  pro- 
fuse external  ceremonies  combine  the  most 
polite  forms  of  speech.  They  never  offend 
one  another  in  word,  and  politeness  never 
fails  them  in  any  circumstance. 

Family  names  are  derived  from  various 
sources.  Ta-ka-ha-shi,  Ko-ba-ya-shi,  Ha-ya- 
shi,  A-ka-ba-ya-shi,  meaning  respectively  “high 
bridge,”  “ little  forest,”  “ forest  ” and  “ red  for- 
est,” are  instances.  It  is  well,  in  reading  Jap- 
anese proper  names,  to  remember  that  ya-ma 
means  “ mountain ;”  ka-wa,  “ river ;”  ha-shi, 
“bridge;”  ha-ya-shi,  “forest;”  and  sa-ki^  “cape.” 
The  great  mountain  of  Japan  previously  men- 
tioned we  call  Fu-ji-ya-ma,  but  by  the  people 
is  generally  called  Fu-ji  only.  The  Sumida 


1870]  Going  to  ''See  Flowers S 89 

is  spoken  of  to  us  as  the  Sumida-ga-wa 
(“river”). 

Boys’  names  always  end  in  ta-ro,  ji-ro  and 
ki-chi,  as  Mi-chi-ta-ro,  Ta-ke-ji-ro  and  Sen-ki- 
chi.  And  if  we  leave  off  the  termination  and 
prefix  the  honorific  we  have  the  girls’  names 
— viz. : O Mi-chi,  O Ta-ke,  O Sen,  San  is  a 
common  termination  to  all  names,  meaning 
indiscriminately  “ Mr.,”  “ Mrs.,”  “ Miss  ” and 
“ Master.” 

And  now  May  has  come  to  us  in  Tokio.  It 
is  a lovely  month  in  Japan  as  well  as  at  home. 
-A  few  days  ago  we  drove  in  a trap  around  the 
castle-walls.  A perfect  forest  of  trees  sur- 
rounds the  residence  of  the  Mikado,  and  the 
^ beautiful  green  bank  slopes  from  the  outer  wall 
down  to  the  moat.  On  one  side  of  the  road 
are  hedges,  beautiful  now  in  their  spring  fresh- 
ness. It  is  hard  to  realize,  as  we  look  upon 
the  fair  landscape  and  apparently  firm  struc- 
tures before  us,  that  this  is  a land  of  earth- 
quakes, and  yet,  on  the  night  before,  our  house 
had  been  rocked  like  a ship  at  sea,  and  after 
the  first  severe  shock  we  had  a series  of  slight- 
er ones  which  kept  us  uneasy  for  some  time. 

We  have  a little  Sunday-school  now,  and 
some  priests  from  Shi-ba  come  almost  every 
day  for  Bible  instruction.  This  is  a new 
feature  in  our  work.  Their  attention  was  di- 


90 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1870 


rected  to  Christianity  by  reading  Goodrich’s 
General  History  of  the  World  with  a Japanese 
teacher.  We  hope  that  they  are  sincere,  and 
will  yet  be  brought  to  believe  in  the  Lord 
Jesus. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


RO-KU-BAN. 


The  New  Mission-House — The  Typhoon — A Class  of  Boys 
— Young  Samurai — The  Bible  Class— The  Ya-cu-nins 
— Our  New  Year. 

HE  new  mission-house,  on  lot  No.  6 — 


Ro-ku-ban — of  the  Foreign  Concession,  is 
opposite  the  island  Sku-da-ji-ma^  just  below  the 
place  where  the  river  Sumida  empties  into  the 
bay.  It  is  made  of  wood,  with  tiled  roof  and 
walls,  and  boasts  of  veritable  doors,  windows 
and  a chimney. 

The  house  was  built  by  Japanese  workmen, 
under  the  superintendence  of  one  of  the  mis- 
sionaries. The  location  is  pleasant  and  health- 
ful. Directly  in  front  is  the  bay.  From  the 
upper  veranda  we  can  almost  look  down  into 
the  junks  and  sail-boats  as  they  pass.  The 
north  windows  command  a view  of  the  river, 
and  to  the  south-west  we  can  see  Shi-ba’s 
magnificent  trees. 

The  distant  mountains,  on  pleasant  days,  are 
beautiful,  standing  out  clear  and  distinct  against 


91 


92  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

the  sky.  Far  above  the  others  rises  old  Fu-ji, 
in  summer  of  a soft,  deep  purple  hue,  and  in 
winter  all  glittering  and  resplendent  as  his 
snow-crowned  head  catches  the  sunbeams. 

One  Sunday,  soon  after  coming  over  here  to 
live,  we  had  a fearful  storm  of  wind  and  rain. 
In  the  fall  the  north  and  south  winds  have  terri- 
ble battles,  which  last  until  the  north  wind  pre- 
vails and  brings  cold,  clear  weather,  occasionally 
with  snow.  In  the  spring  the  conflict  again 
begins,  and  the  south  wind  gains  the  victory : 
then  we  have  heat,  dampness  and  frequent 
rains. 

In  August  and  September  we  expect  these 
typhoons  (Chinese  tai-fu,  “great  wind”),  but 
they  are  not  so  severe  here  as  in  China. 

Typhoon  of  September. — This  was  a wild 
storm,  and  lasted  nearly  all  day.  The  bay 
was  a grand  sight;  the  waves  dashed  over 
the  breakwater  as  though  they  would  like 
to  sweep  us  all  away.  Rain  and  wind,  with  the 
sound  of  the  angry  waves  and  the  noise  of  the 
falling  tiles  and  timbers  of  the  yet-unfinished 
house,  made  that  Sabbath-day  one  of  terror. 
Some  Japanese  were  killed  not  far  from  us  by 
a falling  house. 

But  the  storm  ceased  suddenly,  and  there 
was  a “ great  calm.”  The  bay  was  as  quiet  as 
if  nothing  had  ever  occurred  to  disturb  it.  The 


1871] 


Ro-ku-ban. 


93 


sunset  was  magnificent.  Bands  of  crimson 
and  gold  stretched  across  the  western  horizon, 
and  eastern  sea  and  sky  were  brightened  by  a 
golden  light  slightly  tinged  with  pink.  Directly 
overhead,  in  an  ocean  of  deep  blue,  floated 
clouds  of  a rich  salmon-color.  It  is  not  often 
that  we  have  a sunset  scene  like  this. 

A large  boy  whom  we  call  Ma-ki  has  been 
reading  for  some  months  with  us.  He  is  a 
plain  and  delicate-looking  person,  but  exceed- 
ingly kind.  A week  seldom  passes  without 
some  little  token  of  gratitude  from  him.  The 
gifts  are  sometimes  rather  peculiar.  Once  he 
brought  a live  cricket  in  an  exquisitely-made 
bamboo  cage.  The  Japanese  are  very  fond  of 
hearing  these  insects  sing,  so  they  cage  them 
and  feed  them  on  cucumbers.  Mine  was  care- 
fully fed,  but  it  did  not  sing  very  long. 

I have  had  two  classes  of  boys  this  winter, 
one  rather  plebeian  in  its  nature,  consisting  of 
Ru-so,  the  barber’s  boy,  Chiu-taro,  a merchant’s 
son,  the  son  of  the  hotel-clerk,  and  others.  All 
of  these  boys  were  diligent.  The  other  class 
was  quite  aristocratic,  consisting  of  nine  or  ten 
little  Samurai  from  Sat-su-ma’s  country.  They 
all  wore  two  swords,  even  those  who  were  so 
small  that  their  eyes  just  came  above  the  table 
when  they  stood  around  it  to  read.  They  were 
nice  little  fellows,  and  the  afternoon  was  pleas- 


94  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

antly  spent  in  teaching  them.  It  is  a grief  to 
me  to  think  of  them  all  as  scattered  now,  I 
know  not  where. 

On  the  first  Sabbath  of  December  one  of  the 
missionaries  beo^an  a Bible  class — the  first  ever 
attempted  in  the  Tokio  mission.  It  was  held 
in  the  parlor  of  the  new  house.  A fire  was 
kindled  in  the  large  stove,  benches  were 
brought,  and  the  dark-skinned,  black-haired 
natives  gathered  in  to  hear  the  teaching  of  the 
word.  Outside,  the  sun  was  shining  brightly, 
the  bay  sparkling  in  the  glorious  light,  and  sail- 
boats were  gliding  noiselessly  by.  Some  of 
the  young  men  had  English,  and  some  Chinese, 
Bibles.  The  verses  were  carefully  explained 
in  Japanese,  and  at  the  close  the  pupils  heard 
a prayer  to  the  true  God  for  the  first  time. 
Friends  at  home  would  have  been  much  grati- 
fied could  they  have  seen  the  earnest  attention 
paid  by  the  pupils.  These  meetings  were  kept 
up,  with  increasing  interest,  for  several  weeks, 
and  we  hoped  and  prayed  that  great  good 
might  result  from  them. 

Christmas  came  on  Sunday.  On  the  day 
before,  we  went  to  U-ye-no.  This  is  a charming 
place.  From  some  of  the  tea-houses  there  are 
fine  views  of  the  great  city  and  the  river.  It  is 
said  that  the  government  intends  to  establish 
a hospital  there.  In  former  days  there  were 


1871] 


Ro-ku-ban. 


95 


temples  and  mi-yas  here  as  beautiful  as  those 
at  Shi-ba,  we  are  told,  but  during  the  revolution 
of  1868  a battle  was  fought  at  U-ye-no,  and, 
with  the  exception  of  a few  small  temples,  we 
saw  nothing  but  ruins. 

In  one  temple  we  found  some  women  with 
heads  shaven  like  those  of  the  priests.  They 
were  beating  drums,  ringing  bells  and  reciting 
prayers  in  a loud  tone,  making  more  noise  than 
we  could  endure.  They  diversified  their  wor- 
ship by  drinking  tea  and  smoking.  While 
wandering  about  the  really  beautiful  grounds 
we  discovered  an  immense  idol.  We  sat  down 
to  look  at  him,  and  felt  ourselves  very  small  in 
comparison,  for  he  was  thirty  feet  high.  He 
wore  a very  complacent  look.  The  winter  day 
was  warm  and  bright,  after  the  sun  had  dis- 
sipated the  morning  mist.  The  rich  sunlight 
poured  through  the  trees,  and  the  quiet  retire- 
ment and  beautiful  scenery  made  the  day  a 
pleasant  one. 

On  Christmas-day  the  class  assembled  as 
usual ; but  a few  days  after,  we  heard  that  some 
one  had  informed  the  ya-cu-nins  at  the  custom- 
house of  their  meeting,  and  that  these  officers 
were  going  to  report  to  the  government,  so 
that  the  pupils  were  in  danger  of  losing  their 
liberty,  if  not  their  lives.  The  missionaries 
felt  it  to  be  their  duty  to  warn  the  pupils  of 


96 


The  Sunrise  Kingdoin, 


[187] 


the  threatened  danger,  and  it  has  resulted  in 
breaking  up  the  class.  Even  the  interesting 
school  of  little  ones  has  dwindled  down  to 
four  scholars. 

A few  young  men  are  coming  to  read  the 
Bible  privately.  They  creep  cautiously,  by 
night,  over  the  fields,  or  singly  in  the  daytime, 
to  elude  the  vigilance  of  the  ya-cu-nins.  Our 
new  year  (1871)  has  thus  dawned  rather  sadly 
upon  us. 

“ Oh,”  said  one  of  the  missionaries  as  we 
discussed  these  things,  “if  O-ga-wa  should  be 
cast  into  prison,  I would  stop  all  work  here,  and 
do  nothing  for  a while  but  write  home,  begging 
God’s  people  to  pray  for  us.  Only  prayer  can 
be  of  any  use  now.” 

We  are  forcibly  reminded  that  the  death-pen- 
alty still  exists,  and  .that  the  cross  of  Christ  is 
a shame  and  a dishonor  here.  “ I fear  not  im- 
prisonment or  beheading,”  said  a young  Japan- 
ese. “I  want  to  study  the  Bible.”  We  stood 
by  one  of  the  front  windows  of  the  mission- 
house.  The  day  was  dark,  the  waves  dashed 
sullenly  against  the  breakwater,  and  the  way 
seemed  dark  to  us. 

■ Thus  it  often  is  in  the  morning.  The  sun 
comes  up  clear  and  bright,  and  we  imagine  that 
all  the  day  will  be  fair.  Then  clouds  arise, 
hide  the  blue  sky  from  view,  and  it  grows 


1871] 


Ro-ku-ban. 


97 


dark,  but  when  they  roll  away  we  find  not  only 
that  the  sun  has  still  been  shining  behind  them, 
but  that  he  has  really  been  mounting  higher 
and  higher,  and  growing  each  moment  brighter 
and  stronger. 

9 Gt 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


PICTURES  AND  BOONS. 

Ancient  Warriors  — Court- Ladies — Daimios — H a-ra-Ki- 
Ri — Jo-RO-REi — Japanese  Books — Religious — Historical 
— Encyclopaedias — Allegory — Moral  Teachings — Poet- 
ry— Novels. 


WHEN  we  go  to  call  on  our  Japanese 
friends  in  the  city,  they  usually  enter- 
tain us  with  pictures.  These  look  to  us  like 
strange  caricatures,  but  no  doubt  appear  to 
them  perfectly  natural,  and  even  to  our  eyes, 
as  we  become  more  familiar  with  the  land,  they 
lose  much  of  their  grotesqueness. 

True,  the  Japanese  have  no  proper  idea  of 
perspective,  and  they  put  into  the  picture  what- 
ever they  consider  would  look  well  there,  with- 
out regard  to  true  size  or  relative  position  ; but 
these  objects,  viewed  singly,  are  all  delineated 
with  a great  degree  of  perfection.  Thus,  trees, 
birds,  flowers,  fish  and  human  beings  are  accu- 
rately described  as  looked  at  individually,  but 
when  grouped  together  there  is  a most  gro- 
tesque disregard  of  all  proportion  and  proper 
position.  There  are  but  few  animals  in  Japan, 


‘>8 


871] 


Pictures  and  Books, 


99 


and  this  accounts  for  the  invariably  absurd,  and 
sometimes  hideous,  delineations  found  on  their 
vases  and  in  the  carvings  of  the  temples.  It 
would  seem  as  if  they  had  heard  of  such  things, 
and  their  vivid  imaginations  had  attempted  to 
depict  them,  but  in  this  respect  there  is  an  utter 
failure. 

These  pictures  are,  however,  interesting  as 
giving  us  an  insight  into  national  life  and 
society  which  could  not  be  otherwise  obtain- 
ed. We  see  ancient  warriors  ready  for  battle 
or  fighting  with  brave,  composed  faces.  The 
dress  is  very  peculiar,  and  looks  to  us  exceed- 
ingly cumbersome.  There  are  pieces  of  armor 
for  the  protection  of  head,  breast  and  limbs,  and 
we  see  them  bearing  all  the  ancient  weapons 
of  war — swords,  spears,  bows  and  arrows,  and 
battle-axes — and  over  all  are  gorgeous  robes 
with  wide,  full  skirts,  and  pennons  streaming 
from  head  and  shoulders — a marked  contrast 
to  the  simple  dress  and  accoutrements  of  the 
modern  soldier. 

We  also  look  at  pictures  of  court-ladies  In 
white  robes  and  with  hair  streaming  down  their 
backs.  Their  eyelashes  and  eyebrows  are 
plucked  out,  but  a tinge  of  dark  paint  higher 
up  on  the  forehead  supplies  the  loss.  They 
are  represented  as  playing  on  the  samisen,  the 
ko-to  or  the  bl-wa,  acd  embroidering  rich  robes, 


lOO  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1871 

and  painting  beautiful  flowers  or  butterflies  on 
silk. 

Then  we  have  views  of  the  interior  of  ya- 
shi-kis,  and  see  the  daimios  at  their  great  feasts, 
where  the  saki  is  drunk  and  songs  sung,  and 
where  geishas  and  dancing-girls  entertain  the 
guests.  Or  we  see  these  great  lords  walking 
in  the  fields,  complacently  viewing  their  broad 
possessions ; and  some  of  the  pictures  show  us 
farmers  kneeling  at  their  feet,  begging  relief 
from  their  oppressive  taxation. 

We  then  look  into  the  private  reception-room, 
where  sometimes  the  daimio,  in  the  presence  of 
his  retainers,  performs  the  solemn  act  of  Ha-ra- 
Ki-ri  (disembowelment).  This  is  done  under 
the  sense  of  a real  or  imaginary  insult ; and 
when  a high  officer  is  subjected  to  the  death- 
penalty  he  has  the  privilege  of  inflicting  it  upon 
himself,  and  thus  escaping  all  disgrace. 

Many  of  these  pictures  represent  the  jo-ro- 
reis,  which  are  large  establishments  where  the 
women  live  who  sell  themselves  or  are  sold, 
when  children,  by  their  parents.  This  is 
esteemed  no  particular  disgrace  in  Japan ; for 
a girl  to  sell  herself  to  relieve  the  poverty  of 
her  parents  is  considered  the  highest  proof  of 
filial  virtue.  The  names  of  the  most  celebrated 
of  jo-ros  are  on  every  child’s  tongue,  and 
their  pictures  are  painted  in  most  brilliant  colors. 


1871]  Pictures  and  Books.  loi 

Books. — In  printing  books,  blocks  of  wood, 
with  the  letters  cut  on  them,  are  used.  These 
are  thickly  blacked  with  India-ink  and  sheets 
of  paper  put  on,  and  the  impressions  are  then 
:aken  by  a simple  and  rapid  process.  In  course 
)f  time  the  letters  on  the  block  are  worn  down, 
md  this  accounts  for  the  faintness  of  some  of  the 
words  in  their  books.  They  have  no  binderies, 
but  all  their  books  have  paper  covers,  stitched 
in  their  own  peculiar  style. 

As  is  usual  with  all  Oriental  books,  they 
begin  at  the  last  page  (as  it  appears  to  us),  in 
the  back  of  the  book,  and  read  down  in  columns 
from  right  to  left — precisely  the  reverse  from 
what  it  is  with  us. 

The  best  literature  of  the  Japanese  is  bor- 
rowed from  their  neighbors,  the  Chinese. 
Their  religious  books  are  written  in  this  lan- 
guage, but  sometimes  their  own  characters  are 
intermixed.  These  are  stories  of  the  gods  and 
Buddhas.  Some  of  their  illustrations  repre- 
sent mild,  placid  Buddhas  sitting  calmly  on 
lotus-leaves,  and  others  fierce,  ugly  little  devils 
and  frightful  scenes  of  the  Buddhist  places  of 
torment. 

In  their  historical  books,  in  which  Chinese 
characters  are  also  largely  used,  there  is  so 
much  of  the  fabulous  history  of  the  gods,  set 
forth  in  fantastic  allegory,  combined  with  the 


102  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

stories  of  their  heroes,  that  there  is  little  satis- 
faction in  reading  them. 

.The  encyclopaedias,  which  are  embellished 
with  pictures,  are  more  interesting  to  us. 
There  is  one  queer  old  book  of  this  sort  in 
which  the  impressions  of  the  people  in  regard 
to  different  countries  are  described.  In  one 
picture  the  men  of  a certain  country  are  repre- 
sented as  having  long  ears  which  serve  as  a 
covering  in  the  night.  These  encyclopaedias 
are  very  copious,  embracing  all  varieties  of 
subjects  and  giving  the  Japanese  ideas  upon 
things  foreign  as  well  as  home-born.  They 
sometimes  run  up  to  nearly  one  hundred  large 
volumes,  are  profusely  illustrated,  and  are  the 
most  handsomely  printed  of  all  books  published 
in  Japan.  The  illustrations  given  are  very  in- 
teresting as  portraying  the  ideas  held  by  that 
people  in  regard  to  many  things  in  Nature. 
Thus,  in  one  we  have  their  conception  of  thun- 
der— a terrific-looking  god  in  a dense  cloud 
striking  with  a drumstick  the  dark  surface. 
Their  island  is  also  set  forth  as  resting  upon 
a turtle,  the  uneasy  movements  of  which  cause 
the  earthquakes  so  frequent  there. 

The  Japanese  are  very  fond  of  allegorical 
literature,  and  many  books  of  that  kind  may 
be  found  in  their  libraries.  The  most  famous 
of  them  is  the  Mu-so-bi.  This  is  the  name  of 


1871] 


Pictures  and  Books. 


103 


a man  who  traveled  through  the  air,  visiting 
many  different  kingdoms — as  they  are  called — 
such  as  Childhood,  Avarice,  Lying,  and  others. 
He  tells  what  he  saw  in  them  all.  In  the  king- 
dom of  Childhood  he  found  funny  little  people 
who  could  neither  walk  nor  talk,  and  had  no 
teeth  and  no  hair.  In  the  kingdom  of  Lying  he 
came  across  a notice  upon  a schoolroom-door 
stating  that  the  teacher  would  begin  a class 
there  on  a certain  day.  He  went  at  the  ap- 
pointed time,  but  no  teacher  was  there.  This 
was  repeated  several  times,  until  he  went  after 
the  teacher  and  asked  him  the  reason  of  such 
strange  conduct.  He  replied  that  to  teach 
lying  was  his  special  object,  and  this  he  did 
by  action  rather  than  by  word. 

In  his  descent  into  the  kingdom  of  Avarice 
he  became  entangled  in  the  branches  of  a tree. 
The  people  of  the  country  were  so  afraid  that 
they  would  not  receive  a proper  equivalent  for 
their  services  that  he  could  hardly  persuade 
them  to  bring  ropes  and  ladders  to  rescue  him 
from  his  perilous  position. 

None  of  these  books  are  very  intelligible  to 
Japanese  women,  except  to  those  who  reso- 
lutely break  over  the  barriers  of  restraint  and 
are  ambitious  to  acquire  more  learning  than  is 
usually  allowed  them.  They  are  kept  back 
from  learning  the  Chinese  characters,  and  of 


104  • The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

course  find  it  impossible  to  get  the  full  sense  of 
what  they  read.  For  them,  however,  books  of 
a special  kind  on  topics  of  morality  are  pre- 
pared. The  most  celebrated  of  these  is  the 
On-na-Dai  Ga-ku(^^  Womans  Great  Learning'") . 
Every  girl  is  expected  to  read  this  book  and  be 
well  acquainted  with  its  contents.  It  is  written 
in  large,  straggling  Chinese  characters,  with  the 
Japanese  ka-na  (alphabet)  in  the  margin  of 
each  column.  It  consists  mainly  in  the  enumer- 
ation of  many  petty  duties,  with  frequent  in- 
junctions to  women  to  be  quiet  and  not  talk 
too  much.  It  says:  “Until  children  are  six 
years  of  age  boys  and  girls  may  sit  on  the 
same  mats  at  school,  but  after  that  they  must 
be  separated.  . . . Girls  must  learn  to  read 
well,  and  afterward  to  sew.  . . . When  they 
are  seventeen  or  eighteen  they  must  remember 
that  in  a short  time  they  will  leave  father  and 
mother  and  go  to  a new  home.  . . . They  must 
remember,  also,  that  the  father-in-law  and  the 
mother-in-law  are  the  husband’s  parents,  and 
try  to  love  them.”  Of  the  seven  reasons  for 
divorce,  the  first  is  disobedience  to  the  mother- 
in-law.  A woman  may  also  be  divorced  if  she 
has  no  child. 

This  book  also  says : “ Children  must  be 
obedient  to  their  parents,  attend  diligently  to 
their  business,  get  up  in  the  morning  in  a good- 


Pictures  and  Books, 


1871J 


105 


humor,  and  eat  what  is  set  before  them  with- 
out looking  around,  complaining  or  asking 
questions.” 

There  is  also  a particular  book  on  obedience 
to  parents.  They  have  some  stories  of  Confu- 
cius and  Mencius,  the  great  Chinese  sages  ; 
among  these  will  be  found  many  good  and 
useful  maxims,  worthy  of  a place  in  the  litera- 
ture of  any  land,  but  the  greater  part  is  a com- 
pilation of  ethics  exceedingly  dry  and  of  little 
profit. 

'‘Japanese  poetry,”  says  one  of  their  own 
people,  “ is  like  a tree  with  its  roots,  trunk  and 
branches.”  It  is  very  difficult  for  us  to  under- 
stand the  precise  meaning  of  this,  but  their 
poetical  history  seems  to  be  the  root,  the  short 
poems  the  trunk,  and  the  various  renderings 
and  meanings  the  branches.  Even  to  the  na- 
tives the  poems  are  so  difficult,  and  the  words 
used  differ  so  materially  from  both  the  ordinary 
book-laneuaee  and  the  vernacular,  that  unless 
they  attend  a regular  poetry-school  they  are 
never  able  to  comprehend  their  meaning. 

The  great  book  of  Japanese  poetry  is  the 
H' -ya-ku-nin-shi  (“  The  One  Hundred  Poems''^. 
These  were  written  by  one  hundred  persons, 
amone  whom  were  a number  of  women.  The 

o 

first  poem  in  the  book  was  written  by  Ten-ji 
Ten- no,  a great  man  of  ancient  times,  and  is 


io6  The  Sunrise  Kmgdom.  [1871 

about  the  “ full,  round  harvest-moon.”  The 
fifteenth  day  of  the  eighth  month  is  the  moon’s 
festival,  and  this  poem  is  written  in  honor  of 
that.  To  us  its  brevity  is  worthy  of  notice,  for 
it  consists  of  only  twenty-six  characters,  occu- 
pying the  space  of  not  more  than  a single 
stanza  of  a hymn.  And  yet  so  hidden  is  its 
meaning,  demanding  in  its  interpretation  the 
unfolding  of  symbols,  the  bringing  forth  of  his- 
toric and  ethical  lore — in  fact,  so  deeply  myste- 
rious is  it — as  to  require  the  efforts  of  the  most 
learned  men  (ga-ku-shas)  to  expound  it  before 
a wondering  audience.  It  is  said  that  it  would 
take  a long  lifetime  to  learn  the  meaning  of 
these  hundred  poems,  and  yet  they  are  con- 
tained in  a book  in  length  three  inches  and 
a half,  in  width  two  inches  and  a half,  and  just 
half  an  inch  in  thickness,  and  then  fully  two- 
thirds  of  each  page  are  taken  up  with  an  en- 
graved illustration  and  deep  margin.  It  seems 
to  be  the  essence  of  all  the  learning,  history 
and  poetry  of  all  the  ages  reduced  to  an  al- 
most infinitesimal  point. 

It  may  be  interesting  to  consider  several  of 
the  poems  said  to  have  been  written  by  women. 
Ji-to-ten-o  sings  about  “white”  things.  “Al- 
though spring  is  past  ” (the  cherry-blossoms 
faded),  “there  are  still  white  things — white 
cloths  spread  out  to  bleach,  and  snow  on  Fu- 


iSyij  Pictures  and  Books.  107 

ji.”  The  idea  here  is  expressive  of  purity. 
Ko-ma-chi  was  a beautiful  woman.  In  reply  to 
the  praises  of  her  admirers  she  spoke  of  fading 
flowers : “ My  body  will  likewise  fade.”  I-se 
and  U-kon  tell  us  of  love:  “No  matter  how 
short  the  time  may  be,  we  think  it  long  when 
separated  from  our  loved  one.”  I-dzu-mi-shi- 
ki’s  strain  is  familiar : “ In  this  world  we  love : 
shall  we  love  again  ? I am  far  away  from  the 
one  I love : shall  I meet  him  ao^ain  in  this  world  ? 
But  if  not,  shall  we  love  in  the  next?  Even 
then  I would  see  him  again  here.”  In  Sei-so- 
nan-gon’s  poem  we  have  something  of  the  root. 
The  daimios  were  obliged  to  spend  six  months 
of  each  year  in  Tokio.  During  the  time  of 
the  To-ku-ga-wa  dynasty  there  were  apprehen- 
sions of  trouble  at  the  capital  from  the  prov- 
inces, and  the  daimios  were  compelled  to  leave 
their  wives  in  Tokio  as  hostages  when  they 
returned  to  their  separate  homes.  Most  of 
these  princes  w^ere  obliged  to  cross  the  Ha-ko- 
ne  Mountains.  There  was  a gate  at  the  one 
pass  over  these  mountains.  Ya-cu-nins  were 
stationed  to  search  carefully  every  woman  who 
approached  the  gate,  lest  she  might  prove  to  be 
the  wife  of  a daimio  returning  with  her  husband 
to  their  home.  The  women  of  the  ya-shi-kis 
had  their  hair  dressed  in  a peculiar  way,  and  so 
were  easily  recognized.  Sei-so-nan-non  said. 


io8  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

“ I lie  awake  at  night  to  listen  for  the  voice  of 
the  bird.  But  there  are  many  obstacles  in  our 
path  in  getting  to  those  we  love.”  (The  word 
translated  “ obstacle  ” is  applied  to  the  gate 
above  mentioned.)  The  swan,  in  his  capacity 
as  letter-carrier  (for  which  in  China  he  is 
sometimes  used),  is  the  bird  for  whose  voice  she 
listens.  We  can  perceive  in  these  few  instances 
something  of  the  meaning  of  the  one  who  rep- 
resents the  poem  as  a tree.  Its  roots  are  set 
in  symbols  and  hidden  facts  ; its  trunk  is  the 
poem  as  it  appears  to  sight ; and  its  branches 
are  the  renderings  and  explanations  which  a 
skillful  expounder  can  give  to  such  terse  effu- 
sions. In  no  other  way  do  we  see  how  this 
expression  can  be  interpreted. 

There  are  also  a great  number  of  novels  in 
the  language,  written  in  the  easy  colloquial. 
They  are  to  us  insipid  stories,  all  about  lovers 
and  tyrants.  They  commonly  exhibit  a marvel- 
ous facility  of  extension,  the  same  novel  being- 
carried  through  hundreds  of  volumes.  One 
of  them  has  been  translated  into  English,  and 
is  the  usual  tale  of  a girl  who  sold  herself  in 
order  to  save  the  family  from  poverty  and 
ruin,  but  is  rescued  by  her  lover,  Sa-ki-shi. 
It  ends  in  a familiar,  and  even  home-like,  style : 
“ Of  course  all  their  sorrow  was  now  turned  into 
joy ; nor  had  they  suffered  in  vain,  since  the 


1871]  Pictures  and  Books.  109 

trials  they  had  undergone  had  thoroughly  tested 
the  strength  and  constancy  of  their  affection. 
. . . Being  distinguished  for  filial  duty  and 
affection,  they  were  blessed  with  a numerous 
offspring,  and  led  henceforward  peaceful  and 
happy  lives.” 

The  women  have  no  books  to  read  except 
dry  books  of  ethics  and  these  novels.  Some 
books  on  the  distant  provinces,  on  the  produc- 
tions of  their  own  country  or  its  history,  might 
be  made  quite  interesting  for  the  women  if 
written  in  characters  and  language  intelligible 
to  them. 

We  must  take  another  chapter  to  consider 
a very  important  class  of  books — those  de- 
signed for  the  use  of  the  children  of  Japan. 

10 


CHAPTER  IX. 


GAMES  AND  TOYS. 


Japanese  New  Year — Division  of  Time — Mo-chi— Orna- 
ments— 0-Mi-so-KA — Money — Driving  away  Evil  Spir- 
its—New  Year’s  Festivities — The  Dolls’  Feast — Games 
— Toy-Shops — Japanese  Children. 

HE  year  just  closed  has  been  a long  one 


with  the  Japanese.  It  was  leap-year,  and 
the  tenth  month  was  doubled,  making  the  year 
to  consist  of  thirteen  months.  And  now  New 
Year’s  day  has  come  late  in  February.  It  is 
very  difficult  to  understand  the  Japanese  divis- 
ion of  time.  They  reckon  by  cycles  and  dynas- 
ties in  numbering  their  years. 

They  divide  the  year  into  twelve  months, 
naming  them  respectively  first,  second,  third, 
etc.  These  months  consist  of  thirty  days  each, 
and  thus,  after  certain  intervals,  to  make  the 
solar  and  lunar  year  agree,  they  put  on  the 
additional  month. 

The  people  are  busy  for  many  days  in  pre- 
paring for  their  New  Year’s  festival.  We  saw 
them  making  mo-chi  in  the  streets  all  through 
the  city.  This  is  rice  beaten  in  a mortar  with 


no 


1871] 


Games  and  Toys. 


1 1 1 


a little  water  until  it  becomes  a thick,  hard 
paste,  bearing  little  resemblance  to  the  original 
ko-me.  It  is  dried  in  cakes,  and  baked  over 
the  hi-ba-chi.  This  is  very  much  liked  by  the 
people,  but  rather  distasteful  to  our  palates. 

The  houses  are  all  ornamented  with  branches 
of  the  pine,  dai-dai  (a  kind  of  orange),  bamboo 
and  plum-blossoms.  These  are  placed  over  or 
near  the  entrance.  The  pine  tree  is  an  emblem 
of  perpetual  joy  ; dai-dai  means  “ from  genera- 
tion to  generation,”  and  expresses  perpetuity 
of  family.  The  bamboo  never  changes  its 
color,  and  is  a symbol  of  constancy.  It  is 
straight,  and  thus  teaches  man  to  be  upright. 
The  plum  tree  blossoms  in  cold  weather,  and 
shows  us  that  man  should  rejoice  in  time  of 
trouble. 

The  houses  are  also  ornamented  with  deep 
fringes  of  straw,  which  look  very  handsome  as 
they  wave  in  the  wind.  Cooked  rice  in  a pyra- 
mid represents  the  island  of  eternal  happiness, 
which  they  imagine  to  be  somewhere.  A crab 
shows  their  desire  for  longevity,  and  fish-skin 
is  a sign  of  politeness  and  a desire  to  have 
their  gifts  graciously  received. 

The  day  before  New  Year’s  is  the  0-mi-so-ka, 
the  great  day  of  casting  accounts^-  Then  the 
merchants  close  up  their  business  transactions 
and  collect  their  debts.  ' Every  one  is  busy 


1 1 2 The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

settling  up  affairs,  to  be  ready  to  begin  afresh 
the  new  year.  The  little  girls  of  Tokio  have 
a song  about  the  O-mi-so-ka,  which  they  sing 
when  bounding  their  balls. 

Japanese  money  is  very  curious  to  us.  They 
have  in  circulation  gold,  silver,  copper  and  scrip- 
iron  cash — coins  of  very  small  value — were 
formerly  used.  The  largest  gold  coins  are  the 
o-ban  and  the  ko-ban,  the  great  and  small  ban. 
These  are  of  an  elliptical  shape,  and  are  not 
often  seen  at  the  present  day.  There  are  also 
small  gold  coins  of  various  values ; but  having 
been  extensively  counterfeited,  they  are  not  in 
general  use.  Our  principal  coins  in  use  now 
are  the  silver  boos^  ni-shius  and  i-skius,  of  the 
respective  values  of  twenty-five,  twelve  and  a 
half,  and  six  and  a quarter  cents.  These  are 
oblong  in  shape,  with  Chinese  characters 
stamped  upon  them. 

There  is  also  a variety  of  copper  coins ; the 
largest  is  the  elliptical  tempo  (one  cent).  The 
smaller  coins  are  worth  one-fifth,  one-sixth  and 
one-tenth  of  a tempo.  Then  there  are  the 
paper  satz  (or  scrip),  the  rio  (one  dollar)  and 
the  ni-bu,  ichi-bu,  7ii-shiu  and  i-shiu,  or  two  boos, 
one  boo,  half  boo  and  quarter  boo.  This  scrip 
is  the  principal  money  in  circulation,  but  is 
easily  counterfeited. 

O Tot  san  is  away  at  Ha-ko-da-di,  and  O Ka 


CASTING  OUT  EVIL  SPIRITS.  WRITING  LHE  NEW  YEAR’S  COPY 


1871]  Games  and  Toys.  1 1 3 

san  and  O I-ne  san  are  at  O-ji,  spending  the 
holidays  with  the  grandmother.  On  the  O-mi- 
so-ka  the  house  was  carefully  swept,  the  few 
vases  and  other  ornaments  arranged  neatly, 
the  former  filled  with  camellias  and  other 
flowers.  Pine  branches,  bamboo,  oranges  and 
plum-blossoms  were  put  over  the  doorway. 
The  children  watched  all  the  preparations 
with  great  interest. 

At  night  they  did  something  which  would 
seem  very  curious  to  American  children.  The 
servants  brought  parched  beans,  and  O I-ne 
san  and  Sen-ki-chi  put  them  in  boxes,  and 
then  sprinkled  them  all  over  the  floors.  This 
was  to  drive  out  the  evil  spirits.  It  is  a strange 
custom,  but  at  the  same  time  suggestive.  It  is 
a good  thing  to  commence  the  new  year  with 
banishing  evil  spirits,  though  what  connection 
beans  had  with  it  we  could  not  see. 

O I-ne  san  was  up  long  before  the  sun  rose 
this  morning.  She  slipped  quietly  out  of  the 
house,  got  some  water  from  the  well,  poured 
it  on  her  ink-stone,  rubbed  it  with  ink  and 
wrote  a copy.  She  did  this  very  quickly, 
before  Sen-ki-chi  joined  her.  Why  was  this  ? 
When  there  are  two  or  more  children  in  a 
Japanese  family,  they  see  which  one  can  get  up 
the  earliest  on  the  first  morning  of -the  year, 
wet  their  ink-stone,  and  write  the  first  Chinese 
10  * H 


# 

1 14  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

character.  The  fortunate  one  will  be  the  best 
writer  of  the  family.  Often  the  pine  ornaments 
are  burned  before  a temple,  and  with  them  the 
children  put  their  “ copies.”  The  higher  the 
wind  blows  the  paper,  the  more  famous  will 
the  child  be  as  a writer — so  say  the  children. 
j When  Japanese  meet  on  New  Year’s  morn- 
ing, they  say,  “ 0-me-di-to  ” (“  Great  happiness  ” 
or  “ Many  congratulations  ”) . The  women  smile 
and  say,  “ The  spring  has  come,”  although  the 
weather  may  still  be.  quite  cold.  As  in  our 
country,  the  gentlemen  go  out  to  call,  and  the 
ladies,  dressed  in  silks  and  crapes,  and  with 
hair  ornamented  with  amber  hairpins,  remain 
at  home  to  receive  their  guests.  It  has  been 
remarked  that  either  this  custom  was  intro- 
duced by  the  Hollanders  into  Japan,  or  that  the 
Hollanders  derived  it  from  the  Japanese ; it  is 
uncertain  where  it  originated.  The  sweetmeats 
are  arranged  on  little  tables  in  pyramids,  and 
beautifully  ornamented  with  sprigs  of  pine 
and  flowers.  These  sweetmeats,  with  tea,  are 
offered  to  the  guests,  who  usually  bring  a 
present.  A picture  represents  a gentleman 
starting  out  on  these  calls  as  attended  by  a 
boy  with  a boxful  of  presents,  which  consist 
generally  of  pieces  of  silk,  crape,  hairpins  and 
dried  fruits. 

All  little  girls  in  Tokio  have  battledores  and 


871] 


Games  and  Toys. 


115 


shuttlecocks,  and  look  very  happy  as  they  toss 
up  the  pretty  feathers,  counting  all  the  time. 
O I-ne  san’s  new  battledore  is  very  large  and 
handsome,  and  the  under  side  is  covered  with 
beautiful  crape.  All  the  little  boys  in  Tokio 
are  playing  with  kites  to-day ; these  are  made 
in  various  shapes  and  painted  in  bright  colors. 
Some  of  them  represent  men  with  arms  ex- 
tended, and  some  birds,  and  others,  which  they 
seem  particularly  to  like,  represent  dragons, 
devils  and  evil  spirits. 

There  are  singing  kites,  which  in  the  air  emit 
sounds  like  those  produced  by  the  passing  of 
wind  over  wires.  And  whilst  flying  them  the 
boys  chant, 

“ Blow,  wind,  blow  ! 

The  god  of  the  wind  is  weak ; 

The  god  of  the  sun  is  strong ; 

Blow,  wind,  blow !” 

Fathers  and  mothers  are  playing  with  their 
children,  and  the  whole  city  is  filled  with  pleas- 
ant sights  and  sounds.  The  New  Year  s feast 
continues  for  seven  days.  The  schools  are 
all  closed,  and  there  is  nothing  but  play  and 
rejoicing. 

On  the  third  day  of  the  third  month,  O I-ne 
san  will  have  a happy  time.  It  is  the  little 
girls’  holiday,  the  feast  of  dolls.  The  dolls  are 
arranged  on  shelves  sloping  one  above  and  a 


4 

ii6  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

little  back  of  another,  the  emperor  and  his  wife 
occupying  the  topmost  shelf.  Then  a feast  is 
prepared  of  white  sweet  saki  and  two  cakes 
of  mo-chi,  placed  one  above  another  on  a dish. 
The  under  cake  is  green,  and  the  other  white. 
Whether  there  is  any  special  significance  in  this 
I cannot  say.  This  feast  is  first  offered  to 
the  dolls,  who,  not  being  troubled  with  sensa- 
tions of  hunger  and  thirst,  do  not  partake 
heartily ; so  the  children  have  the  benefit  of 
it  all,  and  drink  the  saki  and  eat  the  mo-chi 
with  great  satisfaction. 

Japanese  dolls  (nin-gi-yo,  “ resembling  men  ”) 
are  very  worthy  of  consideration.  They  are 
as  much  like  real  babies  as  anything  can  pos- 
sibly be,  and  we  are  frequently  deceived  by 
them  as  we  see  the  women  carrying  large 
dolls  in  their  arms.  The  best  dolls  are  made 
in  Ki-o-to.  They  are  of  wood,  with  real  hair. 
The  others  are  made  of  a kind  of  composition 
and  are  very  frail,  being  in  constant  danger  of 
losing  heads  and  limbs.  A-sa-ku-sa  is  the  prin- 
cipal mart  for  dolls  in  Tokio.  Some  of  the 
dolls  there  are  beautifully  dressed  like  grown 
ladies,  with  several  changes  of  headgear.  The 
women  in  the  ya-shi-kis  play  with  these  large 
dolls,  dressing  them  in  fine  clothes,  and  taking 
them  out  with  them  when  they  go  to  call.  The 
little  girls  have  tiny  futons  and  pillows  for  their 


1871]  Games  a7id  Toys.  117 

dolls,  and  little  dishes,  but  they  are  just  as  fond 
as  American  children  of  playing  with  broken 
plates  and  cups  and  all  sorts  of  make-believe 
things. 

Playing  ball  is  the  favorite  amusement  of 
girls.  Some  of  their  balls  are  very  pretty, 
being  covered  with  bright  silk  threads.  They 
bound  them  on  the  ground  with  their  hands, 
counting  the  beats  in  a sing-song  style,  and 
often  keep  them  going  an  almost  incredible 
number  of  times.  Boys  seldom  play  ball,  but 
are  contented  with  stilts,  tops  and  kites. 

The  little  girls  also  play,  with  small  bean-bags, 
a game  similar  to  our  childish  one  of  jack-stones. 
These  bags  they  call  te-da-na,  and  they  are  very 
dextrous  in  managing  them.  They  have  also 
games  with  little  cards,  matching  them  and 
playing  “ grab.”  Checkers,  which  they  play  in 
various  ways,  among  which  “ go-bang  ” is  promi- 
nent, are  used  by  the  men.  The  word  go-bang 
means  “ five  checkers.” 

One  of  the  most  singular  amusements  for 
children  is  called  h'ya-ku  mo-no  ga-ta-ri  (“  the 
one  hundred  things”).  xA.  hundred  tapers  are 
put  into  a large  saucer  of  oil  and  lighted.  The 
children  sit  quietly  down  in  a dark  corner  of 
the  room,  at  some  distance  from  the  lights,  and 
begin  to  tell  ghost-stories,  with  which  Japanese 
literature  abounds.  Then  one  child  is  sent  to 


ii8  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

extinguish  a light.  When  this  is  done,  the 
story-telling  again  begins,  when  another  child 
is  sent  to  put  out  another  light.  The  stories 
become  more  and  more  frightful  in  their  charac- 
ter ; the  room  becomes  darker  and  darker  as 
light  after  light  is  extinguished ; the  imagination 
of  the  children  becomes  more  excited,  until  the 
room  seems  to  them  filled  with  hobgoblins  and 
demons ; and  at  last  the  screaming  little  ones 
rush  from  the  house,  and  the  game  is  over. 

Japanese  children  have  a great  deal  done  for 
their  amusement.  We  often  pass  large  toy- 
shops filled  with  pretty  things  for  them,  such 
as  windmills,  kites,  tops,  balls,  dolls,  toy  cats, 
dogs  and  other  animals,  all  highly  colored. 
The  children  who  play  about  the  streets  are 
merry  little  people  ; they  have  sparkling  eyes 
and  bright,  intelligent  faces,  and  seem  to  enjoy 
their  sport  as  much  as  little  ones  at  home. 
Many  of  the  girls  have  babies  strapped  on  their 
backs.  These  babies’  heads  roll  from  side  to 
side,  and  the  poor  little  unprotected  eyes  blink 
in  the  sunshine.  Some  of  these  children  are 
covered  with  loathsome  sores.  Skin-diseases 
are  very  common  here. 

It  is  said  that  Japanese  children  do  not  cry  or 
quarrel  as  do  those  in  our  land.  Several  causes 
have  been  assigned  for  this.  Though  parents 
are  very  strict  in  exacting  obedience,  they  do 


/ 


\A.-v 


•:  - * i"*'  • 


! * 0*  <’. 


»•>- 


-«l  . >V 


K 


1871] 


Games  and  Toys, 


119 


not  subject  their  little  ones  to  so  many  orders 
or  restraints.  Then  their  clothing  is  much 
lighter  than  in  this  country,  giving  more  free- 
dom to  their  limbs,  and  they  are  more  the 
children  of  nature  than  of  artificial  life.  And 
another  cause  may  be  found  in  the  fact  that 
they  have  less  vitality  and  nervous  energy 
than  European  or  American  children  have,  and 
hence  are  more  indifferent  to  both  pleasure  and 
pain.  These  little  Asiatics  are  quiet  and  patient 
generally,  content  to  go  on  in  the  same  routine 
day  after  day.  They  do  not  give  us  so  much 
to  write  and  talk  about  as  the  children  of  our 
land,  with  their  pretty  sayings  and  doings. 
They  do  cry  sometimes,  and  their  screams 
are  long  and  loud. 

The  mission  of  the  little  street-children  has 
been  very  sweet  to  us.  When  we  first  came 
here,  the  people  seemed  like  inhabitants  of 
another  planet.  The  only  way  we  could  gain 
any  feeling  of  kinship  was  by  shutting  our  eyes 
to  their  strange  customs  and  letting  the  sound 
of  the  children’s  voices  in  their  happy  laughter 
or  grieved  crying  enter  our  ears.  It  was  then 
that  we  heard  familiar  sounds,  and  realized  that 
these  strangers  are  indeed  our  flesh  and  blood. 
And  so  we  pray  God  to  bless  the  little  children 
of  Japan. 


CHAPTER  X. 


WHAT  LITTLE  CHILDREN  READ. 


The  Names  of  their  Books:  “The  Ape  and  the  Crab” 
— “ The  Rat’s  Wedding” — “ Mo-mo-taro” — “ Kin-ta-ro” 
— “The  Tail-Cut  Swallow” — “ Story  of  Sho-set-su 
“ The  Treasure.” 


HAT  has  our  little  O I-ne  san  to  read  ? 


Hundreds  of  small  books  with  brio-ht 

o 

pictures,  the  chief  peculiarity  of  which  is  that 
the  story  is  written,  not  under  the  pictures,  but 
on  their  face.  We  have  some  before  us — gay 
little  specimens  of  infant  literature,  and  filled 
with  intensely  glaring  illustrations  of  men  and 
animals  in  every  grotesque  form  and  dress.  In 
each  picture  are  scattered  columns  of  curious 
characters,  to  us  incomprehensible,  but  contain- 
ing to  them  the  story  designed  to  be  illustrated. 
Let  us  now  glance,  by  the  aid  of  an  interpreter, 
at  what  a few  of  these  stories  will  tell  us. 

Tke  Ape  and  the  Crab. — A hungry  Ape  met 
a Crab  with  a piece  of  mo-chi  in  its  claws,  and 
to  his  begging  for  it  the  Crab  promised  he 
would  give  it  if  he  would  go  home  with  him 
and  gather  some  persimmons  from  the  tree. 


120 


1871]  What  Little  Children  Read.  121 

The  Ape  agreed,  ate  the  mo-chi,  and  went 
home  with  the  Crab,  who  sat  on  the  veranda 
with  his  pipe,  while  the  Ape  climbed  the  tree. 
But  instead  of  handing  them  down  to  the 
Crab,  he  pelted  the  Crab  with  them,  until  he 
succeeded  in  killing  him. 

But  the  Egg,  a friend  of  the  Crab,  suddenly- 
appeared,  and  the  Ape  ran  away.  Then  the 
Egg  went  and  consulted  with  his  friends,  the 
Rice-Mortar  and  the  Bee.  The  three  friends 
invited  the  Ape  to  a feast,  and  gave  him  a seat 
upon  what  appeared  a box,  but  in  reality  it  was 
an  “infernal  machine,”  which  they  had  secret- 
ly prepared.  This  blew  up ; and  while  lying 
prostrate  on  the  ground,  he  was  thrust  through 
with  spears  and  quickly  despatched.  In  this 
ludicrous  way  the  moral  is  given  that  those 
who  treat  others  unjustly  shall  be  themselves 
served  in  like  manner. 

The  Rat's  Wedding. — A young-lady  Rat  was 
out  walking  one  morning,  followed  by  her  ser- 
vant. She  met  a young  Mr.  Rat,  who  was 
much  pleased  with  her.  He  went  to  a friend 
to  ask  him  to  act  as  a go-between  and  con- 
sult with  the  young  lady’s  father.  The  friend 
sat  on  the  floor  with  his  pipe,  and  the  hi- 
ba-chi  was  beside  him  ; and  his  wife  listened 
with  interest  to  all  that  was  said.  The  go- 
between  then  went  to  the  father,  who  received 


11 


1 22 


The  Sunrise  Kinodom. 

o 


[1S71 


him  graciously,  and  preparations  were  made 
for  the  wedding.  The  happy  day  came,  the 
guests  assembled  at  the  house  of  the  bride’s 
father  in  two  large  parlors,  the  Rat-men  in  one 
room  and  the  Rat-women  in  the  other.  The 
go-between,  the  bride  and  groom,  with  two 
maids,  retired  into  a separate  apartment. 

In  Japanese  houses  the  place  of  honor  is  a 
dais,  or  raised  platform,  at  one  end  of  the 
room.  The  bride,  arrayed  in  white,  sat  before 
this  platform ; opposite  her  sat  the  bridegroom, 
and  the  go-between  sat  between,  a little  way 
off ; the  maids  sat  opposite  the  go-between, 
the  parties  occupying  the  four  angles  of  a 
square. 

A little  table  with  three  lacquered  cups  was 
placed  in  the  centre  of  the  square.  The  cups 
were  of  different  sizes,  the  smallest  one  being 
on  top.  The  maid  nearest  the  bride  had  the 
pot  of  saki,  which  she  took,  poured  a portion 
into  the  little  cup,  and  gave  it  to  the  bride,  who 
drank  and  then  handed  it  to  the  bridegroom, 
who  also  drank.  The  cup  was  then  handed 
back  and  put  away  under  the  table,  when  the 
second  cup  was  likewise  filled,  and  bride,  bride- 
groom and  go-between  partook,  and  the  same 
process  was  gone  through  with  the  third  and 
largest  cup,  and  the  ceremony  was  ended. 

The  design  of  this  book  is  evidently  to 


i87ij  What  Little  Children  Read.  123 

illustrate  to  children  the  simple  form  of  mar- 
riage adopted  and  in  use. 

Mo-mo-ta-ro. — An  old  woman  found  on  the 
bank  of  a river  a large  beautiful  peach.  She 
took  it  home  to  her  husband ; and  while  they 
were  admiring  it,  it  burst  open,  disclosing  a 
baby.  Greatly  surprised,  to  the  childless  old 
couple  its  appearance  was  yet  one  of  great 
joy.  They  put  the  child  in  water,  and  he  up- 
set the  tub.  Mo-mo  is  the  Japanese  word  for 
peach,  and  they  named  the  child  Mo-mo-ta-ro, 
or  “ Peach-boy.” 

As  he  grew  older  he  became  very  strong. 
One  day  he  begged  a cake  from  his  adopted 
parents,  and  they  hastened  to  give  it  to  him. 
Then  he  started  off  to  fight  the  devils  in  a 
distant  island  and  take  their  treasures.  On 
the  way  an  ape,  a dog  and  a beautiful  white 
bird  met  him,  and  begged  the  cake.  He  gave 
it  to  them,  and  they  became  his  followers.  They 
went  with  him  to  the  island,  where  they  fought 
the  devils,  and  Mo-mo  gained  the  treasures  and 
then  returned  home.  The  moral  is  obvious : 
Generosity  meets  with  its  reward. 

Kintaro. — A great  many  tales  are  told  of 
Kintaro,  a child  born  in  the  mountains,  whose 
friends  were  rabbits,  apes  and  birds,  who  sub- 
dued terrible  dragons  and  monsters,  and  at  last 
became  a daimio.  He  is  represented  in  the 


124  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

pictures  as  being  very  red.  In  the  autumn,  at 
the  great  display  of  chrysanthemums,  among 
other  human  figures  we  easily  recognize  the 
ruddy  Kintaro. 

The  Tail-cut  Swallow. — Once  upon  a time  an 
old  woman  made  some  paste.  A pet  swallow 
got  out  of  the  cage  and  ate  the  paste.  The 
old  woman  was  very  angry,  cut  the  bird’s  tail, 
and  sent  it  away.  The  old  man,  her  husband, 
O Ji  san,  was  sorry  when  he  heard  of  this,  and 
went  out  to  make  inquiries  about  the  tailless 
bird.  On  the  way  he  met  Mrs.  and  Miss  Swal- 
low, and  after  making  his  kind  inquiries  was 
invited  to  their  house.  He  went,  and  Mrs.  S. 
made  a feast,  at  which  there  were  music  and 
dancing. 

She  then  showed  him  two  boxes,  and  asked 
if  he  would  take  home  with  him  the  light  or 
the  heavy  one.  He  said,  as  he  was  old,  he 
would  take  the  lighter  one.  So  he  went  off 
with  the  box  on  his  back,  and  was  accompanied 
a part  of  the  way  by  Mrs.  Swallow,  as  is  the 
usual  courtesy  shown  to  an  honored  guest. 

When  O Ji  san  reached  home  he  opened 
the  box,  and  treasures  fell  out,  at  the  sight  of 
which  he  started  back  astonished,  while  the  old 
woman  looked  on  amazed.  She,  hearing  of  the 
other  box,  hastened  to  call  upon  Mrs.  Swallow, 
and  begged  her  to  give  it  to  her.  She  readily 


1871] 


What  Little  Children  Read, 


125 


gave  it,  but  when  it  was  opened  out  flew  ba-ke- 
mo-no  (ghosts),  which  frightened  her  dreadfully. 

The  pictures  of  this  little  book  would  tell 
the  story  to  one  of  us  without  the  interpreter’s 
aid.  You  can  read  it  readily  and  learn  the 
moral — that  cruelty  and  avarice  will  surely  be 
overtaken  with  dreadful  vengeance,  while  a 
tender  heart  and  modest  unselfishness  are  to 
be  approved. 

Story  of  Sho-set-su. — In  the  province  of  Shin- 
shiu  lived  a man  named  Sho-set-su.  He  was 
once  walking  upon  the  seashore,  when  an  old 
man,  riding  upon  a large  fish,  appeared,  from 
whom  he  learned  many  of  the  things  of  the 
spirit-world  such  as  are  not  usual  for  men  to 
know.  In  a mountain  he  learned  the  art  of 
fencing ; and  coming  across  a man  one  day,  he 
made  such  dextrous  use  of  his  sword  as  soon 
to  kill  him.  While  sitting  alone  after  this,  a 
frightful  ba-ke-mo-no  appeared : it  was  the  - 
spirit  of  the  murdered  man.  But  he  was  not 
frightened,  and  ever  after  he  was  distinguished 
for  his  great  courage,  fearing  nothing  in  this  or 
the  other  world. 

The  Treasure, — O Ji  san  petted  his  dog,  and 
the  dog  was  very  grateful,  and  told  the  old 
master  to  go  and  dig  under  a certain  tree, 
where  he  would  find  treasure.  He  did  so,  and 
found  ko-ban  (gold  coins).  But  while  both  he 


[1871 


126  The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 

and  the  dog  looked  on  this  new-found  treasure 
with  happy  look,  an  old  woman  living  in  the 
neighborhood  stealthily  came  up,  and  saw  it 
with  covetous  desires.  She  told  her  husband 
about  it,  and  they  borrowed  the  dog,  to  have 
him  point  out  to  them  where  another  treasure 
was  hid.  He  did  so;  but  instead  of  digging  up 
ko-ban,  most  offensive  things  came  out  of  the 
earth.  The  old  man  was  so  angry  that  he 
killed  the  dog  and  buried  the  body  under  a 
tree.  That  night  the  good  O Ji  san  was  visited 
in  a dream  by  the  spirit  of  the  dog,  which  told 
him  to  make  a mortar  for  mo-chi  out  of  the 
wood  of  the  tree  under  which  the  dog  was 
buried.  He  did  so,  and  every  time  he  pounded 
the  rice  ko-ban  came  out  in  profusion.  The 
wicked  old  man,  hearing  this,  went  and  bor- 
rowed the  mortar ; but  when  he  pounded  rice, 
the  same  horrible  offensive  things  came  out, 
.which  vexed  him  so  much  that  he  burned  the 
mortar. 

The  good  O Ji  san  gathered  the  ashes  of  the 
mortar  in  a vessel,  with  which  he  climbed  a 
tree  under  which  daimios  were  sitting,  and 
scattering  some  of  the  ashes  over  the  branches, 
they  all  burst  into  the  most  beautiful  bloom,  at 
which  the  daimios  were  astonished.  But  the 
wicked  old  man,  trying  to  do  the  same,  only 
succeeded  in  throwing  the  ashes  into  a daimio's 


1871]  What  Little  Children  Read.  127 

eyes,  who  was  so  irritated  that  he  ordered  a 
servant  to  give  him  a terrible  beating. 

The  moral : With  the  good  all  things  are 
good  and  beautiful ; while  with  the  bad  all 
things  are  offensive,  and  in  the  end  turn  out 
badly. 

Such  are  some  of  the  best  of  the  stories 
which  O I-ne  san  and  Sen-ki-chi  read.  Most 
of  the  children’s  story-books  are  filled  with  tales 
of  ghosts  and  hobgoblins  and  embellished  with 
most  frightful  pictures,  so  that  their  imagina- 
tions are  constantly  tortured  with  the  horrible 
visions  thus  called  up. 

Dear  little  Christian  children,  with  your  sweet, 
pure  stories,  told  in  such  beautiful  language, 
and  with  enough  to  meet  every  need  of  your 
souls,  remember  these  little  ones  in  Japan,  and 
be  thankful  for  your  own  happier  lot.  Their 
minds  are  starved  and  stunted  in  their  growth, 
while  yours  are  fed  with  nourishing,  strengthen-, 
ing  food. 


CHAPTER  XI. 


A JOURNEY  FROM  TOKIO  TO  0-UA- IVA-RA. 

A Letter — Political  Divisions— Postmen — Setting  Out 
ON  A Journey — The  To-kai-do — Tea-Houses — Ka-gos — 
No-ri-mo-no — The  Road  to  Fu-ji-sa-wa — The  Hotel — A 
Day’s  Journey — Night  at  0-da-wa-ra. 

HE  postman  called,  “ O'  ta-no-mo-shi~ma- 


su  /”  O Cho  ran  and  got  a letter,  which 
she  carried  on  a waiter  to  O Tot  san.  It  was 

written  on  much  coarser  paper  than  the  one 

which  O Ka  san  sent  to  O-ji.  The  address 
was  in  large  characters,  and  the  outside  bore 
the  writer’s  name,  his  town  and  the  date. 
There  were  no  postmarks  except  the  govern- 
ment’s stamps.  The  words  too  differed  from 
those  of  O Ka  san’s  letter,  for  men  and  women 
use  different  forms  of  expression  in  their  let- 
ters. The  divisions  of  Japan  correspond  to 
our  States  and  counties,  so  that  letters  are 

directed  to  such  a town  in  such  a ken  of  such 

a province.  The  ken  answers  to  our  county. 
The  large  cities  are  called  mi-a-ko  or  o-ma-chi ; 
towns  are  ma-chi,  and  the  mu-ra  is  a village  or 
hamlet. 


128 


1871] 


A youi'’iiey  to  0-da-wa-ra. 


1 29 


Postmen  travel  continually  between  the  cit- 
ies, carrying-  letters  in  a bag,  which  is  tied  on 
the  end  of  a pole.  With  this  on  his  shoulder, 
the  postman  goes  at  running  speed.  He  is 
clad  in  tight  clothing,  as  the  robes  generally 
used  would  be  in  the  way  of  a runner.  There 
being  constant  relays,  letters  are  carried  rapidly 
through  the  empire. 

This  letter  was  from  a friend  in  the  province 
of  Su-ru-ga,  which  is  on  the  other  side  of  the 
Ha-ko-ne  Mountains.  The  friend  wished  O Tot 
san  to  meet  him  at  Ha-ko-ne  in  the  sixth  month 
(July).  There  is  always  a great  deal  of  talking 
to  be  done  before  anything  can  be  decided  in 
Japan.  So  a family  council  was  called,  and 
even  O Cho  and  O Kin  were  invited  to  give 
their  opinion.  At  last  the  decision  was  made : 
the  whole  family  would  go. 

An  answer  was  sent  to  the  friend  in  Su-ru- 
ga,  telling  him  what  time  to  expect  them.  Then 
preparations  were  made  for  the  journey.  Gon- 
ji-ro,  the  old  man  whom  we  saw  drawing  water 
from  the  well,  was  delighted  to  have  the  privi- 
lege of  carrying  the  baggage.  This  was  not 
heavy,  for  the  clothing  was  all  packed  in  two 
paper  boxes,  each  one  about  three  feet  long, 
one  and  a half  wide  and  two  in  depth.  These 
were  carried  suspended  at  the  ends  of  a pole 
on  his  shoulders. 


I 


130  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

The  whole  party  started  from  the  house  on 
foot.  O Ka  san  and  O I-ne  san  had  each  a 
blue-and-white  cotton  kerchief  tied  over  her 
head.  Their  dresses  were  partly  fastened  up 
in  their  belts.  They  had  each  a blue  towel  in 
one  sleeve,  and  their  purses  hung  down  from 
their  belts.  Each  of  the  travelers  carried  a 
staff,  an  umbrella  and  a fan ; and  Gon-ji-ro 
followed  them  with  the  baggage.  O Cho  and 
O Kin  accompanied  them  a short  distance, 
then  said  their  good-byes  with  many  a bow 
and  went  back  to  the  house. 

So  our  little  O I-ne  san  became  a traveler, 
and  trudged  on  by  O Ka  san’s  side  under  the 
shade  of  an  umbrella.  She  did  so  with  gay 
anticipations.  They  went  down  the  To-ri  to 
Shi-na-ga-wa,  one  of  the  suburban  towns  of 
Tokio. 

They  were  walking,  but  could  often  stop  to 
rest  at  the  tea-houses  on  each  side  of  the  To- 
kai-do  (the  prolongation  of  the  To-ri),  as  their 
journey  lay  altogether  along  this  road.  As 
traveling  is  done  almost  entirely  on  foot,  these 
tea-houses  are  indispensable  for  rest  and  re- 
freshment. They  are  little  open  houses  where 
a cup  of  tea,  sweetmeats  and  a melon  may  be 
had,  and  also  the  pipe  can  be  lighted  at  the 
hi-ba-chi.  We  find  them  often  built  over  the 
water,  on  the  mountain -sides,  by  the  waterfalls 


1871] 


A Joumtey  to  0-da-wa-ra. 


131 


— wherever  the  view  is  pretty  or  wild  or  grand; 
showing  that  the  Japanese  appreciate  the  beau- 
tiful in  nature. 

Once  during  the  day  our  travelers  came  to 
a long  avenue  of  beautiful  trees,  where  they 
saw  one  sad  thing.  This  was  a man  confined 
in  a box  on  wheels,  in  which  he  was  carried 
around  from  place  to  place  to  be  exhibited  as 
a criminal : this  was  his  punishment.  Some- 
times travelers  in  Japan  see  the  heads  of  crim- 
inals stuck  on  poles  by  the  highways. 

On  they  walked  all  day,  stopping  to  rest  at 
the  tea-houses,  and  at  noon  having  dinner  at  a 
large  hotel,  until  late  in  the  afternoon,  when 
they  reached  Ka-na-ga-wa.  Looking  across 
the  water  from  here,  they  could  see  the  foreign 
buildings  along  the  Bund  at  Yokohama,  on  the 
other  side  of  the  bay. 

O Tot  san  now  got  a ka-go  (sedan-chair), 
and  O Ka  san  and  her  little  girl  jumped  in  and 
were  carried  the  rest  of  the  day.  There  are 
two  kinds  of  these  chairs — the  ka-go  and  the 
no-ri-mo-no.  The  first  is  open,  with  a little 
roof  on  top,  while  the  latter  can  be  entirely 
closed.  Both  are  borne  by  means  of  a pole 
fastened  along  the  length  of  the  roof,  and 
carried  on  the  shoulders  of  two  men.  These 
men  wear  pads  to  prevent  their  shoulders  being 
rubbed  ; but  notwithstanding  this,  they  often  be- 


32 


The  Stmrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

come  sore  and  bleeding.  The  large  no-ri-mo- 
nos  of  the  gods  and  nobles  require  two  poles, 
carried  by  four  men.  The  motion  is  easy,  al- 
though the  cramped  position  in  sitting  would 
be  uncomfortable  to  us. 

As  the  little  company — O Ka  san  and  O I-ne 
san  in  the  ka-go,  O Tot  san  walking  by  their 
side,  and  Gon-ji-ro  trudging  along  with  his 
boxes — went  along  the  great  highway  between 
Ka-na-ga-wa  and  Fu-ji-sa-wa,  the  women  in  the 
tea-houses  called  out,  “ Come  and  rest !”  “ Come 
and  rest !”  The  people  at  work  in  the  rice- 
fields  looked  up  to  see  who  was  going  by. 
Occasionally  trains  of  packhorses  passed  along, 
or  a solitary  pedestrian,  or  laborers,  in  groups 
of  twos  and  threes,  returning  from  their  work. 

They  had  many  little  hills  to  climb,  but  the 
ka-go-men  trotted  easily  over  them,  stopping 
every  few  minutes  to  change  the  pole  from  one 
shoulder  to  the  other.  The  daylight  was  almost 
gone  when  they  reached  the  large  town  of  Fu- 
ji-sa-wa,  having  traveled  about  twenty-five 
miles.  In  the  gathering  darkness  they  went 
down  the  main  street  and  found  a hotel.  The 
landlord  came  out  to  meet  them,  and  O Tot 
san  and  the  landlord  bowed  low.  “ Have  you 
room?”  said  O Tot  san. — “Yes”  (using  the 
most  polite  form  of  expression),  answered  the 
landlord.  “How  far  have  you  come  to-day?” 


1871]  A yourney  to  0-da-wa-ra.  133 

was  the  next  question. — “ Thanks  ! From  To- 
kio.”  Then  O Ka  san  and  O I-ne  san  got  out 
of  the  ka-go,  and  all  were  escorted  to  the  best 
room,  in  the  back  of  the  building.  The  hotel 
is  simply  a large  dwelling-house,  the  entrance 
often  appearing  very  uninviting,  as  the  kitchen 
is  in  front  and  numbers  of  coolies  gather  there ; 
but  we  pass  on,  at  first  in  disgust,  to  find  large, 
airy  apartments,  and  often  beautiful  gardens,  in 
the  rear.  It  is  a noisy  place,  from  the  coming 
and  going  of  guests  at  all  hours  of  the  night, 
the  loud  talking  of  coolies,  the  clapping  of 
hands  to  call  the  servants,  who  all  respond 
with  a loud  Hai  P'  the  frequent  opening  and 
shutting  of  the  slides,  and  the  constant  splash- 
ing of  the  water  in  the  bath-room,  which  occu- 
pies the  most  conspicuous  position  in  the  centre 
of  the  house.  After  the  guests  have  gone 
through  with  their  ablutions,  the  servants  are 
all  accustomed  to  do  the  same. 

O Tne  san  was  tired,  and  felt  a little  home- 
sick as  she  thought  of  O Cho  and  O Kin,  but 
she  ate  her  supper,  and  was  soon  asleep  on  the 
hotel  futon. 

At  Fu-ji-sa-wa  is  a famous  temple,  to  which 
they  all  went  up  to  worship  before  starting  on 
their  journey  the  next  morning.  After  the 
devotions  were  concluded,  while  a priest  talked 
pleasantly  with  O Tot  san  and  O Ka  san  about 
12 


134  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1871 

the  journey,  O I-ne  san  watched  a group  of 
pilgrims  from  Fu-ji,  who  came  into  the  temple- 
enclosure.  She  thought  they  must  be  very 
good,  because  they  had  made  this  pilgrimage, 
and  had  worshiped  on  Fu-ji’s  top.  She  liked 
to  see  them  in  their  white  dresses,  and  listened 
with  pleasure  to  their  jingling  bells.  They 
washed  their  hands  in  the  stone  basin,  and 
then  went  up  to  the  temple. 

In  the  summer,  for  two  months,  Fu-ji  is 
“ open,”  and  pilgrims  from  all  parts  of  the 
country  flock  thither,  to  worship  at  the  top. 
Fu-ji  is  covered  with  snow  more  or  less  through- 
out the  whole  year,  and  its  summit  is  only  ac- 
cessible during  the  months  of  July  and  August. 
Hence  the  natives  then  say  that  it  is  “open,” 
the  bars  of  the  gateway  being  taken  down. 
Pilgrims  also  visit  the  mountains  of  O-i  and 
Nik-ko  and  the  island  E-no-shi-ma,  and  other 
sacred  shrines,  quite  numerous  in  Japan,  so 
that  when  we  travel  in  the  summer  we  are 
meeting  them  on  every  road.  Most  of  them 
are  men  from  the  lowest  classes  of  society. 
Their  songs  and  jests  are  of  the  coarsest  cha- 
racter; but  among  them  may  be  found  men 
and  women  of  rather  superior  intelligence,  who 
are  sincere  in  their  pious  purposes,  and  go  to 
seek  relief  from  a burdened  conscience. 

O Tot  san  said  that  they  must  reach  0-da^ 


1871]  A Journey  to  0-da-wa-ra.  135 

wa-ra  by  night — a distance  of  thirty  miles.  So 
the  coolies  lifted  the  ka-go,  Gon-ji-ro  shouldered 
his  burden,  and  on  they  went  again.  The  way 
for  a time  led  through  a beautiful  country,  and 
the  travelers  had  glimpses  of  lovely  valleys, 
with  hills  stretching  far  into  the  distance.  The 
fields  were  green  and  fair ; the  flowers  bloomed 
along  the  roadside.  They  saw  groves  of  the 
bamboo,  with  its  bright  foliage,  and  the  dark 
rich  green  of  the  pines,  and  the  still  diflerent 
tints  of  the  maples.  The  variety  of  shades  of 
green  in  a Japanese  landscape  is  very  notice- 
able. Our  little  girl  also  saw  the  ferns  and 
ivy  that  grew  on  the  hillside,  and  the  beautiful 
rice-paddies,  and  the  picturesque  thatched  farm- 
houses. Not  so  pleasant  to  look  upon  were 
the  beggars,  who  crouched  by  the  roadside 
asking  alms,  and  to  whom  O I-ne  san  threw 
cash  as  they  passed. 

The  sun  grew  warm  and  the  road  was  sandy 
and  hilly — a weary,  toilsome  way  for  our  pedes- 
trians. At  noon  they  came  to  the  Ban-yu-ga- 
wa,  one  of  the  broad,  quiet  rivers  of  Japan. 
Toiling  through  the  sand  to  the  river’s  brink 
was  hard  work  for  that  warm  summer  day,  but 
by  the  water  the  breeze  was  pleasant  and  re- 
freshing. O I-ne  san  dipped  her  bare  little  feet 
in  the  stream  to  cool  them  while  waiting  for  the 
ferry-boat.  She  watched  two  boats  coming 


136 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1871 


from  the  other  side ; the  boatmen  were  poling 
them  across,  as  the  water  was  quite  shallow.  In 
one  was  a packhorse  with  a load  upon  his  back; 
in  the  other  was  a woman  with  her  head  tied 
up  to  protect  it  from  the  sun  ; also  a man  with 
a pipe  in  his  mouth  and  wearing  a large  scoop 
hat  of  straw  that  answered  the  purposes  of  an 
umbrella  in  sunshine  or  in  rain.  Close  by  this 
man,  in  the  same  boat,  were  two  men  with  bur- 
dens on  their  backs  and  wearing  comical  straw 
hats  like  bushel-baskets  inverted,  and  wholly 
hiding  the  face.  The  Japanese  are  remark- 
able in  the  care  they  take  to  protect  themselves 
from  the  rays  of  the  sun  or  the  effects  of  heavy 
showers.  Their  headgear  and  high  wooden 
shoes  are  far  from  being  neat  or  hand- 
some, but  are  exceedingly  useful  in  times  of 
rain  and  mud,  or  when  the  sun  pours  down 
his  heating  rays. 

Besides  these  objects,  O I-ne  san  saw  the 
fields  and  houses  on  the  other  side  of  the  river, 
and  looked  up  at  the  mountains  of  O-i,  lying 
like  a bank  of  clouds,  soft  and  dark,  against 
the  western  sky.  Their  own  ferry-boat  now 
came,  and  they  were  quickly  poled  across. 
They  climbed  up  a steep  bank  and  reached  a 
little  town,  where  they  took  dinner.  The  after- 
noon journey  was  warm,  but  occasionally  a 
breeze  from  the  sea  relieved  the  sultriness. 


1871  j A Journey  to  0-da-wa-ra.  137 

Sometimes  high  hills  were  in  sight,  and  fre- 
quently little  paths  leading  into  pleasant  mead- 
ows tempted  them  to  leave  the  dusty  highway. 

Through  the  open  slides  of  the  houses  they 
could  see  the  inmates,  most  of  them  stretched 
on  the  floor  asleep.  Occasionally  they  saw  a 
woman  spinning  or  a man  sitting  up  and 
amusing  a baby.  There  seem  to  be  many  idle 
people  in  Japan,  and  apparently  much  of  this 
idleness  is  fostered  by  their  mode  of  sitting  on 
the  floor  and  on  the  ta-ta-mis,  or  soft  straw 
mats. 

Late  in  the  afternoon  the  travelers  had  grand 
views  of  the  ocean.  Once  they  saw  a surf- 
beach,  where  some  boys  were  fishing,  and  in 
the  distance  a great  promontory  stretching  far 
out  into  the  sea.  They  heard  the  thunder  of 
the  waves  as  they  broke  against  the  shore. 
Just  before  reaching  O-da-wa-ra  they  crossed 
another  river  by  a long  bridge  built  on  trestle- 
work.  Formerly  the  current  of  this  river  was 
so  rapid  that  no  bridge  could  be  constructed  of 
sufficient  strength  to  withstand  the  rush  of 
water.  From  what  cause  we  cannot  say,  but 
the  rivers  of  Japan  are  losing  their  volume,  and 
now  wastes  of  sand  and  rock  are  seen  where 
once  broad,  deep  waters  flowed.  We  have  a 
picture  showing  how  passengers  were  taken 

across  when  the  river  was  so  rapid.  They  are 
12  K 


138  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

seated  each  on  a platform  nailed  across  two 
poles,  the  ends  of  which  rest  upon  the  shoul- 
ders of  four  stout  coolies,  who  wade  or  swim 
as  necessity  may  demand. 

O-da-wa-ra,  where  the  night  was  spent,  is  a 
large  town  at  the  foot  of  the  Ha-ko-ne  Moun- 
tains. It  is  a great  place  of  rendezvous  for 
all  the  ka-go-men,  packhorse-drivers,  pilgrims 
and  traders.  The  high  mountains  shut  off  the 
western  breeze  from  the  city,  and  the  sea-breeze 
from  the  east  died  away,  making  the  night  ex- 
cessively warm,  while  the  coolies  in  the  street 
kept  up  an  incessant  talking,  and  the  drivers 
ceased  not  their  cries,  giving  our  weary  trav- 
elers but  little  opportunity  to  gain  the  refresh- 
ment of  much-needed  sleep.  They  were  glad, 
when  the  morning  came,  to  renew  their  journey 
and  set  their  faces  toward  the  mountains. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


ON  THE  HA-KO-NES, 


Sai-o-na-ra — Mountain-scene— Ha-ta-ji-ku — Up  to  Ha-ko- 
NE — The  Lake — The  Temple — Ji-go-ku — A-shi-no-yu — 
Mi-ya-no-shi-ta — Yu-mo-to. 


HE  ka-gos  were  brought  to  the  hotel-en- 


trance. O Ka  san  and  O I-ne  san  crept 
into  theirs,  and  O Tot  san  also  had  one  for  this 
day’s  journey.  The  landlord  and  his  wife,  with 
all  the  servants,  assembled  to  say  “ Good-bye  ” 
to  the  travelers  and  wish  them  a pleasant 
journey. 

“ O Ki-no-do-ku  sa-ma^'  said  the  landlord. 
(“Your  stay  has  been  poison  to  your  soul”) 
— “ O Ya-ki-ma-shi-ku'd  said  O Tot  san.  (“We 
have  been  very  noisy.”) — “ O ki  ni  ar-i-ga-to'd 
said  O Ka  san  to  the  landlady.  (“A  great 
thank  you.”) — “ Do-i-ta-shi  mas-taka^'  answered 
the  landlady  and  the  servants.  (“What  have 
we  done  ?”)  Then  the  low  bows  were  made, 
the  Sai-o-na-ras  (“  Good-byes  ”)  said,  the  ka- 
gos  lifted  on  the  strong  shoulders  of  the  men, 
and  the  journey  up  to  Ha-ko-ne  was  begun. 


139 


140  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

From  O-da-wa-ra  the  ascent  begins.  In 
some  places  the  road  was  densely  shaded,  but 
through  many  openings  they  had  grand  views 
of  the  surrounding  mountains  and  looked  down 
into  deep  valleys.  They  passed  many  little 
shops,  where  tiny  cups  and  boxes,  very  neat- 
ly and  beautifully  made  of  the  mountain-wood, 
were  temptingly  arranged.  The  shop-people 
begged  the  travelers  to  buy  as  they  passed. 
That  day’s  journey  was  not  very  long.  About 
noon  our  travelers  reached  Ha-ta-ji-ku,  a little 
village  on  the  mountain,  and  concluded  to  re- 
main there  all  night.  Ha-ta  no  mi-yo-ji  sama 
is  the  name  of  the  old  hotel  at  which  they 
stopped. 

The  traveler  in  Japan  is  constantly  surprised 
at  finding  in  the  smallest  hamlet  large,  pleas- 
ant hotels.  These  were  built  originally  for  the 
accommodation  of  the  daimios  as  they  traveled 
through  the  country  with  their  retainers.  The 
emperor  once  took  dinner  at  this  very  hotel  on 
his  way  to  his  summer-resort  in  the  mountains. 
O Ka  san  examined  the  dark  carved  wood  of 
the  building,  while  O I-ne  san  was  delighted 
with  the  pretty  garden  made  on  the  hillside, 
with  the  three  waterfalls.  The  water  came 
down  from  the  mountain,  which  towered  above 
them,  gushed  out  of  some  rocks,  and  fell  to 
the  second  terrace,  then  made  its  way  quiet- 


On  the  Ha-ko-nes, 


iSyiJ 


I41 


ly  through  the  grass,  had  another  tumble,  then 
was  again  almost  lost  to  sight,  until  it  made~a 
third  leap,  into  a fish-pond  over  which  was  a 
tiny  arched  bridge.  The  gold  and  silver  fish  in 
the  pond  were  very  large.  Some  were  from 
twelve  to  fifteen  inches  in  length.  A woman 
threw  in  some  food — a wafer-like  substance 
prepared  expressly  for  gold  fish ; and  while 
the  fish  came  out  from  under  a rock  to  get  it 
she  talked  to  O I-ne  san  about  them,  and  told 
her  they  had  been  there  for  a hundred  years. 

In  one  corner  of  the  garden  was  a shrine 
for  I-na-ri  sa-ma  (rice-god),  and  azaleas  grew  on 
the  hillside.  The  evening  at  Ha-ta  was  lovely. 
O Tot  san  and  O Ka  san  walked  through  the 
village  at  night  by  the  light  of  the  new  moon 
and  a single  lantern.  It  was  all  quiet — nothing 
to  be  heard  except  the  sound  of  the  wind 
among  the  cedar  trees  and  the  hum  of  in- 
sects, until  bedtime,  when  the  women  clapped 
their  hands  over  the  fish-pond — “to  send  the 
fish  to  rest,”  they  said. 

O I-ne  san  was  sorry  to  leave  the  waterfalls 
and  the  fish  and  the  kind  people  of  the  hotel 
when  the  ka-gos  were  brought  the  next  morn- 
ing, but  it  was  time  to  continue  the  ascent  of 
the  mountain.  The  road  was  very  steep  and 
rocky.  No  horse  can  travel  over  it  without 
great  difficulty.  The  ka-go  men  said  that  even 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1871 


142 


they  could  not  walk  were  the  boulders  with 
which  the  road  was  paved  taken  away. 

Tall  cedar  trees  shaded  the  travelers,  and 
the  sound  of  falling  water,  which  they  never 
saw,  constantly  excited  their  curiosity.  The 
ka-go  men  went  up,  up,  up,  carrying  the  party 
into  the  mists  of  the  mountain  and  into  the 
pleasant  October-like  weather,  singing  as  they 
went.  Their  song  was  weird  and  strange,  but 
not  at  all  unmusical.  There  were  six  men  to 
the  three  ka-gos.  They  had  a ka-go  for  the 
baggage  this  morning,  so  that  old  Gon-ji-ro 
was  relieved  of  his  burden ; and  when  they 
stopped  to  change  the  poles,  one  would  begin 
a song  and  the  others  take  up  the  chorus. 
Then  another  solo  was  begun,  and  at  the 
second  chorus  all  would  march  off  again. 
The  minor  strains  sounded  very  sweetly  in 
the  mountain.  When  will  it  re-echo  to  the 
music  of  Christian  hymns  ? 

On  they  went,  almost  into  the  cloud-land, 
meeting  pilgrims  and  country-people,  and  occa- 
sionally a packhorse  led  carefully  down.  Just 
before  reaching  Ha-ko-ne  they  had  a charming 
view  of  the  lake.  Two  little  promontories  jut- 
ted out  into  it,  and  between  them  was  Fu-ji, 
looking  even  grander  and  higher  than  he  does 
in  Tokio.  Then  they  went  down  an  avenue  of 
cedar  trees  into  the  village,  and  there,  waiting 


1871]  On  the  Ha-ko-nes.  143 

for  them  at  one  of  the  hotels,  were  the  friends 
from  Su-ru-ga,  and  the  bows  were  many  and 
low  and  the  rejoicings  great. 

Ha-ko-ne  is  a town  of  hotels — the  Saratoga 
of  Japan.  Its  chief  attraction  is  a lovely  lake, 
which  lies  between  two  and  three  thousand  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  sea,  and  is  supposed  by 
some  to  be  the  crater  of  an  extinct  volcano. 
It  is  surrounded  by  mountain-peaks,  and  its 
clear  water  reflects  each  peak  and  cloud.  At 
one  end  is  a tunnel,  two  and  a half  miles  long, 
made  for  purposes  of  irrigation.  This  is  a 
great  work,  but  who  did  it  and  when  it  was 
done  no  one  knows. 

The  little  company  of  friends  much  enjoyed 
their  excursions  on  the  lake  and  trips  from 
Ha-ko-ne  to  the  neighboring  villages.  One 
day  they  went  in  a sail-boat  to  the  other  end  of 
the  lake,  and  visited  an  old  temple.  They  had 
to  climb  one  hundred  and  five  steps  to  get  to  it. 
The  entrance  was  very  grand,  with  rows  of  tall 
cedars  and  lanterns,  on  each  side,  but  the  tem- 
ple was  old  and  dilapidated.  A Buddhist  tem- 
ple is  much  like  the  religion  itself  at  the  pres- 
ent day.  The  entrance  is  so  imposing  that 
you  wonder  what  the  temple  itself  may  be, 
and  enter  the  gateway  to  find  nothing  but 
an  old  building  tumbling  into  decay. 

The  most  wonderful  place  about  Ha-ko-ne 


144  The  Su7irise  Kmgdom.  [1871 

is  what  the  people  call  Ji-go-ku,  their  name  for 
the  infernal  region.  To  reach  this  our  travel- 
ers took  a sail-boat  and  went  to  the  extreme 
end  of  the  lake,  where  they  moored  the  boat, 
and  all  got  out  and  climbed  the  mountain.  The 
ascent  was  very  steep  and  difficult,  but  O I-ne 
san  toiled  along  bravely  by  her  mother’s  side. 
The  guide  led  the  way  along  a deeply-shaded 
road  to  the  springs.  Clear  water,  boiling  hot, 
bubbled  up  out  of  the  ground,  and  crowds  of 
miserable  people  were  bathing  in  the  water, 
some  covered  with  sores  and  almost  naked. 
Men,  women  and  children  throng  to  these 
springs  in  the  summer  to  obtain,  if  possible, 
relief  from  their  diseases. 

Our  friends  did  not  stop  here  long,  but  went 
still  higher  up.  From  some  points  on  the  road 
they  had  grand  views  of  Fu-ji  (the  “matchless 
mountain”),  rising  high  above  the  clouds.  As 
they  toiled  upward  the  way  became  barren  and 
desolate,  and  the  fumes  of  the  sulphur  almost  in- 
tolerable. At  one  place  they  dared  not  step  to 
the  right  or  left  of  a narrow  foot-path,  as  the 
ground  on  either  side  was  full  of  deep  holes. 
The  water  which  issued  from  the  ground  was 
boiling  hot. 

At  two  little  huts  by  the  way  men  were  pre- 
paring the  sulphur  for  use,  and  at  a little  distance 
from  these  places  of  shelter  arose  dense  vol- 


On  the  Ha-ko-nes. 


H5 


1871] 

umes  of  smoke.  Onward  still  the  guides  led 
to  where  boiling  sulphur  hissed,  and  where 
clouds  of  steam  prevented  them  from  seeing 
anything  distinctly.  “ Keep  away  from  the 
edge  of  the  chasm,”  called  the  guide  to  one  of 
the  party  who  ventured  too  near.  “ The  earth 
will  give  way.”  Ji-go-ku  was  a fearful  place, 
and  O I-ne  san  was  glad  to  get  away. 

Near  Ha-ko-ne  is  Ashi-no-yu.  The  “Twin 
Mountains,”  two  peaks  just  alike,  are  distinctly 
seen  from  here.  Down  the  mountain  from 
Ashi-no-yu  is  Mi-ya-no-shi-ta,  the  emperor’s 
summer  resting-place.  From  Mi-ya-no-shi-ta 
to  Yu-mo-to  the  scenery  is  most  romantic  and 
interesting.  High  mountains  shut  in  the  nar- 
row path,  and  a river  rushes  and  foams  over 
great  rocks.  These  mountains  are  noted  for 
their  springs.  Water,  hot  and  cold,  gushes 
out  of  the  rocks  in  every  direction.  The  ho- 
tels are  crowded  with  invalids  in  the  summer. 

Oh  how  we  long  for  the  time  to  come  when 
the  missionary  can  go  and  preach  to  these  suf- 
fering souls,  to  tell  them  of  the  “ living  water  ” 
which  can  quench  their  thirst  and  give  them 
everlasting  life ! 

13  K « 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


PILGRIMS  ON  FU-yi. 


Pilgrims  come  to  Ha-ko-ne — Descent  of  the  Mountain 
— Mi-shi-ma — Yo-shi-wa-ra  — The  Base  of  Fu-ji — The 
Cinder  Cone— The  Huts — Going  up  to  the  Crater — 
The  Storm. 

MOTLEY  crowd  had  assembled  at  the 


entrance  of  the  hotel  when  our  travelers 


left  Ha-ko-ne  to  return  to  Tokio.  Ka-gomen, 
pilgrims,  travelers,  drivers  with  their  packhorses, 
— all  were  congregated  there.  Those  bound  for 
Tokio  went  down  the  mountain  on  its  eastern 
slope,  while  the  pilgrims  turned  their  faces  west- 
ward toward  Fu-ji.  Let  us  follow  them. 

They  went  up  the  one  steep  street  of  Ha- 
ko-ne,  out  of  the  gate  through  which  the  old 
daimios  passed,  and  just  outside  of  which 
some  old  idols  stood,  as  if  keeping  guard  in 
the  place  of  sentinels. 

Under  grand  old  trees,  between  mossy  banks 
from  which  hung  tangled  masses  of  vines  and 
ivy,  and  where  ferns  grew  in  rank  profusion  and 
fair  white  lilies  bloomed,  went  the  pilgrims, 
stepping  from  rock  to  rock  and  stopping  to 


PILGRIMS.  Pagci47. 


:^-  i-^wt  ,i»  f.^  ■ 

t ■ j.  m,-  ' 


JV 

7a 


r-3!'  iiirti  ■ I 

♦^1 

"^•1^  ^ 


..  W2f”#^‘<‘y*  j'*-**^  -■' 

I liiSi^p  i 

• i-  »!.  ^-J;*‘^  *'-'i 

4-  :-J.1l»<»’Mli  ' V-'-f  *'*>^*'.'«i'?r  ^ 

^4-^,-;i|^.V'f<!rf  "iNew  •»a>  ■ 'y^  »?S.  jt" 


,f 

• jK*.!:  :«i*Mi6i«^  <Miw<  f<i» 


«i.-  Wlw^ 

»=•*««?'  **  '''■i\'J 


jTjU^  .-•  ^ IH^,  'li^.  '■•  - 


' ^;,  .".'a? 


1871] 


Pilgrims  on  Fu-ji. 


147 


quench  their  thirst  at  some  cooling  spring.  At 
noon  they  halted  for  dinner  at  Mi-shi-ma,  a 
large  town  at  the  foot  of  the  western  side  of 
Ha-ko-ne. 

Just  opposite  the  hotel  was  a large  temple, 
and  back  of  the  temple  a beautiful  grove. 
Pretty  winding  walks  under  the  shady  trees, 
with  thatched  cottages  and  people  walking  to 
and  fro,  made  the  place  very  charming.  But 
the  most  attractive  object  at  Mi-shi-ma  was  the 
stream  which  the  pilgrims  passed  as  they  went 
out  of  town.  Down  from  the  mountain  it  came, 
pure  and  fresh,  and  in  such  volume  that  it  was 
sufficient  to  quench  the  thirst  of  ail  the  people 
of  Mi-shi-ma  through  all  time.  Truly,  Japan  is 
a well-watered  counti*}^ — “ a land  of  brooks  of 
water,  of  fountains  and  depths,  that  spring  out 
of  valleys  and  hills;”  and  these  bright  waters 
flow  over  a green,  sunny  land.  It  is  strange 
how  earth’s  most  lovely  regions  are  the  ones 
most  defiled  by  sin.  Even  Sodom  and  Gomor- 
rah stood  in  that  plain  of  Jordan  which  was 
like  the  garden  of  the  Lord.” 

At  Yo-shi-wa-ra,  2l  large  town  near  the  base 
of  Fu-ji,  the  pilgrims  passed  the  night.  Every- 
where they  performed  their  devotions,  going 
for  this  purpose  into  all  the  large  temples. 
And  now  they  came  to  the  mountain. 

Fu-ji  (Fuji-yama)  is  an  extinct  volcano,  which 


148 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1871 


stands  by  itself  in  the  centre  of  a large  plain. 
It  rises  (taking  the  average  of  several  estimates) 
thirteen  thousand  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
sea,  being  the  highest  point  of  elevation  in 
Japan.  Perpetual  snow  lies  upon  the  summit. 
Its  cone  is  made  of  cinders,  and  is  one  of  the 
most  symmetrical  in  the  world.  It  is  the  steep- 
est of  all  volcanoes,  the  angle  being  forty-five 
degrees.  Its  ashes  cause  at  a distance  the 
peculiar  purple  hue  which  distinguishes  the 
mountain.  A hundred  years  have  elapsed 
since  the  last  eruption. 

As  the  pilgrims  started  on  their  journey  in 
the  early  morning  their  way  lay  for  a time  over 
a plain  whereon  beautiful  flowers  grew.  Begin- 
ning the  ascent,  they  passed  through  a grove 
of  cedars,  then  through  fields  of  flowers,  where 
the  vegetation  was  rank,  and  then  reached  hut 
No.  I. 

At  nearly  regular  intervals  on  the  mountain 
are  these  places  of  refuge  for  the  pilgrims. 
They  are  built  far  into  the  side  of  the  moun- 
tain, boarded  inside,  with  immense  blocks  of 
scorice  on  top  to  hold  down  the  little  of  the 
hut  which  projects  outside.  One  would  scarcely 
imagine  them  to  be  huts  from  seeing  the  outside 
only,  but  within  they  are  quite  spacious.  There 
are  eight  or  nine  of  these  huts,  numbered  re- 
spectively No.  I,  No.  2,  No.  3,  etc.,  and  without 


1871] 


Pilgrims  on  Fii-ji. 


149 


their  shelter  travel  on  the  mountain  would  be 
almost  impossible. 

No.  I looked  very  pleasant  that  summer 
morning  as  the  pilgrims  stopped  to  rest.  It 
bore  quite  a resemblance  to  a regular  house, 
and  in  this  respect  was  superior  to  the  other 
huts,  farther  up.  Near  this  place  was  an  old 
hermit,  living  all  alone  in  a little  hut. 

Then  they  went  on  until  they  reached  No.  2, 
a wild,  desolate  spot.  Below  were  the  clouds, 
and  only  through  the  rifts  could  the  pilgrims 
catch  glimpses  of  hills  and  valleys  far  beneath 
them.  Above  was  the  top,  like  a great  ash-pile, 
black  and  barren.  An  old  woman  had  charge 
of  No.  2.  She  had  a fire  of  wood  built  on  the 
floor ; there  was  no  chimney,  and  smoke  filled 
the  room.  Guides,  ka-gomen  and  pilgrims  made 
up  the  company  within.  Here  the  pilgrims  ate 
their  midday  meal.  Water,  very  cold,  came 
down  from  the  summit;  it  was  the  melting 
snow.  Everywhere  the  pilgrims  found  rice 
and  dai-kon,  but  not  much  else. 

Then  began  the  real  ascent  of  the  cinder- 
cone.  It  all  looked  black  and  desolate.  Vege- 
tation suddenly  ceased,  with  the  exception  of  a 
few  patches  of  a sickly  green  shrub,  and  the 
feet  of  the  pilgrims  sank  deep  into  the  ashes 
at  every  step.  The  way  was  strewn  with  cast- 
off sandals — the  waraji,  a very  cheap  style  of 


150  ' The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1871 

shoe  worn  by  coolies.  They  wear  out  quickly 
on  Fu-ji.  Ka-gos  can  be  carried  no  farther 
than  the  third  resting-place. 

After  reaching  No.  6 the  way  up  to  the  crater 
became  yet  more  steep  and  difficult,  and  the 
scenery  of  the  mountain  the  very  extreme  of 
desolateness.  On  went  the  pilgrims,  toiling 
slowly  upward,  purposing  to  sleep  at  the  cra- 
ter. Large  stones  impeded  their  progress,  and 
their  feet  sank  deeper  and  deeper  into  the 
cinders.  The  air  became  so  rarefied  that  it 
failed  to  satisfy  their  lungs,  and  breathing 
became  difficult.  Patches  of  snow  lay  along 
their  way.  It  was  a blessing  indeed  that  the 
running  water  was  so  cold  and  plentiful,  for 
the  ashes,  flying  up  at  every  step,  made  the 
throats  of  the  pilgrims  very  dry,  so  that  they 
constantly  wanted  to  drink. 

At  last  they  stood  on  the  summit.  A priest 
sat  by  the  side  of  a deep  well,  constructed  no 
one  knows  how  long  ago,  and  a most  remark- 
able feature  in  such  a scene — a well  of  water 
at  the  very  crater’s  mouth.  He  pulled  the 
buckets  up  and  down  by  a rope  on  a windlass, 
and  as  the  cold,  sparkling  water  came,  he  gave 
it  to  the  weary,  thirsty  pilgrims.  How  interest- 
ing and  deeply  suggestive  this  incident,  though 
happening  in  a heathen  land  and  in  a false 
pagan  worship ! There  is  the  counterfeit,  and 


1871] 


Pilgrims  on  Fu-ji. 


151 


there  is  the  true.  Can  we  doubt  where  the 
true  well  is,  and  the  real  water  of  life  ? 

The  pilgrims,  refreshed,  went  on  to  worship 
at  the  crater.  Around  the  deep,  yawning  pit 
were  the  idols  of  wood  and  stone,  similar  to 
those  in  their  temples  and  homes.  All  was 
quiet — no  smoke  or  smell  of  sulphur,  or  any- 
thing else  but  the  crater  itself  and  its  cold  black 
ash-piles,  to  indicate  the  presence  of  a volcano. 
It  was  by  no  means  so  fearful  a place  as  Ji-go- 
ku,  with  its  boiling,  hissing  sulphur.  Near  the 
crater  was  quite  a village,  in  which  were  men 
and  boys,  but  no  women.  This  is  their  home 
for  the  two  months  of  summer  when  the  pil- 
grims come,  to  whose  wants  they  minister. 

The  air  was  sharp  and  cold.  All  night  the 
tinkling  of  the  pilgrims’  bells  was  heard  as 
other  parties  made  their  way  up  the  mountain. 
The  morning  sun  rose  upon  a scene  of  won- 
drous beauty  to  the  pilgrims.  Far,  far  below 

them  rolled  a sea  of  clouds ; and  when  the 
% 

sun  emerged,  it  was  like  a perfect  sea  of 
glory,  which  turned  into  deep  crimson  and 
gold  as  the  sun  shone  over  it. 

The  pilgrims  started  early  down  the  moun- 
tain. It  is  necessary  only  to  worship  at  the 
crater  and  spend  one  night  on  the  mountain. 
As  they  descended  the  glory  of  the  early  morn- 
ing faded  away,  and  a terrible  storm  of  rain 


152 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1871 

and  wind  overtook  them.  The  mist  entirely 
concealed  the  path  from  view.  Often  they  fell 
down  in  the  ashes,  but  the  bed  was  soft,  and  no 
one  was  hurt.  Occasionally  the  scene  bright- 
ened for  a moment,  and  the  clouds  parted. 
But  the  wind  again  swept  down  from  the  moun- 
tain, driving  before  it  a dense  fog,  and  every- 
thing became  obscured.  The  pilgrims  were 
drenched  to  the  skin  ; they  stopped  at  each  hut 
to  rest  and  get  a cup  of  tea,  and  then  went  out 
again  into  the  wild  storm,  and  in  this  way  they 
reached  the  foot  of  the  mountain.  But  the 
prayers  had  been  said,  their  worship  paid  at 
Fu-ji’s  top,  and  they  were  satisfied. 

“ Why  do  the  pilgrims  ascend  Fu-ji?”  This 
question  was  asked  of  a Christian  Japanese. 
“They  wish  to  be  holy,”  was  the  reply.  “As 
long  as  they  are  on  the  mountain  their  conduct 
is  good,  but  when  they  come  down  they  drink 
saki,  gamble  and  cheat,  and  do  many  wicked 
things.  But  the  Christian  religion  is  Hke  be- 
ing always  on  the  mount.  People  need  never 
come  down.  They  can  always  be  holy.” 


BOOK  II. 


CHAPTER  I 


AJV  OPEN  DOOR. 


And  I said,  What  shall  I do,  Lord  ? 

“ A great  door  and  effectual  is  open  unto  me,  and  there  are  many 
adversaries.” 

FTER  the  dispersion  of  the  scholars  in 


the  winter  of  1870-71  we  waited  patient- 
ly for  brighter  days  to  come,  and  waited  not  in 
vain,  for  this  year  (1872)  we  seem  to  breathe 
a new  atmosphere  of  religious  freedom.  In 
March  some  converts  were  baptized,  a native 
church  was  organized  in  Yokohama,  and  in  one 
of  the  mission-houses  On-ga-wa  conducts  daily 
family  worship.  Even  in  the  capital  Bibles  are 
sold  and  Bible  classes  taught  without  interfer- 
ence from  the  ya-cu-nins. 

The  Tokio  of  to-day  is  very  different  from 
the  city  to  which  we  came  nearly  three  years 
ago.  Few  two-sworded  men  are  now  seen  in 
the  streets,  and  we  go  among  the  people  with 
much  freedom.  The  foreign  population  has 


154  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1872 

greatly  increased,  and  the  house  at  Ro-ku-ban 
is  no  longer  the  only  foreign  building  in  this 
part  of  the  Concession.  Soon  a railroad  will 
connect  Tokio  with  Yokohama,  and  a church 
for  foreigners  will  be  erected.  It  seems  as 
though  the  mere  sight  of  a Christian  church 
here  will  have  its  effect  on  the  Japanese.  And 
yet  even  this  spring  we  heard  rumors  of  rebel- 
lion and  of  the  possible  expulsion  of  foreigners 
from  Japan,  and  stories  of  a general  massacre, 
to  take  place  some  time  in  April,  reached  our 
ears,  but  the  bright  spring  days  passed  away, 
bringing  no  signs  of  intended  violence. 

And  now  the  thing  for  which  we  have  longed 
and  prayed  these  many  months  has  been  grant- 
ed. A door  of  access  to  the  women  of  Japan 
has  been  opened,  and,  strange  to  say,  in  the 
providence  of  God,  by  the  Japanese  themselves. 
So  has  it  been  in  all  our  intercourse  with  this 
people.  They  have  always  come  to  us  to  beg 
instruction.  We  know  not  to  what  the  path 
in  which  we  have  begun  to  tread  may  lead. 
One  thing  we  do  know : it  is  the  only  way  open 
now,  and  there  is  no  question  as  to  duty.  The 
desire  to  study  English  has  been  aroused  in 
the  hearts  of  some  of  the  eids,  or  in  the  hearts 
of  their  parents  for  them,  and  in  this  way  they 
have  been  brouofht  under  Christian  influence. 
It  seems  but  a little  thing,  the  daily  teaching 


155 


1872]  An  Open  Doo7\ 

of  English  to  a few  girls,  but  the  results  none 
can  foretell. 

Early  in  March,  while  the  weather  was  still 
cold,  Harna  Konda,  the  first  pupil,  came  to  Ro- 
ku-ban.  She  was  not  very  young,  and  was 
plain  in  her  personal  appearance,  but  wore 
dark,  rich  clothing.  Her  regular  lesson-book 
was  a First  Reader,  but  after  that  had  been 
learned  we  had  a book  of  simple  religious 
truths,  in  which  she  seemed  much  interested. 
She  was  learning  English  in  view  of  teaching 
little  children  herself  some  day.  She  (O  Hama 
san)  did  not  remain  in  Tokio  very  long,  but 
went  to  Yokohama,  where  she  is  still  under 
Christian  instruction. 

One  evening,  after  the  lamps  were  lighted, 
Chimura  Goro,  a man  who  was  going  to  Ameri- 
ca with  a daimio,  brought  two  girls  to  be  taught 
English.  They  were  quite  different  from  O Ha- 
ma san,  being  gayly  dressed,  with  bright  sashes 
and  hairpins  and  powder  and  paint.  They 
have  been  coming  to  school  quite  regularly 
ever  since.  The  little  girls  are  named  Mishi 
and  Kiyo.  One  room  in  the  second  story  at 
Ro-ku-ban  was  fitted  up  for  school-purposes. 
From  every  window  we  could  look  out  upon 
the  water.  It  was  April  when  O Mishi  san  and 
O Kiyo  san  came,  and  the  fort  near  Sku-da-ji- 
ma  was  just  turning  green. 


156  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1872 

Soon  after  the  little  girls  came  we  had  one 
of  those  terrible  conflagrations  which  so  often 
sweep  over  Tokio.  We  saw  it,  early  in  the 
afternoon,  in  the  direction  of  the  castle,  never 
dreaming  that  it  would  come  near  us,  but  the 
wind  blew  in  the  direction  of  Ts’kiji,  and  it 
soon  became  evident  that  the  greater  part  of 
the  Concession  was  doomed. 

From  the  veranda  of  the  mission-house  we 
kept  watch  as  one  by  one  the  old  landmarks 
were  swept  away.  Toward  evening  the  scene 
grew  wild.  Men,  women  and  children,  with 
what  they  could  carry  in  their  arms  and  on  their 
backs,  fled  to  the  open  common  near  us.  Ter- 
rified horses  and  frightened,  screaming  birds 
sought  the  same  place  of  refuge.  The  fire 
seemed  to  be  forming  a circle  around  us. 
There  was  no  way  of  escape  except  by  the 
bay,  so  a boatman  was  engaged,  and  waited  for 
hours,  ready  to  take  us  off  at  any  moment. 
But  the  mission-house  was  spared  that  time, 
and  became  a place  of  refuge  for  some  of  the 
homeless  ones,  who  crowded  on  the  lower 
veranda  and  protected  themselves  by  screens. 

Such  fires  are  not  the  same  calamity  to  the 
Japanese  that  they  would  be  to  us.  They 
expect  them,  and  can  easily  save  all  of  their 
houses  except  the  framework,  which  consists 
of  poles  and  sticks -of  timber  that  can  readily 


1872] 


An  Open  Door, 


157 


be  replaced  at  very  little  cost.  Their  fire- 
engines  are  mere  pumps,  throwing  a small  jet 
of  water,  and  are  scarcely  more  efficacious  than 
are  the  poles  with  long  strips  of  paper  attach- 
ed which  they  bring  out  to  appease  the  gods. 
It  is  strange  to  see  them  running  around  with 
lighted  lanterns,  even  in  the  full  blaze  of  burn- 
ing houses.  It  is  the  law  of  the  land,  and  they 
must  obey  whether  it  be  necessary  or  not. 

One  day  after  this  the  little  girls  came  from 
their  home  near  Shi-ba  to  find  nothing  of  the 
pleasant  house  at  Ro-ku-ban  but  the  chimney 
and  a heap  of  smouldering  ashes.  The  house 
had  burned  that  morning,  taking  fire  from  the 
kitchen  stove-pipe.  Books,  dictionaries,  man- 
uscripts and  translations,  the  work  of  many 
months,  perished  in  the  flames.  Homeless,  we 
found  a temporary  shelter  in  the  third  story  of 
Shin-yama  da  y a (“New  Mountain  House”), 
a lar^e  boardine-establishment  on  the  corner 
of  one  of  the  busiest  streets  of  Tokio.  We 
had  the  whole  of  the  upper  story.  There  were 
a number  of  families  below  us.  The  landlady 
occupied  part  of  the  lower  story,  and  near  her 
room  was  a family  consisting  of  the  mother, 
a grown  son,  a little  daughter  and  an  old 
grandmother  eighty  years  of  age.  The  head  of 
the  latter  was  perfectly  bald  and  she  was  bent 
almost  double,  but  she  was  the  brightest,  cheer- 
14 


158 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1872 


iest  old  lady  imaginable.  On  the  second  story 
was  a music-teacher,  a large,  fine-looking  Japan- 
ese woman,  and  opposite  her  an  old  man  and 
a young  girl.  They  were  all  exceedingly  kind, 
but  had  a great  many  inquiries  to  make. 
“ Where  are  you  going  ?”  was  a question 
which  had  to  be  answered  many  times  when 
we  went  through  the  building  to  go  out. 

I went  one  evening  to  call  on  the  family  in 
the  first  story,  and  sat  on  the  floor  to  have  a 
cup  of  tea  with  them.  The  tea  was  very  hot, 
but  the  mother  took  a large  fan  to  cool  it.  I 
told  them  how  old  I was,  and  the  ages  of  father, 
mother,  grandfather  and  grandmother,  and  they 
told  their  ages.  All  this  is  etiquette.  The  old 
women  especially  esteem  it  a great  compliment 
to  be  asked  their  age.  They  had  many  ques- 
tions to  ask  about  the  journey  to  America.  I 
told  them  about  our  Sabbath  and  the  God  whom 
we  worship,  and  then  the  man  took  a picture 
of  his  god  out  of  his  pocket.  It  was  an  exceed- 
ingly small  affair,  but  he  said  that  he  prayed  to 
it  every  morning,  and  that  it  would  keep  the 
house  from  burning  down. 

The  music-teacher  entertained  me  pleasantly 
in  her  room  on  the  second  story.  She  was 
giving  a lesson  on  the  samisen  to  a little  girl 
sitting  on  the  floor.  The  music  is  very  simple, 
consisting  of  one  part  only,  and  is  learned  cn- 


1872] 


An  Open  Door. 


159 


tirely  by  imitation.  The  woman  had  many  in- 
quiries to  make  about  our  little  cabinet-organ, 
which  was  up  stairs.  It  was  an  object  of  great 
curiosity  to  all,  and  a real  missionary  in  itself. 
I could  not  touch  a chord  without  bringing  peo- 
ple up  from  all  parts  of  the  house.  Sometimes 
I would  stop  working  the  pedals,  and  then  they 
were  puzzled,  and  would  get  down  to  see  where 
the  sound  came  from. 

For  about  a week  after  we  went  to  Shin-yama 
a storm  raged,  and  the  Japanese  house  was 
very  gloomy.  But  after  that  the  sun  came 
out,  the  days  were  bright  and  warm,  and  we 
could  throw  open  all  the  slides. 

It  was  interesting  to  watch  the  people  on  the 
street  and  to  listen  to  the  street-cries,  which, 
like  those  in  our  own  cities,  sometimes  bear 
little  resemblance  to  the  words  supposed  to  be 
uttered.  At  night  the  noises  were  very  annoy- 
ing. Samisens,  drums  and  other  musical  in- 
struments, with  singing,  the  cries  of  the  ped- 
dlers and  the  shrill  whistles  of  the  a-mas, 
rendered  sleep  almost  impossible  until  long  after 
midnight,  and  then  there  were  only  a few  hours 
of  quiet,  for  other  noises  began  very  early  in 
the  morning. 

Our  pupils  soon  found  us  again  after  the  fire, 
and  went  on  with  their  lessons.  Then  Tama, 
a large  girl,  and  Rio,  a grave  young  woman 


1 6o  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1872 

of  twenty-two  or  twenty-three,  with  To-yo, 
a bright,  active  child  of  six,  were  added  to 
our  number. 

Soon  O Ka  san  (Japanese  term  for  “ mother  ”) 
heard  of  the  school,  and  one  bright  June  day 
brought  her  little  I-ne,  then  a little  more  than 
eight  years  old.  Her  hair  had  all  been  cut 
short  and  fell  over  her  forehead,  and  she  wore 
a short  coat ; and  when  O Ka  san  asked  per- 
mission to  send  her  to  school,  I said,  “ Why, 
this  is  a little  boy,  and  I have  only  girls  in  the 
afternoon.”  But  O Ka  san  laughed  and  said, 
“ Oh  no  ! This  is  a girl — ^my  little  daughter.” 
And  now  the  young  and  tender  rice  has  been 
brought  under  cultivation : may  it  develop  into 
beautiful  refined  grain  ! 

Soon  after  I-ne  came  a little  girl  about  the 
same  age,  named  I-no,  the  daughter  of  an 
officer.  The  children  brought  beautiful  wis- 
teria-blossoms and  pink  roses  to  ornament 
the  room.  The  rose  is  not  a Japanese  flower, 
and  its  cultivation  is  somewhat  difficult.  The 
people  call  it  the  “thorn-flower.” 

When  the  lessons  were  over  in  the  third 
story  of  Shin-yama,  the  little  girls  gathered 
around  the  organ  to  learn  some  English  hymns. 
The  very  first  one  was  “ In  the  Light,”  and  they 
learned  the  meaning  of  “ light,”  “ God  ” and 
“ walk  ” in  their  own  language.  They  sang 


1872]  An  Open  Door.  161 

out  the  chorus  loud  and  strong,  and  it  sound- 
ed pleasantly  in  Shin-yama.  Oh  that  the  little 
feet  may  soon  find  their  way  into  the  king- 
dom ! Then  indeed  shall  they  “ walk  in  the 
light.” 

The  warm  summer  days  had  come  when  we 
went  back  to  Ro-ku-ban.  We  had  only  two 
small  rooms,  one  above  the  other.  The  lower 
apartment  served  for  dining-room,  parlor  and 
schoolroom.  A board  put  upon  some  bricks 
and  covered  with  a carpet  made  a bench  for 
some  of  the  scholars,  and  as  the  house-building 
progressed  we  were  moved  from  room  to  room, 
all  assisting  merrily  in  carrying  chairs. 

We  had  no  dictionaries,  no  translations  of 
any  kind,  and  progress  was  necessarily  slow, 
but  the  little  school  increased  in  numbers. 
The  children  learned  many  hymns — “ Little 
drops  of  water,”  “ There  is  a happy  land,” 
“Jesus  loves  me,”  and  others — and  partly 
committed  and  learned  to  chant  the  twenty- 
third  Psalm.  The  words  of  all  these  were 
taught  them  orally  by  constant  repetition. 

Little  I-ne  always  had  an  English  sentence 
ready  to  say  when  she  came  into  the  school- 
room, and  she  would  repeat  it  with  the  utmost 
precision.  O Ka  san  came  with  her  every  day, 
and  sat  near  while  the  lessons  were  being  read 
and  explained.  One  day  I overheard  her  say- 
14  L 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1872- 


162 


ing  something  about  the  creation  of  the  world 
and  Adam  and  Eve ; and  referring  to  some 
Japanese  tradition,  she  said:  “That”  (the  tra- 
dition) “is  a lie/' 

It  was  always  pleasant  to  go  into  the  school 
and  see  the  bright,  happy  girls  around  the  table. 
The  first  thing  in  the  afternoon  was  Mishi 
and  Tama’s  lesson.  They  read  in  the  New 
Testament,  as  they  had  learned  some  English 
before  they  came  to  Ro-ku-ban.  After  this, 
1-ne,  I-no  and  Kiyo  read  their  lesson  in  the 
Reader  and  had  their  writing  examined  and 
copies  set ; and  last  of  all  came  the  large  class 
of  beginners.  Then  the  books  were  carefully 
wrapped  in  pretty  fu-ru-shi-kis ; and  after  the 
general  exercises  of  spelling,  catechism  and 
singing,  the  “ Good-byes  ” were  said,  and  the 
girls  went  to  their  homes  in  the  great  city. 
Now  they  are  “resting:”  the  time  for  the  sum- 
mer holidays  has  come.  They  all  promised  to 
come  back  punctually  at  the  end  of  a month. 

We  think  that  by  this  time  the  children  have 
learned  to  regard  our  Bible  as  a very  sacred 
book  and  to  reverence  the  Sabbath.  They 
have  also  learned  of  the  true  God  and  the 
precious  name  of  Christ.  Is  not  this  a begin- 
ning? May  we  not  hope?  Truly,  God  has 
opened  the  door:  let  us  enter  in  with  true 
faith  and  holy  boldness. 


CHAPTER  II. 


MIDSUMMER  HOLIDAYS. 


**  Be  not  afraid ; for  I am  with  thee.” 

“ For  I have  much  people  in  this  city.” 


OW  that  the  ^irls  are  “ restinp^  ” we 


have  time  to  go  about  the  city  and  into 
the  suburbs.  The  introduction  of  jin-ri-ki- 
sha  (“  man-power  wheel  ”) — a little  two- wheeled 
carriage  drawn  by  a man — adds  greatly  to  the 
ease  and  enjoyment  of  travel. 

One  Saturday  morning  O Ka  san  came  with 
a jin-ri-ki-sha  to  take  me  out  to  the  beautiful 
home  at  O-ji.  It  was  well  that  when  first  the 
door  was  opened  for  me  to  approach  the  women 
of  Tokio  I found  this  one  waiting  to  take  me 
by  the  hand ; she  has  done  so  much  to  make  me 
feel  less  of  a stranger  in  the  land  and  to  in- 
troduce me  to  her  countrywomen.  She  always 
brings  to  me  beautiful  flowers  and  choice  fruits 
arranged  in  the  most  tempting  way,  as  expres- 
sions of  her  gratitude  and  esteem,  and  is  ever 
helpful  and  kind. 

O Ka  san’s  invitation  was  accepted  with 
pleasure.  We  seize  eagerly  every  opportunity 


163 


164  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1872 

of  getting  nearer  to  the  people  and  being  with 
them  in  their  homes.  She  had  two  jin-ri-ki-shas 
at  the  door — one  for  herself,  and  the  other  for 
her  guest.  We  got  into  them,  the  coolies  lift- 
ed the  shafts,  and  we  were  rolled  rapidly  along 
through  the  streets  of  the  city.  It  was  a great 
festival-day,  and  poles  were  erected  in  front 
of  houses  and  temples,  with  gayly-colored  pa- 
pers flying  from  their  tops.  Crowds  of  peo- 
ple in  holiday  attire  thronged  the  streets.  It 
takes  a long  time  to  get  into  the  country,  as 
Tokio  is  a very  large  city.  Through  street 
after  street  lined  with  low  wooden  houses  the 
coolies  pulled  the  jin-ri-ki-shas  before  we 
reached  the  suburbs.  The  road  to  O-ji  lies 
through  the  great  shrub-district  of  Tokio.  We 
saw  tea-plantations  and  rice-paddies  and  wheat- 
fields  with  patches  of  yellow  mustard-flowers. 
On  this  road  are  many  nurseries,  where  flowers 
and  trees  are  sold.  Farmhouses,  cedar  trees, 
bamboo-groves  and  hedges  make  the  road  very 
pretty  and  attractive.  After  we  had  passed  the 
entrance  of  the  village  of  O-ji,  we  turned  off 
into  a lane,  went  through  a gateway  at  the 
end,  and  were  met  and  welcomed  warmly  by 
the  kind  people  of  the  house.  In  the  same 
enclosure  with  the  house  is  a cotton-mill,  in 
the  operation  of  which  the  proprietors  receive 
valuable  aid  from  a skillful  Englishman.  Part 


1872]  Midsummer  Holidays.  165 

of  the  house  is  built  in  foreign  style  and 
nicely  furnished. 

The  Japanese  rooms  were  beautifully  neat 
and  clean.  The  large  parlor  (p-za-shi-ki)  was 
open  on  all  sides,  and  the  view  of  the  terraced 
garden  was  lovely.  There  were  the  usual  arti- 
ficial lake  with  gold-fish,  a fountain,  and  small 
hills  made  so  that  many  shrubs  and  flowers 
could  be  planted  in  a limited  space  without 
any  appearance  of  crowding. 

The  dinner  consisted  of  fish,  small  potatoes 
cooked  very  nicely,  rice,  sweetmeats  and  fruit, 
and  all  served  in  Japanese  style. 

The  afternoon  was  the  pleasantest  part  of  the 
whole  day,  when  jin-ri-ki-shas  were  brought  for 
a ride.  Down  the  narrow  lane,  over  the  arched 
bridge  which  crosses  O-ji  creek,  up  the  one 
long  street  of  O-ji,  with  its  streams  of  run- 
ning water  on  both  sides,  past  hotels  and  tem- 
ples, the  coolies  drew  the  jin-ri-ki-shas,  and  at 
each  turn  there  was  something  new  to  admire. 

The  object  of  the  ride  was  to  visit  the  foun- 
tains of  O-ji,  and  very  beautiful  they  were.  A 
little  river  almost  hidden  from  sight  by  the 
dense  shrubbery  was  near  the  first  fountain, 
whose  waters  gushed  clear  and  bright  out  of 
the  living  rock.  A strange  group  of  people 
were  gathered  there.  On  some  faces  marks 
of  intense  suffering  were  indelibly  traced. 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1872 


166 


Those  tortured  with  brain-diseases  stood  under 
the  rock  and  let  the  cool  water  pour  over  their 
heads.  Country-people  from  all  the  region 
round  about  O-ji  seemed  to  be  gathered  there 
that  day.  At  another  fountain  a similar  group 
could  be  seen.  From  a high  hill  back  of  the 
one  large  temple  at  O-ji  (there  are  several 
smaller  ones  there)  we  had  grand  views  of  the 
surrounding  country.  The  old  women  who 
were  with  us  went  to  the  temple  and  worship- 
ed most  devoutly,  but  O Ka  san  says  she  does 
not  pray  to  idols.  The  rest  of  the  afternoon 
was  spent  on  Sa-ku-ra-ya-ma.  It  was  pleasant 
under  the  trees ; we  had  tea  and  fruit  and  a 
little  melon  which  the  people  call  ma-ka-wa-u- 
ri.  At  O-ji  are  many  bi-wa  trees,  which  bear 
in  the  early  summer  a yellow  fruit  about  the 
size  of  an  ordinary  plum. 

Sa-ku-ra-ya-ma  has  a gentle,  easy  ascent  on 
one  side,  but  the  other  is  a high  precipice. 
Little  flat  stones  like  small  earthen  plates  were 
sold  us,  that  we  might  throw  them  down  and 
tell  in  that  way  how  far  it  is  to  the  bottom. 
Through  a green  valley  flowed  the  Sumida, 
looking  like  a silver  thread  in  the  distance. 

In  the  coolness  of  the  evening  the  jin-ri-ki- 
shas  were  pulled  rapidly  home.  The  long 
summer  day  was  over,  but  the  recollections 
of  sunny  skies  and  fields  of  “living  green,” 


1872]  Midsummer  Holidays.  167 

of  fountains  and  clear,  running  streams,  of 
sweet  flowers  and  kind  friends — even  those 
of  another  land  and  speaking  a strange  lan- 
guage— linger  in  the  memory.  Yet  with  these 
memories  come  the  words  of  the  prophet : “ In 
that  day  shall  a fountain  be  opened  for  sin  and 
uncleanness,”  and  our  hearts  ask,  “When  will 
the  eyes  of  this  people  be  opened  to  see  it  ?” 

Another  day  we  went  in  a house-boat  a short 
distance  up  the  Sumida,  and  then  turned  off 
into  a canal  to  a distant  part  of  the  city  to 
visit  a temple  where  are  the  images  of  the 
deified  five  hundred  disciples  of  Buddha.  It 
was  another  festival-day,  and  the  crowd  in 
the  temple  prevented  us  from  examining 
the  statues,  as  we  wished  to  do.  Some  of 
the  figures  were  very  striking  in  their  ap- 
pearance, being  in  the  form  of  venerable  old 
men,  but  most  of  them  were  badly  mutilated. 
In  the  principal  temple,  which  was  old  and 
dilapidated,  priests  were  chanting  a service. 
One,  who  appeared  to  be  a high  priest,  with  a 
mitre  on  his  head  and  clothed  in  rich  robes,  sat 
on  an  elevated  chair.  Above  the  heads  of  all 
towered  an  immense  idol.  The  people  who 
thronged  the  temple  seemed  to  have  no  idea 
of  worship,  but  were  rude  and  noisy,  and 
many  of  them  drunk. 

That  night  was  the  end  of  O Bon,  a great 


i68 


[1872 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 

festival  which  continues  three  days.  During 
this  period  the  people  imagine  that  they  are 
entertaining  the  spirits  of  the  dead.  It  is  a 
long,  solemn  festival,  and  the  houses  are  swept 
and  feasts  prepared  before  it  begins.  It  is 
during  these  three  days  that  the  “ fan-dances  ” 
are  performed.  In  these  the  men,  who  are 
mostly  common  coolies,  or  jin-ri-ki-sha  men, 
move  in  a circle,  waving  their  fans  and  keeping 
time  gracefully  to  a weird  melody  which  they 
chant  in  unison.  As  we  came  down  the  river 
that  evening  we  saw  lanterns  floating  down 
with  the  tide,  and  lights  in  various  places  near 
the  shore.  The  spirits  were  supposed  to  go 
back  to  their  abodes  in  the  fire. 

But  the  greatest  festival  we  have  seen  this 
summer  was  the  Ka-wa  bi-7^a-ki,  the  “river-open- 
ing.” It  took  place  at  night,  and  the  display 
of  fireworks  attracted  thousands  of  people  to 
Ri-yo-go-ku  and  Ad-zu-ma  Bashi.  The  space 
between  these  two  bridges  was  filled  with  boats 
ornamented  with  gay  Chinese  lanterns ; while 
in  the  boats  people  were  dancing,  singing  and 
playing  on  sarnisens,  fifes  and  drums.  There 
was  nothing  remarkable  in  the  fireworks,  but 
the  whole  scene  was  most  animated. 

Exactly  what  the  meaning  of  this  feast  is  we 
cannot  ascertain.  Some  of  the  people  say  that 
it  has  something  to  do  with  a strange  super- 


1872] 


Midsummer  Holidays. 


1 69 


stition  concerning  a fabulous  water-monster, 
the  Kappa,  who  requires  to  be  periodically 
aroused  or  awakened. 

Another  of  our  pleasant  little  excursions  this 
summer  was  to  O So  so  sama,  a temple  in  the 
south-western  suburbs.  We  were  there  in  the 
evening,  and  the  gathering  darkness  rendered 
the  great  temple  in  the  solemn  grove  yet  more 
impressive.  A priest  showed  us  a number  of 
native  offerings  which  from  time  to  time  have 
been  made.  There  was  a quantity  of  human 
hair  hung  up,  and  very  singular  figures  painted 
or  carved  on  wood.  On  one  side  of  the  temple 
was  a garden.  Trees  had  been  trained  to  re- 
semble a line  of  hills,  and  the  effect  in  the  un- 
certain light  in  which  we  saw  them  was  most 
peculiar  and  beautiful.  The  talkative  priest 
also  showed  us  the  “holy  water,”  which  he 
said  would  cure  diseases  of  the  eye. 

Just  at  dusk  one  day  we  stood  in  an  old 
cemetery.  The  cemeteries  in  Japan,  which 
are  always  near  the  temples,  are  very  different 
from  those  we  see  in  our  country.  The  stones 
are  crowded  closely  together,  the  inscriptions 
are  in  Chinese  character,  and  in  some  stones 
a place  for  water  is  hollowed  out,  and  flowers, 
with  the  ever-green  leaves  of  the  camellia,  are 
kept  in  them. 

At  death  the  body  is  carefully  washed  and 

15 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1872 


1 70 


the  head  shaved.  The  dead  person  becomes 
a priest,  they  say.  The  relatives  gather  to- 
gether, and  there  is  much  noise  and  drinking. 
The  coffin  is  like  the  no-ri-mo-no,  and  the  dead 
are  buried  in  a sitting  posture.  Money  and 
shoes  are  often  placed  in  the  coffin  for  the 
use  of  the  deceased  on  his  journey  to  Hades. 
Then  the  corpse  is  carried  to  the  temple,  and 
from  thence  to  the  grave.  A new  name  is 
written  on  the  tombstone,  and  the  old  one  is 
sometimes  forgotten. 

One  joyful  event  has  marked  this  summer: 
the  foreign  church  has  been  dedicated.  It 
stands  near  the  mission-house.  A church 
dedicated  to  the  worship  of  the  true  God 
stands  in  the  midst  of  this  heathen  city. 
Praised  be  God  for  this  fact ! 

O Ka  san  brought  beautiful  white  flowers 
with  which  to  decorate  the  church,  and  said 
that  she  wanted  to  learn  about  our  way  of 
worship,  for  she  did  not  believe  in  idols  and 
had  none  in  her  house. 

It  has  been  pleasant  thus  to  go  about  the 
city  and  mingle  with  the  people ; but  often, 
seeing  the  multitudes  who  thronged  the  tem- 
ple-gates or  mingled  in  the  festivals,  or  even 
the  ordinary  crowds  in  the  streets,  a feeling 
of  responsibility,  and  almost  of  despair,  which 
was  wellnigh  unendurable,  would  steal  over  us. 


1872]  Midsummer  Holidays.  171 

and  we  would  cry  out  in  our  hearts,  “What 
ca7t  we  do  among  so  many?”  No  mission- 
ary is  a stranger  to  this  feeling.  Viewing 
mankind  in  the  mass  is  always  discouraging, 
but  there  is  one  thing  of  which  we  are  sure, 
and  on  that  we  lean : “ The  Lord  knoweth 
them  that  are  his.” 

Like  Paul  at  Corinth,  we  can  hear  him  say- 
ing unto  us,  “ I have  much  people  in  this  city.” 
For  there  are  here  in  this  very  city,  where  now 
heathenism  and  superstition  prevail,  many  who 
will  hear  of  the  Lord  Jesus,  believe  in  his  name, 
confess  him  before  men,  and  proclaim  him  to 
their  countrymen.  Some  of  them  may  have 
already  passed  middle  age,  some  may  be  strong 
men  and  women,  some  merry  toddling  children, 
and  some  little  feeble  babes.  The  Lord  knows 
them  all.  Their  names  are  written  in  his  book. 
We  do  not  know  them,  but  he  dojs.  May  we 
not  pray,  “Lead  them  to  us — lead  us  to  them”? 


CHAPTER  III. 


THE  GOSPEL  IN  JAPANESE. 


“ And  I saw  another  angel  fly  in  the  midst  of  heaven,  having  the 
everlasting  gospel,  to  preach  ...  to  every  nation  and  kindred  and 
tongue  and  people.” 


ARLY  in  October,  when  the  oranges 


were  turning  from  green  to  gold  and 
purple  grapes  and  figs  hung  from  vines  and 
trees,  when  persimmons,  red  and  yellow,  bent 
the  boughs  and  chrysanthemums  made  all  the 
city  gay  with  their  bright  colors,  there  came  a 
book  which  was  brighter  and  more  beautiful 
than  all  else  to  us  in  Tokio — the  Gospel  of 
Mark  in  the  Japanese  language. 

Who  of  the  early  missionaries  in  Japan  will 
ever  forget  that  volume,  with  its  yellow  paper 
covers  stitched  in  real  native  style,  and  Chinese 
characters  on  the  title-page  ? Who  will  forget 
with  what  joy  we  opened  the  book,  turning  the 
leaves  from  left  to  right,  and  read  in  Japanese 
the  first  words : “ The  beginning  of  the  gospel 
of  Jesus  Christ,  the  Son  of  God.”  Quickly 
following  Mark,  that  Gospel  which  so  concise- 


172 


1872]  The  Gospel  in  Japanese.  173 

ly  sets  forth  the  power  of  Christ,  came  John’s 
beautiful  Gospel  of  love. 

Those  who  know  something  of  the  Japanese 
language  can  appreciate  some  of  the  difficulties 
in  making  a translation  of  the  Scriptures  ac- 
ceptable to  the  people.  Let  us  look  at  some 
of  the  questions  which  have  to  be  considered 
by  translators. 

In  what  form  shall  the  Scripture  first  be 
given  to  the  people  Will  it  not  be  best  to 
put  it  in  colloquial,  so  that  all  can  read  it? 
That  is  something  easily  decided : it  will  not ; 
for  that  would  lower  the  character  of  the  trans- 
lation. That  being  settled,  what  form  of  book- 
language  will  it  be  best  to  use  ? Shall  it  be 
written  with  many  Chinese  characters  and  in 
high  literary  style,  that  it  may  please  the  schol- 
ars of  the  land  ? In  that  case  the  merchants, 
artisans  and  coolies,  women  and  little  children, 
will  not  be  able  to  understand  it  at  all.  Shall 
it  be  written  in  very  simple  language,  without 
the  Chinese  ? Then  all  the  great  scholars  will 
think  it  unworthy  of  notice.  And  while  we 
believe  that  God  “chooseth  the  foolish  things 
of  the  world  to  confound  the  wise,”  and  while 
our  hearts  yearn  toward  the  poor  and  lowly, 
we  cannot,  in  the  present  state  of  the  country, 
let  a translation  go  out  which  will  be  utterly 
despised.  Will  it,  then,  be  necessary  to  make 


174  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1872 

two  translations,  one  for  the  upper  and  one  for 
the  lower  classes  ? This  would  involve  great 
labor  and  expense,  and  it  is  not  deemed  expe- 
dient just  now. 

The  best  course  to  be  pursued  is  to  endeavor 
to  give  a translation  that  would  so  combine  the 
various  forms  of  book-language  as  to  be  gener- 
ally intelligible  and  free  from  the  charge,  on 
the  one  hand,  of  being  too  vulgar,  and,  on  the 
other  hand,  of  being  beyond  the  comprehension 
of  the  masses.  The  first  translations  will  ne- 
cessarily be  imperfect,  but  they  must  be  sent 
out  and  used  until,  in  the  years  to  come,  the 
final  accepted  version  shall  be  made. 

One  of  the  great  difficulties  is  in  the  selection 
of  the  characters  to  be  used.  Japanese  books 
are  invariably  made  up  of  a mixture  of  Hira- 
kana  and  Kata-kana,  with  Chinese  characters. 
The  Hira-kana  is  subject  to  many  changes,  as 
it  is  simply  the  reproduction  in  print  of  the 
chirography  of  the  author,  and  of  course  is  as 
varied  as  is  the  handwriting  of  different  authors. 
The  Kata-kana  is  fixed  and  is  more  like  our 
capitals,  and  yet  is  not  easily  read  by  the  peo- 
ple. The  translation  of  Mark  and  John  came 
out  in  the  Hira-kana,  with  a few  Chinese 
characters. 

Another  difficulty  arose  in  regard  to  the 
word  to  be  used  for  “Deity” — whether  it  would 


1872]  The  Gospel  in  Japanese.  175 

be  better  to  originate  a new  name  for  that 
purpose,  or  to  take  their  own  word,  Kami 
(“Sintoo  god”),  and  have  them  gradually  learn 
to  attach  a new  meaning  to  it.  The  latter  was 
considered  the  better  way.  The  heathen  will 
soon  learn  that  our  God  is  not  as  their  god. 

We  must  remember  that  the  beautiful  words 
of  Scripture,  which  have  been  familiar  to  us 
from  childhood,  mean  to  the  heathen  at  first, 
even  when  translated  into  their  own  language, 
simply  nothing.  Take,  for  instance,  the  expres- 
sions, “ Behold  the  Lamb  of  God,  which  taketh 
away  the  sin  of  the  world,”  and  “The  good 
Shepherd  giveth  his  life  for  the  sheep.”  What 
meaning  would  these  words  convey  to  this 
people,  who  know  nothing  of  pastoral  life,  and 
to  whom  the  very  existence  of  such  animals  as 
sheep  or  lambs  has  been  unknown  until  very 
lately  ? They  who  come  into  the  kingdom  have 
a new,  heavenly  language  to  learn,  but  the 
Holy  Spirit  is  a great  teacher,  and  they  who 
permit  themselves  to  be  drawn  under  the  power 
of  the  gospel  will  readily  acquire  its  language, 
while  little  children  who  come  into  the  mission- 
school  will  become  familiar  with  it  in  their  early 
years.  Thus  in  prayer  and  faith  the  gospel  is 
given  to  the  people. 

Wonderful  changes  are  taking  place  in  the 
empire.  We  realize  the  importance  of  the 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1872 


1 76 


events  of  the  day  and  the  record  they  will 
make  in  this  nation’s  history.  We  can  see 
the  hand  of  God  in  all,  though  they  do  not. 

The  imperial  railway  between  Tokio  and  Yo- 
kohama was  formally  opened  in  October,  and 
the  Mikado — the  once  secluded  “ Son  of  Hea- 
ven ” — was  present,  attended  by  his  nobles,  and 
with  the  crowds  of  Japanese  we  all  looked  into 
his  face  as  he  sat  upon  the  throne  which  had  been 
erected  at  one  end  of  a platform.  Pillars  beau- 
tifully decorated  with  chrysanthemums  (the  em- 
blem of  royalty)  lined  the  way  on  either  side  to 
the  throne.  Flags  of  all  nations  waved  in  the 
breeze,  and  a band  of  native  musicians,  led  by 
an  Englishman,  played  national  airs. 

The  ceremony  was  very  impressive.  The 
young  emperor  sat  upon  his  throne  with  much 
dignity,  and  his  lords  arranged  themselves  in 
rows  on  each  side.  All  were  clad  in  the  court- 
dress  of  ancient  times.  Papers  unintelligible  to 
us  were  read,  and  then  the  lords  and  the  em- 
peror, in  solemn,  slow  procession,  retired. 

Shi-bar,  the  ancient  sacred  spot,  which  no  one 
might  enter  save  the  tycoon  and  the  high  offi- 
cers, has  been  thrown  open  to  the  public.  A 
great  festival  was  held  there,  and  thousands 
of  people  thronged  the  temple-grounds,  eager 
to  gain  a view  of  the  holy  shrines.  The  priests, 
ever  ready  to  seize  on  such  occasions,  had  beg- 


ROKUllAN. 


J »•’ 


;■.  liiT  I 


*r  -iS^  %i  ^■« 

*»f<  ..tfew- ',u^n>i»i»  TwigiMft-*'?  yjsB ■:  jj 

''H  *Tl  ' iyi(  ~ ' Ifr’l*!  4*>7  fiSrr^Ml) 

.ttiir  «i#|’,'‘*H '*■*■'■■  »^ 

"T*  ’ jiii 


■'^♦w.!4To»n  •ir*-  J 

- •^|k”-Sy'f|k:  '^illil  titf"  j('  ^ ' 

;>  ^’••«v'»’^' ^4sue’*'  ^ 


1872]  The  Gospel  in  Japanese.  177 

ged  that  this  festival  might  be  held  in  order 
to  raise  money  for  the  temple. 

Another  great  change  has  been  in  regard  to 
the  reckoning  of  time.  Henceforth  the  Japan- 
ese year  will  commence  with  ours,  and  the 
seventh-day  rest — our  Sabbath — will  be  ob- 
served instead  of  the  Ichi  rokus  (“  one-six 
days”).  This  is  decidedly  the  most  hopeful 
change  that  has  taken  place.  It  will  seem 
almost  like  an  actual  recognition  of  Chris- 
tianity when  the  next  step  is  taken  and  they 
begin  to  reckon  their  years  from  the  Chris- 
tian era.  Of  course  the  people  know  noth- 
ing of  the  sacredness  of  our  Sabbath,  but  it 
is  much  gained  that  they  now  are  obliged 
in  some  measure  to  regard  it. 

But  we  must  go  back  to  the  little  school  at 
Ro-ku-ban.  The  schoolhouse,  designed  also 
as  a chapel,  was  finished  in  November ; it 
stands  at  one  side  of  the  new  mission-house. 
The  walls  are  tiled  on  the  outside  and  penciled 
with  white  plaster.  The  room  inside  is  about 
twenty-four  feet  in  length  and  sixteen  in 
breadth.  The  ceiling  is  high,  and  the  floor 
covered  with  a neat  matting.  From  all  of 
its  six  windows  we  can  see  the  bay.  A small 
stove  heats  the  room,  and  on  a platform  are 
the  blackboard  and  a little  organ,  while  pic- 
tures, maps  and  mottoes  adorn  the  walls. 

M 


178 


The  Sum'ise  Kingdofii. 


[1872 


Over  the  blackboard  is  ‘ the  motto,  “ Little 
children,  love  one  another.”  At  the  front 
door  are  shelves  for  shoes : they  are  apt 

to  be  greatly  in  the  way  when  no  such  ar- 
rangement is  made.  This  room  is  a great 
comfort  to  us  all,  and  the  girls  seem  to  enjoy 
it  much. 

One  of  the  ya-cu-nins  at  the  custom-house 
(Kidera)  brought  his  daughter  Chiye  (“Wis- 
dom ”)  to  school  this  fall.  She  is  a bright, 
rosy-cheeked  girl,  and  a most  diligent  scholar. 

December  was  a cold  month,  and  the  snow, 
which  usually  does  not  fall  in  Tokio  until  Feb- 
ruary, found  its  way  to  us  then.  Our  little 
schoolroom  looked  pleasant  and  cheery  on 
one  of  those  snowy  days  in  December.  The 
wind  came  from  the  north  and  the  snow 
fell  all  day,  but  the  fire  was  kindled  early 
and  the  door  opened. 

Ko-ba-ya-shi  san,  a studious  girl,  who  is 
always  called  by  her  family-name;  and  I-no, 
a faithful  little  scholar,  arrived  first,  stamping 
their  feet  and  shaking  the  snow  from  umbrel- 
las and  cloaks  before  they  came  in.  Then 
came  our  funny  little  Toyo,  on  the  back  of 
a man-servant.  Her  head  was  wrapped  in 
a purple  cloth  {dzukiii).  Almost  all  of  these 
dzukins  are  purple,  and  when  the  girls  come 
with  their  heads  wrapped  up  in  them  it  is 


1872]  The  Gospel  m Japanese.  179 

impossible  to  distinguish  one  from  the  other. 
This  little  damsel  took  off  dzukin,  mino  (“  rain- 
coat”) and  shoes  {geta),  and  ran  across  the 
floor  in  her  bare  feet.  It  always  seemed 
strange  to  have  these  little  ladies,  with  their 
rich  robes,  running  about  barefooted.  Next 
came  a jin-ri-ki-sha  man,  toiling  through  the 
snow  with  O I-ne  san  and  her  mother. 

The  afternoon  passed  away  quickly,  while 
lessons  were  read  in  the  schoolroom  and  the 
fire  blazed  in  the  stove  and  the  snow  fell  over 
the  city  and  into  the  dark  water.  Then  the 
girls  had  a merry  time  getting  ready  to  go 
home. 

They  all  learn  well.  Besides  their  reading- 
lessons,  they  have  oral  exercises  on  the  map 
of  the  world,  learning  about  different  countries, 
and  also  spelling-lessons.  The  Catechism  for 
Young  Children  is  faithfully  studied,  and  every 
day  they  sing.  Their  Bible  verses  are  written 
in  large  letters  upon  the  blackboard,  and  trans- 
lated for  them  word  by  word.  Each  word 
is  precious  seed  sown  in  their  hearts,  and 
the  ya-cu-nins  cannot  steal  it  away.  O Ka 
san  has  bought  a copy  of  the  Gospel  of 
Mark. 

The  year  ended  happily  for  us,  because 
great  progress  had  been  made  in  the  work. 
Old  Fu-ji  looked  out  from  behind  the  clouds 


i8o  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1872 

when  the  sun  set  for  the  last  time  that  year, 
but  the  gospel  Sun  has  arisen  upon  Japan. 
Light  is  so  penetrating ! Even  those  who 
try  to  shut  up  their  hearts  to  prevent  its 
entrance  must  know  that  the  Sun  is  shining. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


LOAVES  AND  FISHES. 


“ And  Jesus  took  the  loaves  ; and  when  he  had  given  thanks,  he 
distributed  to  the  disciples,  and  the  disciples  to  them  that  were  set 
down  ; and  likewise  of  the  fishes,  as  many  as  they  would.” 


NE  Friday  we  had  for  our  lesson  in  school 


the  story  of  that  scene  on  the  Lake  of 
Tiberias  when  Jesus  lifted  up  his  eyes  to  see 
the  hungry  multitudes  who  had  followed  him 
so  many  hours  and  listened  to  his  words,  and 
having  compassion  on  them  asked  Philip,  say- 
ing, “Where  shall  we  buy  bread,  that  these 
may  eat?”  We  talked  together  of  the  lad 
who  had  the  “ five  barley -loaves  and  the  two 
small  fishes,”  and  of  how  he  had  given  them 
to  Jesus,  and  how  in  his  hands  they  multiplied 
and  multiplied  until  all  that  great  multitude 
had  enough  and  to  spare.  What  if  the  dis- 
ciples had  rejected  the  few  small  loaves  and 
fishes  as  being  indeed  nothing  among  so 
many  ? Then  the  people  would  have  gone 
away  faint  and  starving.  What  if  they  had 
tried  to  go  about  the  villages  to  buy  bread? 
They  would  never  have  obtained  enoug^i. 

IG  181 


1 82  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1873 

Oh,  well  it  was  that  they  took  the  little  they 
had  and  gave  it  to  Jesus! 

The  simple  gospel  narrative  has  ever  been 
in  my  thoughts  since  I read  it  with  the  girls, 
and  mingles  with  them  now  as  I write  the  story 
of  the  last  few  months,  the  record  of  daily 
routine — always  pleasant,  never  monotonous — 
in  the  schoolroom ; the  record  of  little  every- 
day duties,  nothing  calling  forth  any  great 
amount  of  courage  or  fortitude,  all  being  the 
same  old  story  which  every  missionary  can 
tell  of  “ loaves  and  fishes  ” given  in  faith  to 
the  Lord  Jesus,  believing  that  he  can  multi- 
ply them  until  thousands  of  hungry  souls 
are  fed. 

Bright  dawned  the  new  year,  1873.  The 
house  was  ornamented  with  nan-ten  and  flowers, 
and  the  little  girls  came  in  the  morning,  dress- 
ed in  their  best,  with  belts  of  heavy  silk,  and 
new  hairpins  in  their  hair.  They  had  all  learn- 
ed our  form  of  salutation,  “ I wish  you  a happy 
New  Year;”  so  we  exchanged  greetings  in 
English.  When  O Ka  san  came,  she  pre- 
sented, in  the  name  of  the  scholars  and  in 
a most  graceful  manner.  New  Year’s  gifts  to 
their  teacher — ducks,  oranges  and  dried  per- 
simmons. After  they  had  all  sung  some  hymns 
they  went  away  to  enjoy  the  day  at  their  own 
homes  with  battledores  and  shuttlecocks. 


Loaves  and  Fishes. 


*«73] 


183 


The  first  Sabbath  of  the  year  was  a bright, 
pleasant  day.  O Ka  san  brought  some  camel- 
lias and  plum-blossoms.  The  girls  read  the 
first  ten  verses  of  the  eleventh  chapter  of  Mat- 
thew in  English,  and  Ko-ba-ya-shi  san  read  in 
Line  upon  Line  after  the  others  had  gone.  We 
talked  of  the  blood  upon  the  door-posts  and  of 
the  precious  blood  of  Christ.  The  girls  have 
little  hymn-books  of  their  own  now,  and  enjoy 
them  much. 

The  school,  through  the  winter,  was  not 
quite  so  prosperous  as  it  had  been.  The 
Japanese  are  not  a strong  people,  and  are 
liable  to  consumption,  insufficient  food  and 
clothing  being  the  principal  causes,  so  that 
cold  weather  does  not  seem  to  increase  their 
energy. 

A man,  by  name  Takahashi,  came  in  Janu- 
ary to  inquire  about  the  school  for  his  sister- 
in-law,  O Yasu  san,  a gentle,  pleasant  girl, 
who  entered  soon  after.  We  have  heard  that 
this  man  has  been  to  missionaries  of  each 
different  faith,  Roman  Catholic,  Greek  and 
Protestant,  to  make  inquiries  concerning  re- 
ligion. 

■ One  day  we  read  in  a Yokohama  paper 
that  toleration  in  religious  matters  had  been 
proclaimed  It  was  joyful  news  to  us,  but 
the  report  proved  to  be  without  foundation, 


184 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1873 


for  in  June  there  began  to  be  whispered 
again  apprehensions  of  the  dreaded  ya-cu- 
nins.  Some  of  the  girls  were  afraid  to  come 
to  the  little  Sabbath-school,  which  had  been 
so  faithfully  attended  during  the  winter  and 
spring. 

Ko-ba-ya-shi  san,  who  was  afraid  of  the  offi- 
cers, sent  a note  in  which  she  said,  “I  know 
it  (Christianity)  is  an  important  thing,  but  it 
is  not  permitted.” 

I asked  O Ka  san  if  she  was  afraid  to  come 
to  the  Sunday-school,  and  she  said,  “ No ; I 
think  I will  come,”  but  added,  “ I do  not  care 
for  myself,  but  I-ne  is  so  little  yet.”  Poor 
people!  it  is  hard  that  they  cannot  worship 
as  they  please. 

We  found  in  the  school-yard  one  day  a 
little  amulet,  and  on  opening  it  discovered  a 
cross  made  of  two  pieces  of  twisted  paper, 
with  the  name  “Jesus”  written  on  another 
paper.  It  was  I-ne’s.  I said,  “ Why,  O Ka 
san,  what  does  this  mean  ?”  and  she  said, 
“I-ne  wanted  the  name  of  Jesus  in  her  amu- 
let.” She  tells  me  that  I-ne  and  Sen  ki-chi 
pray  to  Jesus,  never  minding  the  ridicule  of 
the  rest  of  the  family.  The  story  of  the  first 
prayer  that  I have  heard  of  among  the  schol- 
ars is  touching.  O Ka  san  says  that  I-ne  for- 
merly sang  lies,  but  now  she  has  good,  true 


Loaves  and  Fishes, 


1873] 


185 


songs  to  sing — the  hymns  she  has  learned 
at  school. 

We  hear  rumors  of  the  probable  dismissal 
of  all  Christian  teachers  from  the  government 
schools.  It  is  trying  to  have  to  encounter 
all  these  things,  after  the  bright  hopes  of  the 
winter,  but  no  one  is  discouraged. 

The  castle  was  burned  one  cold  night  in 
March,  and  the  emperor  has  taken  refuge  in 
the  house  of  his  mother.  Some  of  the  peo- 
ple saw  the  occupants  of  the  palace  as  they 
were  forced  thus  suddenly  from  their  seclusion, 
and  told  how  the  court-ladies  in  their  white 
robes  ran  affrighted  through  the  streets  of 
the  city  in  the  early  morning. 

Some  young  men  called,  not  long  ago,  to 
consult  about  revising  some  of  the  Chinese 
Christian  literature,  translating  it  into  a style 
of  Japanese  writing  which  will  be  intelligible 
to  the  people.  Whether  they  will  carry  out 
their  purpose  time  alone  will  prove.  Many 
things  are  begun  in  Japan  which  are  never 
finished ; but  we  stop  to  talk  with  all  who 
come,  and  listen  to  their  plans. 

The  new  house  is  completed,  and  the  third 
story  has  been  made  into  a dormitory  for 
the  Japanese  girls  who  may  want  to  come 
and  live  in  the  house.  The  large  windows 
at  each  end  of  the  room  give  light  and  air. 


186 


The  Smirise  Kingdom.  [1873 

Japanese  slides  divide  it  into  little  compart- 
ments. The  ceiling  is  papered,  and  there  is 
a pretty  blue-and-gold  paper  around  the  win- 
dows. The  veranda  makes  a nice  place  for 
the  girls  to  play. 

The  first  girl  who  came  to  live  with  us  was 
O Toki  san.  She  was  a very  studious  girl, 
and  a Chinese  scholar.  She  would  sometimes 
tell  of  her  wish,  in  early  childhood,  for  an 
education  beyond  what  was  deemed  sufficient 
for  girls,  and  of  the  sneers  and  jeers  she  en- 
dured in  endeavoring  to  accomplish  her  desires,, 
being  obliged  to  attend  a boys’  school.  She 
read  with  me  the  Gospel  of  John,  but  it 
seemed  to  make  no  impression  on  her  heart. 
Only  last  month  three  sisters — I-so,  Kuma 
and  Nori — and  a little  cousin  of  theirs  entered 
our  family.  The  father  of  these  girls,  Mr. 
Koga,  came  with  them,  accompanied  by  a dai- 
mio,  and  they  brought  flowers  and  cake  and 
crape.  It  is  pleasant  to  see  the  fathers  so  in- 
terested in  the  education  of  their  daughters. 

Life  in  the  mission-house  now  is  very  dif- 
ferent from  the  loneliness  of  days  gone  by. 
The  house  is  filled  with  the  sounds  of  chil- 
dren’s laughter,  and  echoes  to  the  patter  of 
children’s  feet.  They  seem  very  busy  and 
happy.  The  little  hymn,  “Jesus  loves  me,” 
has  been  translated  into  Japanese,  and  we 


Loaves  and  Fishes, 


187 


i»73] 


have  now  The  Catechism  for  Young  Children — 
The  Happy  Book,  which  is  its  name  in  their 
language.  Matthew’s  Gospel,  with  a map  of 
Palestine,  has  come  to  us,  and  we  have  the 
fujika  no  mo-no  gatari  (“  The  Themes  of  the 
Cross''^,  written  in  simple  language,  the  first 
tract  put  forth  in  Japanese.  For  all  these 
things  we  are  truly  thankful. 

Last  Friday  we  read  the  hymn  “ Beautiful 
Zion  ” and  had  it  explained.  The  day  was 
excessively  warm,  and  the  text  written  on 
the  blackboard  was,  “ Neither  shall  the  sun 
light  upon  them,  nor  any  heat.”  The  lesson 
was  on  heaven,  and  the  girls  seemed  much 
interested. 

It  is  hard  to  have  the  little  flock  dispersed, 
for  it  is  scarcely  probable  that  they  can  all 
be  gathered  together  again.  They  have  learn- 
ed a great  deal  this  session.  Their  faces 
show  that  their  minds  are  developed,  and 
they  understand  a few  great  truths.  Every 
day  they  have  a verse  written  on  the  black- 
board, and  they  copy  it  on  their  slates.  To- 
day the  verse  was,  “ I am  the  good  Shepherd.” 

The  girls  have  become  very  dear  to  their 
teacher.  To  tell  the  message  of  salvation 
to  these  precious  souls  is  worth  any  sacrifice. 
Since  January  only  three  have  left  the  school, 
and  the  number  on  the  roll  has  increased  to 


1 88 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1873 


seventeen,  while  the  attendance  has  been  more 
regular.  Nor  is  this  all.  Through  the  girls 
we  have  gained  access  to  their  homes,  and 
now  we  can  talk  to  them  about  father  and 
mother  and  brothers  and  sisters. 

A pleasant  day  was  recently  spent  with 
Ko-ba-ya-shi  san.  She  came  with  jin-ri-ki- 
shas,  and  we  went  to  her  home,  in  the  direc- 
tion of  Shi-ba.  The  mother  met  us  at  the 
gate  and  gave  a pleasant  welcome  to  her 
daughter’s  teacher,  and  all  day  they  enter- 
tained their  foreign  guest  with  the  greatest 
ease  and  grace.  They  showed  me  pictures 
and  books  and  took  me  to  Atago  yama,  a 
high  place  back  of  the  city,  to  point  out  the 
view.  The  aunt,  who  is  quite  a musician, 
played  on  the  ko-to  and  sang.  The  old  father 
is  very  fond  of  flowers  and  has  a pretty  gar- 
den, and  there  is  an  uncle  who  is  a flower- 
painter.  They  had  works  on  botany  and  paint- 
ings of  flowers. 

And  I have  been  in  O Toki  san’s  house, 
near  the  castle,  and  to  I-no’s  pleasant  home, 
in  the  suburbs,  and  to  see  O Rin  san  and  O 
Chiye  san,  in  the  neighborhood  of  Ts’kiji,  and 
also  to  visit  I-so  and  Kuma  and  Nori’s  home 
in  the  old  ya-shi-ki  where  the  poor  dear 
little  blind  baby  is. 

Who  will  not  say  that  the  “ loaves  and  fishes 


1873] 


Loaves  and  Fishes, 


189 


are  multiplying?  Sometimes  we  long  to  do 
some  great  thing,  to  go  and  preach  to  the 
multitudes,  endure  great  hardships,  and  then 
the  story  of  the  “loaves  and  fishes”  comes 
with  comfort  to  our  hearts.  Better  give  a 
little  to  Jesus  than  to  try  to  do  a great  deal 
of  ourselves. 


CHAPTER  V. 

THE  HOLY  SPIRIT  ALONE. 

Except  a man  be  bom  of  water  and  of  the  Spirit,  he  cannot 
enter  into  the  kingdom  of  God.” 

WE  stood,  one  day,  at  Sakura-yama  and 
looked  down  on  the  village  of  O-ji, 
lying  far  below  us.  The  houses  looked  pleas- 
ant in  the  summer  sunlight,  and  the  simple- 
hearted  people  were  quietly  pursuing  their 
customary  easy  tasks.  From  one  place  and 
another  smoke  curled  lazily  upward.  In  the 
distance  gleamed  the  Sumida,  and  O-ji  creek 
ran  swiftly  over  rocks  at  the  foot  of  the  hill. 
We  could  not  see  the  sunny  fountains,  but 
knew  that  only  a short  distance  away  they 
were  leaping  and  sparkling  just  as  when  we 
saw  them  last  year. 

Gazing  on  that  peaceful  scene,  the  thought 
arose,  “Is  it  wise  or  best  to  disturb  this  peo- 
ple in  their  present  state  of  content?”  The 
gospel  often  brings,  not  peace,  but  a sword. 
“ The  brother  shall  betray  the  brother  to 
death,  the  father  the  son,  and  children  shall 
rise  up  against  their  parents.”  “ He  that  knew 

190 


1873] 


The  Holy  Spirit  Alone, 


191 


not,  and  did  commit  things  worthy  of  stripes, 
shall  be  beaten  with  few  stripes.”  Is  it  well 
thus  to  make  the  irresponsible  responsible  ? 
We  long  so  earnestly  that  the  seed  which  is 
sown  in  the  girls’  hearts  may  spring  up  and 
bear  fruit ; yet  when  it  does,  there  will  surely 
be  a time  of  trouble  for  them — perhaps  even 
of  persecution. 

Let  not  any  one  wonder  that  such  thoughts 
arise  in  the  heart  of  a missionary.  It  is  well 
to  stop  sometimes  and  consider  carefully  what 
we  are  doing,  and  it  is  well  not  only  for  us, 
but  for  those  who  are  helping  us ; for  letters 
from  across  the  sea  tell  us  of  societies  organ- 
ized and  mission-bands  formed,  that  women 
and  children  at  home  may  work  better  with 
us  among  “ the  women  and  children  in  hea-% 
then  lands.”  Let  us  see  if  even  children  who 
give  their  pennies  for  the  heathen  cannot  un- 
derstand the  reasons  why  we  send  the  gospel 
to  them. 

Every  Christian  is  a soldier.  We  have  all 
entered  into  the  army  of  the  great  King,  and 
are  bound  to  obey  his  commands,  whether  we 
fully  understand  them  or  not ; and  when  he 
says,  “ Go,  win  those  lands  for  me,”  must  we 
look  over  into  the  enemy’s  country  and  say, 
“O  Lord,  they  are  all  content  with  what  they 
have.  Their  fields  are  very  fair,  their  homes 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1873 


192 


look  peaceful  and  pleasant ; we  would  not 
disturb  them  in  their  quietness,  and  bring  trou- 
ble and  fire  and  sword”?  No;  we  must  obey 
his  command.  It  will  not  do,  in  religion,  in 
science,  or  in  anything  else,  to  keep  back  the 
truth  from  the  people  because  they  may  be 
happier  or  less  responsible  in  a state  of  igno- 
rance. The  King’s  army  bears  aloft  the  ban- 
ners of  truth,  and  with  them  we  must  push 
on  until  all  the  world  be  won. 

But  let  us  look  at  Japan  and  the  Japanese 
more  closely.  Under  all  this  lovely  landscape 
are  hidden  elements  of  destruction  ; at  almost 
any  moment  the  earth  may  open  and  swallow 
us  up.  And  the  longer  we  dwell  among  this 
people,  the  more  sensibly  do  we  realize  that 
there  is  also  deep  degradation  and  misery  un- 
derlying all  their  fair  and  pleasant  exterior. 

We  have  seen  how  goodly  is  this  land,  how 
bright  its  skies  and  how  sweet  its  flowers,  and 
have  seen,  too,  how  fond  the  people  are  of  all 
these  things,  and  yet  how  far  their  hearts  are 
from  purity  and  holiness.  We  have  heard  some- 
thing of  their  gods,  and  know  that  most  revolt- 
ing tales  are  told  concerning  them  ; we  have 
looked  upon  the  temples,  to  find  that  under 
their  very  shadow  the  grossest  sins  are  com- 
mitted and  the  vilest  language  used.  We 
have  found  in  their  books  some  good  moral 


1 873]  The  Holy  Spirit  Alone.  193 

maxims,  and  even  some  which  bear  resem- 
blance to  the  teachings  of  Christ ; and  their 
laws  and  injunctions  concerning  obedience  to 
parents  and  other  virtues  show  us  that  the 
commandments  involving  man’s  duty  to  his 
fellow-man  are  written  in  their  hearts.  They 
know  what  is  right  and  wrong  as  well  as 
we  do,  but  all  this,  while  we  see  the  degra- 
dation of  the  people,  only  proves  to  us  that 
man  cannot  make  himself  good. 

The  Japanese  are  a cultivated  people.  Their 
books,  to  be  sure,  do  not  teach  them  much 
that  is  useful,  but  their  minds  are  disciplined 
by  the  study  to  which  they  are  obliged  to 
apply  themselves.  In  Japan  religion  and  sci- 
ence have  literally  gone  “ hand  in  hand.”  In 
some  countries  missionaries  make  both  the 
schools  and  the  literature,  but  here  we  have 
to  strain  every  nerve  to  make  our  schools  as 
good  as  those  of  the  natives. 

We  have  seen  this  people  in  the  early  dawn 
of  their  new  life,  almost  in  the  darkness,  and 
yet  struggling  for  something — they  scarcely 
know  what.  We  have  seen  them  running 
eagerly  after  Western  science  and  civilization, 
and  have  marked  their  rapid  progress.  Even 
before  we  came  to  Tokio  the  great  govern- 
ment-school for  boys  (Kai-sei  yak-ko)  had 
been  established.  German,  French  and  Eng- 
17  N 


194 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1873 

lish  teachers  are  employed  there,  and  thou- 
sands of  boys  and  young  men  may  now  re- 
ceive a complete  education  in  the  science  and 
literature  of  these  different  nations.  A gov- 
ernment-school for  girls  was  opened  just  about 
the  time  that  the  mission-school  was  beofun,  and 
a foreign  lady  employed  as  teacher.  Rail- 
roads have  been  built,  and  the  telegraph  is  in 
active  operation.  We  have  seen  the  emperor 
come  out  from  his  seclusion  and  many  walls 
of  superstition  broken  down,  but  we  believe 
that  Japan  can  never  be  holy  and  happy  with- 
out the  Bible. 

The  simple  creed  of  the  missionary  is  this : 
“ I believe  that  all  men  have  wandered  away 
from  God ; I believe  that  the  one  way  back 
to  God  is  through  Christ ; I believe  that  only 
by  the  breath  of  the  Holy  Spirit  upon  the 
word,  as  it  is  sown  in  the  hearts  of  men,  can 
they  be  purified  and  made  fit  to  enter  heaven.” 
And  so  with  earnestness  and  faith  we  sow  the 
seed,  and  we  are  glad  to  have  those  at  home 
working  with  us.  For  them  too  a “ door  ” is 
“ open.”  They  too  can  give  in  faith  “ loaves 
and  fishes”  to  the  Saviour.  They  too  can 
pray  for  the  blessing  of  the  Spirit. 

What  says  the  children’s  Happy  Book? 
“ Can  any  one  go  to  heaven,  with  this  sinful 
nature?  No;  our  hearts  must  be  changed 


1873]  The  Holy  Spirit  Alone.  195 

before  we  can  be  fit  for  heaven.” — “What 
power  can  change  a sinner’s  heart?  The 
Holy  Spirit  alone.”  And  with  the  sound  of 
the  summer  wind  ever  mingle  the  words  of 
the  text,  “The  wind  bloweth  where  it  listeth, 
and  thou  hearest  the  sound  thereof,  but  canst 
not  tell  whence  it  cometh  and  whither  it  goeth : 
so  is  every  one  that  is  born  of  the  Spirit. 

The  days  pass  quickly  at  Ro-ku-ban.  It 
seems  but  a little  while  since,  in  the  spring 
and  early  summer,  we  looked  for  wild  straw- 
berries and  vines  and  flowers  on  the  common, 
and  twined  them  around  the  vases  and  picture- 
frames,  and  opened  all  the  windows  to  let  in 
the  air.  Now  there  are  fires  in  the  grates,  and 
the  windows  are  closed ; the  children  gather 
beautiful  fall  grasses  and  autumn  leaves. 

Since  September  we  have  all  been  busy  in 
school.  We  have  a catechism  class  entirely 
in  Japanese  on  Wednesdays,  which  all  the 
older  girls  attend  regularly ; we  also  close 
with  prayer  in  the  native  tongue.  It  was  hard 
at  first  to  use  this  language  in  prayer  to  God, 
for  a new  form  of  expression  had  to  be  ac- 
quired in  addressing  the  Deity ; but  after  the 
form  of  petition  had  been  learned  the  rest 
became  easy,  and  we  found  how  true  it  is : 


Prayer  is  the  simplest  form  of  speech 
3'hat  infant  lips  can  try.” 


196  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1873 

One  of  the  girls  bought  an  extra  Happy 
Book  to  leave  at  home  for  her  parents. 

One  day  the  girls  had  a good  native  elder 
from  Yokohama  (O-ku-no)  to  talk  and  pray 
with  them.  And  now  O-ku-no  and  another 
elder,  Ongawa,  have  gone  on  a journey  to- 
gether, the  first  missionary-tour.  They  knelt 
down  and  prayed  before  they  started.  We 
have  not  heard  from  them  yet,  but  we  follow 
them  with  our  prayers. 

Our  children  are  studying  the  map  of  Pal- 
estine. Even  the  little  ones  have  learned  the 
mountains,  lakes,  rivers  and  cities  of  Pales- 
tine, and  they  know  it  is  called  “The  Holy 
Land.” 

The  work  is  all-absorbing.  There  are  cares 
and  anxieties  in  it,  and  it  is  hard  to  know 
just  what  is  right  sometimes,  but  we  trust 
that  God  is  guiding  us. 

Our  lesson  last  Sabbath  was  on  the  indwell- 
ing of  the  Holy  Spirit,  our  bodies  being  the 
temples  of  the  Holy  Ghost.  It  was  a new 
doctrine  to  the  girls,  and  they  listened  atten- 
tively, finding  their  proof-texts  with  interest. 
Next  Sabbath  their  lesson  will  be  on  faith. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


CHRISTMAS  AT  RO-KU-BAN. 

“We  love  to  sing  around  our  King, 
And  hail  him  blessed  Jesus, 

For  there’s  no  word  ear  ever  heard 
So  dear,  so  sweet,  as  ‘ Jesus.’  ” 


HAT  a New  Year’s  day  for  Tokio ! 


The  wind  is  from  the  north ; the  water 
is  cold  and  dark.  All  day  snow  has  been  fall- 
ing, and  the  trees  and  roofs  of  the  houses  are 
covered  with  it.  The  girls  could  not  come  to 
give  their  usual  greetings  and  little  presents 
to  their  teacher.  In  the  afternoon  we  took 
a walk  in  the  storm.  The  streets  were  almost 
deserted,  but  within-doors  the  families  seemed 
to  be  enjoying  the  day.  Sounds  of  laughter 
and  singing,  with  the  familiar  twang  of  the 
samisens,  reached  our  ears. 

Our  house  is  quiet  without  the  girls,  who 
are  at  home  spending  their  New  Year’s  holi- 
days. We  have  had  a great  deal  of  earnest 
work  during  the  last  fall.  There  have  been 
four  classes  to  be  taught.  The  older  girls, 
who  have  been  longest  in  the  school,  have 

17*  r^7 


19^  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1873 

been  reading  in  an  elementary  book  on  physi- 
ology and  universal  history.  There  has  been 
a Second  Reader  class,  and  one  in  a little  book 
called  First  Footsteps  in  the  Way  of  Knowledge, 
which  the  little  ones  enjoy,  and  there  is  always 
a class  of  beginners,  for  new  scholars  are  con- 
stantly coming  in.  The  last  hour  in  school 
is  occupied  in  general  exercises — spelling,  ge- 
ography, Bible  verses  and  singing. 

These  girls,  have  very  retentive  memories. 
It  is  wonderful  to  hear  them,  even  the  little 
ones,  repeat  their  English  lessons,  but  they 
are  too  apt  to  repeat  without  trying  to  under- 
stand, and  we  find  that  great  care  has  to  be 
taken  in  training  their  minds.  Constant  re- 
view is  necessary.  Their  delicacy  of  constitu- 
tion and  weakness  of  eyes  in  many  cases  are 
serious  drawbacks  to  their  education.  Espe- 
cially in  the  winter  long  intervals  of  rest  are 
necessary  to  some  of  the  most  delicate  ones. 
In  the  school  of  twenty-five  girls  some  have 
already  been  marked  by  their  teacher  as  schol- 
ars of  peculiar  ability  and  promise. 

The  Japanese  seemed  to  us  at  first  all  alike, 
but  as  we  become  better  acquainted  with  them 
we  can  see  the  diversity  of  character.  To 
speak  of  the  scholars  generally,  we  can  say 
with  truth  that  they  learn  well  and  are  dili- 
gent in  attendance,  gentle,  and  respectful  in 


i873]  Christmas  at  Ro-ku-ban.  199 

their  manners.  Some  are  full  of  fun  and  a 
little  noisy  at  times,  but  a word  or  a look  is 
sufficient  to  restrain  them.  The  class  of  little 
ones  is  very  interesting.  It  is  amusing  some- 
times to  see  how  earnestly  they  study,  never 
pretending  to  play.  Their  little  grave  faces 
are  bent  over  their  slates  as  if  some  great 
result  depended  on  the  work  being  done  well. 

Japanese  music  is  very  different  from  ours, 
but  the  girls  seem  to  enjoy  much  our  style 
of  singing.  Most  of  them  can  now  sing  by 
note,  and  their  voices  sometimes  sound  very 
sweetly. 

The  Sabbath-school,  which  has  been  carried 
on  without  molestation  from  the  ya-cu-nins,  has 
usually  been  a little  smaller  than  the  day-school. 
Some  of  the  girls  even  now  seem  to  have  se- 
rious thoughts  about  God  and  the  world  to 
come.  O Chiye  san,  the  daughter  of  the 
custom-house  officer,  appears  at  times  very 
thoughtful.  I talk  with  her,  but  it  is  hard  to 
win  our  way  to  the  hearts  of  this  people. 
Their  politeness  forms  a smooth  surface  which 
it  is  hard  to  penetrate.  We  feel  sometimes 
as  if  we  were  getting  in,  but  soon  find  our- 
selves slipping  off  again. 

Christmas  in  Japan, — We  were  busy  for 
some  days  in  preparing  for  Christmas,  our 
first  celebration  of  the  day  as  a school.  It 


200  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1873 

was  like  Christmas  in  the  home-land  to  have 
to  keep  the  children  away  from  the  parlor 
while  the  tree  was  being  prepared. 

The  servants  helped  with  the  outside  dec- 
orations. Over  the  gate  was  an  arch  of  ever- 
greens ; around  the  front  door  was  another 
arch,  of  green  leaves  and  yellow  chrysanthe- 
mums. In  the  veranda,  just  at  the  entrance, 
was  a large  Chinese  lantern,  with  “ Merry 
Christmas !”  painted  on  it.  In  the  hall,  just 
over  the  parlor-door,  was  the  word  “Wel- 
come !”  in  gilt  letters,  with  a wreath  around 
it.  The  top  of  the  chandelier  was  ornament- 
ed with  flowers,  and  the  words  “ God  Bless 
our  Home  ” were  wreathed  with  evergreens. 
In  the  niche  on  the  stairs  was  a vase  of  beau- 
tiful flowers,  and  the  framed  motto  “ God  is 
Love  ” was  also  ornamented.  A wreath  of 
vines  and  evergreens,  with  the  bright  nan-ten, 
hung  in  festoons  from  the  ceiling,  and  at  dif- 
ferent points  around  the  room  were  large  bou- 
quets. At  each  end  of  the  bay-window  was 
a beautiful  gilt  star. 

Near  the  bay-window  stood  our  beautiful 
tree,  with  straight  branches  and  reaching  to 
the  ceiling.  We  had  Japanese  candies  made 
in  all  sorts  of  shapes  for  ornament.  At  the 
top  of  the  tree  was  a large  fish,  which  looked 
very  much  as  if  it  were  out  of  its  element. 


1873]  Christmas  at  Ro-ku-ban.  201 

There  was  a candy  man  and  woman  dangling 
from  the  limbs,  and  horses,  melons,  gourds  and 
cucumbers,  all  of  which  looked  very  bright 
and  pretty.  For  the  girls  there  were  small 
bags  filled  with  foreign  candy  and  apples  and 
Chinese  oranges.  There  were  three  lanterns 
back  of  the  tree,  and  we  had  all  the  lamps 
lighted. 

Japanese  girls  do  not  go  out  much  at  night, 
but  all  the  scholars  were  present  on  this  eve 
of  Christmas.  They  assembled  in  the  school- 
room and  entered  the  parlor  together,  arrang- 
ing themselves,  according  to  direction,  on  each 
side  of  the  organ.  They  looked  very  nice  in 
their  dresses  of  silk  and  crape  and  heavy  silk 
sashes,  with  their  bright  hairpins.  They  first 
sang  “There  is  no  name,”  etc.,  then  “Autumn,” 
and  after  that  chanted  the  twenty-third  Psalm. 
Then  reward-cards  marked  with  the  number 
of  times  they  had  been  present  during  the 
session  were  distributed.  Two  Christmas 
hymns  were  then  sung:  “We  three  kings 

of  Orient  are,”  and  “Who  is  He  in  yonder 
stall  ?”  after  which,  one  of  the  missionaries 
made  a little  address  in  Japanese.  When 
the  things  on  the  tree  had  been  distributed, 
the  girls  sang  the  hymn,  “ When  he  cometh,” 
and  chanted  the  Lord’s  Prayer  both  in  Japanese 
and  English.  Each  scholar  was  then  presented 


202 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1873 

with  a little  book.  Then  “ I am  Jesus’  little 
lamb”  was  sung  in  Japanese,  and  “The  Pil- 
grims’ Song  ” for  the  end  of  the  year. 

Several  of  the  mothers  and  female  friends 
of  the  scholars  were  present  in  holiday  attire. 
The  dress  of  Japanese  women  is  very  becom- 
ing, the  want  of  proper  fastenings  being  the 
greatest  objection  observable.  When  in  full 
dress  they  wear  pieces  of  crape  at  the  throat. 
The  black  teeth  of  the  married  women  and 
of  elderly  unmarried  women  spoil  their  ap- 
pearance. Little  girls,  until  they  are  six  or 
eight  years  old,  have  their  hair  “ banged  ” or 
cut  in  a variety  of  ways,  leaving  bald  places 
on  their  heads.  They  have  various  styles  of 
hairpins  for  different  ages — those  for  little  chil- 
dren, and  those  for  girls  of  fourteen  and  fifteen, 
and  those  for  women  ; amber  is  preferred  by 
the  wealthy.  They  also  wear  very  handsome 
tortoise-shell  combs. 

But  to  return.  The  children  doubtless  have 
a pleasant  impression  of  Christmas,  and  their 
singing  and  behavior  were  highly  complimented 
by  the  foreigners  who  favored  them  with  their 
presence  that  night. 

Christmas  day  was  bright  and  warm.  In 
the  morning  I went  to  call  on  the  father  and 
mother  of  O Chiye  san,  and  to  see  the  children. 
The  father  is  very  proud  of  them  all,  and  takes 


Christmas  at  Ro-ku-ban, 


203 


1873] 


great  pains  with  their  education.  They  are 
nice  children,  with  an  amount  of  spirit  and 
life  uncommon  to  Japanese.  The  father  gave 
many  thanks  for  the  entertainment  of  the 
previous  evening.  When  anything  is  done 
for  one  member  of  a family,  all  the  others 
will  repeatedly  thank  you  for  it,  until  the 
i-ta-shi-mas-tu  kuT'  (“  What  have  I done?''') 
becomes  irksome. 

The  father  said  that  the  children  had  never 
seen  a foreign  apple  before,  and  Riujiro,  the 
little  brother,  had  the  empty  candy-bag  in  his 
hand.  Our  Japanese  friends  have  brought  us 
many  little  gifts  for  Christmas,  and  we  have 
had  a pleasant  time  giving  and  receiving 
presents,  and  are  happy  in  feeling  that  we 
are  gaining  our  way  into  the  hearts  of  the 
people. 

A normal  school  has  been  established  in 
Tokio,  where  children  are  taught  geography, 
history,  etc.,  and  have  graded  Japanese  Read- 
ers. Teachers  from  all  parts  of  the  country 
visit  it. 

The  Union  native  church  was  organized 

o 

this  fall.  Christians  have  not  yet  been  trou- 
bled by  the  ya-cu-nins.  And  now  we  have 
another  year  of  work  before  us. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


THE  “ PEEP  OF  DA  YP 


“ Through  the  tender  mercy  of  our  God ; whereby  the  Dayspring 
from  on  high  hath  visited  us.” 


HE  little  book  Peep  of  Day  has  been 


translated  into  colloquial  Japanese,  and 
has  already  found  its  way  to  the  homes  of 
some  of  the  people.  It  has  been  the  young 
children’s  Sunday-book  in  English  for  a long 
time,  and  now  they  have  it  in  their  own  lan- 
guage. They  call  it  Yo  Ake  (“  The  ve^y  Be- 
ghming  of  the  Morning''), 

Last  summer  a girl  who  had  been  baptized 
while  a member  of  the  Yokohama  mission- 
school  came  to  live  with  her  old  father  in  Shi- 
ba.  She  attended  our  Sabbath-school  occa- 
sionally, and  the  girls  all  knew  that  she  was 
a Christian  and  had  been  baptized.  One  day 
O Ya-su  san  came  to  me  and  said  in  a whisper 
so  soft  and  low  that  I could  scarcely  under- 
stand her,  “ I wish  to  be  baptized  like  O Kwai 
san.”  After  that  we  studied  the  Little  Cate- 
chism together,  and  she  attended  regularly  the 
Bible  classes,  and  in  January  was  baptized. 


204 


The  ''Peep  of  Day!' 


205 


1873] 


Soon  after,  she  married  her  brother-in-law, 
who  has  become  settled  in  his  faith  at  last, 
and  is  now  a Protestant  Christian.  She  is 
a young  wife  and  stepmother,  being  only 
sixteen  now.  She  had  no  opposition  to  fear 
in  her  own  home  in  regard  to  her  baptism. 
Indeed,  the  other  members  of  her  family  de- 
sired it. 

It  was  during  that  same  month  that  Deguchi 
Taka  came  to  live  with  us.  We  call  her  Degu- 
chi san.  She  is  a middle-aged  Japanese  widow, 
well  educated  in  the  Chinese  language.  She 
has  been  a pilgrim,  going  from  shrine  to  shrine, 
vainly  trying  to  obtain  relief  for  her  burdened 
heart,  and  has  tried  various  sects  of  Buddhism 
and  Sintooism,  of  which  there  are  many,  but 
as  yet  has  failed  to  attain  satisfaction.  She 
succeeds  very  well  in  teaching  the  boarders 
Chinese  and  Japanese. 

Kato  san,  who  has  a writinof-class  in  our 
school,  has  been  a teacher  of  the  Japanese 
language  in  the  mission-house  for  some  time, 
and  has  studied  the  translation  of  the  gospel 
most  diligently.  Some  believe  that  he  is  one 
of  those  “ not  far  from  the  kingdom  of  God,” 
but  still  he  lives  under  bondage  and  will  not 
break  the  fetters.  He  has  two  wives,  one 
here  and  one  in  Osaca. 

The  wife  here  seems,  from  some  hidden 
18 


206 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1873 

cause,  to  have  great  influence  over  him.  She 
is  much  opposed  to  his  coming  here  and  read- 
ing the  Scriptures,  as  she  sees  that  it  arouses 
in  him  a sense  of  his  sin.  One  Saturday 
morning  she  came  here  after  him.  Her  eyes, 
swollen  with  weeping,  and  her  long  hair,  stream- 
ing down  her  back,  made  her  look  almost  like 
an  insane  person.  It  was  impossible  not  to 
pity  her,  for  she  seemed  in  great  distress ; but 
she  is  not  really  his  wife.  She  has  two  chil- 
dren of  a former  husband,  and  this  man  (our 
teacher)  has  two  by  his  first  wife.  He  was 
anxious  that  his  daughter,  Michi,  should  come 
into  our  family,  and  we  took  her,  he  engaging 
to  pay  for  her  tuition  by  teaching.  He  is  an 
editor,  and  talks  of  starting  a religious  news- 
paper. A friend  of  his  called  to  talk  to  us 
about  the  paper,  but  they  will  be  obliged  to 
get  permission  from  the  government  before 
they  can  begin  it. 

Some  are  beginning  to  inquire  more  closely 
about  the  Christian  faith.  A man  from  Aidzu 
(a  province  in  the  North)  often  comes  to  con  - 
verse upon  the  subject  of  our  religion.  He  is 
a strange,  wild-looking  man.  We  hear  that 
Aidzu  is  a very  rough  country,  almost  buried 
in  snow  during  the  winter. 

Our  new  servant,  Ume  ki-chi,  reads  the 
Bible  and  attends  the  classes  regularly.  H(‘ 


1873]  The  ''Peep  of  Day!'  207 

has  a wife,  mother  and  baby  to  support.  The 
old  woman,  O Ba  san,  comes  in  every  morn- 
ing to  read  the  gospel  with  Deguchi  san. 
Frequently  they  interrupt  the  reading  with 
“ O arigatai  koto  ” (“  A thing  to  be  grateful 
for  ”). 

We  have  rumors  of  serious  troubles  in  the 
South.  Tales  of  war  and  bloodshed  reach 
our  ears,  and  there  is  some  doubt  as  to  the 
result.  But  the  rebels  do  not  appear  to  be  es- 
pecially hostile  toward  foreigners.  The  prime 
minister  does  not  give  satisfaction ; taxes  are 
very  oppressive,  and  the  subject  of  the  Corean 
war  is  being  agitated. 

There  is  always  more  or  less  trouble  among 
the  Satsuma  clan.  The  papers  give  a sad 
account  of  the  state  of  thinors  in  Nagasaki, 
but  nothing  has  yet  been  authenticated.  It 
will  be  some  time  before  these  things  are  final- 
ly settled  and  peace  and  order  restored,  but 
the  government  will  take  care  to  protect  life 
and  property. 

Everything  as  yet  is  quiet  in  our  city ; the 
government  troops  are  gaining  victories,  and 
we  pray  here  every  day  for  protection.  Many 
believe  that  all  these  things  are  the  beginning  of 
better  times  and  of  more  liberty  to  both  native 
and  foreign  inhabitants.  But  we  often  feel 
cramped  and  fettered.  Our  boundaries  are 


2o8  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1873 

fixed.  The  Foreign  Concessions  are  pleasant, 
but  we  feel  as  though  we  should  like  to  be 
free  to  live  where  we  choose. 

Harder  to  bear  than  tidiness  of  war  in  re- 
mote  provinces  and  restrictions  by  the  govern- 
ment, because  it  comes  more  closely  to  us,  is 
the  fact  that  some  “ little  foxes  ” have  crept 
unawares  into  our  school.  There  are  petty 
jealousies  and  disputings  and  murmurings, 
and  some  of  these  have  grown  to  consider- 
able size.  We  have  talked  about  it,  and  have 
knelt  to  ask  God’s  forgiveness  and  blessing, 
and  since  then  have  had  less  trouble.  The 
girls  have  their  faults — deeper,  perhaps,  though 
less  apparent,  than  those  of  children  at  home. 
It  is  hard  to  know  just  what  is  going  on  in 
their  hearts. 

Every  Sabbath  evening  now  a few  people 
gather  in  the  schoolroom  to  read  the  Bible. 
The  carpenter,  Ju  ki-chi,  comes  sometimes,  and 
the  blacksmith,  who  has  a blind  daughter,  and 
some  of  the  neighbors  and  servants.  They 
listen  to  the  explanations  given,  and  sing  in 
Japanese.  When  the  service  is  over  they  light 
their  lanterns,  and  we  hear  the  sound  of  their 
heavy  clogs  on  the  gravel  as  they  turn  away 
from  the  door  toward  their  homes. 

A mission-school  for  boys  has  been  com- 
menced, and  is  prospering.  The  old  Shin-ya- 


1873]  The  ^^Peep  of  Day!'  209  . 

ma  O Ba  san  is  ill.  She  is  growing  very  old 
and  feeble,  and  our  women  will  visit  and  read 
to  her. 

I took  a copy  of  Peep  of  Day  to  O Ka  san 
the  other  day,  and  had  an  interesting  talk  with 
her.  She  seems  to  wish  to  know  more  of  our 
religion.  We  go  quietly  along  in  the  same 
routine  day  after  day.  There  is  little  to  re- 
cord, but  life  seems  very  full,  and  not  at  all 
monotonous.  The  light  is  growing  brighter 
around  us. 


“ Christ,  whose  glory  fills  the  skies, 
Christ,  the  true,  the  only  Light, 
Sun  of  righteousness,  arise ! 

Triumph  o’er  the  shades  of  night. 
Dayspring  from  on  high,  be  near; 
Dayspring  from  on  high,  appear.” 

0 


18  * 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

THE  WOMAN  AT  THE  WELL. 


“ Then  cometh  a woman  of  Samaria  to  draw  water.  . . . Jesus 
answered  and  said  unto  her,  Whosoever  drinketh  of  this  water 
shall  thirst  again.  But  whosoever  drinketh  of  the  water  that  I shall 
give  him  shall  never  thirst.” 


PRIL  came  in  with  a glad  burst  of  sun- 


shine after  all  the  storms  of  March.  It 
is  always  a delightful  month  of  the  year  here, 
as  the  flowers  are  then  abundant  and  lovely. 
The  girls  bring  great  branches  of  peach  and 
plum  trees  all  bright  with  blossoms,  and  of 
camellias  in  bloom.  We  have  vases  in  every 
corner  of  the  house,  and  still  are  at  a loss  to 
know  sometimes  what  to  do  with  the  frail 
treasures. 

The  girls  are  developing  very  rapidly  into 
womanhood.  They  have  all  changed  much 
since  first  they  began  to  study,  and  are  im- 
proved in  every  way.  Many  of  those  who 
started  with  us  have  left  us,  but  some  have 
been  faithful  from  the  beginning.  It  is  a fault 
of  the  Japanese  character  that  they  run  eager- 


210 


i874]  The  Woman  at  the  Well.  211 

ly  after  any  new  thing,  but  do  not  always 
persevere. 

We  hear  from  the  teacher  in  the  girls’  de- 
partment of  the  government  school  that  some 
of  the  pupils  are  very  anxious  to  study  the 
Bible.  They  have  read  something  of  Scrip- 
ture narrative  in  the  Universal  History,  and 
want  to  learn  more.  How  we  do  long  for 
religious  liberty  in  Japan ! It  seems  almost 
cruel  to  let  them  only  just  peep  in  at  a door 
which  they  may  not  enter. 

Our  girls  are  more  fortunate.  Here  we 
have  greater  freedom.  O Chiye  san  first 
desired  more  Bible  instruction  than  she  could 
gain  in  school-hours.  In  a little  note  handed 
to  her  teacher  she  had  written,  “ I want  to 
pray  to  God  and  receive  help  from  him,  and 
to  walk  in  the  same  way  in  which  you  are 
walking.”  So,  after  school-hours,  she  remain- 
ed to  read  the  Bible.  We  selected  the  Epis- 
tles of  Peter,  and  read  of  the  “inheritance 
of  the  saints,”  of  the  Saviour,  “ whom,  not 
having  seen,  we  love,”  and  of  what  a Chris- 
tian should  be — like  unto  Jesus  in  all  things 
and  ever  “looking  for  and  hastening  unto 
the  coming  of  the  day  of  God ;”  and  she 
drank  it  all  in  like  water  to  her  thirsty  soul. 
She  is  a girl  of  very  superior  mind,  grasping 
an  idea  quickly  and  holding  it  firmly.  I asked 


212 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1874 


her  one  day  if  she  thought  she  loved  the 
Lord  enough  to  confess  him  before  men,  and 
she  said  she  did ; but  a few  days  afterward 
she  came  and  told  me  that  her  father  was 
not  willing  that  she  should  be  baptized,  as 
it  was  contrary  to  the  law  of  the  land. 

Soon  afterward  O Rin  san  remained  to  read, 
and  one  after  another  of  the  girls  bought 
Bibles  and  came  into  the  class.  Every  after- 
noon, when  the  regular  exercises  of  school 
were  over  and  the  little  ones  had  gone,  we 
read  and  talked  together  for  an  hour. 

The  books  of  Ruth  and  Esther  interested 
the  girls.  Many  scenes  in  Oriental  life  they 
can  understand  better  than  children  at  home. 
The  story  of  Esther’s  petition  to  the  king 
was  one  to  which  they  listened  eagerly,  and 
after  this  lesson  O Chiye  san  led  our  devotions 
in  prayer  for  the  first  time.  It  is  unspeakably 
pleasant  to  hear  the  voices  of  these  people  in 
prayer. 

In  the  New  Testament  we  read  the  Acts. 
We  very  much  want  a translation  of  that 
book,  which  seems  especially  appropriate  to 
this  country.  We  still  have  only  the  three 

Gospels,  and  the  rest  of  the  Bible  must  be 
read  in  English  and  carefully  translated. 

Our  principal  text-book  is  the  Bible.  To 
translate  it  into  intelligible  Japanese  for  the 


1 874]  The  Woman  at  the  Well.  213 

class  is  part  of  my  daily  work.  When  the 
sun  sinks  behind  Fu-ji  and  the  evening  has 
come,  the  children  come  down  to  sing,  and 
then  we  go  up  into  the  “ study-room  ’’  to  have 
worship.  The  girls  have  been  reading  Line 
upon  Line,  and  have  finished  the  story  of 
Joseph.  It  is  almost  like  hearing  it  for  the 
first  time  myself  to  read  it  in  a new  language 
to  those  who  have  never  heard  it  before. 

Our  Sabbath  lessons  have  all  been  inter- 
esting. One  Sabbath  we  had  for  our  lesson 
the  healing  of  the  paralytic  at  the  pool  of 
Bethesda.  How  like  the  crowd  who  gathered 
there  must  be  the  people  who  congregate  at 
O-ji’s  fountains  and  Ha-ko-ne*s  springs  ! Again, 
the  girls  listened  attentively  to  the  story  of 
the  blind  man  who  received  his  sight  and 
who  said,  “ Whether  he  be  a sinner  or  not, 
I know  not.  This  one  thing  I know:  whereas 
I was  blind,  now  I see.”  And  one  Sabbath- 
day  our  lesson  was  in  the  fourth  chapter  of 
John’s  Gospel — the  story  of  the  Samaritan 
woman  at  the  well.  We  talked  about  it,  and 
I said,  “You  are  like  that  woman.  All  you 
who  have  tasted  these  living  waters,  came 
here  thinking  to  draw  water  from  earthly 
cisterns,  and,  lo ! you  have  found  heavenly 
fountains,  pure  and  sweet  and  fresh.  ‘ Drink 
and  never  thirst  again,’  and  then  go  quickly — 


214 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1874 


quickly  go — and  tell  of  it,  that  many  in  your 
city  may  also  come  and  drink.” 

A short  time  ago  the  clouds  which  had  hung 
for  many  days  over  us  during  the  rainy  season 
broke  away  and  sailed  off  into  the  blue  depths, 
and  were  seen  no  more.  In  like  manner  have 
our  little  troubles  disappeared,  floating  away 
somewhere,  and  the  girls  are  happy  again. 

The  older  girls  have  finished  their  lessons 
in  the  Happy  Book.  They  read  twice  a week 
in  a little  abridged  copy  of  Wayland’s  Moral 
Science,  and  like  it  very  much ; it  does  them 
good.  We  have  interesting  talks  in  the 
class. 

Now  the  summer  '‘resting-time”  has  come 
again.  When  we  closed  our  Bible  class  for 
the  summer,  I asked  the  girls  to  remember 
the  hour  between  four  and  five  p.  m.  as  a 
time  for  the  study  of  the  Scriptures,  and  they 
promised  to  do  so. 

I was  glad  to  accept  the  invitation  to  spend 
a few  days  in  Yokosuka,  a pretty  village  down 
the  coast.  The  invitation  came  from  Hiyodo 
san,  O Chiye  san’s  aunt.  O Chiye  san’s  father 
insisted  upon  its  being  accepted,  so  she  and 
I went  in  the  cars  to  Yokohama,  about  an 
hour’s  ride,  and  then  took  a little  steamer  for 
Yokosuka. 

We  left  Yokohama  about  four  p.  m.,  and  it 


1874]  The  Woman  at  the  Well,  215 

was  a little  after  six  p.  m.  when  the  steamer 
landed  at  the  wharf.  It  seemed  quite  home- 
like to  find  boys  waiting  for  us  at  the  landing, 
ready  to  carry  baskets  and  bundles  to  the 
house,  which  we  reached  after  a short  walk 
down  a shady  lane. 

Yokosuka  is  a pretty  village  with  a beautiful 
harbor,  shut  in  by  hills.  It  is  the  great  navy- 
yard  of  this  part  of  the  country.  There  are 
extensive  machine-shops  and  large  docks. 
Considerable  activity  was  visible  both  in  build- 
ing new  vessels  and  repairing  old  ones.  The 
French  are  in  charge  of  all  this  work,  and 
there  are  pretty  dwelling-houses  and  a little 
Roman  Catholic  church.  On  a compound 
goats  were  feeding,  for  wherever  you  find 
French  people  you  will  also  find  goats. 

Fliyodo’s  house  is  the  very  neatest  of  all 
the  neat  houses  in  Japan.  The  servants  are 
kept  busy  dusting,  sweeping  and  scrubbing. 
The  parlor,  or  guest-chamber,  is  on  one  side 
of  the  entrance,  and  back  of  this  there  are 
pretty  rooms  opening  into  a court.  Each 
evening  the  man-servant  went  through  the 
courts  with  a pail  and  dipper  and  threw  water 
over  the  trees  and  bushes.  Back  of  the  house 
rises  abruptly  a high  hill,  and  where  the  view 
of  the  ocean  and  surrounding  country  is  finest 
there  is  a tea-house  belonging  to  the  family. 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1874 


2 1 6 


which  we  enjoyed  very  much.  The  children 
kept  climbing  up  and  down  the  steep  ascent, 
bringing  sweetmeats,  fruit  and  tea.  In  the 
front  of  the  house  we  could  see  higher  hills  in 
the  distance,  and  we  watched  the  moon  rising 
over  them  each  evening  of  our  stay.  Down 
by  the  public  road  was  a little  summer-house 
with  a lattice,  so  that  we  could,  if  we  wished, 
watch  the  passers-by.  The  Japanese  have 
a number  of  such  contrivances  to  aid  them 
in  enjoying  life. 

The  family,  consisting  of  the  parents,  three 
children  and  servants,  with  their  guests,  made 
quite  a large  party.  The  children  were  well 
governed  and  everything  in  the  house  was 
nicely  arranged,  and  nothing  could  exceed 
the  ease  and  grace  with  which  the  mistress 
of  the  house  entertained  her  foreign  guest. 

When  the  father  went  to  his  business  in 
the  morning,  the  children  all  bowed  down 
to  the  floor  and  said,  "'SaionaraS  and  when 
he  returned  all  went  to  the  door  to  salute  him. 
A child  never  left  the  house  without  saying  to 
the  mother,  ''Mo  mairi  masK'  (“I  am  going”), 
and  on  returning  would  say:  " Ta-da-i  ma'' 
(“Just  now  I have  come”). 

We  all  ate  together  in  the  best  room,  pa- 
rents and  children  sitting  around  the  little 
tables,  while  they  had  a high  stand  for  their 


1874]  The  Woman  at  the  Well.  217 

visitor.  Breakfast  usually  consisted  of  eggs,  rice 
and  fish,  lunch  the  same,  while  at  the  evening 
dinner  there  was  more  variety.  Fruits  and 
sweetmeats  were  partaken  of  between  meals. 

One  evening  some  visitors  came — a young 
married  sister  with  her  baby,  and  some  other 
relatives.  The  lights  were  put  out  that  the 
moonlight  might  have  its  full  effect.  The 
mother  plays  well  on  the  ko-to,  and  she  brought 
out  her  instrument  and  sang  for  us.  A young 
man  performed  one  of  the  slow,  weird  dances 
of  his  country,  moving  his  whole  body  grace- 
fully. Then  we  sang  “ Shall  we  gather  at  the 
river?”  in  English.  How  I wished  they  could 
all  understand  the  words ! 

When  night  came  the  maids  brought  the 
futons  and  great  green  mosquito-nets,  put- 
ting the  former  down  on  the  floor  and  fast- 
ening the  latter  to  the  walls  by  means  of 
strings.  Then  the  lamps — for  they  had  for- 
eign oil-lamps — were  put  out,  and  we  were 
left  to  sleep.  The  lady  frequently  said,  “ O ki 
no  do  ku  sama  ” (“  Poison  to  your  soul  ”),  mean- 
ing that  I was  suffering  from  the  lack  of  things 
to  which  foreigners  are  accustomed ; but  she 
always  received  an  answer  to  the  contrary. 
The  greatest  difficulty  was  how'  to  dress  in 
the  morning,  as  the  mosquito-nets  were  taken 
down  and  all  the  slides  opened.  We  are 

19 


2i8 


The  SmiHse  Kingdom, 


[1874 


not  accustomed  to  make  our  toilets  in  such 
a public  manner. 

We  met  the  little  child  of  the  family  on 
entering  the  lane,  in  front  of  the  house,  just 
fresh  from  his  bath,  with  his  hair  all  wet  and 
plastered  down  to  the  sides  of  his  head.  The 
mother  takes  great  care  of  the  children,  and 
no  one  would  dream  that  she  is  not  their  own 
mother,  nor  that  they  each  one  have  a different 
mother.  It  is  not  always  pleasant  to  look 
below  the  surface : many  disagreeable  things 
appear  to  us  which  we  hardly  expected. 

One  pleasant  Sabbath  afternoon  in  vacation 
a few  of  the  girls  came  to  read  the  Bible,  and 
our  lesson  was  on  the  “ new  song,”  the  song 
beginning  in  feeble  strains  on  earth  and  end- 
ing in  the  full  harmonies  of  heaven.  Deguchi 
san  said  they  wanted  to  learn  the  song.  I 
could  not  but  ask  with  joy,  “What  have  these 
girls  already  found  in  the  kingdom  of  God 
A new  language  to  speak,  a new  song  to 
sing,  fountains  to  cleanse  their  sinful  hearts, 
wells  of  water  to  quench  their  thirst,  and, 
above  all,  the  Sun  of  righteousness  to  shine 
for  evermore  on  their  benighted  souls. 

“ And  the  Spirit  and  the  Bride  say,  Come ; 
and  let  him  that  heareth  say.  Come ; and  let 
him  that  is  athirst,  come ; and  whosoever  will, 
let  him  take  the  water  of  life  freely.” 


BOOK  III. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE  - LURCHES  OF  ASIA  SALUTE  YOUR 

“ Behold,  I h .e  graven  thee  on  the  palms  of  my  hands  : thy  walls 
are  continually  before  me.” 

OUR  school  began  brightly  and  pleasantly 
in  September.  But  few  of  the  old  schol- 
ars were  missing  on  the  very  first  day,  and 
others  soon  joined  our  ranks.  O Ka  san 
brought  three  new  pupils  to  school — I chi, 
Sudzu  and  an  aunt  of  the  last  named.  Four 
sisters  named  Sa-ku-mo,  Mashi,  Yasu  and  Mitsu 
were  also  • brought  by  a relative  of  theirs. 
These  are  boarders,  the  other  three  day-schol- 
ars. A little  girl  named  Aida  Kame  came 
into  our  family  before  the  last  session  closed. 

We  miss  O Rin  san  from  our  classes.  We 
are  sorry,  for  she  wants  to  come  to  school, 
but  her  grandmother  will  not  allow  it.  Some- 
times these  ignorant,  prejudiced  grandmothers 
can  have  a great  deal  of  influence  in  keeping 
a girl  away  from  school.  More  than  one 

211) 


220 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1874 


missionary  has  had  the  same  thing  to  contend 
with.  In  spite  of  the  servitude  of  women, 
the  O Ba  sans  contrive  in  some  way  to  keep 
girls  at  home,  even  though  the  fathers  have 
no  objection  to  their  attendance  at  school. 
But  we  still  pray  for  O Rin  san,  and  hope 
some  time  to  see  her. 

The  state  of  things  with  us  just  now  is 
intensely  interesting,  calling  forth  every  energy 
of  soul  and  body.  In  July  the  man  who 
brought  our  first  little  pupils,  and  who  after- 
ward went  to  America,  was  examined  as  to 
his  faith  and  knowledge,  previous  to  baptism. 
Deguchi  san,  Kato  san  and  our  girls,  with  Ju  ki- 
chi,  the  carpenter,  and  U-me-ki-chi,  were  all 
present.  Chimura  is  an  elderly  man  and  a 
scholar,  and  his  examination  was  very  strict. 
His  answers  displayed  a wonderful  knowledge 
of  the  Bible.  He  has  been  thinking  about 
being  a Christian  for  years.  He  was  baptized 
soon  after  in  our  little  schoolroom,  all  of  the 
girls  being  present. 

The  Bible  class  was  begun  again  with  the 
new  school-session.  Some  of  the  girls  wish  to 
be  baptized,  but  their  fathers  will  not  permit  it, 
and  they  cannot  see  clearly  their  duty  in  the 
matter. 

O Chiye  san  begins  to  realize  that  God’s 
claims  are  above  her  father’s,  and  is  sorely 


1874]  ''The  Chm'ches  of  Asia  Salute  YouS  221 

perplexed  and  troubled.  More  than  two  years 
have  passed  since  she  came  into  the  mission- 
school.  Then  she  was  a round-faced,  rosy- 
cheeked  girl,  with  nothing  to  mark  her  ex- 
cept apparent  good-nature.  Now  she  has 
a thoughtful,  earnest  expression,  and  often 
seems  sad  and  depressed. 

Shige,  a girl  of  fourteen,  is  an  earnest  lover 
of  God’s  word.  She  is  very  bright  and  earn- 
est, and  anxious  to  do  right.  I am  not  good,” 
she  said  one  day,  “ but  I will  try  to  be  better.” 
She  told  with  sobs  of  her  father’s  angry  refu- 
sal to  permit  her  to  be  baptized,  and  of  how 
he  threatened  to  take  her  from  school.  Others 
seem  inclined  to  walk  in  the  same  good  way, 
but  are  deterred  from  making  a profession  of 
religion  by  fear  of  their  fathers’  anger. 

We  knew  long  ago  that  such  a time  of  trou- 
ble would  come,  and  we  paused  and  thought 
about  it,  and  then  went  on,  knowing  that  we 
were  doing  right.  We  cannot  do  much  to 
help  the  girls,  and  can  only  commend  them 
to  the  care  of  the  Shepherd  who  is  calling 
his  flock  from  out  of  all  the  nations.  We 
never  advise  the  girls  to  go  contrary  to  their 
fathers’  wishes.  They  all  need  instruction, 
and  are  here  receiving  it.  They  attend  the 
services,  are  thoughtful  and  attentive,  con- 
duct their  own  little  prayer-meetings,  and 


222 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1874 


lead  in  prayer.  Their  petitions  are  simple 
and  touching-. 

Many  interesting  meetings  were  held  in  the 
schoolroom.  One  evening  all  listened  with 
marked  seriousness  to  the  sermon.  After  a 
hymn  had  been  sung,  those  who  desired  bap- 
tism were  requested  to  come  forward,  and 
seven  responded.  Toda  san,  who  lives  on 
the  To-ri,  was  the  first  one,  then  three  young 
men  in  the  school,  and  then  Deguchi  san,  our 
O Ba  san,  and  U-me-ki-chi,  all  of  whom  were 
soon  after  baptized,  with  three  others. 

It  was  November  when  the  church  was 
regularly  organized  and  elders  and  deacons 
ordained.  The  scene  was  an  impressive  one, 
and  all  seemed  very  thoughtful.  An  address 
was  made  to  the  elders,  deacons,  church  mem- 
bers and  outsiders.  The  girls  chanted  the 
Lord’s  Prayer  in  Japanese.  Then  a hym'n 
was  sung,  the  benediction  was  pronounced, 
and  the  little  company  dispersed.  Thus  did 
another  “ church  in  Asia  ” (Japan)  salute  their 
brethren  of  like  faith  throughout  the  world. 

Our  first  little  hymn-book  in  Japanese  came 
to  us  last  summer.  It  has  eighteen  hymns, 
besides  the  Doxology.  The  first  one,  which 
we  sing  to  “Old  Hundred,”  is  “Ye  people 
who  on  earth  do  dwell.”  We  have  “Rock  of 
ages,”  “There  is  a happy  land,”  “Joyfully, 


1674]  ''The  Churches  of  Asia  Salute  You,"  223 

joyfully,”  “To-day  the  Saviour  calls,”  and 
others.  But  the  great  favorite  is  “Jesus  loves 
me.”  No  one  who  has  been  associated  in 
any  way  with  the  early  Japanese  church  can 
ever  forget  that  hymn.  It  has  been  sung  at 
church,  inquiry-meetings,  prayer-meetings  and 
Sunday-school.  The  children  love  it,  and  we 
often  hear  them  singing  it  as  they  play  about 
the  room.  How  many  first  things  we  have 
seen  in  Japan,  the  beginnings  of  various 
changes ! How  we  have  welcomed  each  help 
as  it  came ! How  we  have  hailed  with  joy 
each  indication  of  progress  in  anything ! 

Events  are  pressing  rapidly  upon  us  now. 
Toda  was  anxious,  as  soon  as  he  received 
baptism  himself,  that  friends  and  neighbors 
should  hear  the  gospel.  So  we  went  one 
night  to  his  house  on  the  Tori — Ginza  we  call 
it  now,  with  its  foreign-built  houses.  Chimura 
Goro  held  a lantern  to  light  us  through  the 
back  streets  of  the  city,  but  on  the  Ginza  no 
such  aid  was  required.  The  lights  in  the 
houses  and  the  lanterns  of  the  jin-ri-ki-sha 
men  made  the  scene  very  animated. 

In  the  upper  room  of  Toda  san’s  house 
quite  a little  company  had  gathered,  and  among 
them  five  women.  The  men  were  all  in  one 
room,  and  the  women  in  an  adjoining  apart- 
ment, with  the  door  between  opened  that  they 


224 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1874 


might  listen.  They  did  listen,  and  with  some 
degree  of  interest,  but  occasionally  would  all 
go  away — perhaps  to  have  a smoke. 

Toda  san’s  wife  is  a young,  pretty  woman, 
and  can  read  a little  English.  These  women 
grow  old  very  fast.  There  were  two  or  three 
who  were  only  twenty- three  or  -four  years  of 
age,  they  said,  but  they  looked  as  though  they 
might  be  thirty.  Their  habits  of  smoking,  tea- 
drinking, and  others  equally  pernicious,  cause 
them  to  look  older  than  they  really  are. 

Meetings  are  held  in  different  parts  of  the 
city.  Chimura  san’s  house  is  near  Shi-ba,  and 
one  bitterly  cold  night  we  all  went  over  there. 
The  girls  begged  to  go.  The  way  was  long 
and  the  night  dark,  but  we  enjoyed  it  as  we 
walked  along  the  quiet  streets  by  the  light 
of  the  lanterns. 

The  large  rooms  were  thrown  together,  and 
candles  and  lamps  gave  light,  while  in  the  hi- 
ba-chis  the  charcoal  glowed  brightly.  A num- 
ber of  the  neighbors  gathered  in  to  listen  to 
the  preaching  and  join  in  the  singing.  All 
these  things  are  encouraging  to  us,  and  we 
gladly  go  as  we  are  called  from  place  to  place. 

But  the  little  schoolhouse  grew  too  small  to 
accommodate  the  numbers  who  gathered  there 
on  Sunday  afternoons ; some  had  to  go  away. 
So  a large  wooden  building  was  erected,  and 


1874]  ''The  Churches  of  Asia  Salute  YouC  225 

dedicated  to  the  service  of  God.  It  is  near 
Ts’kiji,  but  out  of  the  Concession,  and  we 
bought  it  in  the  name  of  a Japanese.  The 
building  is  low  and  plain,  but  neat  and  cheer- 
ful. The  platform  is  covered  with  a carpet, 
and  has  a desk  and  a little  table.  The  seats 
are  wooden  benches,  but  comfortable.  On 
the  broad  aisle  is  matting.  There  are  some 
mats  for  old  and  feeble  persons  to  sit  upon  if 
they  prefer  the  Japanese  way  of  sitting. 

The  dedication  of  this  building  to  the  ser- 
vice of  God  was  an  interesting  occasion.  The 
house  was  well  filled.  An  invocation  was 
offered,  the  Lord’s  Prayer  chanted  in  Japanese, 
a missionary  made  an  earnest  prayer,  and  Chi- 
mura  san  read  the  Scripture  lesson.  Then 
one  of  the  oldest  missionaries  preached  a 
sermon  on  the  text : “ They  shall  be  one.” 

The  subject  was  the  oneness  of  believers.  All 
listened,  and  even  children  understood  how 
they  who  believe  in  Jesus  are  one.  Chimura 
san’s  servant,  Sawa,  was  baptized.  His  wife, 
O Kiyo  san,  had  been  baptized  some  weeks 
before.  Now  the  whole  family  are  in  the 
church. 

We  sang  “ Old  Hundred,”  “America,”  “Joy- 
fully, joyfully,”  and  our  sweet  little  hymn  “Je- 
sus loves  me.”  Soon  afterward  our  Sabbath- 
school  was  organized  with  seventy  members. 

p 


226 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1874 

Who  remembers  the  time  when  Takejiro,  Toi- 
chi  and  his  mother  stumbled  over  a few  Eng- 
lish words  and  sang  “ There  is  a happy  land  ” 
in  the  little  Japanese  house  on  the  corner? 
And  now  we  have  a church-building  filled  with 
worshipers  and  those  who  ^ome  to  hear  the 
word.  We  have  also  the  Gospels  and  a hymn- 
book,  with  some  tracts  and  the  Happy  Book, 
and  also  a Sabbath-school. 

Oh,  Christians  at  home,  it  is  so  little  com- 
pared to  what  you  have,  and  yet  it  seems  so 
much  to  us ! And  now  indeed  “ the  churches 
of  Asia  salute  you.”  They  say  unto  you, 
“Rejoice  and  be  glad  with  us;  for  the  Sun 
which  has  so  long  shone  over  you  is  rising 
upon  us — not  to  leave  you  in  darkness,  for 
it  shineth  night  and  day,  but  to  be  our  Sun 
also.” 

Christians  at  home,  our  little  church  in  Asia 
salutes  you,  saying,  “ OhayoP' — a glad  “Good- 
morning !” 


CHAPTER  II. 


ENO-SHIMA. 


“ He  hath  made  everything  beautiful.” 


LOVELY,  happy  day.”  This  is  an  ex- 


tract from  a diary,  and  the  day  was  the 
31st  of  October,  1874,  when  O Chiye  san  and 
I started  on  a little  trip  to  Eno-Shima,  an 
island  down  the  coast. 

It  is  one  of  the  “ compensations  ” of  mission- 
ary-life, if  we  need  any,  that  our  homes  are 
often  in  beautiful,  pleasant  lands.  There  are 
few  missionaries  with  whom  I have  been 
brought  into  contact  who  do  not  find  relief 
from  loneliness  in  the  natural  beauties  around 
them.  The  flowers  are  dear  companions  in 
our  exile  ; the  sea  tells  of  the  power  of  the 
Creator  in  its  deep  thunderings,  and  in  its 
soft  murmurings  whispers  stories  of  love  and 
peace ; while  the  mountains  are  our  grand 
old  friends,  symbols  of  constancy  and  fidelity. 
There  are  many  “ lovely,  happy  days  ” to 
record. 

This  one  was  an  autumn  day.  The  maple- 


227 


228 


The  Sunrise  Kingdoyn.  [1874 

leaves  were  red  and  glorious  in  the  rich  Octo- 
ber sunshine,  and  the  familiar  road  to  Fu-ji-sa-wa 
was  even  more  beautiful  than  in  midsummer. 
At  Fu-ji-sa-wa  we  turned  off  the  main  road  to 
reach  the  seacoast.  The  road  was  narrow, 
and  we  had  difficulty  in  passing  the  frequent 
trains  of  packhorses.  All  around  rose  little 
hills  still  green  and  fair. 

It  was  only  a short  journey  across  the  fields 
*in  the  jin-ri-ki-shas  ; then  a hard  pull  over  the 
sand  brought  us  within  sight  and  hearing  of 
the  glorious  Pacific,  and  before  us  rose  E-no- 
Shi-ma,  a mountain-island  clothed  in  richest 
green,  with  the  sea  thundering  at  its  base, 
and  just  enough  mist  gathering  over  it  to 
heighten  its  beauty.  At  one  time,  probably, 
it  was  entirely  separated  from  the  mainland, 
but  gradually  a sandy  isthmus  has  been  form- 
ed. over  which  people  can  walk  to  the  island. 
Its  lofty  sides  are  almost  perpendicular,  with 
overhanging  cliffs.  Trees  grow  over  it,  afford- 
ing in  places  beautiful  bowers  and  shady  re- 
treats. It  is  covered  with  an  almost  tropical 
verdure. 

On  the  island  are  numerous  tea-houses  and 
little  open  shops  where  shell-work  is  kept  for 
sale.  The  island  is  dedicated  to  the  goddess 
Benten,  who  is  one  of  the  “ happy  gods.”  She 
ought,  at  least,  to  be  content  with  her  island. 


Eno-Shima. 


229 


1874] 

for  it  is  a rarely  lovely  spot,  and  a week  there 
passed  rapidly  away.  The  hotel  was  comfort- 
able and  quiet,  as  there  are  no  pilgrims — or 
very  few — at  this  season  of  the  year. 

We  had  a delightful  walk  over  the  island. 
Up  and  down  stone  steps  we  climbed,  often 
stopping  to  enjoy  the  magnificent  views  of 
sea  and  coast  and  distant  mountains.  At  one 
point  on  the  road  we  peeped  into  a yawning 
chasm.  Numbers  of  divers  passed  us,  going 
easily  down  the  steep  path,  which  was  so  diffi- 
cult to  us. 

We  climbed  carefully  over  the  rocks,  gradu- 
ally making  our  way  to  a deep  cavern.  The 
roar  of  the  ocean  at  its  entrance  was  almost 
deafening.  This  entrance  was  a narrow,  slip- 
pery path  along  the  rocks,  which  widened  by 
degrees  until  the  road  became  less  dangerous. 
Within  the  cave,  dimly  lighted  by  tapers,  sat 
an  old  man,  and  two  little  boys  acted  as  our 
guides.  We  had  to  stop  often,  had  once  to 
crawl  through  a hole,  and  at  the  end  of  this 
dark,  dangerous  way  we  found  an  idol  with 
tapers  burning  before  it — doubtless  one  of  the 
representations  of  Benten,  for  she  is  said  to 
have  appeared  in  many  forms. 

We  were  glad  to  get  out  into  the  bright  day- 
light once  more,  and  stopped  to  watch  the 
divers  go  down  in  the  water  and  bring  up 
20 


230 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1874 


shellfish.  We,  too,  gathered  shells  on  the 
sandy  isthmus,  and  looked  at  the  shell-work 
and  marine  curiosities  in  the  shops.  Little 
screens  with  figures  of  men  and  women,  birds 
and  flowers,  were  pretty,  but  the  natural  curi- 
osities were  more  attractive.  Here  is  found 
the  beautiful  glass  coral,  resembling  in  texture 
and  appearance  finely-spun  glass.  We  are 
told  that  it  is  only  to  be  found  here  and  on 
the  coast  of  Spain.  The  calls  of  the  old 
women  at  the  shops  to  come  and  buy  were 
frequent  and  importunate;  we  would  stop  to 
chat  with  them,  and  occasionally  buy  some  of 
their  little  things. 

We  took  a kago  one  day,  and  went  over  to 
see  Dai  Butsu.  The  road  lay  along  the  sea- 
shore. The  natives  were  busily  engaged  in 
gathering  seaweeds.  They  had  long  wooden 
hooks,  with  which  they  secured  the  seaweed 
as  it  was  washed  on  the  shore.  Between  the 
breakers  they  would  run  out  into  the  water, 
sometimes  up  to  their  knees.  Occasionally 
a wave  would  be  too  quick  for  them,  and  they 
would  be  well  soaked;  but  as  their  clothing 
was-  very  scant,  it  made  little  difference  to 
them. 

From  a little  hamlet  on  the  shore  we  turned 
off  into  the  country,  and  went  through  rice- 
paddies  to  Dai  Butsu,  “the  Great  Buddha.” 


DAI  BUTSU.  Page  230 


'MiH  tfi'N 

.-ni.-  r i 


• V ik*  ■mi-*.  *<>'  r 

- n ,fc«^  )••■  iq 

■^i»{ 

l#ai 

■mten)(i'<—*-.-^  %<U  al  qw'>4».  v.-*jp 

: *f  • i«Uj<h.«;>W 

,ff0m  ,s<n ‘I*t'«i'  »(«# 

«*< -*i^  i 5Jt(.  iw'-  ' -•''-■«*  ‘■>S 

';.'..'>nt.  >A.^';- I^g||i#.4iq|tn  fr»-«lBVr 

‘ij  ' •««  • )...«  ■<A>'-t«%»  -IV  md 

; f»«*  • i*Kt  •■j*B*  p.»  J.-1M  '•>•*  ■•rMw 

>rf^-...-  ---■<-’^.)W.,.tW<.-^,4lf  •«■  • -«i'aVS^9 

H -n!  ‘tj  W ^Cf 

“ I . .,  »,  . tlXhBfl  'to 


*/  4>'<Jii- 


,^«aHlf._.  ittuh-^'iis^jiia 

■•  ,^■*>^^^r>lW•s»^ ! jfe<d  t*04  . 

' UM>w.  xiMft,  j.  .‘t-'r-o  .J^.aci2 

■''■'=•  ■ •'"-*«?  . **ife4|i6»,  jWt--  ' 

'4t^  «pe»i-  ^{iiu  iStt^V-SST' 

.’^v' '■•-'^fr  • ••-HH*'yHk'-^“^ 

■■  wd  ' ■ ji)]‘»».mm,t>-^  «•  <d'5^v  BP- 


Eno-Shima. 


231 


1874] 

This  is  a bronze  image  fifty  feet  high  and  well 
proportioned.  It  is  in  a sitting  posture,  with 
hands  clasped  and  head  bent  forward.  The 
features  are  regular  and  the  forehead  bears  the 
round  drop  in  the  centre — the  peculiar  mark 
of  Buddha. 

No  temple  is  near  the  Great  Buddha  now, 
and  there  he  sits  all  alone,  looking  down 
with  mild,  placid  countenance  on  those  who 
go  to  see  him.  We  went  inside  of  him, 
walked  around  him,  asked  questions  about 
him,  bought  his  picture,  and  did  not  go  away 
without  turning  back  to  see  him,  high  above 
everything  else  in  the  vicinity,  looking  down 
upon  us,  but  with  manifest  indifference.  Near 
Dai  Butsu  is  Kamakura,  the  ancient  capital 
of  Japan,  where  the  great  hero  Yoritomo 
lived,  and  where  in  a temple  his  armor, 
shoes  and  no-ri-mo-nos  are  still  preserved. 
The  tide  was  very  high,  almost  covering 
the  isthmus,  as  we  returned  to  E-no-Shi-ma. 
The  waves  came  rolling  in  splendidly,  and 
the  walk  was  exciting. 

The  next  day  the  rain  came  down  in  tor- 
rents. It  knows  how  to  rain  in  Japan.  But 
the  scenes,  even  on  rainy  days,  never  lose  the 
charm  of  novelty  to  me.  The  straw  rain-coats, 
and  the  hats  which  serve  some  of  the  people 
instead  of  umbrellas,  are  very  peculiar.  The 


232  The  Sunrise  Kingdo^n,  [1874 

ram  pours  off  the  roofs  of  the  houses  and 
runs  in  streams  down  the  gutters,  while  dogs, 
ducks  and  chickens  crowd  close  to  the  house, 
looking  wet  and  miserable.  We  sat  in  the 
hotel-entrance  and  watched  the  travelers  as 
they  passed,  until  too  many  sought  refuge  in 
the  hotel,  and  we  went  to  our  own  room.  But 
there  was  only  one  cold,  rainy  day,  and  E-no- 
Shi-ma  was  lovely  that  first  week  in  November, 
so  that  we  came  back  with  pleasant  remem- 
brances of  the  island. 

Associated  with  these  remembrances  is  also 
the  memory  of  another  pleasant  day  the  same 
autumn,  spent  in  some  gardens  where  there 
was  a brilliant  display  of  chrysanthemums. 
These  flower-shows  are  usual  with  the  Jap- 
anese when  the  chrysanthemums  are  brightest 
and  most  abundant.  There  were  figures  dress- 
ed. in  the  leaves  and  flowers,  which  were  very 
pretty  and  evinced  much  taste  and  skill.  Some 
of  them  were  ancient  historic  characters,  others 
figures  of  men,  women  and  children  ; but  the 
prettiest  thing  of  all  was  a white  bird. 

The  display  of  chrysanthemums  was  magnif- 
icent: all  colors  and  all  sizes  were  on  exhibi- 
tion. The  beautiful  trees,  with  their  rich  va- 
ried foliage,  red,  yellow  and  different  shades 
of  green,  in  some  places  grouped  together 
and  looking  like  enormous  bouquets,  formed 


Eno  Shima. 


233 


1874] 

a scene  beautiful  beyond  description,  and  one 
never  to  be  forgotten.  One  scene  was  espe- 
cially gorgeous.  We  were  riding  in  jin-ri-ki- 
shas  through  a long  avenue  of  trees  with 
dark-green  leaves,  when  we  passed  some  red 
maples.  The  bright  sun  shone  through  the 
red  leaves,  producing  a most  brilliant  effect. 

These  are  some  of  the  pleasures  that  come 
to  us  in  our  mission-homes. 

20  * 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE  STRAIT  GATE  AND  THE  NARROW  WAY. 

“ Because  strait  is  the  gate  and  narrow  is  the  way  which  leadeth 
unto  life.” 

At  last  the  girls  came  up  to  the  strait  gate : 
they  could  not  walk  any  longer  in  the 
heavenly  way  without  going  through  it.  The 
time  came  when  they  had  to  choose  between 
obeying  the  commands  of  God  and  yielding 
to  the  fear  of  man.  Some  of  them  turned 
away  and  went  back  ; for  some,  the  entrance 
did  not  seem  so  difficult ; while  others  waited 
long  without,  fearing  and  trembling  and  shed- 
ding many  tears.  And  all  the  while  the  gentle 
Saviour  stood  near  and  said,  “Come  unto  me.” 
“ Be  not  afraid  of  them  that  kill  the  body,  and 
after  that  have  no  more  that  they  can  do.” 
“ Whosoever  shall  confess  me  before  men, 
him  shall  the  Son  of  man  also  confess  before 
the  angels  of  God.”  Angels  beheld  the  con- 
flict and  rejoiced  over  each  victory,  and  teach- 
ers and  Christian  friends  watched  with  eager 
solicitude  and  constant  prayer. 

We  sent  once  in  the  fall  for  O Chiye  san’s 

234 


1 87 5]  Strait  Gate  and  Narrow  Way.  235 

father  to  come  and  talk  about  his  daughter’s 
baptism.  He  said  that  he  had  no  objection 
himself,  but  in  his  department  the  ya-cu-nins 
were  obliged  to  send  the  names  of  any  who 
received  baptism  to  the  general  government, 
and  his  own  daughter’s  name  might  cost  him 
his  office  and  means  of  support;  but  he  prom- 
ised to  give  his  consent  within  three  months. 

At  the  close  of  the  year  I had  an  earnest 
talk  with  O Chiye  san  about  life  and  its  work. 
She  and  her  father  were  pleased  with  the  propo- 
sition made  that  she  should  teach  the  younger 
girls  their  translations,  and  she  took  classes 
after  the  school  began  in  January.  The  man- 
uscript copy  of  the  Epistle  to  the  Romans  was 
sent  me  the  first  of  the  year,  and  Deguchi  san 
copied  it  carefully. 

The  first  Sabbath  of  this  year  (1875)  was 
a beautiful  one.  Some  of  the  girls  offered 
prayers  in  the  little  meeting  before  church, 
which  at  least  showed  their  earnestness  in 
wishing  for  a blessing.  Deguchi  san  brought 
several  people  to  church.  Two  young  men 
were  baptized.  The  services  were  long,  but 
no  one  seemed  wearied.  Every  morning  of 
the  “week  of  prayer”  found  a number  of  na- 
tive Christians  and  those  who  were  interest- 
ed in  religion  at  the  church,  and  the  meetings 
were  all  pleasant. 


236 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1875 


That  week  Deguchi  san  went  to  see  our 
little  O Kame  san,  and  found  her  in  trouble. 
Her  brother  was  sick,  and  could  no  longer 
pay  for  her  tuition  and  support  her  in  school. 
Deguchi  san  found  her  hard  at  work.  She 
is  such  a bright  child  that  we  could  not  bear 
to  give  her  up,  and  so  we  took  her  back,  hop- 
ing that  some  means  would  be  provided  for 
her  support.  So  the  winter  days  passed  on 
with  their  busy  cares. 

The  first  communion-season  of  the  year  was 
on  the  1 8th  of  January.  O Chiye  san  seemed 
to  feel  much  her  separation  from  Christian  peo- 
ple, and  went  home  sad  and  crying.  She  said 
she  feared  nothing  but  the  trouble  which  her 
baptism  might  bring  upon  the  family. 

Our  girls  were  all  troubled.  Deguchi  san 
says  that  woman  in  Japan  has  her  head  down 
and  man  has  his  foot  upon  her  neck.  It  does 
seem  so.  Often  in  those  days,  when  I saw 
the  young  men  of  the  mission-school  coming 
out  one  after  another  and  being  baptized,  and 
yet  not  one  of  our  girls  ready,  it  seemed  as  if 
work  for  woman  here  was  a hopeless  task. 
Kato  san’s  Michi  was  one  who  desired  bap- 
tism, but  she  “waited”  for  her  friends. 

At  last,  however,  three  of  the  girls  decided 
to  be  baptized.  O Shige  san,  after  a long 
struggle,  thought  it  best  to  come  out  boldly 


1875]  Strait  Gate  and  Narrow  V/ay.  237 

as  a Christian  without  her  father’s  permission, 
which  had  been  angrily  refused.  It  is  exceed- 
ingly difficult  to  decide  the  right  in  these  cases, 
yet  here  the  responsibility  seemed  to  be  lifted 
away  from  every  one.  She  was  fully  persuaded 
that  she  was  right,  and  promised  bravely  to  con- 
fess the  truth  if  called  upon  to  do  so.  She 
and  her  little  sister  Nui  are  faithful,  diligent 
pupils,  and  have  ever  been  comforts  to  their 
teachers.  We  dreaded  losing  them  from  our 
school,  should  the  father  in  his  anger  take 
them  away. 

Michi  had  nothing  to  fear  from  her  father. 
The  third  was  our  little  orphan  girl  Kame. 
She  is  thirteen  years  old  and  not  advanced 
in  her  studies,  although  learning  very  fast. 
There  was  some  hesitancy  about  admitting 
her  into  the  church,  as  she  was  so  young  and 
had  been  so  short  a time  in  school.  But  she 
was  so  anxious,  and  answered  every  question 
so  well,  that  she  was  baptized  with  the  others. 
It  was  touching  to  see  her  carrying  her  Little 
* Catechism  about  with  her,  that  she  might  study 
every  spare  moment. 

When  O Chiye  san  heard  of  the  intention 
of  these  girls  to  be  baptized,  especially  of 
O Shipfe  san’s  determination  to  brave  her 
father’s  displeasure,  she  seemed  very  thought- 
ful and  sad.  Over  and  over  she  said  that  she 


238  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1875 

feared  nothing  that  her  father  might  do  to  her 
personally,  but  only  the  trouble  she  might  bring 
on  the  family.  Yet  there  was  a sore  conflict 
going  on  in  her  mind.  One  day  she  came 
to  Ro-ku-ban  to  say  that  a new  baby-girl 
had  come  into  their  family,  when  a messen- 
ger arrived  from  her  house  saying  that  she 
must  go  home  immediately.  She  did  not  re- 
turn, and  Deguchi  san  went  over  to  see  what 
the  trouble  was.  It  seems  that  she  had  spo- 
ken to  her  mother  about  her  strong  desire  to 
be  baptized,  and  her  mother  had  told  her 
father  of  it.  He  was  exceedingly  angry,  and 
sent  for  her  and  forbade  her  coming  to  the 
mission-house  any  more. 

Deguchi  san,  after  reporting  these  things  at 
home,  went  again  to  beg  that  she  might  be 
allowed  to  see  her  sick  teacher  once  more. 
Her  father  very  reluctantly  gave  his  consent, 
and  she  came  with  Deguchi  san,  crying  and 
sobbing  most  pitifully.  She  promised  not  to 
give  up  her  faith  and  trust  in  God.  She  was 
soon  sent  for.  All  these  things  were  very 
trying,  and  we  knew  not  how  it  would  end. 
The  next  day  she  came  running  in,  panting 
and  almost  breathless.  Her  father  was  out 
of  the  house,  and  her  mother  had  given  her 
permission  to  come  for  a while. 

Michi,  Shige  and  Kame  were  baptized  on 


1 875]  Strait  Gate  and  Narrow  Way,  239  . 

the  next  Sunday.  Chiye  was  here  all  day, 
and  was  very  sad.  Her  mother  told  her  she 
might  come,  and  she  manag-ed  to  elude  her 
father’s  vigilance  in  some  way. 

The  next  Sunday  another  of  the  pupils, 
Mashi,  and  Hara  san’s  wife,  with  four  others, 
were  baptized.  In  the  morning  a note  came 
from  O Chiye  san.  She  had  fully  made  up 
her  mind  to  be  baptized,  but  that  day  she 
could  not  get  out  of  the  house,  as  her  father 
was  at  home.  She  said  that  she  would  rather 
do  the  hardest  work  than  to  be  so  bound.  “ I 
am  bound  by  an  iron  chain,  which  is  the  will 
of  the  father,”  is  an  expression  she  has  used. 

She  came  in  on  Monday,  after  her  final 
decision  was  made.  Oh  what  a change ! On 
Friday  she  was  here,  her  face  swollen  with 
weeping  and  .her  whole  expression  one  of 
such  sadness  that  it  was  painful  to  see  her; 
on  Monday  she  came  into  the  room,  her  face 
beaming  with  joy,  and  there  has  not  been  a 
tear  in  her  eye  since,  I think.  She  said,  “ The 
rain  has  all  ofone.  The  clouds  have  broken 
away,  and  it  is  light.”  In  the  afternoon  she 
came  again  to  be  examined  previous  to  bap- 
tism. A wild  storm  of  wind  and  rain  was 
raging.  We  gathered  around  the  fire  in  the 
bedroom.  Only  four  were  present,  and  we 
listened  to  her  confession  of  faith.  The  fifth 


240  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1875 

commandment  was  particularly  dwelt  upon. 
When  asked  why  she  would  go  contrary  to 
her  father’s  wishes  in  this  respect,  she  said 
that  she  felt  God’s  command  was  higher. 
She  came  several  times  that  week,  and  al- 
ways* seemed  strong  and  happy. 

The  Sabbath  that  she  was  baptized  was  a 
cold,  stormy  Easter  day.  She  stood  up  alone, 
and  received  the  water  of  baptism  on  her  head. 
For  her  many  a prayer  had  ascended,  to  her 
many  an  anxious  thought  had  been  given’  but 
that  day  the  burden  of  the  joyful  song  was — 

“ ’Tis  done  ! the  great  transaction’s  done  ! 

I am  the  Lord’s,  and  he  is  mine  ; 

He  drew  me,  and  I followed  on. 

Charmed  to  obey  the  voice  divine.’’ 

There  are  now  fourteen  women  in  the  church, 
and  thirty-eight  members  in  all. 

No  one  in  her  home  has  said  anything  to 

0 Chiye  san  about  her  baptism.  We  cannot 
but  think  that  her  father  is  aware  of  it.  The 
other  children  know  it,  but  they  are  quiet, 
discreet  little  things,  and  say  nothing. 

O Tama  san,  little  Sudzu’s  aunt,  came  one 
day,  and  knelt  by  my  bedside  and  whispered 
her  wish  to  be  baptized.  “While  you  were 
sick,”  she  said,  “I  first  learned  to  pray.  I 
knew  not  whom  to  ask  to  make  you  well,  and 

1 turned  to  the  true  God.”  This  woman  had 


*875]  Strait  Gate  and  Narrow  Way.  241 

no  opposition  to  fear  from  friends  at  home, 
and  was  soon  after  received  into  the  church. 
We  miss  some  of  the  girls  who  have  long 
been  with  us.  The  past  few  months  have 
been  stormy,  troubled  ones,  but  now  the  sun 
is  shining  out  brightly  again,  and  all  are  at 
peace. 

What  of  our  little  O Ine  san  ? She  is 
growing  tall  and  developing  rapidly.  She 
has  once  or  twice  expressed  to  one  of  her 
friends  in  school,  or  to  her  mother,  her  desire 
to  be  baptized,  but  she  does  not  yet  seem  to 
have  come  to  the  time  when  she  feels  that 
she  must  decide  one  way  or  the  other.  I tell 
her  mother  that  I often  fear  she  is  too  ambi- 
tious for  Ine,  and  is  crowding  her  mind.  She 
' is  anxious  that  she  shall  excel  in  all  Japanese 
accomplishments  as  well  as  go  on  in  her  for- 
eign studies. 

I went  with  her  one  day  to  the  “ tea-school.” 
Presenting  tea  to  guests  and  making  all  the 
necessary  bows  and  complimentary  phrases 
are  such  important  things  for  Japanese  wom- 
en that  they  are  taught  them  as  a regular 
science.  The  teacher  has  his  pupils  to  come 
one  by  one.  There  were  a number  of  Japan- 
ese present,  and  we  all  sat  on  the  floor  and 
watched  the  little  girl  as  she  took  the  tea 
from  its  canister  and  put  it  into  the  tiny 

21  Q 


242 


The  Suiu'ise  Kingdom.  [1875 

tea-pot.  The  other  things  were  all  in  a little 
drawer,  and  she  got  them  out,  then  folded 
the  napkin,  fanned  the  charcoal,  poured  boil- 
ing water  on  the  tea,  and  then  presented  it 
in  a little  cup  gracefully  to  the  spectators, 
who  were  supposed  to  be  guests.  All  this 
was  very  daintily  and  nicely  done,  and  we 
thought  the  tea-school  quite  interesting. 

Ko-ba-ya-shi  san  is  one  who  causes  me  much 
anxiety.  She  is  out  of  the  more  immediate 
sphere  of  our  influence  now,  as  the  family 
have  moved  into  the  country,  and  she  does 
not  attend  school.  The  whole  family  are  ex- 
ceedingly kind.  The  father  and  mother  are 
nice  old  people,  but  do  not  seem  favorably 
inclined  toward  Christianity.  “ I imagine,”  says 
a missionary  friend,  “ they  think  the  gate  is 
very  ‘ strait  ’ and  the  way  very  ‘ narrow.’  ” 
They  seem  to  enjoy  much  of  the  pleasures 
of  this  life,  and  care  not  for  any  others. 

Doubtless  those  who  have  just  entered  the 
“strait  gate,”  and  begun  to  walk  in  the  “nar- 
row way,”  will  stumble  and  fall  sometimes, 
but  their  faces  are  turned  heavenward;  and 
when  they  rise,  it  will  be  to  walk  on  in  the 
same  direction.  They  will  wander  sometimes, 
there  will  be  many  temptations  to  turn  them 
aside,  and  there  are  many  false  teachers  who 
will  try  to  lead  them  astray. 


1875]  Strait  Gate  and  Narrow  Way.  243 

Our  girls  are  learning  the  tenth  chapter  of 
John’s  Gospel.  In  their  own  soft,  musical 
language  they  repeat  the  words,  “ He  calleth 
his  own  sheep  by  name  and  leadeth  them  out; 
and  the  sheep  follow  him,  for  they  know  his 
voice.  And  a stranger  they  will  not  follow, 
for  they  know  not  the  voice  of  a stranger.” 

Yes,  the  sheep  know  the  true  Shepherd’s 
voice.  False  teachers  are  all  around,  but  we 
fear  not  the  voice  of  strangers  for  our  flock, 
for  they  know  them  not.  They  will  not  wander 
long  nor  far  from  the  shining  road  along  which 
the  Shepherd  is  leading  them,  nor  go  back 
into  the  dark  mazes  of  Buddhism,  Sintooism 
or  Confucianism,  for  they  have  heard  the 
Lord’s  voice  and  are  following  him. 

“ And  I give  unto  them  eternal  life,  and  they 
shall  never  perish,  neither  shall  any  one  pluck 
them  out  of  my  hand.”  It  is  in  this  word  that 
we  rest  without  fear  or  doubt. 

O Chiye  san  has  had  more  to  contend  with 
than  the  others,  so  far.  Soon  after  her  bap- 
tism, she  was  taken  away  to  Yikosuka,  much 
against  her  desire.  But  her  aunt  came  back 
with  her,  brought  her  to  our  house,  and  per- 
suaded her  father  to  let  her  come  to  school 
again.  This  aunt  has  great  influence  over 
her  brother,  O Chiye  san’s  father,  and  is  a 
woman  of  bright  intellect.  Soon  after,  without 


244  Sunrise  Kingdojn,  [1875 

any  difficulty,  we  gained  the  father’s  consent 
to  have  her  come  into  the  house  as  a teacher- 
pupil,  supporting  herself  in  this  way. 

And  now  indeed  the  clouds  have  all  gone, 
and  our  school  closed  very  happily  for  the 
summer  vacation.  Most  of  the  older  girls 
are  members  of  the  church,  and  the  little 
ones  believe  with  childish  faith. 

On  these  summer  Sabbaths  the  house  is 
open  all  day  and  filled  with  Japanese,  who 
come  to  attend  service  or  to  talk  about  our 
religion.  Friends  of  the  girls  come,  dressed 
neatly  and  prettily,  to  go  to  the  church  and 
Sabbath-school.  The  Sabbaths  are  happy  days 
here,  and  every  one  is  so  glad  to  go  to  church. 
The  windows  and  doors  are  all  open,  and  the 
pleasant  breeze  comes  in  from  the  sea.  Twice 
a day  the  people  go  from  the  mission-house 
to  the  church.  At  noon  the  girls  have  their 
prayer-meeting.  The  hymns — Japanese  words 
set  to  our  own  familiar  tunes — fill  the  house 
with  music,  and  it  is  no  uncommon  thing  to 
hear  , the  low  murmur  of  prayer. 

In  June  our  funny  little  Toyo  of  long  ago 
came  back  to  us ; she  has  the  same  quick, 
nervous  manner  as  of  old,  and  always  makes 
her  presence  felt. 

Last  evening  the  closing  exercises  of  the 
school  were  held  in  the  church.  The  house 


i875]  Straii  Gate  and  Narrozv  Way.  245 

was  filled.  Fathers,  mothers  and  friends  came 
to  see  and  hear  the  girls,  who  sang  English 
hymns,  and  some  of  the  older  ones  played 
on  the  organ.  They  had  recitations  and  read- 
ings and  dialogues,  and  the  little  ones  went 
through  with  their  exercises  in  calisthenics. 
All  passed  off  very  successfully,  and  both 
natives  and  foreigners  expressed  themselves 
as  highly  pleased  with  the  appearance  and  ef- 
forts of  the  school. 

So  another  school-year  has  closed  brightly 
and  hopefully.  It  has  given  us  great  encour- 
agement to  go  forward,  and  “woman’s  work 
for  woman”  here  is  an  established  fact.  We 
look  for  still  more  hopeful  results,  when  many 
more  shall  seek  the  “ strait  gate  ” and  enter 
upon  the  “ narrow  way.” 

21 


CHAPTER  IV. 


A yiN-I^I-JCI-SHA  JOURNEY. 

“ Every  place  that  the  sole  of  your  foot  shall  tread  upon,  that  have 
I given  you.” 


E have  been  traveling  in  jin-ri-ki-shas 


down  the  Tokaido,  from  Tokio,  the 
eastern  capital,  to  Saikiyo,  or  Kiyoto,  the  west- 
ern capital.  To  do  this  we  had  to  obtain  pass- 
ports from  the  government,  as  it  is  death  to 
foreigners  to  go  beyond  certain  bounds  with- 
out permission.  Through  the  kindness  of 
the  American  resident  minister,  these  pass- 
ports were  obtained  without  difficulty,  and 
proved  an  effectual  protection  to  us  all 
through  our  journey.  The  road  from  Tokio 
to  the  foot  of  the  Ha-ko-ne  Mountains  has 
been  described  in  a previous  chapter,  and 
we  need  not  go  over  that  already  familiar 


It  took  us  fifteen  days  to  make  the  journey 
of  three  hundred  miles,  including  all  stoppages 
for  rest  and  the  Sabbath.  Since  we  left  Mishi- 
ma,  at  the  foot  of  the  Ha-ko-nes,  we  have  had 
the  same  jin-ri-ki-sha  men,  who  have  on  an 


route 


246 


1875]  A Jin-ri-ki-sha  Journey.  247 

average  traveled  thirty  miles  a day,  stopping 
to  rest  once  in  the  morning,  then  at  noon, 
and  once  again  in  the  afternoon  and  at  night. 
These  men  were  exceedingly  anxious  to  go 
all  the  way  to  Kiyoto,  and  kept  up  their 
strength  very  well,  although  we  should  have 
preferred  obtaining  fresh  men  at  different  sta- 
tions. 

Day  after  day  we  followed  the  road,  scarce- 
ly turning  to  the  right  or  the  left.  It  has  led 
us  over  hot,  sandy  highways,  across  three 
mountain-chains,  through  pleasant  valleys  and 
under  grand  old  trees.  We  have  crossed 
rivers  on  flat-boats.  Twice  have  we  sailed 
over  an  arm  of  the  sea.  We  have  walked, 
or  been  carried  in  ka-gos,  over  the  mountains, 
enjoying  the  fresh  mountain-air  and  the  beau- 
tiful scenery.  In  these  mountains,  we  are 
told,  there  are  treasures  of  gold,  silver,  cop- 
per, lead,  quicksilver  and  coal.  We  saw  car- 
nelians,  agates,  jasper  and  crystals.  We  pass- 
ed by  fields  of  tobacco,  rice  and  cotton.  Some 
parts  of  the  country  seemed  to  produce  but  few 
vegetables.  The  sa-to-i-mo  (Japanese  “sugar- 
potato  ”)  was  abundant.  Rice  and  eggs  were 
usually  found,  but  sometimes  even  eggs  were 
scarce.  We  were  generally  dependent  on 
our  own  supply  of  provisions. 

The  road  led  us  through  a number  of  large 


248  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1875 

towns.  They  are  very  similar  to  each  other 
and  to  Tokio,  and  the  houses  in  Japan  are  so 
much  alike  that  every  evening,  in  going  into 
our  new  hotel,  it  seemed  as  if  we  were  enter- 
ing the  very  one  we  had  been  in  the  night 
before ; the  rooms  and  the  gardens,  the  ser- 
vants, the  candlesticks,  dishes  and  washbasins, 
— all  seemed  the  very  same. 

Some  places,  however,  deserve  special  men- 
tion, and  first  I must  tell  of  the  river  Fu-ji. 
Fu-ji-ya-ma  was  all  covered  by  mists  and  clouds 
when  we  passed  him,  and  we  went  directly 
on  to  Fu-ji-ka-wa,  or  the  river  Fu-ji,  which 
runs  near  the  base  of  the  mountain.  Before 
reaching  it  we  crossed  a singular  spot  to 
find  in  this  “garden  of  the  world.”  It  seem- 
ed to  have  been  the  ancient  channel  of  Fu-ji- 
ka-wa,  and  was  wild  and  desolate  in  the 
extreme.  The  river  at  times  overflows  its 
banks  to  the  extent  of  a mile  and  a half 
with  a rushing  torrent,  as  indicated  by  the 
eflbrts  of  the  natives  to  protect  the  embank- 
ments by  means  of  huge  cobble-stones  en- 
closed in  strong  bamboo  network.  Even 
then,  although  comparatively  small,  the  river 
rushed  over  its  rocky  bed  with  so  swift  a 
current  that  we  almost  feared  to  cross  it.  It 
seemed  as  though  the  rowers  could  scarcely 
stem  the  rapid  current,  but  we  soon  found 


1875]  A Jin-ri-ki-sha  yourney,  249 

that,  like  the  Japanese  in  general,  the  men 
were  good  boatmen,  and  we  were  rowed 
across  in  safety. 

Shidzuoka. — Our  noon  rest  one  day  was  at 
Shidzuoka,  the  capital  of  the  province  of  Su- 
ruga.  There  the  old  tycoon,  Stotsu  Bashi,  re- 
sides. After  his  defeat  in  1868,  instead  of  be- 
ing put  to  death  or  commanded  to  commit 
hara-kiri,  as  was  the  usual  way  in  old  times, 
he  was  allowed  to  go  into  retirement  on  his 
own  estate,  where  he  now  lives  in  honorable 
exile. 

In  the  government  school  at  Shidzuoka  a 
Christian  gentleman  is  engaged  in  teaching. 
He  gave  an  interesting  account  of  religious 
matters  there.  Twenty-nine  persons  had  been 
baptized. 

Yoshida. — This  was  the  only  town  where  we 
had  trouble  in  finding  a place  to  sleep.  With 
the  shadows  growing  deeper  and  deeper  about 
us,  we  tried  one  hotel  after  another.  The  jin- 
ri-ki-sha  men  were  wearied  with  their  day’s 
travel,  and  were  sorely  in  need  of  rest.  Fi- 
nally, an  appeal  was  made  at  the  police-station. 
A crowd  gathered  around  the  jin-ri-ki-shas.  A 
courteous  policeman  accompanied  us  on  the 
search  for  a lodging-place,  but  even  his  en- 
treaties were  of  no  avail. 

At  last  some  people  offered  the  use  of  a 


250  The  Su7trise  Kingdom.  [1875 

kiira  (a  fire-proof  house).  There  were  no  win- 
dows, and  only  two  holes  in  the  wall  to  admit 
the  air.  In  these  close,  heated  quarters  the 
night  was  passed.  The  policeman  was  ver^' 
polite,  and  came  in  the  morning  with  many 
apologies  for  the  people  of  the  town.  He 
said  “ ’ O ki-no  do  ku  sama  ” many  times  (“  Poi- 
son to  your  soul  ”),  and  bowed  very  low  as 
the  coolies  picked  up  the  jin-ri-ki-sha  shafts 
and  trotted  off. 

Nagoya. — Reaching  this  city  on  Saturday 
morning,  we  concluded  to  spend  the  Sabbath 
here.  The  entrance  to  the  hotel  was  dark 
and  forbidding,  but  the  upper  rooms,  which 
were  allotted  to  us,  were  airy  and  cheerful. 
From  one  room  there  was  a view  of  a wide 
street  and  the  entrance  to  a temple.  Dinner 
was  served  on  one  of  the  small  tables ; the 
usual  tea  and  rice  were  brought,  with  water- 
melons for  dessert. 

Nagoya  is  a large,  important  city.  Here 
is  one  of  the  Eigo  - gakkos,  or  “ English 
schools.”  The  buildings  are  very  fine.  Here, 
too,  is  a castle,  where  a prince  once  lived  who 
just  missed  a chance  of  becoming  a tycoon. 
The  ya-shi-kis  which  are  passed  on  the  way  to 
the  castle  were  all  closed,  with  the  exception 
of  two.  The  ponderous  gates  looked  as  if 
they  had  not  been  moved  on  their  hinges  for 


A yin-ri-ki-sha  Journey. 


251 


1H75] 


many  a day.  After  passing  a grove  we  came 
to  a wide  road;  here  the  scene  was  very  pretty. 
In  the  moat  around  the  castle  lotus-flowers 
were  blooming.  The  castle  was  more  like 
a real  one  than  any  we  had  hitherto  seen.  It 
had  a high  wall  flanked  with  towers. 

There  are  many  temples  in  Nagoya ; among 
them,  the  Atsuka  temples,  near  the  city,  are 
famous.  The  streets  of  the  city  were  wide 
and  clean,  and  the  articles  exhibited  in  the 
shops  were  quite  tempting.  Always,  when 
we  stopped  to  look  at  anything,  a crowd  col- 
lected, rendering  it  unpleasant;  and  when  we 
walked  in  the  temple-grounds,  men,  women 
and  children  followed  us. 

The  people  at  the  hotel  gave  us  nice  white- 
fish  for  supper.  The  maids  brought  in  the 
beds,  which  were  comfortable  enough,  but  the 
noise  of  some  travelers  in  a lower  room,  who 
seemed  to  be  having  a particularly  merry  time, 
kept  us  from  sleeping. 

Early  Sabbath  morning  we  were  aroused 
by  the  bell  ringing  and  the  drum  beating  in 
the  temple.  The  worshipers,  a large  crowd, 
came  pouring  through  the  gates.  The  hotel- 
people  said  they  had  been  to  hear  a sermon. 
The  day  passed  quietly.  The  people  talked 
a little  with  us,  and  the  children  seemed  glad 
to  see  the  foreign  ladies,  and  to  get  some 


252 


The  Sum'ise  Kingdom.  [1875 

papers  from  them,  and  to  be  told  about  the 
pictures. 

The  hotel-people  said  they  would  be  lonely 
when  we  left  them.  They  gathered  at  the 
entrance  as  we  were  starting  in  the  morning 
to  say  Saionai^ad  and  the  landlord  waited  at 
the  street-corner  and  bowed  low  as  we  passed. 

Kame  y Lima. — This  is  a pretty  little  town, 
and  as  the  jin-ri-ki-shas  rolled  rapidly  through 
the  streets  the  crowd  following  kept  increasing. 
Children  ran  after  us,  laughing  and  shouting  ; 
the  babies’  heads  rolled  from  side  to  side ; 
and  when  .the  coolies  stopped  at  a hotel,  the 
group  presented  a singular  appearance.  From 
the  upper  window  of  our  hotel  that  night  we 
could  see  the  castle  and  look  over  a beautiful 
wooded  country. 

In  the  morning  the  road  led  us  again  over 
mountains,  the  views  of  which  were  glorious. 
Over  one  mountain  a man  was  leading  some 
goats.  The  people  did  not  know  what  these 
animals  were. 

A town  near  Lake  Biwa  was  our  resting- 
place  for  the  night.  Over  a bridge  across  one 
end  of  the  lake  Biwa,  which  is  the  largest 
lake  in  Japan,  the  men  drew  the  jin-ri-ki-shas 
the  next  morning. 

The  rain  began  to  come  down,  and  umbrel- 
las and  oiled  paper  had  to  be  taken  out  for  the 


A yin-id-ki-sha  Jottmey. 


253 


1875] 


first  time.  But  it  did  not  rain  long.  The  road 
was  all  up  hill  and  very  bad.  At  many  places 
the  jin-ri-ki-shas  had  to  be  lifted  over.  One 
thing  which  seemed  peculiar  as  we  entered 
Kiyoto  was  the  number  of  oxen  employed 
as  beasts  of  burden.  A bamboo-grove  made 
the  road  near  the  city  very  pleasant. 

Will  this  land  ever  be  thrown  open  to  for- 
eigners ? No  one  can  tell,  but  we  hope  that 
some  day  this  may  be  accomplished.  One 
thing  is  a source  of  comfort  to  the  Christian : 
we  can  never  be  out  of  our  Father’s  kingdom. 
The  Japanese  may  set  their  boundaries  as 
they  please ; we  may  wander  or  be  in  exile 
anywhere : our  feet  are  in  our  Father’s  terri- 
tory, and  we  are  ever  at  home.  And  the  land 
is  ours,  for  the  Lord  has  promised  it  to  his 
Son,  and  in  him  we  possess  all  things.  Thus 
we  believe  that  this  fair  “ Land  of  the  Rising 
Sun  ” will  be  covered  with  the  brightness  of 
the  Saviour’s  glory. 


22 


CHAPTER  V. 


THE  TWO  CAPITALS  IN  187s. 

“ Paul  departed  from  Athens,  and  came  to  Corinth.” 

^ / 'HE  Western  Capital. — August  7,  1875. — 
^ Kiyoto,  or  Saikiyo,  as  the  people  here 
best  like  to  have  it  called,  is  the  great  religious 
centre  of  Japan.  It  was  formerly  the  residence 
of  the  spiritual  emperor,  or  Mikado.  It  is  very 
different  from  the  city  where  we  dwell.  Accus- 
tomed to  the  breezes  of  open  plain  and  sea,  we 
feel  oppressed  here  by  the  close  surround- 
ing mountains.  Yet  it  is  in  many  respects  a 
far  more  imposing  city  than  Tokio.  Its  tem- 
ples are  larger  and  grander,  its  pagodas  more 
numerous,  its  streets  wider,  and  its  manufac- 
tures miore  extensive  and  various.  There  is 
a preponderance  of  dark  red  in  the  color  of 
the  houses  and  temples. 

The  great  temple  Choin  is  a wonderful  build- 
ing. Everything  is  on  a gigantic  scale.  The 
high  place  {^Kiyomicizid),  from  which  there  is 
a fine  view  of  the  city,  is  very  beautiful  with 
its  dense  shrubbery  and  pleasant  tea-houses. 
At  one  temple  we  saw  an  immense  bell,  said 

254 


The  Two  Capitals  in  1875. 


255 


1875] 


to  be  one  of  the  largest  in  the  world ; it  is 
broken  now.  Here  also  was  a large  image  of 
Buddha. 

But  the  most  wonderful  thing  we  have  seen 
in  Kiyoto  is  the  temple  where  Buddha  is  seated, 
with  his  warriors  standing  around  him.  In  the 
centre  of  a long,  narrow  room  is  the  large 
gilded  image,  and  on  either  side  of  it  are  five 
hundred  statues  of  life  size,  richly  gilded,  each 
having  three  heads  and  six  hands,  and  all  bear- 
ing the  same  gentle,  sweet  expression  which 
generally  characterizes  the  image  of  Buddha. 
It  seems  as  if  this  were  significant  of  the  mer- 
ciful feature  of  Buddhism  in  regard  to  animal 
life.  We  have  already  noticed  the  Japanese 
tenderness  toward  flies  and  insects,  to  kill  one 
of  which  wantonly  or  unnecessarily  would  pro- 
voke the  anger  of  their  gods.  It  forms  a part 
of  their  devotions  to  release  insects  from  cap- 
tivity, and  in  the  temple-grounds  are  venders 
of  insects  for  that  purpose.  We  saw  beetles 
sold  for  pieces  of  cash  to  such  devotees,  who 
doubtless  in  their  prayers  asked  Buddha  to 
remember  their  kindness  and  gentleness. 

As  a strange  commentary,  however,  on  this 
merciful  disposition,  it  appeared  to  us  as  if 
they  would  not  be  loth  to  slaughter  one  of 
us,  their  white  brethren,  the  hated  foreigners, 
even  though  they  turned  aside  from  the  crawl- 


256 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[187s 


ing  worm  or  gave  glad  freedom  to  an  impris- 
oned insect.  Their  creed  has  been  so  learned 
that  animal  food  never  crosses  their  lips,  be- 
cause life  has  to  be  taken,  and  yet,  with  bitter 
ferocity,  they  have  made  their  swords  to  drip 
with  the  hearts’  blood  of  Christians,  and  might 
be  ready  to  do  the  same  now  if  the  power  of 
the  government  were  only  relaxed.  To  love 
insects  and  worms  and  yet  hate  a fellow-man 
is  certainly  remarkable  inconsistency,  and  pre- 
sents a wonderful  contrast  to  that  religion 
whose  foundation-principle  is  love — even  love 
for  enemies. 

Still,  as  we  stood  before  that  image  of 
Buddha  attended  by  his  thousand  golden-clad 
warriors,  with  the  light  of  the  declining  sun 
reflected  in  their  almost  angelic  countenances, 
we  could  not  help  feeling  sentiments  of  awe 
and  veneration ; and  though  Buddhism  has 
many  a dark  aspect,  we  came  away  deeply 
impressed  with  the  benignity  stamped  on  these 
beautiful  statues,  and  with  something  of  respect 
for  the  faith  whose  expression  they  are.  A 
creed  is  not  always  to  be  judged  by  the  life 
of  its  professed  adherents.  Christianity  itself, 
the  essence  of  divine  holiness  and  love,  has 
often  been  brought  into  disrepute  by  the  in- 
consistent lives  of  its  professors ; and  so 
cliarity  would  teach  us  that  even  Confucius 


1 87 5]  The  Two  Capitals  in  1875.  257 

and  Buddha  are  grossly  misrepresented  by 
their  followers,  since  he  may  profess  to  be 
the  upholder  of  gentleness  and  mercy  who 
yet  would  not  forbear  to  take  the  life  of  his 
fellow-man.  With  these  reflections  we  emerged 
from  this  temple  of  Buddha  and  his  thousand 
warriors  to  visit  other  scenes  in  this  interest- 
ing capital  of  the  West. 

A great  temple  in  the  suburbs  of  the  city  was 
attractive  on  account  of  its  bamboo-groves. 
From  a point  higher  than  Kiyo-midzu  we  had 
a grand  view  of  Kiyoto  one  evening  just  as 
the  sun  was  setting  and  throwing  long  rays 
of  golden  light  over  city  and  mountains.  We 
looked  across  the  roofs  of  the  houses,  down 
over  the  temples  and  pagodas  to  where  the 
hills  on  every  side  shut  off  the  surrounding 
country  from  our  view. 

They  tell  us  of  the  great  mountain  Haizen, 
in  the  neighborhood  of  Kiyoto,  where  the 
scenes  are  wondrously  fair  and  the  temples 
interesting  from  their  great  antiquity ; also 
that  in  the  suburbs  of  the  city  are  many  pleas- 
ant spots.  But  our  investigations  have  been 
confined  principally  to  the  city  itself.  We 
have  watched  men  painting  porcelain  and 
manufacturing  the  cups  and  plates  which 
are  so  celebrated  as  “ Kiyoto- ware.”  We 
have  examined  the  fans,  vases  and  children’s 
*22  * K 


258  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1875 

toys  made  here  in  such  variety  and  rich  abun- 
dance. 

Theatre. — Yesterday  we  went  to  the  Japan- 
ese theatre,  and  were  fortunate  enough  to  see 
the  performance  of  one  complete  play,  a short 
tragedy.  And  we  may  properly  notice  just  here 
the  Japanese  theatre  as  it  appears  through- 
out the  empire.  We  have  looked  into  the 
theatre  at  Tokio  for  a few  minutes,  and  we 
saw  this  one  play  at  Kiyoto,  from  which,  and 
from  all  we  have  heard  about  it,  we  presume 
that  one  is  the  type  of  all.  The  performances 
commence  early  in  the  morning,  continue 
through  the  day  with  scarcely  an  interruption, 
and  close  at  sundown.  Theatres  are  never 
open  at  night.  The  buildings  are  wooden, 
barn-like  structures,  without  gilding  or  orna- 
ment save  the  usual  lanterns,  colored  papers 
and  painted  Chinese  characters.  This  thea- 
tre at  Kiyoto  had  no  galleries,  but  simply 
a sloping  parquette  a little  higher  in  the  rear 
than  in  the  front.  The  audience  was  constant- 
ly changing,  some  coming  in  and  some  going 
out,  while  the  performance  was  going  on,  and 
boys  went  around  selling  sweetmeats  and 
fruits. 

As  in  the  Roscian  period,  only  male  actors 
were  on  the  stage.  The  chief  performers — 
doubtless  the  “ stars  ” — came  in  from  the^front 


iS75]  The  Two  Capitals  in  1875.  259 

of  the  house,  and  walked  on  a narrow  plat- 
form the  whole  length  to  the  stage,  spouting 
and  stalking  with  majestic  tread,  all  in  such 
stilted  style  as  to  be  irresistibly  comical, 
although  the  ^lay  was  a tragedy  and  this  lofty 
prologue  was  to  tell  of  the  hero’s  dire  wrongs 
and  how  he  was  to  suffer  till  Justice  had 
wrought  her  work.  The  dresses  of  these 
actors  were  more  like  those  represented  on 
vases  and  in  pictures  than  those  of  ordinary 
every-day  life,  being  robes  of  gorgeous  hue, 
well  bespangled  and  with  ample  folds. 

The  play  was  the  usual  one  of  a tyrant 
usurper,  who  prospered  for  a while  in  his 
cruel  oppressions,  but  whose  evil  designs  were 
finally  frustrated  and  the  proper  heir  was  re- 
stored. The  tyrant  died  by  his  own  hand.  He 
first  committed  hari-kari,  and  then  cut  his  own 
head  off.  We  saw  his  head  falling  into  a bas- 
ket. The  Japanese  are  masters  of  jugglery. 

The  orchestra  was  peculiarly  Japanese,  and 
most  distressing  to  our  ears.  It  consisted  of 
fife  and  drum  and  a kind  of  flute ; but  the 
chief  effect  was  that  produced  by  the  pound- 
ing of  mallets  on  blocks  of  wood  without 
regard  to  melody  or  tune — at  least,  so  it 
seemed  to  us — and  we  could  well  dispense 
with  this  accessory  to  the  stage.  Still,  a vigor- 
ous blow  may  properly  accompany  the  tale  of 


26o 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1875 

a tyrant’s  acts,  and  doubtless,  to  the  Japanese 
ear,  there  was  more  of  harmony  than  appeared 
to  our  untutored  and  unappreciative  taste. 
For  the  play  we  saw  was  certainly  operatic, 
and  this  thumping  music  was  evidently  intend- 
ed to  give  effect  to  the  sentiments  expressed 
by  the  actors.  The  natives  relished  it,  if  we 
did  not.  When  anything  peculiarly  striking 
was  expressed  by  an  actor,  it  was  accompa- 
nied by  a corresponding  crash  from  the  orches- 
tra ' and  a hissing  kind  of  applause  from  the 
spectators. 

We  saw  nothing  immoral,  or  even  objection- 
able, in  the  play,  the  audience  or  any  of  the 
surroundings.  And  thus  we  may  pronounce 
the  theatre  in  a heathen  land  as  immeasurably 
superior  to  that  in  our  Christian  country.  The 
adjuncts  of  a theatre  are  generally  its  worst 
and  most  injurious  features.  The  bar-room, 
the  questionable  company,  the  mawkish  and 
often  false  representations  of  life  on  the  stage 
itself,  and  all  the  dissipating  tendencies  of  the 
surroundings  in  our  theatres,  have  brought 
many  a youth  to  ruin.  We  may  have  a pure 
and  classical  stage,  but  there  will  have  to  be 
great  changes  also  in  the  theatre.  None  of 
these  adjuncts  mentioned  are  found  in  this 
heathen  theatre. 

The  jin-ri-ki-shas  of  Kiyoto  are  larger  and 


TUKIO  WOMAN.  KIOTO  WOMAN.  Page  261. 


<1.  *«»  ' 


■ 


'•,  • - Ivi  r.  - : 

«v'  ‘»o?  ,w’ r;r^v 

/v>y---.  'O  Sft<  -• 

.'j-c' . ■*^.  ■ ■■'..•‘i^K  V-  II 


^ /ikkgr,^h,  jp 


■ ■ : . v-H 


/ ’V  .>-.-*fv  «i4  ..,..^.■4%.^ 


i 


■i 


<*U 


> 


t’ 


r.  ..  .ir«  .1^4 


*.  ' »'•"  H ' ■■■:  - ‘’*5i  ', ;. 

' ■ ■•'■  ■.  • ; ; •'  ' 'f 

..  .«l^  . - 


i875]  The  Two  Capitals  m 1875.  261 

handsomer  than  those  of  Tokio.  The  peo- 
ple look  about  the  same,  except  that  the 
women  let  their  sashes  hang  loosely  behind 
instead  of  looping  them  up,  as  in  Tokio.  The 
dialect  is  a little  different,  but  not  enough  so 
to  trouble  us  much. 

The  Eastern  Capital. — Monday,  Sept.  6,  1875. 
— We  are  glad  to  be  at  home  again.  This  has 
been  a very  lovely  day,  and  Kadzusa’s  moun- 
tains, across  the  bay,  look  very  tempting. 

The  mission-house  is  full  of  life,  for  school 
began  last  Wednesday.  In  the  morning  the 
day-scholars  come  over  the  fields,  bright  and 
happy,  to  begin  the  work  of  the  day.  There 
is  usually  a line  of  children  waiting  on  the 
stairs,  with  bright  faces  peeping  over  the 
banisters. 

The  two  weeks  which  intervened  between 
the  homecoming  and  the  beginning  of  school 
passed  away  rapidly.  Almost  every  afternoon, 
when  the  heat  of  the  day  was  over,  jin-ri-ki- 
shas  were  called  for,  and  we  made  a little  jour- 
ney into  the  city  and  visited  a number  of  the 
scholars  at  their  homes. 

The  Tokio  of  to-day  is  very  different  from  the 
Yedo  of  old.  It  is  a great  city,  and  contains 
much  that  is  interesting.  The  State  govern- 
ment is  all  divided  into  departments,  or  shius. 
There  is  the  finance  department,  the  naval,  the 


262  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1875 

military,  the  agricultural,  the  religious,  the 
engineering,  mining,  etc.,  etc.  All,  or  almost 
all,  of  these  have  their  headquarters  in  Tokio. 
Although  some  of  these  departments  are  lo- 
cated in  old  temples,  yet  many  of  the  build- 
ings are  of  foreign  style,  and  foreigners  are 
employed  largely  in  them.  A new  building 
for  the  Kai  sei  gakko,  or  government  school, 
has  been  erected,  and  one  for  the  normal 
school  for  girls  is  now  going  up. 

The  police-force  of  the  city  is  large  and 
effective.  The  post-office  department  is  finely 
organized,  and  letters  are  faithfully  delivered 
at  the  door.  The  streets  are  named  and  the 
houses  numbered. 

The  Ginza  differs  materially  from  the  old 
To-ri.  The  stores  are  built  in  European  style 
and  filled  with  foreign  articles,  as  well  as  with 
everything  that  a Japanese  can  want.  All 
over  the  city,  indeed,  foreign  vegetables  and 
fruits  of  all  kinds  may  be  found.  Butchers 
and  bakers  are  numerous,  and  bread  and  meat 
are  no  longer  scarce,  as  they  were  a few  years 
ago.  Milk  is  sold  at  tolerably  reasonable  rates, 
and  ice  can  be  procured  in  any  quantity  on 
the  Ginza. 

Coaches  and  jin-ri-ki-shas  roll  along  the 
streets.  Many  of  the  men  wear  foreign 
clothes.  No  two-sworded  men  are  seen  any 


1875]  The  Two  Capitals  in  1875.  263 

longer,  and  the  Mikado  goes  about  among 
the  people,  not  fearing  to  show  his  face. 
And  one  of  the  most  remarkable  things  to 
be  noticed  is  the  utter  absence  of  tramps  and 
beggars.  Beggary  was  once  a system,  but 
now  it  has  been  abolished,  and  the  beggars 
have  been  put  to  work.  Many  have  been 
sent  to  Yeso,  and  others  are  employed  in  the 
factories. 

Missionaries  of  different  countries  and  socie- 
ties have  their  homes  here.  Some  are  allowed 
to  live  outside  the  Concession  by  accepting 
a position  as  teachers  under  the  care  of  a 
Japanese,  and  these  missionaries  and  teach- 
ers are  permitted  to  hold  meetings  in  their 
own  houses. 

The  Japanese  women  are  not  all  the  painted, 
soulless  dolls  of  old  Japan ; there  are  now 
among  them  some  educated,  intelligent  women. 
As  fathers  see  their  daughters  learning  and 
becoming  good,  wise  women  ; as  the  educated 
young  men  seek  wives  among  the  girls  who 
have  been  taught  in  the  schools,  and  intelligent 
women  have  the  care  and  training  of  children, 
and  boys  no  longer  despise  their  mothers,  and 
husbands  learn  to  trust  their  wives — the  family 
relations  will  all  be  changed,  and  the  power  of 
pure  womanhood  will  be  felt  in  the  land. 

It  is  pleasant  sometimes  to  take  a mere 


264  The  Sttnrise  Kingdom.  [1875 

surface-glance — to  go  to  the  little  houses  when 
the  slides  are  drawn  back  in  the  late  summer 
afternoons,  and  the  little  glass  ornaments  are 
tinkling  musically,  and  the  wind  is  gently  stir- 
ring the  flowers  of  the  little  garden,  and  to 
look  at  the  pretty  pictures  of  Japanese  life 
which  are  unconsciously  shown  to  us. 

Thus  we  have  been  visiting  the  scholars  in 
their  homes,  into  many  of  which  the  teachers 
were  warmly  welcomed.  We  sat  on  the  mats, 
drank  tea,  and  talked  about  the  school  and 
the  church,  and  how  the  little  ones  were  learn- 
ing. At  one  house  we  were  treated  with  great 
ceremony.  We  were  conducted  into  the  best 
room  of  the  large  house,  and  all  the  family 
gathered  in.  They  told  us  that  the  children 
were  anxious  to  begin  school  again,  and  when 
we  went  away  they  loaded  us  with  fruit. 

All  this  is  real,  unaffected  kindness  on  their 
part,  but  the  making  our  visit  a thing  of  so 
much  ceremony  prevents  us  from  going  to 
visit  them  in  a friendly,  social  way  as  often 
as  we  should  like.  Such  overwhelming  atten- 
tions are  irksome  to  us,  and  must  be  burden- 
some to  them.  And  when  this  practice  is 
carried  to  such  an  extent  as  it  is  in  this 
country,  it  must  interfere  with  informal  neigh- 
borly visiting. 

O Sen  san’s  father  is  Deguchi  san’s  brother. 


>875]  The  Two  Capitals  m 1875.  265 

He  is  an  officer,  and  lives  near  the  Ginza,  in 
a foreign  house.  When  we  went  to  see  the 
family,  the  room  where  we  were  entertained 
had  doors  and  windows,  a carpet,  tables  and 
chairs.  He  entertained  us  so  well  and  kept 
us  so  long  that  the  greater  part  of  an  hour 
was  spent  there  in  looking  at  books  and 
photographs,  and  in  talking  about  Japan  and 
America. 

One  lovely  summer  day  we  went  to  see 
O Shige  san.  Her  father  has  a beautiful  home 
in  the  suburbs.  We  pass  the  high  place  Kudan 
to  get  to  it.  The  light  wooden  house,  with  the 
slides  all  drawn  back  to  admit  the  air,  look- 
ed very  charming,  embowered  in  the  green 
shrubbery.  They  have  a fine  garden,  which 
the  master  of  the  house  showed  with  much 
pride,  while  he  told  of  contemplated  improve- 
ments. He  has  five  daughters,  of  whom 
Shige  is  the  eldest.  The  third  one,  Fu-sa, 
is  a fine-looking  child.  There  is  a little  new 
baby,  a grandmother  and  the  young-looking, 
gentle  mother.  The  children  in  the  garden 
and  the  neat,  clean  house  made  a pretty  pic- 
ture, and  we  lingered  there  until  warned  by 
the  gathering  darkness  that  it  was  time  to 
go  home. 

In  brief  description  we  have  had  before  us 
the  two  great  capitals  of  Japan,  the  Western 

23 


266 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[>875 


still  submerged  in  complete  heathenism  and 
entirely  unaffected  by  foreign  influence,  while 
the  other  has  already  undergone  great  changes 
from  the  introduction  of  foreign  science,  and 
also,  in  some  measure,  from  the  influence  of 
the  gospel  of  our  Lord.  And  enough  is  mani- 
fest to  assure  us  of  the  future  blessed  results 
of  that  gospel,  and  to  inspire  a hope  that 
this  same  glorious  truth  may  soon  rise  upon 
Kiyoto’s  temples  and  pagodas,  until  one  wave 
of  light  may  illumine  the  whole  land,  from 
Tokio  to  the  Western  capital,  down  to  Naga- 
saki in  the  southern  extremity,  and  that  the 
light  of  the  knowledge  of  God  may  penetrate 
into  every  heart. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


**  THE  POOR  HAVE  THE  GOSPEL  PREACHED 
TO  THEMP 


I love  to  tell  the  story  : 

’Tis  pleasant  to  rep'bat 
What  seems,  each  time  I tell  it, 
More  wonderfully  sweet. 

1 love  to  tell  the  story. 

For  some  have  never  heard 
The  message  of  salvation 

From  God’s  own  holy  word.” 


E have  long  waited  for  the  time  to  come 


when  we  might  go  among  the  poor 
and  lowly  and  speak  to  the  people.  A pecu- 
liar phase  of  missionary-life  in  Japan  is  that 
we  began  our  work  among  the  upper  classes 
and  only  gradually  came  to  the  lower,  while  in 
most  mission-fields  labor  is  chiefly  confined  to 
the  poor.  The  unoccupied  Samurai,  looking 
about  for  something  to  do  or  some  means  of 
support,  came  to  us  for  instruction,  and  to  the 
merchant  class  we  easily  gained  access,  but 
until  now  we  have  been  unable  to  work  free- 
ly among  the  lower  classes. 

The  poor  people  are  ignorant  and  timid, 
and  therefore  superstitious  and  more  under 


268 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1875 


the  power  of  the  priests.  How  often,  when 
reading  the  New  Testament  in  school,  have 
we  been  struck  with  the  frequent  recurrence 
of  the  words,  “ The  chief  priests  and  the 
elders  ” ! “ Who  were  Christ’s  most  bitter 

enemies  when  on  earth?”  I asked  a Japanese 
girl  one  day.  “ The  priests,”  she  answered. 
“ And  who  now  are  the  most  bitter  opponents 
of  Christianity  in  this  land?”  “The  priests,” 
was  the  quick  reply.  It  is  even  so : the  false 
teachers  hate  the  truth.  But  now  a door  is 
open  to  the  poor,  and  we  can  go  to  them. 
Blessed,  happy  work  we  find  it. 

Deguchi  san  is  regularly  employed  as  a 
Bible-reader.  She  is  the  first  one  among  the 
women-  of  Tokio,  and  is  an  invaluable  assistant. 
She  has  a wonderful  gift  in  speaking  to  chil- 
dren. Not  long  ago  a jin-ri-ki-sha  man  was 
baptized  with  his  old  mother,  Hisa.  This  old 
woman  is  also  employed  as  an  assistant  in  the 
missionary-work,  and  since  August  we  have 
been  holding  meetings  at  her  house  on  Thurs- 
day of  every  week.  The  house  is  in  a narrow 
street  (Gen-ske-cko)  on  the  way  to  Shi-ba.  She 
gathers  in  the  neighboring  women  and  chil- 
dren, and  we  read  the  Scriptures  and  sing. 
All  enjoy  '' yesu  ware  no  aisu''  (“Jesus  loves 
me”),  and  the  children  like  to  sing  it  every 
time  we  meet.  We  have  been  reading  the 


1 87  5]  ^ The  Gospel  Preached,  269 

Gospel  of  Matthew  through,  in  course,  at 
these  meetings.  The  women  listen  eagerly. 
How  I wish  some  at  home  who  are  interested 
in  our  work  here  could  look  in  upon  us  at 
Gen-ske-cho ! We  all  sit  on  the  floor.  Old 
Hisa  has  the  charcoal  in  the  hi-ba-chis  bright 
and  glowing  these  cold  winter  days.  Those 
who  have*  books  open  them  and  read,  then 
listen  while  others  are  reading. 

The  people  are  usually  very  quiet  and  order- 
ly, but  sometimes  old  Hisa  disturbs  us  a little 
by  distributing  cups  of  tea  in  the  midst  of  the 
talking,  or  some  one  knocks  down  a screen  or 
slide.  Japanese  houses  are  exceedingly  frail 
structures,  and  it  is  rather  dangerous  for  a 
paper  screen  or  slide  to  fall  into  a hi-ba-chi. 
But  old  Hisa  is  learning  not  to  present  tea 
until  the  lesson  is  over,  and  foreigners  are  be- 
coming more  accustomed  to  the  slides. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  features  of  our 
work  this  winter  has  been  the  teaching  of  the 
gospel  to  the  blind  a- mas.  One  or  two  heard 
the  word  and  told  the  joyful  news  to  others, 
and  a deep  interest  was  awakened  in  their 
hearts.  Old  Hisa  takes  her  copies  of  the 
Gospels  and  teaches  them.  They  repeat  the 
words  after  her,  and  thus  learn  large  portions 
of  the  Scriptures.  There  are  always  some  of 
them  at  our  meetings  in  Gen-ske-cho.  Some 

23  * 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom,* 


[1875 


270 


of  them  begged  one  afternoon  that  a meeting 
expressly  for  them  might  be  held  the  next 
Saturday,  and  when  the  petition  was  granted 
one  clapped  his  hands  for  joy. 

So,  on  Saturday,  Hisa  and  I went.  An 
upper  room,  to  which  we  climbed  by  a steep, 
narrow  stairway,  was  filled  with  blind  men. 
The  sunshine  poured  in,  but  all  was  darkness 
to  them.  Yet  one  has  said,  “I  am  glad  I am 
blind ; for  if  I had  seen,  I might  not  have  cared 
for  God.”  They  wanted  to  sing,  and  all  knew 
“Jesus  loves  me.”  We  sang  that  and  “Joy- 
fully, joyfully,”  repeating  each  line  many  times, 
so  that  they  would  remember  it.  They  learned 
also  a little  prayer,  and  all  were  very  happy. 

In  earth’s  sweetest  music  there  is  often  some- 
thing that  strikes  painfully,  a discord  some- 
where— not  in  the  music  itself,  perhaps,  but 
in  our  hearts  or  in  the  misery  and  suffering 
around  us.  But  to  those  whose  ears  are  opened 
to  the  sound  of  heavenly  harmonies,  blind  men, 
singing  even  in  harsh,  discordant  voices,  make 
sweeter  music  than  any  which  earth’s  grandest 
composer  ever  conceived.  It  is  the  beginning 
of  the  “ new  song  ” — the  song  which  we  can 
always  hear  as  we  listen  to  these  untutored, 
often  unpleasant,  voices  singing  the  praises 
of  our  King. 

It  is  not  at  Gen-ske-cho  only  that  the  poor 


’1875] 


The  Gospel  Preached. 


271 


have  the  gospel  preached  to  them.  There 
are  preaching-places  in  various  parts  of  the 
city,  where  many  gather  in. 

But  before  this  year  closes  I must  go  back 
to  our  home-school  and  take  careful  note  of 
what  we  are  doing  at  Ro-ku-ban.  Our  faith- 
ful servant,  Umekichi,  left  our  house  to  go 
into  a book-store.  Two  girls  who  wanted  to 
study,  but  could  not  afford  to  pay  their  tui- 
tion, were  taken  in  his  stead.  Their  names 
were  Hana  and  Shidzu.  They  soon  learned 
the  light  duties  required  of  them,  and  made 
good  progress  in  their  studies.  But  they  did 
not  remain  in  school  very  long.  O Shidzu 
san  was  sent  for  one  evening : her  mother 
was  sick.  She  stayed  away  a little  while,  and 
came  back,  but  was  soon  sent  for  a second 
time.  At  last  Deguchi  san  said  she  was  going 
to  be  married,  and  brought  another  girl,  Iseki 
Mitsuye,  in  her  place.  Then  O Hana  san’s 
mother  came  and  said  that  her  daughter’s 
uncle  was  insane,  and  they  wanted  her  to 
come  and  take  care  of  him.  So  another  one, 
Rin,  came  in  her  place.  But  O Shidzu  san 
was  not  married  very  soon,  nor  did  O Hana 
san  go  to  take  care  of  her  crazy  uncle. 

Another  girl,  O Moto  san,  from  the  north- 
ern provinces,  came  to  school.  She  was  an 
interesting  pupil,  and  talked  about  going  back 


272 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1875* 


to  her  country  and  taking  the  Bible  to  her 
people.  Then  she  stopped  coming,  and  sent 
word  that  her  grandmother  was  sick.  But  the 
old  lady  was  ov\\y  yakamas hi — noisy  and  trou- 
blesome at  home.  She  objected  so  seriously  to 
the  girl’s  going  to  the  school  that  the  family 
had  no  peace,  and  so  O Moto  san  had  to  give 
up  her  studies. 

All  these  things  are  very  trying,  but  we 
meet  such  constantly  in  our  dealings  with  this 
people.  We  can  all  echo  the  prayer  of  one 
of  our  missionaries,  offered  at  a late  prayer- 
meeting : “ Cleanse  this  people  from  the  great 
national  sin  of  hypocrisy.”  Oh,  if  they  would 
only  speak  the  truth ! 

We  have  been  through  many  scenes  of  suf- 
fering and  distress  this  fall.  The  first  sick  one 
to  whom  we  were  called  was  O Kame  san’s 
brother.  For  days  he  lay  on  his  pallet,  bloated 
with  dropsy  and  scarcely  able  to  speak.  Once 
we  thought  him  dying.  The  Japanese  doctor 
said  that  he  could  not  live  through  the  day. 
O Kame  san  was  very  much  distressed.  “ He 
does  not  believe ; he  cannot  be  saved,”  she 
said.  But  the  missionary  doctor  came  in,  and 
under  his  care  the  patient  has  been  recovering. 

Other  cases  of  sickness  occurred.  O Chiye 
san’s  mother  has  suffered  much  and  long. 
One  day  I sat  down  beside  her  and  said. 


The  Gospel  Preached, 


273 


1875] 


“ Where  do  you  go  in  your  sickness  and 
trouble?  You  have  many  gods,  but  to  which 
do  you  pray  now  ?” — “ Alas  she  said,  using 

the  expressive  Japanese  dogu,  “there  are  many, 
but  I know  not  to  which  to  go.” 

Then  O Shige  san,  who  always  seemed  so 
strong  and  well,  was  prostrated  by  serious  lung- 
disease,  and  has  been  ill  all  the  winter,  although 
remaining  at  Ro-ku-ban  to  have  the  care  of  the 
foreign  physician.  So  we  have  had  a sick  one 
in  our  own  home.  It  has  taught  the -other 
girls  to  be  quiet  and  tender,  thoughtful  and 
prayerful.  They  are  very  kind  to  each  other, 
and  want  to  do  what  is  right. 

We  have  been  uneasy  about  O Shige  san, 
but  have  spoken  often  of  her  fitness  to  go, 
should  the  Lord  call  her  home.  She  is  very 
patient.  One  day  she  said,  “I  have  had  such 
a happy  dream ! I thought  I was  in  church 
again  with  all  the  girls.”  Often  since  she 
has  been  better  I have  seen  her  with  the  Bible 
in  her  hands,  and  have  gone  to  her  with  Philip’s 
question:  “ Understandest  thou  what  thou  read- 
est  ?”  and  have  stopped  to  explain  those  things 
which  were  puzzling  to  her.  This  is  a time  of 
unusually  severe  illness  and  depression.  Thus 
it  often  is  in  our  journey  to  our  heavenly  home. 
We  walk  through  scenes  of  suffering,  and,  like 
our  Saviour,  become  “acquainted  with  grief.” 


2 74  Sunrise  Kmgdom.  [1875 

It  is  astonishing  with  what  tenacity  the  Jap- 
anese cling  to  life.  The  foreign  physicians 
say  that  they  do  not  suffer  in  surgical  opera- 
tions as  we  do : their  nervous  system  is  not 
so  sensitive.  A wound  heals  more  quickly 
in  a Japanese  than  in  a foreigner — whether 
owing  to  their  more  simple  way  of  living  or 
not,  we  cannot  say. 

Eye-  and  skin-diseases  are  the  ones  which 
physicians  are  mostly  called  upon  to  treat. 
Consumption  is  common.  Small-pox  formerly 
raged  as  a fearful  scourge,  but  now  the  peo- 
ple are  required  to  be  vaccinated,  and  meas- 
ures are  taken  to  prevent  its  spread.  One 
peculiar  disease  is  the  kake,  which  makes  its 
appearance  in  the  lower  limbs  generally,  caus- 
ing much  suffering,  and  often  death.  It  is  not 
yet  well  understood  by  foreign  physicians,  but 
is  supposed  to  be  a sort  of  granulation  ot 
the  nervous  marrow. 

The  school  has  been  large  and  well  attended 
this  session.  There  has  not  been  the  constant 
change  of  pupils  to  contend  with,  as  before. 
The  most  advanced  class  in  Japanese  have  a 
scientific  book  to  read,  and  the  younger  chil- 
dren have  the  Second  Reader  of  the  normal 
school.  In  English  the  older  girls  are  read- 
ing  physical  geography  and  first  lessons  in 
rhetoric,  besides  spelling,  etc.  The  second 


1875]  The  Gospel  Preached.  275 

class  have  studied  the  Universal  History,  with 
spelling,  reading  and  geography.  The  third 
class  have  had  the  Second  Reader,  Table-Book 
and  Elementary  Geography,  and  the  little  chil- 
dren are  in  the  Primer, 

From  morning  until  night  the  mission-house 
is  filled  with  Japanese.  First  they  meet  in 
the  school  for  worship,  reading  a few  verses, 
singing  Christian  hymns  and  uniting  in  prayer. 
Then  the  lessons  of  the  day  go  on  until  noon. 
After  the  noon  rest  the  whole  school  assembles 
for  the  Bible  lesson  and  the  calling  of  the  roll. 
Next  come  the  Japanese,  Chinese  and  trans- 
lation lessons.  And  so  the  busy,  happy  days 
go  on. 

Christmas. — Before  Christmas  the  Japanese 
ornamented  the  church  beautifully  with  long 
wreaths  of  evergreen,  oranges  and  flowers, 
and  had  a tree  filled  with  Japanese  toys.  In 
connection  with  the  Christmas  festival  was 
the  Sunday-school  anniversary,  and  the  classes 
had  banners  and  designs.  Each  scholar  of 
every  class  had  an  appropriate  verse.  It  was 
pleasant  to  see  the  classes  coming  in  with 
their  banners,  singing  as  they  took  their  places. 
We  feel  that  the  Sunday-school  army  is  gather- 
ing here  in  Japan.  May  all  these  youthful 
soldiers  fight  the  battle  well! 

Dec.  31st. — The  last  night  of  the  old  year 


276  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1875 

has  come.  It  has  been  a year  of  great  pro- 
gress in  the  mission-work.  To-night,  as  its 
scenes  come  up  before  us,  and  we  remember 
the  many  missionaries  who  are  laboring  in 
Japan,  the  many  churches  and  preaching-places 
in  this  and  the  other  open  ports,  the  multitudes 
who  hear  the  preached  word  and  the  numbers 
who  have  received  the  baptismal  water  on  their 
heads  in  the  name  of  the  Father,  the  Son  and 
the  Holy  Ghost, — memory  takes  us  back  to 
a bright  October  Sabbath  of  seven  years  ago, 
when  in  all  the  region  round  about  Tokio 
there  were  only  three  Christians,  and  those 
foreigners. 

From  more  than  one  mission-house,  in  the 
mornings  and  evenings,  prayers  and  hymns 
of  praise  now  ascend.  Women  and  girls  in 
all  parts  of  Tokio,  Yokohama,  Kobe,  Osaca, 
and  even  lately  in  Kiyoto,  are  being  taught 
not  only  secular  knowledge,  but  without  hin- 
drance are  beino^  trained  for  the  service  of 
God. 

All  this,  and  more,  we  have  seen,  and  again 
memory  goes  back  to  the  time  when  O Hama 
san  came  to  read  the  First  Reader,  and  when 
with  a few  girls  we  read  and  talked  of  the 
story  of  the  “ loaves  and  fishes.”  Much  has 
been  done,  and  hath  not  God  wrought  it  all  ? 
And  that  which  is  brightest  of  all  is  that  of 


*875] 


The  Gospel  Preached. 


277 


late  it  may  be  said,  “ The  poor  have  the  gospel 
preached  unto  them.”  The  blind  men  (a-mas) 
are  receiving  spiritual  sight,  and  the  coolies  are 
beginning  to  recognize  in  Christ  the  Friend 
of  the  lowliest.  What  a glorious  thing  for 
the  poor  is  the  gospel  of  Jesus! 


24 


CHAPTER  VII. 


COMING  INTO  THE  KINGDOM. 


With  his  blood  the  Lord  hath  bought  them, 
When  they  knew  him  not  he  sought  them, 
And  from  all  their  wanderings  brought  them  : 
His  the  praise  alone.” 


IN  a meeting-  at  Gen-ske-cho  the  other  day 
our  chapter  was  the  fourth  of  Matthew’s 
Gospel,  and  the  blind  men  were  particularly 
interested  in  the  verse  beginning,  “ And  Jesus 
went  about  all  Galilee,  teaching  in  their  syna- 
gogues, and  preaching  the  gospel  of  the  king- 
dom.” We  have  thouorht  and  talked  a ereat 
deal  about  the  kingdom  of  heaven  lately.  It 
seems  very  near,  and  it  is  such  joyous  work 
to  point  the  way  thither. 

Our  girls  are  growing  in  knowledge  and  in 
grace.  They  keep  up  their  Sabbath  noon 
prayer-meetings,  and  many  an  earnest  prayer 
ascends  from  their  lips  to  the  true  God.  They 
regularly  attend  the  Bible  classes,  and  find 
the  Book  ever  more  wonderful  and  interest- 
ing. We  close  our  school-week  by  a prayer- 
meetinor  to  which  the  women  of  the  church 

278 


1876]  Coming  into  the  Kingdom,  279 

come.  We  are  now  reading  Mark,  our  first 
Gospel. 

The  church  services  are  well  attended,  and 
the  Sabbath-school  is  large.  Most  of  the 
older  girls  have  classes.  Many  women  are 
interested,  and  we  are  praying  and  working 
for  them.  We  find  the  influence  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  among  us,  and  all  speak  and  pray  with 
a power  never  felt  before. 

On  the  bright  Sabbath  which  closed  the 
month  of  October  last  year  (1875)  some  old 
friends  came  to  Ro-ku-ban.  They  were  Take- 
jiro,  with  the  woman  Hayashi  and  her  two 
neatly-dressed,  polite  little  boys,  Toichiro  and 
Saijiro ; the  latter  was  the  baby  of  six  years 
ago.  His  black  eyes  have  lost  none  of  their 
sparkle,  and  I never  look  into  them  as  they 
meet  mine  with  such  a fearless  gaze  without 
thinking  of  the  day  when  we  put  him  in  the 
chair  and  he  told  me  to  “go  away  quickly.” 

We  rejoiced  to  see  this  mother  coming  Sun- 
day after  Sunday,  sometimes  with  one  and 
sometimes  with  both  of  the  little  boys.  She 
listened  eagerly  to  the  preaching,  and  her  in- 
terest seemed  to  increase.  Deguchi  san  and 
I went  to  see  her  in  her  home  on  Ginza.  We 
read  the  third  chapter  of  John,  and  when 
Deguchi  san  told  her  that  special  prayer  had 
been  offered  for  her  she  seemed  much  grati- 


28o  The  Sum'ise  Kingdom.  [1876 

fied.  Soon  after,  she  expressed  her  desire  to 
be  admitted  into  the  full  communion  of  the 
church.  She  was  the  very  first  woman  taught 
in  Tokio.  We  are  all  glad  to  have  her 
with  us. 

Much  snow  fell  in  Tokio  the  first  of  the 
year  (1876).  It  lay  upon  the  ground  for  two 
whole  days,  and  weighed  down  the  fir  trees. 
After  the  storm  I went  to  old  Hisa’s  house 
to  see  about  gathering  the  women  together 
for  their  meeting,  but  we  cannot  do  anything 
here  for  fifteen  days  at  the  New  Year’s  holi- 
days. Every  one  is  busy  for  one  week  mak- 
ing preparations  for  the  festival,  and  after  that 
they  must  have  a “ play  ” or  “ rest  ” for  another 
week.  Only  the  jin-ri-ki-ya’s  boy  was  at  home. 
The  jin-ri-ki-ya  has  not  been  doing  well  lately, 
and  the  burden  of  the  support  of  this  little 
child  falls  on  his  grandmother.  The  old  wo- 
man had  gone  out  into  the  country. 

Just  at  the  door,  as  I was  going  away,  I 
met  Tomi,  Hisa’s  daughter,  a pale,  sad  young 
woman,  who  has  been  thinking  seriously  on 
the  good  way,  but  has  not  been  able  to  come 
to  any  definite  conclusion.  She  asked  me  to 
go  to  see  a woman  who  has  been  attending 
the  services  regularly.  She  is  the  second  wife 
of  a kutsuya,  or  cobbler,  and  has  a little  step- 
daughter. We  made  our  way  carefully  down 


28 


1876]  Coming  into  the  Kingdom. 

an  alley,  the  melted  snow  dropping  from  the 
roofs  of  the  houses. 

The  kutsuya,  who  was  baptized  the  next 
Sunday,  has  a very  small  house.  The  little 
room  into  which  we  were  taken  was  about 
six  feet  square.  An  almost  perpendicular 
ladder  led  to  one  above,  apparently  of  the 
same  size.  The  kitchen  in  front  was  about 
three  feet  in  width,  and  that  was  the  extent 
of  the  house. 

The  kutsuya,  his  wife  and  child,  two  neigh- 
bors, Tomi  and  myself  quite  filled  up  the 
lower  room.  One  of  the  women  was  very 
old.  “ O Ba  san,”  she  was  asked,  “ do  you 
find  this  world  a very  happy  place  ?”  “ Alas, 
no !”  she  said ; “ there  are  many  cares  and 

troubles.”  “ O Ba  san,”  said  the  kutsuya, 
“you  are  growing  old.  You  must  attend  to 
these  things  now,  for  it  is  dangerous  to  delay.” 
Then  we  talked  for  a time,  sang  our  little  hymn, 
and  came  away.  We  talked  to-night  at  home 
about  the  meeting.  This  O Ba  san  is  a hair- 
dresser, and  usually  can  be  taught  only  at 
night.  The  kutsuya’s  wife  is  like  Tomi — only 
“ almost  persuaded.”  Old  Hisa  thinks  she  is 
not  kind  to  her  little  girl,  and  that  keeps  her 
from  coming  out  decidedly. 

The  old  woman  is  in  trouble.  Her  son, 
the  jin-ri-ki-ya,  has  run  away ; and  when  she 

24  * 


282 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1876 


had  come  home  from  the  country  with  a “glad 
heart  ” because  the  people  had  listened  to  her 
teachings,  it  was  to  have  this  unpleasant  news 
to  meet  her.  And  just  now,  after  the  other 
girls  had  gone  to  bed,  O Michi  san  came,  cry- 
ing and  sobbing,  to  tell  me  that  her  father  had 
been  put  in  prison.  This  is  all  she  has  heard, 
and  we  can  learn  nothing  more  to-night. 

A number  of  days  have  passed  away  since 
the  meeting  at  the  kutsuya’s.  The  fathers  of 
two  of  our  girls  were  baptized  not  long  ago. 
One  of  our  scholars,  who  lives  in  the  country, 
is  very  anxious  to  have  some  one  go  to  her 
home  to  teach  her  parents. 

We  are  much  interested  in  three  women 
from  Sannai  Cho,  or  Sannai  “ street,”  who  have 
been  coming  without  interruption  to  church 
and  prayer-meeting.  I went  with  Deguchi  san 
to  see  them  one  day.  They  are  mother  and 
daughters.  With  them  was  a woman  from  a 
distance  who  “ wants  to  believe,”  they  said. 
It  was  a long  time  before  we  could  get  them 
quiet  enough  to  sit  down  and  listen  to  a chap- 
ter and  have  their  lesson  in  the  catechism. 
The  mother  and  one  daughter  answered  their 
questions  very  well.  This  little  book,  begin- 
ning, “ Who  made  you  ? — God,”  has  been 
invaluable  to  us  since  its  translation. 

The  wife  of  old  Sa-sa-ki,  a Christian  man, 


1876]  Coming  into  the  Kingdom.  283 

is  another  woman  whom  we  have  much  in  our 
thoughts.  We  went  to  Sa-sa-ki’s  house  one 
day,  and  found  him  lying  on  his  futon  cough- 
ing dreadfully.  The  wife  came  and  sat  beside 
us,  and  listened  as  we  read  of  the  coming  of 
Christ  and  the  happy  entrance  of  the  righteous 
into  bliss.  The  woman  listened  and  assented, 
but  with  her  it  was  the  old  story  of  not  having 
the  time  to  go  to  church. 

One  day  O Yasu  san  told  of  an  old  woman 
who  went  to  Gen-ske-cho  to  hear  the  new  doc- 
trine. She  had  long  felt  the  burden  of  her 
sins,  and  had  tried  to  find  peace  by  going  on 
pilgrimage  or  in  one  doctrine  after  another  of 
Buddhism  or  Sintooism.  She  spoke  to  one 
of  her  neighbors  of  her  long  struggles  and 
want  of  success  in  finding  peace,  and  the 
neighbor  told  her  of  our  meetings  at  Gen-ske- 
cho,  and  she  went  there.  O Yasu  san  said  of 
her,  “ Such  a happy  O Ba  san  !” 

“ If  some  one  were  to  go  all  through  this 
country  and  proclaim  pardon  for  sin,  would 
not  many  hear  with  joy.^”  asked  a missionary 
of  a Japanese  Christian  one  day.  “ Oh  yes  /” 
was  the  answer;  and  I believe  it  from  my 
heart. 

' Old  Hisa  and  I went  to  see  this  O Ba  san 
one  day.  She  lives  in  a little  room  back  of  a 
store.  She  said  there  was  not  room  to  turn 


284  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1876 

around,  and  indeed  we  three  nearly  filled  it 
as  we  sat  around  the  hi-ba-chi.  We  read  the 
parable  of  the  Ten  Virgins.  The  woman  told 
us  that  she  could  not  understand  the  Bible 
very  well  when  she  read  it  alone,  and  we  ex- 
plained the  parable  to  her  as  we  could.  She 
manifested  a deep  and  tender  interest  in  what 
was  said,  and  we  left  her  trusting  that  she  had 
indeed  tasted  of  the  true  happiness. 

Deguchi  san’s  old  mother  and 'the  wife  of 
her  brother  are  among  those  who  wish  to  be 
baptized,  and  also  two  of  our  girls,  Mitsuye 
and  Rin.  Thus  the  work  ever  grows  in  inter- 
est, and  those  who  are  working  seem  to  have 
new  strength  imparted  to  them. 

The  Christian  girls  come,  and  we  talk  of 
what  we  have  seen  and  heard  of  the  progress 
of  the  gospel  in  this  land,  and  of  how  one 
and  another  has  received  it  into  his  or  her 
heart,  and  thus  become  an  “heir”  of  the  “king- 
dom.” Prayers  go  up  for  one  who  is  penitent, 
or  for  another  who  is  “halting  between  two 
opinions,”  or  for  one  who  is  wandering  just 
a little  from  the  path  in  which  she  began  to 
walk,  or  for  those  who  are  in  affliction  and 
distress.  “ Praying  and  working — working  and 
praying” — this  is  the  watchword. 

April. — A number  of  the  women  for  whom 
we  have  been  praying  this  winter  have  been 


1876]  Coming  into  the  Kingdom.  285 

baptized.  Among  them  are  Ha-ya-shi  san, 
Degiichi  san’s  old  mother,  and  her  sister-in-law 
Honda  san,  Sa-sa-ki’s  wife,  who  has  found  time  to 
come  to  church,  the  kutsuya’s  wife  and  Tomi, 
whose  doubts  have  all  disappeared,  with  Mit- 
suye  and  RIn,  our  own  two  girls,  the  three 
Sannai  cho  women  and  the  wife  of  Umekichi, 
formerly  our  servant.  The  O Ba  san  did  not 
appear. 

Many  sightless  ones  (a-mas)  have  been  led 
by  the  hand  to  the  altar  and  felt  the  baptismal 
water  on  their  heads.  How  touching  is  It  to 
see  these  blind  ones  coming  forward  rejoicing 
in  the  hope  that  the  eyes  of  their  understand- 
ing have  been  opened,  that  they  might  behold 
the  glory  of  the  Lord  in  the  face  of  Jesus 
Christ ! Who  can  help  thinking  of  the  story 
of  the  blind  Bartimeus  ? and  the  quaint  verses 
of  the  old  hymn  always  recur  to  me  when  I 
see  them : 

“ Oh,  methinks  I hear  him  praising, 

Publishing  to  all  around, 

Friends,  is  not  my  case  amazing  ? 

What  a Saviour  I have  fjund  ! 

Oh  that  all  the  blind  but  knew  him, 

And  would  be  advised  by  me  ! 

Surely  they  would  hasten  to  him : 

He  would  cause  them  all  to  see  !” 

Some  of  the  most  touching  prayers  have 
been  offered  for  Kato  san  in  prison ; for  it 


286  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1876 

was  too  true  that  he  was  put  in  prison.  He 
is  an  editor,  and  used  some  expressions  in 
his  paper  which  gave  offence  to  the  govern- 
ment. Michi  tried  one  day  to  get  blankets 
and  a Bible  to  him,  that  he  might  suffer  less 
from  the  cold,  and  hoping  that  as  he  had  the 
time,  so  he  might  have  the  inclination,  to  read 
the  Book,  but  she  did  not  succeed.  Every 
cold  day,  or  when  the  wind  of  winter  whis- 
tles around  the  house  at  night,  she  is  greatly 
distressed  for  her  father,  and  they  all  pray 
that  he  may  call  to  mind  all  that  he  has  read 
and  heard  of  Christ  and  his  word,  and  be 
converted — yes,  find  the  way  into  the  king- 
dom, even  in  his  prison-cell. 

“ Ah  yes,  O Ba  san !”  This  is  an  answer 
to  a question  about  America  from  an  old 
woman  at  Gen-ske-cho.  “ My  country  is  a 
pleasant  country,  but  it  is  a great  distance 
away.  It  would  take  a long  time  to  go  there, 

' and  more  money  than  you  can  ever  get. 
But  there  is  a better  country  which  you  may 
reach  without  going  from  this  room,  and  with- 
out money.  The  sick  and  the  poor  and  the 
little  child  may  enter  this  country.  It  is  the 
kingdom  of  heaven.  God  is  the  King.  In 
it  the  sun  is  ever  shining.  In  it  you  will  find 
all  your  wants  supplied.  ‘ Let  him  that  is 
athirst  come.’  ” 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


OUR  FATHER  WHICH  ART  IN  HE  A VENT 
“ And  they  spake  the  language  of  Canaan.” 

HO  knows  anything  about  Fridays  at 


Ro-ku-ban  ? Our  girls  enjoy  them, 
for  they  like  the  sewing  and  “declamations,” 
as  they  call  their  recitations  on  that  day.  O 
Michi  san  helps  the  little  ones  with  their  patch- 
work,  and  the  other  girls  do  fancy-work.  In 
the  afternoon  they  all  assemble  in  the  school- 
room, and  read  and  recite  in  English  and  Jap- 
anese. Sometimes  they  have  dialogues,  and 
always  some  have  compositions.  Then,  when 
the  exercises  are  over,  the  report  for  the  week 
is  read,  and  after  singing  the  little  ones  go 
away,  and  the  elder  girls,  with  the  women,  re- 
main to  their  prayer-meeting.  In  the  evening, 
while  the  winter  wind  is  howling  around  the 
house  and  the  waves  are  dashing  against  the 
breakwater,  the  fire  is  kindled  in  the  grate 
of  a room  not  often  used,  where  we  can  be 
undisturbed,  and  the  lamp  is  placed  on  the 
table.  Then  the  two  women  give  their  reports 
of  work  during  the  week.  Old  Hisa  has 


287 


288  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1876 

taught  the  blind  men  every  day.  Last  week 
she  was  out  in  the  country  two  days ; reports 
that  the  people  heard  joyfully. 

We  are  reading,  on  Friday  evenings,  parts 
of  the  book  of  Leviticus.  Only  the  older 
girls  have  joined  the  class,  and  the  lessons 
are  exceedingly  .pleasant  to  us  all,  and  very 
profitable.  The  voluntary  offering  of  the  best 
of  the  flock — the  “male  without  blemish” — 
gives  the  girls  clear  ideas  in  regard  to  the 
Lamb  of  God,  who  offered  himself  a sacrifice 
for  us,  and  shows  them  how  they  must  give 
up  their  best  to  God. 

The  man  standing  with  his  hand  on  the 
victim’s  head  leads  them  better  to  understand 
the  meaning  of  the  words,  “ Laying  our  sins 
on  Jesus.”  The  oblations,  with  the  incense 
and  the  sweet-smelling  savor  that  went  up 
to  the  Lord,  show  them  how  to  present  their 
bodies  a sacrifice  to  God  “without  hypocrisy,” 
and  with  faith,  peace  and  love.  There  also 
do  they  learn  of  the  high  priest  going  up 
with  clean  linen  robes  to  offer  his  sacrifices, 
and  they  read  of  the  fire  ever  burning  on 
the  altar  and  of  the  terrible  leprosy,  the  type 
of  sin.  (Deguchi  san  says  there  are  leper- 
villages  in  Japan.) 

Thus  the  girls  are  learning  more  and  more 
of  the  heavenly  language,  and  are  being 


1876]  '^Our  Father  which  art  in  Heaven!'  289 

strengthened  to  walk  in  the  heavenly  way. 
It  is  wonderful  what  a rest  there  is  in  teach- 
ing the  Bible.  These  lessons  always  come  after 
a week  of  toil  in  the  schoolroom.  We  go  to 
them  wearied  almost  to  exhaustion,  and  come 
from  them  strong  and  triumphant  as  those 
who  have  been  drinking  from  a deep  well 
of  life-giving  water. 

Thursday,  Feb.  24.  1876. — Our  lesson  at 
Gen-ske-cho  this  afternoon  was  on  the  latter 
part  of  the  sixth  chapter  of  Matthew.  The 
women  listened  very  attentively,  but  at  times 
there  comes  such  a feeling  of  helplessness  in 
the  effort  to  teach  them  ! So  many  come  only 
once  or  twice,  and  we  see  them  no  more. 
What  shall  we  say  to  such  ? They  under- 
stand so  little  of  the  language  of  the  kingdom, 
but  this  wonderful  Sermon  on  the  Mount  ofives 
us  the  first  letter  of  the  heavenly  alphabet,  the 
very  first  word  of  the  heavenly  language. 
Jesus  spoke  to  multitudes  such  as  these — 
weary,  worn,  sinful,  ignorant  people.  He  spoke 
to  them  of  God,  and  what  words  did  he  use  ? 
“Your  Father,”  “our  Father,”  “the  Father.” 

Let  us  look  at  some  of  these  verses  more 
carefully  than  ever  before,  and  read  as  though 
we  saw  them  for  the  first  time : 

“Take  heed  that  ye  do  not  your  alms  before 
men,  to  be  seen  of  them  : otherwise  ye  have 

25  T 


290  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1876 

no  reward  of  your  Father  which  is  in  heaven.” 
What  do  these  heathen  women  know  of  any- 
thing done  without  thought  of  honor  from 
men  ? What  do  they  know  of  the  Father 
who  seeth  in  secret,  and  who  will  reward 
openly  ? 

“ But  thou,  when  thou  prayest,  enter  into 
thy  closet ; and  when  thou  hast  shut  thy  door, 
pray  to  thy  Father  which  is  in  secret.”  Their 
shrines  are  in  the  kitchen  or  in  the  busiest 
corners  of  the  house,  and  while  they  pray 
busy  work  ’and  idle  talk  are  going  on  all 
around  them.  They  pray  “standing”  in  the 
temples,  where  the  multitudes  who  throng 
them  can  see  their  devotions,  prostrations  and 
counting  of  beads.  It  is  well  to  take  just  the 
words  that  the  Lord  Jesus  uses  and  give  them 
to  the  people,  for  they  can  understand  them 
without  note  or  comment. 

“ Lay  not  up  for  yourselves  treasures  upon 
earth,  where  moth  and  rust  doth  corrupt,  and 
where  thieves  break  through  and  steal.  But 
lay  up  for  yourselves  treasures  in  heaven, 
where  neither  moth  nor  rust  do  corrupt,  and 
where  thieves  do  not  break  through  nor  steal. 
For  where  your  treasure  is,  there  will  your 
heart  be  also.”  “Take  no  thought,  saying. 
What  shall  we  eat,  or  what  shall  we  drink,  or 
wherewithal  shall  we  be  clothed?  Your  heav- 


1876]  ^^Our  Father  which  art  in  Heaveii^  291 

enly  Father  knoweth  that  ye  have  need  of  all 
these  things.  But  seek  ye  first  the  kingdom 
of  God  and  his  righteousness,  and  all  these 
things  shall  be  added  unto  you.”  “And  after 
this  manner  pray  ye;  Our  Father  which  art 
in  heaven;  hallowed  be  thy  name.  Thy  king- 
dom come,  thy  will  be  done  on  earth  as  it  is 
in  heaven.  Give  us  this  day  our  daily  bread. 
And  forgive  us  our  debts  as  we  forgive  our 
debtors.  And  lead  us  not  into  temptation, 
but  deliver  us  from  evil.  For  thine  is  the 
kingdom,  and  the  power,  and  the  glory,  for 
ever.  Amen.”  This  is  what  the  women  at 
Gen-ske-cho  are  learning.  We  speak  such 
words  as  these  to  them,  and  they  repeat  them 
over  and  over  again  ; and  this  is  seed-sowing — 
a different  work  from  the  care  of  growing, 
ripening  grain. 

Our  children  at  home  are  learning  for  their 
evening  Bible  lesson  the  twelfth  chapter  of 
Luke’s  Gospel.  They  commit  a few  verses 
to  memory  each  day,  and  we  pray  that  these 
words  may  be  written  upon  their  hearts  for 
ever.  In  the  very  first  verse  they  learn,  “ Be- 
ware ye  of  the  leaven  of  the  Pharisees,  which 
is  hypocrisy.”  They  are  learning  to  beware 
of  it,  and  to  hate  lying.  Thus  is  the  seed 
planted  in  their  minds,  and  we  pray  that  even 
if  not  now,  while  we  are  so  anxiously  watching. 


29 2 The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1876 

yet  in  the  years  to  come,  it  may  spring  up 
and  bear  fruit. 

One  day,  Mashi,  Shi-ge,  Nui,  Kame,  Rin  and 
I went  by  invitation  to  spend  the  afternoon  at 
Willow  Island,  Mr.  H.’s  place,  on  the  other 
side  of  the  river.  The  girls  got  into  the  boat 
on  the  little  lake,  and  their  merry  laughter 
seemed  to  accord  with  the  joyousness  and 
beauty  of  everything  around.  We  went  to 
see  plum-blossoms  and  drink  plum-tea,  and  we 
had  sweetmeats  and  enjoyed  the  garden.  As 
I stood  upon  the  mound  and  looked  down 
upon  the  flowers,  the  pond,  the  island  and  the 
boat  laden  with  the  girls  in  their  bright  sashes 
and  hairpins,  one  happy  thought  filled  my  heart: 
They  are  Christians ; they  know  their  Father’s 
name,  and  know,  too,  that  all  enjoyment  comes 
from  him. 

“ In  my  Father’s  house  are  many  mansions.” 
We  want  to  lead  many  of  the  women  to  their 
Father’s  house.  It  is  not  a hard  message  to 
deliver  with  which  those  who  are  “ sent  ” are 
burdened — simply  this:  “You  have  a Father 
in  heaven.  Fie  it  is  who  has  been  causing  his 
sun  to  shine  on  you.  He  has  been  feeding 
and  clothing  you.  You  have  wandered  away 
from  his  house.  Now  he  is  calling  you  to  come 
back.  The  way  is  through  the  Son.  Come  to 
Jesus !” 


1876]  ^^Our  Father  which  art  in  Heaven!'  293 

Much  of  the  preceding  consists  of  extracts 
from  journals  kept  during  the  last  winter — 
records  of  seed-sowing.  The  precious  seed 
will  fall  by  the  wayside  or  into  stony  places, 
and  some  be  choked  with  thorns,  but  much 
will  fall  into  good  ground,  and  we  are  com- 
manded to  go  on  sowing  without  fear  or  doubt. 

I have  seen  O I-ne  san’s  mother  lately.  The 
family  have  lost  money  in  various  ways,  and 
have  moved  from  the  house  where  we  first 
saw  them.  O I-ne  san  does  not  yet  decide  to 
follow  the  example  of  her  school-friends  in 
becoming  a member  of  the  visible  Church. 
I often  wonder  if  the  first  little  blade  which 
I saw  peeping  out  after  one  year  of  waiting 
is  going  to  be  all  choked  up  by  weeds.  But 
we  will  hope  not  so,  and  pray  that  she  and 
her  mother,  my  first  friends  in  Tokio,  will  yet 
become  true  disciples  of  Christ. 

O I-ne  san  shows  the  result  of  her  careful 
training.  She  is  exceedingly  dignified  in  man- 
ner, and  in  her  studies  is  far  ahead  of  most 
girls  of  her  age  at  home.  Her  mother  may 
well  be  proud  of  this  her  only  child,  and  we 
can  only  pray  that  they  will  both  learn  to  say 
from  the  heart,  “ Our  Father,”  and  then  carry 
the  good  news  to  O-ji. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


LITTLE  CHILDREN. 

“ Little  children,  little  children, 

Who  love  their  Redeemer, 

Are  the  jewels,  precious  jewels, 

His  loved  and  his  own.” 

JAPANESE  babies  always  seem  to  me  the 
most  comical  little  mortals  imaginable. 
We  see  hundreds  of  them  in  the  streets, 
carried  on  the  backs  of  their  child  nurses,  some 
of  whom  do  not  appear  much  larger  than  the 
babies,  so  that  the  effect  is  of  one  child  with 
two  heads.  These  babies  are  fastened  into 
the  outer  garments  of  their  nurses  in  such 
a way  as  to  leave  only  the  heads  exposed  if 
they  are  very  small,  but  if  they  are  large 
enough  to  make  free  use  of  their  hands  de- 
sirable, the  arms  are  left  free.  The  poor  little 
heads  are  shaved,  with  the  exception  of  small 
patches  of  hair,  and  are  often  covered  with 
loathsome  sores. 

The  young  nurses  play  ball  or  battledore 
and  shuttlecock  with  apparent  unconcern  as 
to  the  fate  of  the  babies.  It  is  seldom  that 


294 


i8;6]  Little  Children,  295 

any  accident  occurs,  but  occasionally  a child 
will  roll  off  from  the  back  of  its  nurse.  Then 
we  know  whether  a Japanese  baby  can  cry  or 
not.  It  always  appears  to  us  a fertile  cause 
of  weak  eyes  in  after-life  that  the  head  of  a 
little  infant  is  left  unsupported  and  its  eyes 
are  exposed  to  a strong  light.  It  must  also 
be  injurious  to  the  child  who  acts  as  nurse 
to  have  a heavy  baby  strapped  on  her  back, 
thus  causing  habitual  stooping. 

Yet  it  seems  to  me  that  babies  have  very 
good  care  taken  of  them.  They  are  amused 
by  gaudy  toys,  rattles  and  bells  when  awake, 
and  have  little  mosquito-nets  to  protect  them 
from  insects  while  they  sleep.  Indeed,  they 
are  a contented  race,  and  accept  as  a matter 
of  course  what  does  not  please  them. 

Once  a young  mother  showed  us  her  baby’s 
wardrobe.  Its  best  robes  were  of  crape  and 
silk,  all  of  large  figures  and  with  wide,  flowing 
sleeves  made  after  the  same  pattern  as  its 
mother’s  garments.  For  ordinary  wear  the 
baby  had  short  dresses  made  of  bright  red 
and  yellow  cloth.  For  ornaments  the  babies 
have  square  patches  of  red,  green  or  em- 
broidered cloth  put  upon  their  backs.  They 
wear  little  colored  bibs,  and  when  the  weather 
is  cold,  red  crape  caps  with  cloaks  much  like 
the  dresses.  Then  they  have  their  bags  con- 


296  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1876 

taining  amulets  on  their  backs.  When  they 
are  old  enough  just  to  toddle  around  they 
have  bells  fastened  to  them,  so  that  the  mother 
may  know  where  they  are.  The  principal  dan- 
gers by  accident  to  which  they  are  liable  are  fall- 
ing into  hi-ba-chis  or  upsetting  tea-kettles. 

I have  heard  somewhere  of  a difference  of 
ceremony  observed  at  the  birth  of  a boy-baby 
and  a girl : the  little  boy  is  raised  and  the 
girl  lowered,  in  token  of  superior  or  inferior 
position.  But  I have  never  myself  noticed 
any  difference  in  their  treatment,  and  great 
care  is  taken  even  of  sickly  or  deformed  in- 
fants. The  Japanese  are  not  like  their  neigh- 
bors, who  desert  their  blind,  deformed  or  dis- 
eased infants. 

Some  girls  who  were  in  our  school  had  a 
little  blind  sister.  The  mother  was  most  de- 
voted to  this  baby,  nursing  it  continually,  and 
hailing  gladly  every  symptom  of  increased 
strength,  for  the  child  was  very  delicate.  She 
brought  her  here  once,  dressed  in  most  gor- 
geous robes,  and  the  little  thing  laughed  and 
seemed  very-  happy.  At  last  it  learned  how  to 
raise  its  little  hands  and  say,  ^'Takai!  takai T 
(“So  high!  so  high!”),  and  all  were  delighted. 
We  learned  much  of  the  care  and  devotion 
of  a Japanese  mother  in  watching  this  one, 
with  her  poor  blind  baby. 


295, 


'■  f jjKjv  ■ Vi  , 

to'liUria. 

.;g*»r  v-Si|,«|  T;r  <::.5«.^-  v6ilb^  ^ 

j#.f  ^^tetitsaa-  *>,jb  -■■  ' 

S*r^i9  &•#■*■»  » lb  ■ '!)'- 

.sk-m^^  rM  n»ftAa  -3»4  .^4 

'■■  .-jwriUWdUi  AroW’Vta  bf}^^  - 

' ^■-m%J!<as  baaeifK^ada"’^'-'' 

tt  K»4  iw  bfca»  SW 

T?sJ%r-rf'  tirnmimtn^  ao«  £,*  sw 

* ” i»iiifc  .4|M  « L , ^ .« 

.i^«  «rmh,  nmufq. 


' •Hi  >.  >Mn  !V it'll <f! I<a|4  ,--.i'l>t»>  'URV  * J 


Vvi-  «s^i5*«M 

ii«'-«i  #4a  «ar^" -a*  :>t  -’mis*  ««  aa%:i4'^ 


oijjt.tifU.4W/> 

* ^ ’ isa^raL  iiji|^;jj|i 

1 


' ' ^ ^ 

^;v  .?*JJ 


' ♦ I 


rc 


-iTj 


i 


1876] 


Little  Children. 


297 


The  first  baby  I noticed  specially  was  the 
child  of  our  servants.  The  mother  performed 
her  daily  tasks  with  the  baby  on  her  back.  It 
died  suddenly  one  night.  The  father  carried 
the  little  body  away.  They  cried  a great  deal 
at  first,  but  soon  seemed  to  forget  it.  I watch- 
ed the  mother  at  her  work,  and  wondered  if 
she  missed  the  “ little  hindering  thing.”  But 
we  could  not  talk  about  it,  for  at  that  time 
we  did  not  understand  each  other’s  language. 
Then  another  baby  came.  They  called  her 
Kane  (“money”).  Little  Miss  Money  was 
plump  and  strong,  and  grew  nicely.  She 
learned  to  walk  and  to  sing  “Jesus  loves  me.” 
But  neither  did  her  little  feet  press  the  sod  of 
God’s  footstool  very  long,  for  she  too  died 
after  much  suffering. 

Another  very  little  child  whom  I have  known 
was  a brother  of  O Yo  san,  one  of  the  younger 
scholars.  He  was  a fine-looking,  healthy  boy 
until  a year  old.  He  always  had  a smile  for 
the  foreign  lady  who  went  to  the  house.  But 
he  began  to  droop  and  to  suffer  with  his  head. 
All  that  was  possible  was  done  for  him,  but 
one  day  the  baby  closed  his  eyes,  and  his 
sufferings  were  over.  The  mother  was  much 
distressed,  for  the  father  was  in  America  and 
had  never  seen  his  boy. 

Doubtless  the  baby-spirits  are  safe.  But 


298  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1876 

we  are  glad  to  have  these  little  ones,  children 
of  Christian  parents,  brought  into  the  church 
by  baptism.  One  of  the  first  babies  baptized 
was  our  Umekichi’s  little  daughter.  She  is 
a nervous  child,  full  of  life  and  play,  with  a 
comical,  screwed-up  little  face,  yet  very  win- 
ning withal,  and  a great  pet  with  us.  She 
wears  a little  bell,  and  when  she  is  awake  it 
keeps  ’up  a constant  tinkling. 

She  has  been  taught  to  say,  “ Good-bye,  ba- 
by,” in  English,  and  when  she  wants  anything 
says  these  words,  so  as  to  obtain  her  wishes. 
She  imitates  everything  she  sees,  sits  and 
plays  on  the  parlor-organ,  and  sings  like  a 
foreigner.  She  gives  the  calls  of  peddlers 
and  sellers  of  fish  and  vegetables,  takes  a 
basket  and  goes  around  pretending  to  sell 
things,  saying  that  she  is  a Chinaman.  Some- 
times she  gets  into  a passion  and  kicks  and 
screams  like  a real  home-baby,  but  usually 
she  is  good,  and  it  is  pleasant  to  listen  to  the 
tinkling  of  the  bell  and  hear  the  “ Good-bye, 
baby.” 

Another  one  of  the  baptized  children  of 
the  church  is  Toda  san’s  strong,  hearty  boy. 
He  is  an  active  child,  and  never  keeps  still 
when  awake.  Old  Hisa’s  little  Se-no-ski  is  one 
who  is  being  well  taught  in  the  Scriptures. 
He  can  repeat  verse  after  verse  of  Matthew’s 


1876]  Little  Children.  299 

Gospel,  and  he  tells  me  that  he  prays  every 
day. 

Work  among  little  children  always  seems  to 
me  the  most  hopeful  and  pleasant  of  all  work. 
To  be  sure,  it  does  not  seem  to  yield  fruit  as 
rapidly  as  some  other  soil,  and  “ little  lambs  ” 
will  stray  away  and  act  in  a very  naughty  man- 
ner. But  our  little  ones  are  ever  a comfort 
to  us,  and  it  is  delightful  to  witness  the  effects 
of  grace  in  these  children’s  hearts.  They  all 
come  on  Sundays,  bright  and  happy,  to  go  to 
church  and  Sabbath-school,  and  pay  good  at- 
tention to  their  lessons.  Their  short  text  is 
written  for  them  on  the  blackboard,  and  then 
they  copy  it  on  slates.  “ From  a child  thou 
hast  known  the  Scripture  ” was  the  verse  one 
morning  not  long  ago.  The  children  repeated 
it  in  English ; then  we  took  the  words  as  they 
come  in  the  reversed  order  of  Japanese  sen- 
tences: “‘Thou.’  What  is  that?”  and  the 

children  all  said,  ''Anata"  (“You”).  “Child- 
time from,”  “Scripture,”  “hast  known,”  and  in 
this  order  they  got  the  words  into  Japanese, 
and  then  repeated  them  all  together.  They  all 
learn  much  of  Jesus,  his  parables  and  miracles, 
and  it  is  far  better  for  them  than  the  stories 
of  Mimotaro,  Kintai^o,  The  Tail-cut  Swallow, 
etc.  But  we  wish  we  had  simpler  books  for 
them.  We  want  a book  about  sheep  and 


300  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1876 

lambs  and  shepherds,  etc.,  that  the  children 
may  better  understand  such  words  in  the 
Scriptures. 

They  have  their  own  prayer-meetings,  all 
joining  in  prayer  and  singing.  They  carry 
their  little  hymn-books  and  their  Happy  Books 
home  with  them.  Once  when  Sudzu  was  sick 
I found  her  with  the  catechism  under  her  pillow. 
Her  baby-brother,  just  learning  to  talk,  heard 
some  one  begin  the  prayer,  “ Our  Father,”  and 
he  bent  his  head  and  clasped  his  hands  as  soon 
as  he  heard  the  first  words. 

Have  I ever  told  any  one  about  our  little 
Kiku  (“  chrysanthemum  ”)  ? I went  out  to 
gather  flowers  one  day,  and  found  this  one. 
She  is  a very  little  child,  and  flies  around  re- 
gardless of  all  rule,  and  yet  she  is  the  affianced 
bride  of  a young  man  of  twenty-three  or  -four, 
and  already  talks  of  her  husband.  I saw  him 
with  her  one  day — she  just  a baby  playing 
with  some  new  shoes  her  father  had  bo  ught 
her,  and  he  a full-grown  young  man. 

And  O I-no  san’s  little  sister,  the  prettiest 
Japanese  child  I ever  saw,  has  been  given  away 
— affianced  to  the  son  of  some  friends  in  the 
country,  and  sent  off  to  be  brought  up  in  their 
family.  I wonder  if  the  father  and  the  moth- 
er do  not  miss  their  pretty  little  daughter? 
“ It  is  to  be  hoped,”  says  a sensible  Japanese, 


876] 


Little  Childi^en. 


301 


“ that  these  ridiculous  customs  will  soon  be 
done  away  with/’  And  indeed  we  hope  so 
too,  for  we  love  the  little  Japanese  children, 
and  trust  they  will  soon  be  delivered  from  such 
bonds. 

Our  dear  little  children  in  school  are  learn- 
ing much  that  is  good  and  useful.  We  try 
to  have  them  in  the  open  air  a great  deal,  and 
they  have  gymnastics  in  the  house.  They 
study  their  lessons  pretty  well  and  are  learn- 
ing fast,  and  they  are  little  Christian  children, 
singing  sweet  hymns  and  becoming  acquainted 
with  the  stories  of  Adam  and  Eve  and  Joseph 
and  Moses,  and,  above  all,  learning  of  Jesus. 
Let  us  pray  that  they  may  all  be  gathered  into 


his  fold. 


26 


CHAPTER  X. 


THE  HEM  OF  THE  GARMENT. 

For  she  said,  If  I may  but  touch  his  clothes,  I shall  be  whole.” 

RIN  SAN’S  aunt  was  dying.  Deguchi 


san  and  I did  not  hear  of  her  illness,  or 
know,  indeed,  that  there  was  such  a woman, 
until  she  was  almost  gone.  Deguchi  san  had 
a copy  of  Mark  when  we  went  to  see  her,  and 
she  seemed  to  listen  while  she  read  of  the 
woman  who  came  behind  Jesus  in  the  crowd 
and  touched  his  garment.  On  Sunday  morn- 
ing a priest  was  at  the  house  mumbling  his 
senseless  prayers,  but  the  woman  paid  little 
attention  to  him.  When  we  were  there  in 
the  afternoon  she  was  just  at  the  point  of 
death.  The  doors  were  closed.  Outside,  the 
busy  multitude  passed  by.  We  sat  quietly 
beside  the  dying  woman  in  the  little  low  room. 
Then  came  a sense  of  the  presence  of  the 
Lord.  He  was  there  with  us  in  the  room. 

The  woman  turned  to  O Rin  san  before 
she  died  and  asked  her  to  read  again  the  story 
of  the  woman  who  touched  the  Lord’s  garment, 
and  while  O Rin  san  was  reading  the  words, 


802 


1876]  The  Hem  of  ihe  Garmnet.  303 

“If  I may  touch  but  his  clothes,”  she  died. 
Was  he  really  there  ? Did  she  touch  the  bor- 
der of  his  garment? 

How  many  there  are  whom  we  feel  to  be 
but  touching  the  border  of  the  garment ! Sick 
and  weak  and  ignorant  ones,  foolish  old  women 
and  young  children,  are  just  now  in  that  posi- 
tion. Many  of  them  are  baptized,  and  rightly 
so ; for  we  are  told  to  receive  even  the  weak 
in  faith,  and  we  who  are  strong  are  to  help 
them  and  “bear  their  infirmities.” 

One  day  at  Gen-ske-cho  my  attention  was 
drawn  to  a pale,  sick  young  girl,  almost  a 
child,  who  listened  eagerly  to  every  word  and 
seemed  to  drink  it  all  in.  I hoped  to  meet 
her  the  next  Thursday,  but  was  disappointed. 
Again  the  time  for  the  meeting  came,  but 
O Taki  san  was  not  there.  Then  I asked 

old  Hisa  about  her.  “ She  is  ill,”  she  said. — 
“Well,  I must  go  to  see  her.” — “But,”  said 
O Hisa  san,  “ it  would  not  do  to  go : her 
mother  would  be  angry.”  I insisted  upon 

going,  however,  so  she  reluctantly  led  the  way 
to  a kura. 

The  mother  of  the  sick  child  heard  us  at 
the  door  and  came  out,  but  gave  no  invita- 
tion to  enter.  The  slides  were  open,  and  we 
could  see  into  the  house.  On  a futon  lay 

poor  little  O Taki  san  in  a heavy  sleep.  “ She 


J04  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1876 

sleeps  this  way  all  day,  and  lies  awake  in  pain 
all  night,”  said  the  mother,  letting  us  know 
how  impossible  it  was  for  us  to  talk  with  her. 
So  we  left  the  child  in  her  sleep  and  went 
home.  Afterward  we  tried  in  some  way  to 
gain  favor  with  the  mother,  but  it  was  all  in 
vain,  and  the  child  died  in  that  condition.  Still, 
we  remembered  how  earnestly  she  listened 
when  she  heard  once  of  the  Lord,  and  how 
spiritual  was  the  expression  of  her  face.  Our 
girls  prayed  often  before  she  died  for  the  child 
who  had  heard  the  gospel,  and  who  slept  all 
day  and  lay  awake  all  night. 

There  are  many  who  hear  the  gospel  but 
once.  We  try  to  give  them  something  to 
remember,  and  some  tract  or  copy  of  the 
catechism  to  take  with  them,  and  then  pray 
that  seeds  dropped  in  faith  may  spring  up. 

The  old  O Ba  sans,  leaning  upon  their  staffs, 
weak  with  the  infirmities  of  age,  form  one  class 
among  whom  we  work.  When  we  remember 
their  lives — how  they  have  always  been  under 
dark  clouds  of  ignorance  and  superstition,  and 
how  fixed  their  habits  of  life  and  thought  have 
become — we  cannot  wonder  that  they  hate  the 
doctrines  they  know  so  little  about,  and  which 
they  have  been  taught  to  hate.  They  are  gen- 
tle, cheery  old  bodies,  always  smiling  and 
in  a good  humor.  It  is  pleasant  to  see  how 


1876]  The  Hem  of  the  Garment,  305 

kindly  they  are  cared  for  by  sons  and  daugh- 
ters. We  often  see  them  led  by  the  hand  in 
the  gardens  or  at  Mu-ko-ji-ma,  taken  with  the 
children  to  “ see  flowers.”  Many  of  them  are 
bent  almost  double,  even  those  who  have  not 
attained  any  extreme  old  age.  Sometimes  we 
stop  one  in  her  walk  and  say,  “Well,  old  lady, 
how  old  are  you  ?”  Then  Grandmother  will 
laugh  and  thank  us  over  and  over,  and  tell 
with  pleasure  her  many  years. 

Our  old  O Ba  san  of  Shin-ya-ma  died  some 
time  ago.  She  was  ill  for  a long  time.  Degu- 
chi  san  read  the  Testament  to  her,  but  she 
was  too  old  to  grasp  it  firmly.  The  daughter 
was  good  to  her.  “ It  will  not  be  long  that  I 
shall  have  her,”  she  said,  “so  I must  do  for  ’ 
her  what  I can  now and  the  old  woman 
received  the  most  devoted  care  during  her 
long  illness. 

Yet  some  of  these  old  women  do  renounce 
their  idols  and  become  believers.  Our  O Ba 
san,  Umekichi’s  mother,  was  very  old  and 
feeble  when  she  was  baptized,  but  is  regular 
in  her  attendance  at  church.  She  comes  to 
the  prayer-meetings,  and  offers  simple  pray- 
ers, and  sometimes  talks.  The  poor  old  lady 
likes  to  sit  in  the  sun,  and  I have  often  seen 
her  on  cold  winter  days,  when  the  sun  was 
shining  brightly,  sitting  on  a mat  out  of  doors 

26  * U 


3o6  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1876 

with  her  sewing.  I tell  her  she  will  surely 
take  cold,  but  she  says  not.  Some  of  their 
habits  seem  very  peculiar  to  us. 

Deguchi  san’s  mother  is  one  of  our  old 
people.  She  went  alone  to  the  elders  of  the 
church  to  be  examined,  coming  early  in  the 
morning.  She  says,  “ Alas ! I forget  as  soon 
as  I hear.  The  words  enter  into  one  ear  and 
go  out  at  the  other.”  And  this  is  certainly 
true.  But  are  we  not  to  lead  these  feeble 
ones  by  the  hand,  as  it  were,  along  the  hea- 
venly road?  This  is  a part  of  our  work — a 
very  different  phase  from  that  with  the  little 
children. 

We  who  are  strong  must  guide  them  along 
the  way,  be  with  them  when  they  fall,  and  go 
with  them  to  the  brink  of  the  river  when  they 
die.  Happy  are  we  if,  strong  in  the  Lord,  we 
can  bring  them  ever  closer  to  his  side.  And 
we  thank  God  that  there  is  life  in  a look  and 
life  in  a touch,  that  even  those  who  but  touch 
the  border  of  his  garment  shall  be  made  whole. 

An  old  man,  a Christian,  is  dead.  The  peo- 
ple say,  “ He  is  asleep.”  Formerly,  when  they 
spoke  of  dead  persons,  they  said,  “ They  are 
dead  and  finished,”  or  “ They  have  become 
nothing.”  Now  they  say,  “They  are  asleep.” 


BOOK  IV. 


CHAPTER  I. 

WOMANS S WORK  FOR  WOMAN, 

“ I will  greatly  multiply  thy  sorrow.  Thy  desire  shall  be  to  thy 
husband,  and  he  shall  reign  over  thee.” 

“ Jesus  saith  unto  her,  Mary.  She  turned  herself,  and  said  unto 
him,  Rabboni ; which  is  to  say.  Master.” 

Heathen  women  are  under  a curse ; 

Christian  women  are  restored  to  the 
favor  of  God  through  Christ.  The  depths 
of  degradation  in  the  curse  and  the  heights 
of  blessing  in  the  restoration  are  only  com- 
prehended fully  by  those  who  live  among  the 
heathen,  who  can  compare  country  with  country 
and  condition  with  condition.  Wherever  in  the 
world  one  woman  leads  another  to  the  Saviour 
or  teaches  some  poor  ignorant  one  to  speak 
the  heavenly  language,  or  to  sing  the  notes 
of  the  glad  new  song;  wherever  one  woman 
draws  another  from  filth  and  vice  to  cleanli- 
ness and  godliness,  from  idleness  to  industry, 
from  Satan  to  God ; wherever  one  woman 
speaks  to  another  words  of  comfort  and  cheer 

307 


3o8 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1877 


and  endeavors  to  alleviate  her  suffering, — there 
^wman  is  working  for  woman. 

But  to-day  we  would  look  up  from  our  work 
in  the  harvest-fields,  from  our  posts  in  the  out- 
skirts, especially  to  the  great  body  of  workers 
with  us  at  home.  For  it  seems  as  though  a 
vast  army  were  gathering  behind  us.  Every 
mail  brings  news  of  societies  organized  to  aid 
us  in  our  work. 

. We  have  from  home  some  account  of  how 
the  societies  were  organized,  and  of  the  origin 
of  the  movement,  which  seems,  in  a number 
of  instances,  to  have  started  almost  simultane- 
ously in  different  denominations  of  Christians. 
The  zeal  and  devotion  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
Sisters  of  Charity  may  have  been  felt  as  a 
rebuke  by  Protestant  women,  and  the  ques- 
tion asked,  “Will  not  woman’s  love  and  wo- 
man’s tenderness  and  woman’s  consecration 
win  a way  for  the  gospel  where  like  influences 
have  won  a way  for  error?”  Many  of  us,  too, 
are  familiar  with  the  sisterhoods  of  the  Lutheran 
Church.  We  have  read  of  how  they  go  to 
Palestine  and  Africa,  to  the  desolate  regions 
of  Hungary  and  other  places,  there  to  estab- 
lish orphanages  or  to  do  hospital-work.  There 
are  also  sisterhoods  in  the  Episcopal  Church 
especially  for  hospital-service. 

It  has  generally  been  thought  that  these 


1877]  Woman's  Work  for  Woman.  309 

“ Sisters  ” must  be  unmarried  women  in  order 
to  attend  to  the  duties  of  their  office.  Most 
of  the  Protestant  missionary  societies  do  not 
hamper  their  workers  by  any  binding  promises, 
and  yet  it  seems  but  right  that,  having  been 
sent  by  a society  into  a distant  field  at  great 
expense,  they  should  remain  faithful  at  their 
posts  for  at  least  some  years,  and  not  take 
upon  themselves  any  duty  or  relation  which 
would  prevent  them  from  fulfilling  those  for 
which  they  were  sent.  The  question  of  the 
marriage  of  missionaries  can  only  be  settled 
by  those  most  nearly  concerned  in  the  matter, 
and  to  them  it  had  better  be  left.  The  work 
of  unmarried  women  in  missionary-fields  is 
very  important — indeed,  indispensable.  The 
difficulty  in  regard  to  their  homes  has  been 
solved  in  late  years  by  the  plan  of  sending 
two  or  three  together  to  make  a home  for 
themselves,  and  this  plan  has  been  found  to 
be  entirely  practicable.  Unmarried  women 
hold  high  positions  in  our  missions,  and  year 
after  year  the  special  difficulties  attending  their 
work  are  vanishing. 

The  missionary  societies  who  take  under 
their  care  both  married  and  unmarried  women 
are,  in  our  judgment,  wise.  They  find  that  all 
have  a work  to  do — some  in  one  way,  and 
some  in  another.  The  opening  of  the  zenanas 


310 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1877 


of  India  to  the  missionary-women  seems  to 
have  been  the  real  starting-point  of  the  wo- 
men’s societies  in  America.  Whatever  woman 
only  can  do,  that  woman  must  do ; and  in 
answer  to  the  call  from  India  women  organized 
the  first  society.  The  Women's  Unio7i  Mis- 
sionary Society  was  organized  in  New  York 
City  in  1861.  It  has  always  worked  independ- 
ently of  any  mission-boards,  and  is  composed 
of  all  denominations.  The  late  president  of 
this  society,  Mrs.  Doremus,  was  justly  termed 
the  mother  of  missionaries.  The  organ  of  the 
society  is  The  Missionary  Link.  Its  home-work- 
ers are  found  in  all  parts  of  the  United  States, 
and  its  representatives  in  the  foreign  field  in 
India,  China  and  Japan,  besides  which  it  has 
schools  in  Greece  and  in  Egypt.  Of  the  spe- 
cial work  of  the  society  in  this  land  (Japan),  we 
need  only  mention  the  American  home  and 
the  name  of  Mrs.  Pruyn  to  bring  it  before  the 
Lord’s  people  at  home. 

Women's  Board  of  Missions. — This  society 
was  organized  in  Boston  in  1868,  under  the 
supervision  of  the  American  Board  of  Com- 
missioners of  Foreign  Missions  in  the  Con- 
gregational Church.  The  organ  of  the  society 
is  Life  and  Light  for  Women.  Their  foreign 
workers  are  in  India,  Africa,  China,  Japan,  and, 
most  of  all,  in  Turkey,  where  the  American 


i877]  Woman's  Work  for  Woman.  31 1 

Board  has  been  laboring  for  so  many  years, 
and  with  such  marked  success.  This  society 
is  doing  a great  work  in  Japan.  Its  schools 
are  in  Ko-be,  Osaca  and  Kioto. 

A branch  of  the  society  just  mentioned  is 
the  Woman's  Board  of  Missions  of  the  Interior, 
collecting  the  subscriptions  and  conducting 
the  work  of  the  Western  part  of  the  country, 
under  the  American  Board. 

The  Woman's  Foreign  Missionary  Society 
of  the  Presbyterian  Church  was  organized  in 
Philadelphia  in  May,  1870.  The  two  maga- 
zines of  this  society  are  Woman's  Work  for 
Woman  and  Children's  Work  for  Children. 
Its  auxiliaries  are  numerous  in  Pennsylvania 
and  the  neighboring  States,  and  its  foreign 
work  is  in  India,  Siam,  Syria,  Persia,  China, 
Africa,  Japan,  Mexico,  South  America,  and 
among  the  Indians  and  Chinese  of  our  own 
country.  Its  work  in  Japan  is  in  Tokio  and 
Yokohama,  where  it  has  under  its  care  mis- 
sionaries, single  and  married,  a school  in  the 
latter  place,  and  a part  interest  in  the  board- 
ing-school at  Tokio. 

The  Occidental  Branch  of  the  society  was 
organized  at  San  Francisco,  Cal.,  in  1873.  The 
ladies  edit  weekly  one  column  of  the  Occident. 
The  States  and  Territories  around  the  parent 
society  are  still  so  sparsely  settled  that  there 


312  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

are  comparatively  few  auxiliaries,  but  we  hope 
that  more  will  be  organized.  They  found  a 
work  waiting  for  them  at  their  very  door — the 
Chinese  of  California.  Their  “ Home  for  Chi- 
nese Women  ” is  doing  a great  work  in  bring- 
ing women  and  girls  under  Christian  training 
and  rescuing  them  from  a sinful  life. 

The  Ladies  Home  and  Fo7^eign  Board  of 
Missions  was  organized  under  its  present 
name  in  New  York  in  November,  1870.  It 
had  formerly  existed  as  a home  society.  Its 
organ  is  Our  Mission- Field.  Its  foreign  mission- 
aries are  in  Syria,  Persia,  India,  China,  Siam, 
Japan  and  Africa.  It  has  one  school  for  girls 
partly  under  its  care  in  Japan. 

The  Woman  s Presbyterian  Board  of  Missions 
of  the  North-west  was  organized  in  Chicago  in 
December,  1870,  the  women  of  the  Presbyte- 
rian Church  separating  from  their  fellow-work- 
ers in  the  Congregational  Church.  They  unite 
with  the  society  at  Philadelphia  in  publishing 
Womans  Work  for  Woman  as  their  organ. 
Their  home-workers  and  auxiliaries  are  in  the 
North-western  States,  and  their  foreign  mission- 
aries are  among  th'^  Indians  of  North  America, 
in  China  and  Japan,  in  India  and  Persia,  in 
Siam  and  Syria,  and  in  South  America. 

The  Woman's  Baptist  Missionary  Society  is 
in  two  divisions — the  Eastern,  organized  at 


1877]  Woman's  Work  for  Woman.  313 

Boston  in  April,  1871,  and  the  Western,  organ- 
ized in  Chicago  in  May,  1871.  Its  missionary 
paper  is  The  Helping  Hand.  It  has  numer- 
ous home-workers,  and  Burmah  has  always 
been  the  special  field  of  the  Baptist  Church 
since  the  days  of  Dr.  Judson.  It  has  also  un- 
der its  charge  the  Karen  missions,  Eurasian 
missions  in  Burmah,  the  Shan  mission,  the 
Telvogoo  mission,  also  one  to  the  Chinese  in 
Siam  and  in  China.  It  now  has  two  mis- 
sionaries in  Japan — one  in  Tokio,  and  one  in 
Yokohama. 

The  Woman's  Foreign  Missionary  Society  of 
the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  was  organized 
in  1869.  It  has  at  home  over  two  thousand 
auxiliaries,  and  missionaries  in  India,  China, 
Japan,  Africa,  Bulgaria,  Italy,  South  America 
and  Mexico.  Its  work  in  Japan  is  in  Tokio, 
Yokohama  and  Hakodati. 

The  Woman  s Auxiliary  to  the  Board  of  Mis- 
sions (Episcopal)  was  organized  in  1873.  It  has 
a number  of  local  societies  throughout  the  dif- 
ferent States,  and  missionaries  in  Greece,  Pales- 
tine, China,  Japan,  Africa,  and  among  the  North 
American  Indians. 

The  Woman's  Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of 
the  Reformed  Church  in  America  was  formed  in 
1874.  It  has  representatives  in  India,  China 
and  Japan. 

27 


3H 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1877 


We  have  thus  glanced  at  the  principal  mis- 
sionary societies  in  the  home-land.  They  are 
like  parts  of  a great  planetary  system — suns, 
planets  and  satellites  all  revolving  around  one 
centre,  Jesus,  the  great  central  Sun — or  like 
so  many  divisions  of  an  army,  under  different 
banners,  captains  and  generals,  but  all  fighting 
for  the  King.  What  a mighty  force  it  is ! We 
in  the  field  feel  overwhelmed  when  we  think 
of  it.  We  can  only  pray  God  to  give  them 
grace  and  strength  and  wisdom  as  they  need. 

The  papers  and  letters  from  our  own  society, 
the  Woman’s  Foreign  Missionary  Society  of 
the  Presbyterian  Church,  show  us  how  they 
work,  and  no  doubt  the  others  do  their  work 
in  a similar  way.  Their  object  is  “to  promote 
an  interest  among  Christian  women  in  the 
work  of  foreign  missions.”  The  officers  of 
the  parent  society  consist  of  a President,  Vice- 
Presidents,  Foreign  Corresponding  Secretaries, 
Home  Corresponding  Secretaries,  Recording 
Secretary,  Treasurer  and  Board  of  Managers. 
In  the  committee-rooms  of  the  parent  society 
all  the  ends  of  the  earth  meet.  Through  the 
Flome  Corresponding  Secretaries  come  the  let- 
ters and  reports  from  the  auxiliaries  throughout 
their  boundaries,  and  through  the  Foreign  Cor- 
responding Secretaries  letters  from  the  mission- 
aries in  every  country  and  from  every  clime. 


Woman's  Work  for  Woman. 


315 


1877] 


In  those  rooms  these  reports  and  letters  are 
read,  plans  discussed,  action  taken  as  to  pro- 
posed work,  and  prayer  continually  made  for 
the  blessing  of  God  upon  all.  And  from  these 
rooms  come  the  magazines,  in  which  missionary 
letters  are  printed,  thus  bringing  every  woman 
of  the  Church  into  close  relationship  with  the 
missionaries,  and  to  those  busy  workers  in  the 
field  go  letters  full  of  words  of  comfort  and 
cheer.  Once  a week  the  Executive  Committee 
meets,  while  the  Board  of  Managers  has  a 
regular  monthly  meeting,  and  once  a month  a 
general  prayer-meeting  for  missions  is  held. 

Auxiliaries. — “ The  object  of  these,”  says  the 
second  article  in  the  constitution,  “is  to  secure 
systematic  contributions  for  foreign  missions, 
and  to  disseminate  missionary  intelligence.” 
Their  officers  are  similar,  except  in  point  of 
numbers,  to  those  of  the  parent  society,  and 
the  auxiliaries  are  expected  to  report  annually 
to  the  parent  society.  “The  plan  of  many  of 
these  auxiliaries  is  to  have  monthly  meetings  of 
one  hour,  in  which  the  promises  of  God  are 
studied  in  regard  to  the  evangelization  of  the 
world,  with  prayer  and  singing.  The  subjects 
recommended  by  the  Assembly’s  Board  are 
taken  in  order,  and  papers  are  written  and 
facts  and  items  given,  letters  read,  stations 
traced  on  maps,  etc.  At  these  meetings  the 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


316 


divine  Master  is  always  present,  and  often 
the  hearts  of  the  members  burn  within  them. 
Think  of  the  development  and  culture,  intel- 
lectual, social  and  spiritual,  possible  to  a band 
of  Christian  women  steadily  engaged  in  such 
a work,  pursuing  such  themes  and  taking  hold 
of  omnipotent  help  for  the  perishing !”  The 
funds  are  raised  by  each  member  paying  a 
certain  amount  each  month  into  the  treasury, 
and  a small  amount  for  contingent  expenses 
is  often  added  to  this  by  a trifling  sum  from 
each  member. 

Then  the  young  people  and  children  are 
brought  into  the  work.  “ They  are,”  writes 
one  from  home,  “ as  of  yore,  especially  forward 
and  especially  honored  in  crowning  the  King.” 
In  their  mission-bands  they  hold  meetings  in 
which  they  have  religious  exercises,  bring  in 
information  on  the  special  topics  of  the  month, 
hear  letters  read  from  missionaries  or  extracts 
from  periodicals,  present  pictures,  curiosities 
or  anything  adapted  to  shed  light  upon  the 
customs  of  the  countr}^  under  consideration, 
introduce  maps  or  charts  to  give  the  geograph- 
ical features  of  the  country,  bring  historical 
facts  in  regard  to  the  same,  and  vary  the  exer- 
cises by  relating  incidents,  reciting  missionary 
poems,  or  adding  any  variety  of  entertainment 
that  may  contribute  to  the  pleasure  and  instruc- 


1877]  Womans  Work  for  Woman.  317. 

tion  of  the  hour.  The  little  magazine,  Chil- 
dren's Work  for  Children^  is  expressly  designed 
for  them. 

“ The  Presbyterial  organization,”  says  the 
pamphlet  on  that  branch  of  the  work,  “is  the 
combination  of  the  local  missionary  societies 
existing  in  churches  forming  a Presbytery  for 
co-operative  work  of  foreign  missions.”  The 
local  societies  are  expected  to  send  their  dele- 
gates to  the  place  where  the  meeting  of  Pres- 
bytery is  held,  and  these  delegates  form  a 
Presbyterial  missionary  society.  This  organiza- 
tion beautifully  systematizes  the  whole  work. 

“ A Presbyterial  society,  working  systemat- 
ically and  feeling  a responsibility  for  the  cause 
within  its  own  bounds,  gains  a thorough  know- 
ledge of  the  condition  of  each  church  in  regard 
to  missionary  work,  consults  as  to  the  general 
good,  gives  necessary  information,  increases 
the  circulation  of  missionary  periodicals  and 
letters,  encourages  and  strengthens  weak  so- 
cieties, enlists  interest,  explains  the  best  plans 
for  systematic  benevolence,  and  makes  full  re- 
ports through  the  secretary  to  the  Board.” 

The  interest  aroused  at  the  meetings  is 
another  blessing  attending  these  organizations. 
It  is  earnestly  recommended  that  the  auxiliary 
societies,  with  “ full  accord,”  report  to  their 
Presbyterial  secretary  and  remit  funds  to  their 


31 8 The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1877 

Presbyterial  treasurer;  which  course  greatly 
simplifies  the  work  of  the  secretaries  and 
treasurers  of  the  parent  societies. 

The  money  from  home  comes  to  us  in  as 
direct  a manner  as  possible,  and  with  little  or 
no  diminution.  The  treasurer  of  the  Presby- 
terian Board  of  Foreign  Missions  sends  the 
mission  treasurer  drafts  for  the  amount  allowed 
to  that  mission.  If  any  one  has  assumed  the 
support  of  any  special  object  in  that  mission, 
the  money  goes  into  the  treasury  of  the  Board, 
and  helps  pay  the  bill  of  exchange  from  which 
the  sum  contributed  is  drawn  on  the  mission- 
field.  Thus  may  any  one  see  that  the  smallest 
contribution  suffers  no  loss  on  its  way  to  the 
field  where  it  is  to  be  used.  Every  mite  goes 
into  the  treasury,  and  enters  into  the  drafts 
drawn  for  the  purposes  of  the  work. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  say  anything  more  to  meet 
the  query  so  often  anxiously  put,  “ What  is  to 
become  of  my  donation  ? Will  it  reach  the 
object  I have  in  view?”  You  may  rest  assured 
that  your  dollar  will  be  faithfully  applied  accord- 
ing to  your  wishes.  It  will  do  its  part  in  the 
great  work  ; it  is  a unit  among  the  thousands, 
and  is  as  efficient  as  any  of  the  rest.  All  this 
applies,  of  course,  to  the  amount  asked  for  in 
the  estimates  of  the  mission  and  allowed  by 
the  Board — not  to  outside  ones  sent  irrespect- 


1877]  Woman's  Work  for  Woman.  319 

ive  of  this  arrangement.  For  such  special 
provision  must  be  made. 

It  is  a good  thing  also  that  some  one  should 
be  commissioned  “ to  go  from  church  to  church, 
telling  women  about  the  missionary-field,  form- 
ing societies  among  them,  and  urging  them 
to  come  up  to  the  help  of  the  Lord,  the  help 
of  the  Lord  against  the  mighty.’'  This  should 
be  considered  a part  of  the  regular  work,  and 
compensation  allowed  to  those  thus  employed. 
Returned  missionaries  can  in  this  and  in  other 
ways  still  work  for  the  fields  they  love  that 
are  far  away ; and  if  any  can  thus  be  in- 
duced to  care  and  to  pray,  a great  deal  will 
be  gained. 

The  annual  meetings,  when  so  many  come 
together,  are  times  when  the  friends  who  are 
interested  in  our  work  must  take  grand  views 
over  all  the  world.  We  out  here  have  to  be 
content  with  the  reports  of  the  secretaries,  and 
with  wishing  ourselves  there  with  them  as  they 
climb  the  mountain-tops.  Oh,  the  views  from 
thence  must  be  grand  and  soul-inspiring ! And 
then,  too,  the  “hour  of*  prayer,”  from  5 to  6 
p.  M.  on  each  Sabbath,  is  something  which  com- 
mends itself  to  us. 

I wonder  sometimes  if  our  constant  cry, 
“ Pray  for  us ! pray  for  us !”  does  not  weary 
those  to  whom  we  write.  To  call  for  the 


320  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

prayers  of  so  many  of  God’s  people  for  one 
particular  place  is  to  ensure  it  a blessing.  We 
feel  more  and  more  our  dependence  on  God’s 
favor  and  upon  the  power  of  the  Spirit.  Our 
school-buildings  may  be  destroyed  and  our 
churches  laid  low,  but  the  word  of  God,  sown 
in  the  heart  and  quickened  by  the  Spirit, 
“abideth  for  ever.” 

We  can  see  from  all  this  how  a mutual  rela- 
tion is  established  between  those  in  the  field 
and  those  at  home  in  working  together,  and 
together  working  with  God.  Wherever  such 
relations  exist,  it  is  well  to  consider  just  what 
they  are  and  what  duties  and  benefits  result 
from  them. 

It  is  hardly  strange  that,  as  the  work  grows 
more  absorbing  in  the  mission-field,  my  heart 
turns  with  ever-increasing  interest  to  those  at 
home  who  are  engaged  in  it.  I feel  like  eager- 
ly questioning,  “ Do  all  attend  the  missionary 
meetings  ? Does  every  one  take  the  maga- 
zines ? Are  you  gaining  anything  spiritually 
from  your  labors  ? What  is  it  that  you  are 
doing  ? What  are  you  endeavoring  to  accom- 
plish ? Do  you  now  know  something  of  how 
it  all  looks  to  your  missionary  in  the  field?” 

The  new  missionaries  come  out  to  us  from 
you.  It  is  so  important  that  the  right  ones 
be  sent,  and  so  much  harm  may  be  done  by 


i877]  Womans  Work  for  Woman,  321 

the  selection  of  those  who  are  not  fitted  for 
the  work,  that  the  responsibility  seems  almost 
overwhelming.  Therefore  let  the  whole  Church 
waken  to  a sense  of  this,  and  continually  ask 
of  God  that  the  choosers  may  be  guided  to 
make  the  right  choice.  At  the  meetings  of 
the  auxiliary  societies,  when  the  women  go 
up  to  pray,  let  them  make  this  one  subject 
of  special  prayer. 

There  are  two  ways  in  which  women  go  out 
to  the  foreign  field — as  wives  and  as  unmarried 
women,  to  teach  in  the  schools  or  to  do  other 
special  work.  In  the  former  case  the  choice 
does  not  devolve  upon  the  societies,  the  mis- 
sionary himself  being  the  one  to  make  the 
proper  selection.  But  in  the  other  instance,  and 
the  one  which  involves  a great  deal  more,  the 
matter  of  choice  falls  on  the  society.  Looking 
over  all  the  missionary  lands  or  listening  to  a 
cry  for  help,  they  see  that  some  one  is  especial- 
ly needed  for  a certain  field.  Then  an  earnest, 
importunate  prayer  goes  up  to  God  for  help, 
entreating  him  to  send  the  right  one.  And 
how  wonderfully  those  prayers  have  been  an- 
swered those  who  made  them  can  testify. 

Or  perhaps  some  one  whose  heart  is  burn- 
ing with  love  for  the  heathen,  and  who  feels 
the  strong  desire  herself  to  go  into  the  great 
white  harvest-fields,  makes  an  application  to 

V 


322 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


the  society.  They  see  in  her  one  eminently 
adapted  to  the  work,  and  they  wish  to  send 
her.  Then  another  necessity  for  prayer  arises 
in  regard  to  her  proper  field,  the  time  for  her 
to  go,  the  means  required.  These  are  the 
subjects  for  prayer  ; the  one  who  wants  to  go 
must  wait^  and  the  waiting-time  is  trying. 

Let  me  say  a word  to  such  a one.  You 
need  to  know  almost  everything  in  a foreign 
land ; no  knowledge  can  come  amiss.  I have 
needed  to  know  how  to  make  bread,  and  how 
to  teach  our  servants  all  kinds  of  housework, 
and  how  to  build  fires.  Once  a man  came  to 
ask  me  to  show  him  how  to  make  a ther- 
mometer, which  was  quite  out  of  my  line  of. 
business.  Let  your  waiting-time  be  spent  part- 
ly in  study,  especially  in  study  of  the  mission- 
work. 

Some  apply  to  the  society  for  appointment 
who  are  considered  unfitted  for  the  work. 
Let  not  such  feel  harshly  toward  any  one  on 
this  account.  If  you  are  not  adapted  to  the 
work,  you  would  only  be  a hindrance  to  the 
cause  you  love.  Only  let  it  increase  your 
zeal  to  do  what  you  can  at  home.  Let  the 
Lord  see,  if  no  one  else  does,  that  beautiful 
flowers  of  patience,  humility  and  increased 
love  grow  up  out  of  your  disappointment. 

With  how  great  an  interest  must  the  Church 


^‘^>77]  Womans  Work  for  Woman.  323 

look  on  as  one  after  another'  is  chosen  from 
the  grand  army  to  be  sent  to  the  outposts ! 
The  missionary  having  been  chosen,  the  next 
thing  is  to  provide  the  outfit.  The  servant 
of  the  Lord  must  be  well  equipped  when  she 
starts  forth  in  the  great  work.  It  is  necessary 
to  be  perfectly  acquainted  with  the  climate 
of  the  country,  to  which  the  missionary  goes, 
that  everything  may  be  suitable.  This  makes 
a great  deal  of  correspondence  necessary  on 
the  part  of  those  who  have  the  missionary’s 
outfit  in  charge.  It  is  well  to  know  just  what 
can  be  procured  to  better  advantage  in  the 
country  to  which  she  goes,  or  in  what  way 
expense  may  be  saved. 

It  may  seem  strange  that  most  missionaries 
who  live  in  tropical  or  semi-tropical  climates 
suffer  as  much  with  the  cold  as  they  do  with 
the  heat,  and  sometimes  even  more.  The  large, 
airy  houses,  with  their  verandas  and  many  win- 
dows, are  better  adapted  for  the  heat  than  the 
cold,  and  we  grow  very  sensitive,  so  that  when 
damp,  rainy  days  come  the  cold  is  very  penetra- 
tin^T  and  we  need  the  comfort  of  thick  clothino-. 
Most  of  us  wear  thicker  clothing  here  in  winter 
than  we  ever  need  at  home,  except  in  regard 
to  outside  wraps.  It  is  usually  warmer  out 
of  doors  than  it  is  in  the  house.  But  there 
are  certain  seasons  of  the  year  when  we  can- 


324  The  Sunrise  Kingdmt.  [1877 

not  bear  to  touch  woolen  clothing,  so  that  both 
very  thick  and  very  thin  clothing  is  necessary 
for  the  Japan  winter  and  summer. 

The  cabinet-organs  which  are  sent  by  the 
societies  are  invaluable  assistants  in  our  work. 
We  should  hardly  know  how  to  get  along  with- 
out them. 

When  the  missionary  is  ready,  to  leave,  those 
who  are  sendinof  her  forth  assemble  to  talk 
about  the  country  to  which  she  is  going,  to 
speak  of  the  work  she  is  to  do,  to  sing  and 
pray  together,  and  then  to  say  “ God  bless 
you !”  and  “ Good-bye.”  Those  whom  she 
meets  along  the  way  as  she  journeys  toward 
the  sea  often  desire  to  greet  her,  to  encourage 
her  and  wish  her  all  good  things  in  the  Lord, 
and  some  will  accompany  her  “unto  the  ship” 
and  watch  until  the  gang-plank  is  lifted  and 
the  vessel  is  out  at  sea.  All  the  Church  will 
know  about  her  going,  because  they  will  read 
the  record  in  the  missionary  journal.  And  the 
missionary  goes  forth  feeling  that  she  has  not 
only  the  presence  of  the  Father,  but  also  the 
tender,  loving  sympathy  and  the  heartfelt  pray- 
ers of  his  dear  children.  It  is  a blessed  thing 
to  go,  and  a blessed  thing  to  help  one  in  going, 
to  do  this  God-given  work. 

We  want  to  hear  no  expressions  of  pity,  for 
we  count  ourselves  the  happiest  of  mortals. 


1 87 7]  Womaii  s Wo7'k  for  Woman.  325 

Rather  would  we  say,  “ Rejoice  with  us,  O our 
friends,  for  the  Kin^  hath  called  us  to  the  front 
of  the  battle.  He  hath  chosen  us  to  go  out  to 
take  possession  of  fair  lands  in  his  name.  Our 
eyes  shall  see  and  our  lips  shall  tell  wondrous 
things.  For  hath  he  not  said,  ‘ I will  not  fail 
thee,  nor  forsake  thee.  Only  be  thou  strong 
and  very  courageous’?  ‘This  book  of  the  law 
shall  not  depart  out  of  thy  mouth,  but  thou 
shalt  meditate  therein,  day  and  night,  that  thou 
mayest  observe  to  do  according  to  all  that  is 
written  therein,  for  thus  shalt  thou  make  thy 
way  prosperous,  then  shalt  thou  have  good 
success.’  ‘ Have  not  I commanded  thee  ? Be 
strong  and  of  a good  courage ; be  not  afraid, 
neither  be  thou  dismayed ; for  the  Lord  thy 
God  is  with  thee,  whithersoever  thou  goest.’  ” 
Do  not  overestimate  our  sacrifice.  But 
what  we  do  for  the  sake  of  the  salvation  of 
souls  and  extending  the  dominions  of  our 
King,  with  the  rest  and  blessing  of  his  pres- 
ence and  the  prospect  of  the  certain  sure 
reward,  hundreds  of  others  do  for  the  sake 
of  gain  or  fame,  with  no  such  Master  to  speak 
unto  them  “ comfortable  words,”  and  with  dis- 
appointment meeting  them  on  every  side. 
Read  the  history  of  the  Spanish  conquests, 
and  especially  the  tales  of  the  Roman  Catholic 
missionaries,  and  you  will  see  why  we  cannot 
28 


326  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

boast.  Here,  in  most  troublous  times,  there 
have  always  been  others  to  share  the  dangers 
and  loneliness  of  our  exile,  and  I have  often 
wondered  how  they  have  endured  them  with- 
out our  faith  and  trust  in  God  our  Father’s 
loving  care. 

This  leads  me  to  say  something  to  mothers 
of  missionaries — those  who  have  sons  and 
daughters  in  the  field.  You  give  your  children 
up  to  dwell  far  from  you  in  heathen  lands.  It 
is  a great  sacrifice,  and  we  wonder  not  at  your 
sadness.  But  they  go  from  you  safe  in  the 
Lord  Jesus,  even  the  heart  of  the  Father’s 
kingdom.  You  know  that  at  the  most  the 
separation  is  only  lifelong,  and  that  you  have 
an  eternity  to  spend  together.  You  know 
that  death,  in  whatever  form  it  comes  to  them 
— whether  by  the  sea  or  by  fire  or-  sword  or 
pestilence — is  only  the  King’s  messenger,  wel- 
come to  them  under  any  circumstances. 

Do  you  ever  think  how  many  mothers  are 
mourning  their  prodigal  sons  and  erring  daugh- 
ters, wanderers  from  them  in  these  foreign 
lands,  from  whom  they  never  hear  and  who 
are  treading  the  downward  path  ? Those  who 
labor  in  the  hospitals  can  tell  you  something 
about  this.  Therefore  grieve  not  for  your- 
selves, but  rather  pray  for  the  mothers  whose 
sorrow  is  so  deep  and  apparently  hopeless. 


i877]  Womans  Work  for  Woman.  327 

And  how  often  do  we  find  that  prayer  for 
these  wandering  ones  is  answered ! 

Another  thought : Let  the  women  who  go  up 
to  the  meetings  remember  that  the  lands  to 
which  the  missionaries  are  sent  have  been  for 
thousands  of  years  in  Satan’s  indisputed  pos- 
session, and  that  he  is  not  going  to  give  them 
up  without  a desperate  struggle.  Let  them 
realize  that  the  position  is  that  of  a little  fee- 
ble band  in  the  heart  of  the  enemy’s  coun- 
try, exposed  to  all  the  darts  of  the  evil  one. 
Then  pray  for  us.  We  must  have  the  pres- 
ence and  blessing  of  our  God,  else  “ how 
shall  one  chase  a thousand,  and  two  put  ten 
thousand  to  flight  ?” 

How  eagerly  you  must  watch  for  the  mis- 
sionary journals,  that  you  may  read  the  ac- 
counts of- the  battles  going  on  in  these  distant 
lands — the  great  battles  between  Truth  and 
Error,  between  Light  and  Darkness,  between 
God  and  Satan  ! I think  I can  hear  you  saying 
to  each  other,  “ There  has  been  a great  victory 
in  Persia “ Soldiers  are  flocking  to  the  stand- 
ard of  the  King  in  India “ Many  in  China 
and  Japan  have  sought  the  shelter  of  the 
cross or,  as  you  hear  it  from  one  place  or 
another  throughout  the  world,  “ A sinner  hath 
repented,  and  we  with  angels  rejoice.”  Dear 
friends,  we  need  your  prayers. 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


28 


It  is  well  that  we  are  relieved  from  care 
concerning  our  support:  we  should  not  other- 
wise have  time  to  devote  to  our  work.  And 
our  salaries  should  be  sufficient  to  enable  us 
to  live,  with  no  burdens  of  debt  to  annoy  us. 
We  have  burdens  enough  without  that. 

Our  comfortable,  pleasant  homes  are  pro- 
vided by  the  mission-boards.  Thinking  of 
this  leads  me  to  say  something  in  regard  to 
the  missionary’s  home.  Sometimes  I hear 
sneering  remarks  about  the  way  in  which  mis- 
sionaries live,  and  persons  at  home  receive 
wrong  impressions  concerning  their  houses 
and  the  number  of  their  servants.  It  is  best 
to  look  at  the  subject  carefully  and  candidly, 
so  that  we  may  be  able  to  answer  any  one 
who  speaks  in  this  way,  or  who  has  doubts  on 
this  subject.  I do  not  believe  that  there  is  one 
of  our  missionary-circle,  here  or  elsewhere,  who 
would  not  cheerfully  endure  any  hardship  or 
toil  for  the  sake  of  the  cause,  and  a number 
of  them  could,  if  they  would,  tell  tales  of  suffer- 
ing from  cold  and  pain  and  weariness,  and  even 
from  hunger  and  thirst.  But  the  missionaries 
do  not  go  out  to  win  a martyr’s  crown,  but  to 
do  the  Lord’s  work  in  the  best,  wisest  and 
most  efficient  way. 

There  are  two  ways  of  working  in  the  mis- 
sionary-field. One  is  by  establishing  a strong 


1877]  Woman's  Work  for  Woman,  329 

centre  and  making  homes ; the  other,  by  the 
itinerant  system — that  of  going  from  place  to 
place,  without  any  certain  dwelling-place,  scat- 
tering seed  as  the  missionary  travels. 

Native  houses  are  not  adapted  to  carrying 
on  our  work : they  are  too  open  and  insecure. 
There  are  few  who  can  endure  the  strain  of 
living  any  length  of  time  without  relief,  alone 
among  the  natives.  Loss  of  health,  of  reason, 
and  even  of  life  itself,  has  been  the  result. 
And  the  natives  do  not  understand  or  in  any 
degree  appreciate  the  sacrifice.  We  must 
bear  in  mind  constantly  one  fact,  and  that  is, 
the  heathen  cannot  comprehend  the  idea  of 

X 

disinterested  benevolence.  They  presume  that 
there  is  always  some  selfish  motive  behind  the 
apparent  good-will. 

Nor  do  we  want  to  be  dragged  down  to  a 
level  with  the  heathen  in  our  manner  of  life ; 
we  want  them  rather  to  be  raised  to  our  level, 
and  wish,  therefore,  to  show  them  the  beauty 
of  Christian  homes.  They  are  attracted  to 
the  mission-houses,  whose  doors  are  always 
open  to  receive  them,  and  we  show  the  women 
our  beds,  which  are  elevated  from  the  floor, 
and  our  more  cleanly  and  healthful  way  of 
using  sheets,  and  they  see  that  our  bath-rooms 
are  in  a private  corner  of  the  house,  not,  as 
theirs,  in  the  most  conspicuous  part,  their  bath- 


330  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

tubs  often  at  the  front  door.  We  teach  them 
the  advantage  of  having  the  house  less  open 
and  the  apartments  more  private  and  all  the 
home-life  more  isolated.  The  missionary’s 
home  is  one  of  the  refining  things  in  a heathen 
land.  But  the  houses  must  be  adapted  to  the 
climate.  We  need  them  to  be  even  larger, 
more  open  and  airy,  than  those  at  home.  And 
it  is  well  that  they  look  pleasant,  with  their  ve- 
randas and  large  windows,  and  bright  with 
flowers  and  sunshine. 

Most  missionaries  come  from  refined  homes, 
and  can  throw  an  air  of  refinement  over  the 
native  houses,  even  the  mud  walls  of  Persian 
homes.  Muslin  curtains,  prettily  draped,  pic- 
tures and  little  keepsakes,  flowers  and  vines, 
make  the  home  pretty  and  attractive  without 
extravagance. 

• Missionary-women  in  heathen  lands  are  very 
dependent  upon  their  homes  for  all  the  pleas- 
ures they  enjoy.  Our  work  has  no  respite. 
We  go  on  from  month  to  month  in  the  same 
routine,  and,  I often  think,  do  not  have  enough 
of  social  enjoyment.  The  health  of  the  mis- 
sionary must  be  considered.  Every  year  of 
added  experience  makes  the  missionaries  more 
valuable  in  the  field,  and  we  do  not  want  them 
to  die  or  to  go  home.  Our  Boards  do  well, 
then,  to  provide  us  with  pleasant  homes. 


1877]  Womans  Work  for  Woman.  331 

But  we  often  leave  them  and  go  out  into 
the  country  and  spend  weeks,  and  even  months, 
teaching  the  people  and  mingling  with  them — 
part  of  the  year  as  itinerant  missionaries,  and 
part  working  from  our  strong  mission-centre, 
sending  out  our  native  helpers,  after  patient 
instruction,  and  going  with  them  often  to  su- 
perintend their  labor. 

In  these  lands  we  need  very  nourishing  food : 
the  system  soon  becomes  enervated  in  these 
warm  climates.  In  regard  to  the  servants  of 
the  missionary,  we  often  hear  surprise  ex- 
pressed as  to  the  number  of  them.  Perhaps 
some  even  think  that  missionaries  ought  not 
to  keep  servants  at  all.  “ It  is  necessary  to  have 
more  servants  here  than  we  would  need  at 
home,  for  no  one  can  labor  much  in  these 
climates.  Nor  will  one  servant  do  more  than 
one  kind  of  work  in  this  country.  Our  time 
and  strength  are  too  precious  to  spend  in  doing 
manual  labor,  which  a small  outlay  will  enable 
us  to  get  natives  to  do.  We  came  to  do  mis- 
sionary work,  and  must  be  free  to  do  it.  So 
a number  of  servants  is  necessary,  and  it  must 
also  be  remembered  that  each  native  servant  is 
one  more  brought  under  the  influence  of  the 
gospel.  But  if  the  economy  of  the  matter  be 
in  question,  it  may  be  a conclusive  answer  to 
the  objector  that  the  expense  of  three  servants 


332 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1877 


here  is  barely  equal  to  one-half  the  cost  of  one 
at  home.  I have  often  wished,  however,  that 
I could  exchange  my  three  or  four  servants  for 
one  good  strong  Irish  woman. 

Besides  the  things  provided  for  us  here, 
some  things  come  to  us  from  home.  When 
we  hear  in  Tokio  that  the  steamer  has  arrived 
at  Yokohama,  we  know  that  only  a few  hours 
will  intervene  before  our  mail  will  come,  and 
we  wait  for  the  postman’s  call.  How,  think 
you,  such  words  as  these  sound  to  us  ? — “ If 
you  can  suggest  any  way  in  which  the  work 
you  are  doing  can  be  aided  by  us,  we  hope 
you  will  do  it.  We  rejoice  in  what  God  is 
doing  for  Japan.”  And  one  says,  “We  want 
to  help  you,”  and  “ I pray  that  you  in  Japan 
may  have  all  the  grace  and  wisdom  and  might 
that  you  need  for  every  part  of  the  work.” — 
“ It  seems  to  me  that  many  are  praying  all 
over  the  world  as  never  before,  ‘ Thy  kingdom 
come.’” — “You  are  in  the  field  doing  the  work 
of  the  Lord.  You  need  first  his  blessing,  with- 
out which  the  laborer  worketh  in  vain,  and  you 
must  also  feel  the  need  of  help  and  encourage- 
ment from  home.” — “It  seems  to  me  that  there 
Is  much  earnest  prayer  for  the  Holy  Ghost  in 
our  land.”  These  are  a few  extracts  from 
many  letters.  Do  you  not  think  such  words 
strengthen  us  in  these  distant  lands  ? 


1877]  Woman's  Work  for  Woman.  333 

The  magazines  have  their  own  special  mis- 
sion to  us  here.  They  enable  the  missionaries 
in  all  fields  to  become  acquainted  with  each 
other.  Often,  in  taking  up  new  phases  of  the 
work,  I have  read  what  my  sisters  older  in  mis- 
sionary-life have  said  in  their  letters  concerning 
the  same  branches  of  the  work,  and  have  been 
profited.  When  the  magazines  come,  particu- 
larly the  one  for  children,  portions  of  them  are 
translated  and  read  to  our  girls,  and  the  result 
has  been  that  they  have  formed  a missionary- 
society  themselves,  and  take  up  one  country 
each  month  and  prepare  articles  upon  it,  and 
pray  for  it  especially.  They  have  already 
learned  a great  deal  about  China  missions, 
about  Miss  Dean’s  school  in  Oroomia,  of  Miss 
Fisk’s  life,  and  of  Mrs.  House’s  school  in  Bang- 
kok. Our  little  children  were  much  interested 
in  the  letter  of  “ Leek,”  a girl  in  the  Bangkok 
school,  and  began  a quilt  like  the  one  she  men- 
tioned. 

“ Do  the  women  of  your  country  support 
missionaries  in  every  part  of  the  world  ?”  asked 
a Japanese  gentleman.  “ Oh  yes,”  was  the  an- 
swer ; “ here  is  their  book.  Do  you  not  see 
the  letters  in  it  from  India,  Siam,  China,  Per- 
sia and  Japan  ? When  will  the  women  of  your 
country  do  such  things  ?” — “ When  this  religion 
spreads  through  all  the  world.” 


334 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


You  would  like  to  see  our  Christian  girls 
gathered  for  these  missionary-meetings  in  a 
room  in  this  great  heathen  city,  with  idols  and 
idolaters  all  around  them.  It  brings  to  my 
mind  Paul’s  salutation  to  tke  Christian  women 
of  Rome:  “Salute  Tryphena  and  Tryphosa, 
who  labor  in  the  Lord.  Salute  the  beloved 
Persis,  which  labored  much  in  the  Lord.  Greet 
Mary,  who  bestowed  much  labor  upon  us.” 

Will  the  societies,  auxiliaries  and  bands  listen 
for  a little  while  to*some  words  from  one  in  the 
field?  We  think  we  appreciate  in  some  degree 
the  difficulties  and  responsibilities  of  those  who 
have  the  work  in  charge,  the  officers  of  our  so- 
cieties. We  wish  you  had  telescopes  through 
which  you  might  look  at  us,  but,  since  you 
have  not,  we  want  our  letters  to  be  fair,  impar- 
tial statements  concerning  the  state  of  things 
here. 

We  wish  to  be  very  careful  how  we  call  upon 
you  for  help.  But  we  are  sure  that  the  mere 
stating  to  you  the  difficulties  which  we  meet  is 
one  way  by  which  those  difficulties  may  be 
overcome  in  great  measure  in  the  present 
and  avoided  in  the  future.  Even  when  we 
are  called  to  pass  through  the  “fiery  furnace,” 
you  will  in  some  measure  share  our  suffer- 
ings, but  we  shall  all  rejoice  together  at  the 
full  deliverance. 


i877]  Woman's  Work  for  Woman.  335 

We  are  sure  of  your  aid  in  every  difficul- 
ty, of  your  sympathy  in  every  experience,  and 
of  your  joy  in  all  our  victories.  But  let  us  all 
remember  that  far  above  all  Boards  and  com- 
mittees are  the  eternal  purposes  of  God. 
Great  difficulties  resolve  themselves,  or  our 
Father  gradually  unravels  them  if  we  are  only 
patient  and  wait. 

The  auxiliaries  which  provide  the  missionary’s 
salary  take  her  and  her  work  as  a special  sub- 
ject of  prayer.  Let  them  often  write  to  her, 
expecting  only  an  occasional  answer  in  return. 
We  are  often  pressed  for  time,  but  we  want 
to  let  you  hear  from  us,  and  will  write  when 
we  can.  Often,  when  great  issues  are  at  hand, 
we  feel  constrained  to  write  directly  to  the  pa- 
rent society,  but  be  sure  that  you  are  not  for- 
gotten by  us. 

In  regard  to  the  societies  and  bands  who 
are  supporting  Bible-readers  and  the  pupils 
in  the  schools,  let  me  say  something  in  regard 
to  what  is  called  “ special  work  ” — that  is,  the 
support  of  any  particular  person  or  child  in  a 
mission.  No  doubt  it  is  pleasanter  for  you  to 
feel  that  you  have  some  particular  person  under 
your  care.  You  want  to  hear  of  her,  receive 
letters  from  her  and  know  just  what  she  is 
doing,  and  it  seems  right  that  you  should  do 
so.  But  when  you  take  certain  things  into 


336 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


consideration,  I am  sure  you  will  see  how 
impossible  it  often  is  to  give  you  such  a special 
object,  and  how  it  may  prove  rather  a hindrance 
than  a help  to  the  missionary  in  her  work. 
For  instance,  a band  has^  a little  heathen  girl 
in  school  here  or  elsewhere.  It  (the  band) 
wants  to  know  something  about  her,  and  this 
necessitates  frequent  writing  on  the  part  of 
the  missionary  ; nor  is  it  always  easy  to  find 
something  interesting  to  write  concerning  these 
apathetic  little  Asiatics. 

But  this  is  not  the  greatest  difficulty,  by  any 
means.  We  are  liable  to  constant  changes — 
changes  in  our  pupils,  in  our  plans  of  work. 
What  might  seem  best  one  month  may  look 
differently  the  next,  or  the  child  who  might 
appear  suitable  at  one  time  might  prove  to  be 
one  whom  we  could  not  keep,  or  we  might  find 
out  things  concerning  her  which  would  render 
any  support  from  home  unnecessary.  Or  the 
child  might  prove  to  be  very  naughty  or  dull, 
and  we  should  not  like  to  write  such  news 
home.  And  these  things  are  not  merely  sup- 
posable  cases.  They  are  what  have  occurred 
under  my  own  eye.  One  of  our  missionaries 
has  said  that  she  did  not  dare  to  write  any- 
thing home  about  our  fluctuating  mission,  for 
by  the  time  it  got  back  to  her  it  was  not  true. 
Of  course  this  applied  simply  to  what  are  the 


lVo77ta7ts  Wo7'k  for  Woman, 


337 


1877] 


mere  incidents  or  contingencies  of  the  work, 
the  minor  occurrences  of  the  day. 

I remember  we  once  had  a hearty  laugh 
at  one  of  our  missionaries  who  began  a letter 
by  speaking  of  her  “good  teacher,”  and  how 
fortunate  it  was  that  she  had  him,  and  had  to 
end  it  by  saying  that  he  had  gone  she  knew 
not  where.  I myself  once  wrote  to  one  of  the 
ladies’  Boards,  asking  them  to  take  charge  of 
a woman  whom  I had  in  training  as  a Bible- 
reader,  and  when  the  ready  answer  came  the 
woman  was  far  beyond  my  reach,  and  I had 
only  to  write  and  say  so. 

We  like  the  scholarship  system  much  better, 
and  sometimes  w'e  can  keep  one  child  on  a 
scholarship  for. a long  time,  and  thus  give  those 
who  endowed  it  an  opportunity  to  become 
acquainted  with  her.  And  we  want  to  have 
the  natives  depend  upon  themselves,  so  that 
just  as  soon  as  we  can  dispense  with  the  schol- 
arship we  may  do  so,  or  take  one  child  off  and 
put  another  in  her  place  in  rapid  succession. 
We  do  not  want  what  is  designed  as  a help  to 
become  a hindrance  to  our  work. 

One  specialty  is  the  teacher  employed  by  the 
missionary'  when  acquiring  the  language.  At 
first  these  teachers  do  little  more  than  instruct 
us,  but  afterward  we  have  them  as  helpers  in 
various  branches  of  our  work.  Their  salaries 


29 


W 


33S 


The  Siim'ise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


must  come  from  the  Board.  Another  very- 
important  specialty  is  providing  means  for 
our  journeyings  for  mission-purposes.  Few  of 
us  can  afford  to  pay  this  out  of  our  salaries, 
and  we  do  not  go  so  often  as  we  might  were 
it  otherwise.  So  one  thing  you  can  do  is  to 
provide  means  for  the  missionary  to  travel  by 
jin-ri-ki-sha,  ka-go,  horse,  camel,  or  even  ele- 
phant, as  the  case  may  be. 

Give  your  money  regularly  and  systemat- 
ically to  the  treasurer,  and  it  will  go  to  the 
parent  society,  and  it  will  know  what  is 
needed  and  where  it  is  needed.  And  do  not 
cling  to  your  “special  work;”  for  if  you  can 
have  any,  I cannot.  My  plans  and  purposes 
are  frequently  broken  off,  and  it  only  makes  it 
all  the  harder  for  me  when  any  one  else  is  dis- 
appointed, especially  if  it  be  any  of  the  young 
people  or  little  children.  We  are  glad  the 
young  girls  and  the  boys  are  interested  in 
our  work,  and  the  dear  little  children  must 
know  all  we  can  tell  them  about  our  little  ones. 

You  cannot  give  in  the  Lord's  cause  with- 
out receiving  tenfold,  and  as  you  read  of  us 
in  these  missionary-lands  you  must  realize 
your  own  privileges.  Oh,  church- women  at 
home,  what  a mighty  army  do  you  seem  to 
us  ! Surely  every  one  in  your  land  is  taught 
of  Jesus.  You  do  not  have  to  wait  month 


1 87 7]  Woman's  Work  for  Woman.  339 

after  month  to  learn  a strange  tongue  before 
you  can  begin  to  teach  the  heavenly  language 
or  the  new  song.  You  never  had  to  see  your 
pupils  tremble  before  the  death-penalty  or 
come  to  you  in  danger  of  persecution.  You 
do  not  need  to  hide  your  Bibles  under  your 
pillows,  as  I have  done,  because  the  volumes 
are  so  scarce.  How  rich  you  are  in  Christian 
literature!  You  can  scatter  it  over  all  the 
land.  If  we  had  your  numbers  and  your  ma- 
terial, in  a few  days  all  Japan  would  know  of 
the  Lord.  See  that  you  rightly  value  and 
rightly  use  your  privileges. 

You  are  brought  into  close  contact  with 
other  lands.  Their  geography,  history  and 
present  state  and  progress  grow  familiar  to 
you.  What  an  education  for  your  children, 
and  indeed  for  yourselves ! Is  not  your  faith 
strengthened  by  what  you  see  is  being  done 
in  these  lands  ? 

Come,  let  us  take  these  heathen  women 
with  us  to  the  sepulchre.  Point  out  to  them 
the  cross  and  the  empty  tomb.  Ask  the  Lord 
to  call  each  one  by  her  name,  and  to  open 
her  ears  that  she  may  hear  his  voice  and  call 
him  “ Master.”  See  her  now  bathed  in  the 
fountain,  clothed  in  new  garments,  white  and 
clean ! Is  it  not  a change  ? But  stay  yet 
longer.  This  is  the  “ Morning  Land.”  The 


340 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


grass  is  glittering  with  dew ; the  birds  have 
only  just  begun  their  song ; everything  is  fresh 
and  bright.  Come  drink  with  these  women  at 
the  very  Fountain-head.  See  if  the  waters  are 
not  to  your  taste  exceedingly  pure  and  sweet. 
Perhaps  some  of  you  have  forgotten  somewhat 
your  first  delight  in  drinking  of  the  water;  per- 
haps some  have  gone  too  far  away  from  the 
Source;  the*  water  may  be  mixed  with  some- 
thing else.  Let  us  all  kneel  and  drink  at  the 
Fountain-head  with  our  new-born  sisters,  hea- 
then but  a little  while  ago. 


CHAPTER  II. 


“ THE  CHRISTIANAS  SHINING  LIGHTT 

“ With  a pure  clear  light 
Jesus  bids  us  shine, 

You  in  your  small  comer, 

And  I in  mine.” 

I SOMETIMES  wonder  how  it  is  that  many 
people  have  such  crude  ideas  in  regard  to 
missionaries  and  the  mission-work.  In  letters 
questions  are  often  put  which  show  us  that 
friends  at  home  are  vainly  trying  to  picture  us 
in  these  far-off  lands.  They  wonder  how  we  are 
living  and  what  we  are  wearing  and  eating  and 
drinking,  and  seem  to  imagine  that  some  great 
change  has  taken  place  in  us  as  well  as  about 
and  around  us,  and  I feel  like  saying,  “ Dear 
friends,  I am  just  myself ; and  my  home  is  just 
as  much  like  the  one  in  our  own  land  as  we  can 
make  it ; and  we  eat,  drink  and  wear  about  the 
same  things  that  we  should  at  home ; and  the 
work  seems  all  alike  to  me.  It  is  only  that  I 
am  here^  and  you  there.  You  are  to  shine  in 
your  corner,  and  I in  mine.’' 

But  I recall  my  own  childish  fancies  about 

29  341 


342 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


missionaries  as  people  going  about  in  boats 
among  islands,  or  teaching  savages  under 
palm  trees — beings  entirely  different  from  ordi- 
nary mortals — and  then  I look  about  me,  my- 
self a missionary  in  this  strange  land,  and  smile 
to  think  how  different  it  all  is  from  anything  I 
had  imagined,  and  yet  how  much  more  is  in- 
volved than  all  those  childish  fancies  had  con- 
ceived. And  it  is  only  now,  after  years  in  the 
field,  when  the  surroundings  have  grown  per- 
fectly familiar  to  me,  and  the  language  is  as 
easily  spoken  and  understood  as  my  own  native 
tongue,  that  the  similarity  of  the  work  here 
and  as  it  is,  or  ought  to  be,  at  home  impresses 
me,  and  I must  go  back  to  note  the  difference. 

In  the  old  days  of  pioneer  missionary-life, 
in  the  times  of  isolation  from  our  own  country- 
men and  of  dwelling  among  a strange  people 
speaking  a strange  tongue,  one  could  realize 
vividly  the  full  import  of  the  words  which  the 
Lord  spoke  unto  Abraham,  saying,  “ Get  thee 
out  of  thy  country,  and  from  thy  people,  and 
from  thy  Father’s  house,  into  a land  which  I 
shall  show  thee.”  At  night,  looking  up  to  the 
sky,  full  of  stars  as  when  the  Lord  called  Abra- 
ham forth  to  look  at  them,  and  said,  “ So  shall 
thy  seed  be,”  and  then  gazing  down  upon  the 
pleasant  land  which  we  know  is  promised  to 
the  Son  for  his  inheritance,  the  house  in  which 


i877]  ''The  Christian's  Shining  Light!'  343 

we  were  living  seemed  turned  into  a tent,  and 
we  ourselves  as  Abraham  dwelling  in  the 
“ Promised  Land,”  though  having  none  inherit- 
ance in  it,  and  yet,  like  him,  rejoicing  in  the 
assurance  that  it  should  be  ours.  But  not 
bidden,  as  was  Abraham,  to  keep  separate 
from  the  nations  around  us,  we  had  come  to 
tell  the  people  of  the  Saviour  whose  day  Abra- 
ham rejoiced  to  see ; and  fair  though  the  land 
be  in  which  as  strangers  we  were  now  sojourn- 
ing, yet  faith  taught  us  to  look  for  a “ better 
country,”  and  we  had  come  to  point  out  to  the 
dwellers  here  the  way  to  that  heavenly  land. 
So  we  mingle  with  them  to  learn  about  their 
country  and  their  character,  their  manners,  and 
customs,  and,  above  all,  to  speak  and  under- 
stand their  language.  And  to  accomplish  these 
things  is  the  first  great  aim  of  the  missionary. 

We  have  found  Japan  a pleasant  land  in 
which  to  dwell,  and  the  climate  one  in  which 
foreigners  can,  under  ordinary  circumstances, 
live  a long  while  without  serious  injury  to  the 
constitution.  Earthquakes  have  rocked  our 
homes  and  tempests  have  swept  over  us,  but 
we  have  been  kept  from  harm  through  all. 
We  have  traveled  in  the  country,  and  have 
eagerly  seized  every  opportunity  of  becoming 
acquainted  with  the  character  of  the  people 
among  whom  we  work,  that  we  may  know  how 


344  The  Sunrise  Kmgdom,  [1877 

to  deal  with  them.  We  Christian  women  who 
are  here  to  labor  among  the  Japanese  women 
must  know  the  natures  of  those  with  whom  we 
come  in  contact.  These  women  have  always 
been  kind  and  pleasantly  disposed.  Almost 
the  first  word  I had  to  learn  was  ''Arigato'' 
(“Thank  you”),  and  ever  since  that  morning, 
a few  days  after  we  landed  at  Yokohama, 
when  a woman  on  the  bluff  put  a morning- 
glory  into  my  hand,  I have  had  to  use  that 
word  constantly. 

The  women  have  shallow,  undeveloped  minds, 
with  blunted  ideas  of  truth  and  virtue,  but  they 
are  capable  of  a high  degree  of  culture,  and 
work  among  them  is  very  satisfactory  in  its 
results. 

This  constant  contact  with  inferior  minds, 
this  continual  giving'out  and  receiving  nothing 
in  return,  the  feeling  that  years — even  the  best 
years — of  our  life  are  slipping  away  and  we  are 
gaining  nothing  intellectually, — these  are  among 
the  greatest  trials  to  which  a missionary  here  is 
subjected.  But  we  can  afford  to  give  when  we 
work  with  One  who  gave  his  life  for  us  “ while 
we  were  yet  sinners,”  and  who  now  gives  lib- 
erally to  supply  all  our  needs,  asking  only  our 
loving  service  in  return. 

We  familiarize  ourselves  with  the  manners 
and  customs  of  the  people  by  mingling  with 


i877]  ''The  Christian's  Shining  LightC  345 

them.  We  take  off  our  shoes,  sit  down  on 
the  mats  and  drink  tea  with  them.  We  let 
bows  and  smiles  and  signs  take  the  place  of 
words  at  first.  We  greet  kindly  the  little  chil- 
dren, and  find  our  way  to  the  mothers’  hearts 
through  the  babes.  We  watch  them  in  the 
temples  and  in  their  gardens  and  their  homes, 
joining  with  them  as  we  can.  In  this  way  we 
learn  the  language.  There  is  no  way  to  learn 
how  to  speak  a language  but  to  speak  it. 
We  must  use  our  vocabularies  over  and  over 
until  we  see  that  the  words  we  use  are  under- 
stood, nor  mind  if  they  are  not  right  at  first. 
We  cannot  learn  the  spoken  language  from 
teachers  altogether — for  in  that  way  we  should 
get  a stiff  form  of  expression — but  we  must 
listen  to  the  people  and  try  to  talk  as  they  do. 

The  Japanese  colloquial  is  not  difficult.  The 
pronunciation  is  easier  to  us  than  that  of  French 
or  German.  The  many  forms  of  the  language 
and  the  honorific  expressions  and  euphonic 
changes  are  troublesome,  but  we  soon  learn 
to  use  them.  We  make  many  ludicrous  blun- 
ders at  first,  but  we  profit  by  our  own  mistakes 
and  try  again.  If  any  one  asks  us  how  long  it 
took  to  learn  the  language,  I have  to  say  that  I 
do  not  know,  for  we  are  always  learning  some- 
thing new,  and  never  feel  that  we  have  perfectly 
acquired  the  language.  It  takes  years  of  resi- 


34^  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

dence  in  this  country  to  be  able  to  speak  like  a 
native,  if  indeed  one  ever  does  it. 

As  to  the  written  language,  it  is  well  to  learn 
as  quickly  as  possible  how  to  read  the  Scrip- 
ture and  the  hymn-book,  tracts,  etc.,  which  are 
published  by  the  mission.  In  them  all  one  set 
of  characters  is  used,  and  they  are  not  very  diffi- 
cult. It  is  well  to  read,  or  at  least  to  know  about, 
Japanese  books,  but  one  may  take  this  leisurely, 
as  it  is  not  essential.  The  Japanese  literature 
drains  the  mind  without  enriching  it. 

I wish  I could  impress  upon  every  new  mis- 
sionary the  importance  of  giving  a year,  or  even 
two  years,  to  study  before  she  undertakes  any 
special  work  in  the  field.  Only  those  who  have 
experienced  it  know  what  it  is  to  be  obliged  to 
strain  every  nerve  to  understand  or  to  be  un- 
derstood, and  this  while  other  cares  are  press- 
ing also.  If  some  time  is  devoted  at  first  to 
study,  it  affords  the  new  missionary  an  oppor- 
tunity to  become  acclimated  and  acquainted 
with  the  people,  and  to  learn  exactly  to  what 
sphere  of  missionary-life  she  is  best  adapted, 
thus  avoiding  the  troubles  which  arise  from 
mistakes  in  beginning  things  not  advisable  or 
for  which  the  missionary  is  not  qualified.  If 
too  much  time  is  spent  on  other  things  in  the 
beginning,  the  language  will  never  be  really 
learned,  and  the  consequence  will  be  that  the 


1877]  '"The  Christian  s Shining  Light!'  347 

missionary  will  always  labor  at  a disadvantage. 
“ Learn  the  language ! learn  the  language !” 
the  old  missionaries  and  all  who  know  any- 
thing about  the  work  will  say  to  the  new" 
w"orker  in  the  field.  Spend  your  first  ener- 
gies on  it,  and  while  doing  so  study  the 
people,  learn  the  character  of  your  fellow- 
missionaries  ; watch  carefully  their  work,  and 
then  you  will  fall  naturally  into  your  proper 
sphere  and  find  your  work  comparatively  easy 
and  pleasant. 

The  relations  w"hich  the  missionary  as  such 
sustains  are  three:  (i)  To  the  Board  and 

the  society  by  whom  she  is  sent,  (2)  to  her  fel- 
low-missionaries, and  (3)  to  the  heathen.  The 
relation  of  the  foreign  missionary  to  the  Board 
is  that  of  “one  sent”  far  off  into  the  enemy’s 
country  by  the  grand  army  at  home.  They 
send  us  out  well  equipped  for  our  work.  They 
care  for  us  when  here  by  prayer,  sympathy  and 
money  as  we  need.  It  is  our  duty,  therefore, 
to  send  home  reports  of  the  land  and  the  peo- 
ple, and  of  our  own  welfare  and  progress  in  the 
work.  If  we  do  not,  how  can  we  expect  them 
to  keep  up  their  interest  in  us?  How  can  they 
know  wherein  w"e  require  aid,  or  how  to  pray 
for  and  sympathize  with  us,  if  we  do  not  tell 
them?  They  must  follow  us  through  our  jour- 
neyings  and  our  first  experiences  in  foreign 


348 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


lands,  and  labor  with  us  as  the  years  go  on 
and  our  work  and  interests  broaden  and 
deepen.  And  this  makes  letter-writing  a 
duty.  We  are  brought  into  correspondence 
with  the  foreign  secretary  of  the  parent  soci- 
ety, with  the  secretary  of  the  auxiliary  that 
provides  our  support,  and  with  the  societies 
and  bands  that  sustain  scholarships  in  our 
schools,  or  Bible-readers  whose  work  we 
superintend.  Besides  these,  a number  of 
letters  come  to  us  from  others  who  wish  to 
know  something  about  our  work  or  make 
inquiries  about  some  particular  branch  of  it. 

As  the  parent  society  has  all  the  work  of 
the  auxiliaries  under  its  care,  and  the  most 
important  or  interesting  of  the  letters  are 
published  or  in  some  way  disseminated,  much 
writing  may  be  spared  the  missionary  by  send- 
ing all  communications  direct  to  the  secretary 
of  the  parent  society  with  whom  she  is  in 
correspondence.  Letters  can  be  sent  through 
her  to  the  auxiliary  societies  or  to  individuals, 
or  special  items  designated  in  the  general  let- 
ter to  the  Board  will  be  copied  and  given  to 
those  who  are  specially  interested.  The  sec- 
retary can  thus  relieve  the  missionary  from 
too  great  a pressure  of  letter-writing. 

But  since  this  letter-writing  must  be  done, 
it  is  best  to  consider  the  easiest  way  of  ac- 


i877]  ''The  Christians  Shining  Light!'  349 

complishing  it ; and  I have  always  found  it 
best  to  set  apart  a small  portion  of  each  day 
— perhaps  only  a half  hour — for  this  purpose, 
regarding  it  as  much  of  a duty  as  anything 
else,  and  in  this  way,  without  interfering  with 
other  things,  I have  easily  kept  up  a large 
correspondence.  It  is  well  to  note  down 
little  passing  events  which  will  be  of  interest 
to  people  at  home,  and  to  watch  for  every- 
thing which  will  add  interest  or  value  to  our 
letters.  Every  one  earnest  in  her  work  will 
throw  her  earnestness  into  her  letters,  and 
thus  set  on  fire  the  hearts  of  the  people  at 
home. 

When  several  missionaries  are  engaged  at 
one  station,  what  is  called  the  “ mission  ” is 
formed.  Every  member  of  the  mission  has 
his  or  her  part  to  take  in  the  work.  There 
are  mission-meetings  once  a month,  when  the 
state  and  progress  of  the  work  are  discussed. 
For  these  meetings  reports  are  made  out  and 
estimates  of  expense  given,  and  plans  for  en- 
largement or  change  in  work  are  examined, 
and  if  approved  by  the  mission  are  sent  on 
to  the  Board  at  home. 

It  is  not  always  that  the  members  of  a mis- 
sion agree  in  all  things,  neither  are  they  always 
perfectly  congenial  companions.  Nor  is  it  ex- 
pected that  they  should  be  such,  for  we  come 

30 


350  The  Sunrise  Kmgdom.  [1877 

here  unacquainted  with  each  other,  often  with 
different  tastes  and  opinions.  Our  imperfectly- 
sanctified,  human  natures  make  us  liable  to  err 
in  many  instances. 

“Ye  are  the  light  of  the  world.”  “A  city 
which  is  set  upon  a hill  cannot  be  hid.”  Thus 
spoke  the  Lord  Jesus  to  the  disciples  who  oc- 
cupied as  missionaries  the  same  position  that 
we  do.  It  seems  to  me  that  no  Christians 
dwell  on  such  high  hills  as  do  missionaries. 
When  we  assume  the  duties  of  our  office  we 
voluntarily  go  up  into  them,  there  to  take  a 
high  position. 

The  eyes  of  the  heathen  are  upon  us.  More 
than  we  think  do  they  comment  upon  every  ac- 
tion and  word.  When  the  city  is  divided,  they 
know  it ; when  the  lights  are  dim,  they  know  it. 
The  eyes  of  those  of  our  own  land  who  sneer 
at  our  work  are  upon  us,  quick  to  see  and  glad 
to  find  anything  by  which  they  can  gain  some 
occasion  for  reviling  or  reproach.  And  the 
Church  at  home  has  high  ideas  in  regard  to 
what  should  be  our  self-renouncement  and  the 
consecration  of  missionaries,  though  ready  to 
admit  that  we  are  but  human.  It  is  necessary, 
then,  that  there  be  not  even  an  appearance  of 
division  in  our  city.  And  we  who  dwell  there- 
in, and  those  who  come  up  to  join  our  ranks, 
must  be  very  careful  to  avoid  all  causes  of  dis- 


1877]  '^The  Christians  Shining  Light!'  351 

sension.  We  must  see  to  it  that  each  member 
has  his  or  her  appropriate  work,  and  that  there 
is  no  unnecessary  interference  on  the  part  of 
one  with  another.  And  especially  should  So- 
cieties and  Boards,  as  they  send  out  new  mis- 
sionaries, be  very  careful  to  ascertain  their  cha- 
racteristics in  this  respect,  and  to  make  such 
arrangements  beforehand,  if  possible,  that  there 
be  no  trespassing  upon  or  intrusion  into  the 
sphere  already  occupied  by  those  who  have 
preceded.  Never  should  anything  be  allowed 
by  which  rivalry  or  jealousy  may  be  fostered. 
Are  they  not  all  one,  working  for  the  same 
Lord,  the  same  glorious  end,  and  should  strife  or 
bitterness  ever  exist?  “Let  your  light  so  shine 
before  men,  that  they  may  see  your  good  works, 
and  glorify  your  Father  which  is  in  heaven.” 
The  third  relation  of  the  missionary  is  to  the 
heathen.  To  my  mind,  there  are  four  distinct 
phases  of  “woman’s  work  for  woman”  in  the 
foreign  field.  The  first  is  that  of  woman  in  the 
home.  The  Christian  wife  can  show  to  the 
heathen  that  she  is  trusted  by  her  husband  and 
stands  on  an  equality  with  him.  One  of  the 
first  things  noticed  by  the  people  is  that  the 
wife  walks  beside  her  husband,  and  not  behind 
him.  We  can  show  them  that  we  do  not  need 
to  blacken  our  teeth  or  otherwise  disfigure 
ourselves  as  they  do  in  order  to  render  our 


352  The  Simi'ise  Kingdom.  • [1877 

husbands  secure  concerning  us,  nor  do  we 
need  certificates  from  them  to  prove  that  we 
are  not  running  away  when  we  go  from  home 
for  a few  days. 

There  are  so  many  beautiful  things  in  a Jap- 
anese household  in  regard  to  the  management 
of  children  and  their  obedience  and  respect  to 
parents  that  a Christian  mother  needs  to  be 
careful  that  her  own  children  are  trained,  in 
these  respects,  as  well  as  those  in  the  families 
around.  But  the  infinite  superiority  of  real 
Christian  training  can  be  shown  to  the  heathen, 
and  the  beauty  of  a truly  Christian  household 
will  not  be  lost  upon  them. 

As  a housekeeper  there  is  much — very  much 
— to  be  shown  to  the  heathen — as,  for  instance, 
the  advantage  of  regular  habits  and  the  value 
of  time — and  we  can  rebuke  their  indolent, 
aimless  lives  by  our  own  better  example. 

No  one  need  think  that  a missionary,  in 
making  the  one  great  sacrifice,  is  free  from 
all  lesser  trials,  for  we  have  here,  just  as  house- 
keepers do  at  home,  our  own  troubles  with 
servants,  and  have  great  need  of  patience  in 
this  respect.  When  we  first  came  here  the 
servants  knew  nothing  of  our  ways,  and  had 
to  be  taught  everything.  They  did  not  know 
how  to  use  a stove,  and  always  wanted  to 
kindle  a fire  under  one  hole  and  cook  every- 


1877]  "'‘The  Christians  Shining  Light!'  353 

thing  separately,  beginning  with  potatoes  early 
in  the  morning,  setting  them  in  a corner  of  the 
room  to  cool,  and  then  putting  on  something  else. 
They  wanted  to  do  everything  down  on  the 
floor,  spreading  things  around  in  all  directions. 
They  never  stole  anything  of  consequence, 
but  would  take  wood  out  of  the  stove  for  char- 
coal. We  have  to  do  all  the  thinking  and 
planning  for  them,  as  they  have  no  idea  of 
method  in  their  work.  The  missionary  house- 
keeper needs  the  prayers  of  her  sisters  at 
home  for  grace  and  patience  in  this  part  of 
her  life. 

Most  of  the  unmarried  ladies  who  are  sent 
out  have  the  charge  of  schools  or  are  in  some 
way  connected  with  them.  It  is  remarkable 
how  mission-schools  have  been  prospered.  In 
Japan  all  our  work  has  been  developed  from 
them.  They  were  the  beginning  of  the  church. 

The  aim  of  the  foreign  teacher  in  the  school 
is  to  train  teachers  and  BIble-women  and  wives 
for  native  Christians.  This  means  a great  deal, 
and  there  is  need  for  special  prayer  that  the 
Lord  will  send  the  right  ones  into  the  school. 
This  is  our  prayer:  “Dear  Lord,  thou  knowest 
the  needs  of  this  land  ; thou  knowest  thy  gra- 
cious purposes  concerning  it.  Send  Into  this 
school  those  who  will  receive  the  truth  and 
become  truly  enlightened,  and  thus  be  fitted 

30  X 


354  The  Su7irise  Kingdom.  [1877 

in  after-years  to  go  forth  to  labor  among  the 
people.” 

The  school-system  here  has  become  rather 
complicated,  owing  to  the  fact  that  English  is 
so  extensively  used,  and  we  had  for  a long 
time  no  native  text-books.  At  first  the  girls 
came  only  to  read  English,  and  we  translated 
it  as  best  we  could,  but  afterward  we  found 
that  more  was  necessary,  especially  when 
boarders  came  into  the  house.  So  we  have 
now  an  English  department,  in  which  only 
pronunciation  is  taught ; translation  classes, 
where  a Japanese  who  understands  English 
takes  charge  of  the  translation ; and  a Jap- 
anese department,  which  includes  Chinese  writ- 
ing. Japanese  teachers  were  not  such  strict 
disciplinarians  at  first  as  we  desired,  but  they 
are  learning  better  our  style  of  teaching,  and 
as  native  text-books  are  made  they  will  be 
more  extensively  used.  Music  is  also  taught, 
and  fancy-work. 

Japan  is  said  to  be  a paradise  for  teachers 
as  well  as  for  babies.  The  children  are  indeed 
docile  and  gentle,  but  still  we  have  our  difficul- 
ties. Sometimes  we  wish  they  had  'more  en- 
ergy, and  we  try  to  stir  up  a spirit  of  emula- 
tion among  them.  Long  and  hard  has  been 
the  contest  to  make  them  give  up  their  way 
of  dealing  by  indirect  means,  and  to  have 


1 877]  ''The  Christian's  Shining  Light!'  355 


them  come  directly  to  their  teachers  with 
their  wants  and  complaints,  and  to  infuse  a 
love  of  truth  into  their  natures. 

Frequent  illness  among  the  pupils  has  been 
one  great  difficulty  with  which  we  have  had  to 
contend.  They  require  great  care  physically 
as  well  as  mentally,  and  a teacher  often  has 
to  play  the  part  of  a nurse.  But  as  scholars 
they  have  some  very  good  traits.  They  have 
great  respect  and  reverence  for  teachers. 
They  are  studious  to  a fault.  It  is  hard  to 
induce  them  to  take  proper  exercise  and  rec- 
reation. Their  tuition-fee  has  always  been 
paid  promptly.  They  are  neat  about  every- 
thing. Some  are  capable  of  a high  degree 
of  culture,  and  all  repay  their  teacher  for  the 
care  given  to  them.  Happy  years  have  been 
these  spent  in  the  mission-school. 

Beautiful  to  the  Christian  woman  is  the  next 
department  of  work  for  woman — that  among 
the  native  women  of  the  church.  We  see 
that  they  come  to  the  Bible  classes  and  to  the 
church-services,  and  grow  strong  to  walk  in  the 
narrow  way.  This  includes  the  work  among  the 
O Ba  sans — the  old  and  feeble  ones  of  the 
church — and  also  the  leading  and  guiding  of 
the  baptized  children,  helping  their  mothers  in 
training  them,  and  exercising  a watchful  care 
over  the  little  ones  of  the  mission-school. 


35 6 The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

True,  the  work  is  often  discouraging,  it  is 
with  such  feeble,  faltering  steps  that  they  some- 
times walk.  And  yet  we  have  great  happiness 
in  this  part  of  our  work,  for  we  can  watch  the 
timid  ones  grow  strong  and  mark  the  develop- 
ment of  their  Christian  character  as  they  go  on. 
Happy  they  who  see,  as  we  have  been  permit- 
ted to  do  in  Japan,  the  first-fruits  offered  unto 
God! 

Another  part  of  the  work  is  the  sowing  of 
the  seed  broadcast,  in  the  distribution  of  the 
printed  page,  the  word  spoken  to  the  individ- 
ual, the  meetings  for  instruction — like  those  in 
Gen-ske-cho — the  work  of  the  Bible-woman,  the 
going  forth  to  sow.  We  can  pray,  and  those 
at  home  who  are  interested  in  our  work  can 
unite  with  us  in  prayer,  that  God  will  prepare 
the  ground.  Then  forth  to  the  work  we  go, 
carrying,  as  it  were,  seed-basket  in  one  hand 
and  sword  in  the  other,  for  while  we  work  we 
must  also  fight.  In  faith  is  the  seed  dropped, 
in  sure  reliance  that  it  will  be  watched  over  by 
the  Lord,  to  whom  it  is  so  precious. 

We  have  considered  the  change  of  home,  the 
relations  and  the  duties  of  the  missionary ; now 
the  qualifications  for  all  this  are  but  clear  deduc- 
tions. Since  the  missionary  leaves  her  “coun- 
try” and  her  “ father’s  house,”  and  goes  to  dwell 
among  a strange  people,  speaking  a strange 


i877]  ''The  Christians  Shining  LightC  357 

tongue,  being  isolated  from  her  own  country- 
men, she  must  be  one  who  has  found  in  God  her 
home,  in  God  her  everlasting  rest.  I repeat, 
she  must  be  one  who  has  found  rest,  not  one 
who  comes  expecting  to  find  a rest  here  which 
she  does  not  possess  at  home.  For  I know  of 
some  who  have  come  to  foreign  lands  thinking 
to  gain  in  absorbing  work  relief  from  their  own 
unrest.  We  do  not  find  “absorbing  work”  at 
first.  We  have  sometimes  to  wait  long  before 
we  do  find  it,  and  the  experience  of  most  of  us 
is  that  at  home  our  time  seemed  more  fully  oc- 
cupied and  our  work  more  important  than  it  did 
here  during  our  years  of  waiting  before  we  could 
talk  or  before  we  found  out  just  what  our  work 
was. 

In  the  long  journey,  during  the  process  of 
acclimation  and  in  the  endurance  of  discom- 
forts falling  to  our  lot  in  traveling  through 
this  land,  we  find  a cheerful  disposition  is  ne- 
cessary, as  well  as  good  health.  Travel  in 
Japan  is  not  so  hard  a matter  as  in  some 
other  heathen  countries,  as  the  Japanese  are 
a cleanly  people,  and,  with  the  exception  of 
fleas  (a  disagreeable  exception,  to  be  sure), 
there  are  but  few  vermin.  I have  read,  in  one 
of  the  books  of  the  missionary  literature  of 
Persia,  a statement  of  the  writer  to  the  effect 
that  he  had  seen  ladies  who  had  borne  brave- 


358  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

ly  many  trials  and  much  pain  give  way  under 
this  affliction. 

Neither  do  we  suffer  from  the  thieving  pro- 
pensities of  the  natives  as  do  the  missionaries 
in  other  lands.  We  sleep  quite  fearlessly  at 
night  in  the  open  houses,  with  all  our  baggage 
in  straw  baskets  without  lock  or  key.  But  we 
travel  in  jin-ri-ki-shas  and  ka-gos,  and  sleep  on 
the  floor,  and  grow  weary  without  the  accus- 
tomed luxury  of  chairs  and  tables,  and  we 
creep  on  hands  and  knees  into  the  boats  and 
cling  desperately  to  the  necks  of  natives  who 
are  carrying  us  through  the  water.  And  well 
is  it  if  we  can  laugh  at  our  discomforts  and 
take  pleasure  enough  in  the  natural  beauties 
around  us  to  compensate  for  all  we  may  have 
suffered. 

Since  the  missionary  gains  nothing,  morally 
or  intellectually,  from  those  among  whom  she 
lives,  she  must  go  to  her  work  with  a good 
supply  of  both  moral  and  intellectual  strength. 
Abraham’s  strong  faith.  Job’s  patience,  Moses’ 
meekness,  and  all  the  histories  of  those  “who 
through  faith  subdued  kingdoms,  wrought  right- 
eousness, obtained  the  promises,”  and  of  the 
women,  also,  who  “ received  their  dead  raised 
to  life  again,”  are  things  familiar  to  us  all  our 
lives.  Paul’s  missionary-life  is  ours  for  an 
example,  and  above  all  we  can  “look  unto 


i877]  ''The  Christian  s Shhiing  Light!'  359 

Jesus,”  “who  for  the  joy  that  was  set  before 
him  endured  the  cross,  despising  the  shame.” 
“What  do  you  do,”  said  one  missionary  to 
another  one  day,  “ when  you  are  tried  by  the 
hypocrisy,  and  sometimes  the  ingratitude,  of 
this  people  ?” — “ I consider,”  was  the  answer — 
“ I consider  ‘ Him  who  endured  such  contradic- 
tion of  sinners  against  himself.’  ” 

And  not  only  these,  but  the  names  of  those 
with  whom  history  makes  us  familiar,  who  have 
toiled  and  suffered  and  accomplished  wonder- 
ful things,  are  “towers  of  streno^th”  to  us. 
So  it  is  well  that  the  missionary  comes  to  her 
work  acquainted  with  thes  history  of  the  world, 
and  with  a well-balanced,  well-regulated  mind. 
We  all  know  how  this  is  attained  only  by  a 
thorough  education  of  all  the  mental  faculties. 

And  well  is  it  also,  for  the  one  who  comes, 
to  have  means  of  recreation  within  herself.  I 
love  to  see  the  missionary  coming  who  is  fond 
of  flowers,  of  music  and  of  beautiful  scenery, 
or  even  of  fancy  needle-work ; for  I know  how 
these  things  will  help  her  in  her  isolated  life. 
The  question  is  often  asked,  “ Does  the  know- 
ledge of  other  languages  help  you  in  learning 
the  Japanese?”  It  does  not,  in  one  sense, 
when  the  other  languages  are  not  cognate, 
but  learning  any  one  language  always  helps  in 
another,  as  our  minds  are  strengthened  by  the 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


,60 


discipline  of  study,  and  we  become  accustomed 
to  memorizing  isolated  words  and  to  the  trans- 
position of  sentences. 

In  order  to  find  our  way  to  the  hearts  of  the 
people,  a winning,  kind  manner  is  a necessity. 
One  needs  to  be  able  to  sit  down  with  them 
on  their  mats,  and  to  drink  hot  tea  without 
choking,  and  swallow  down  unpalatable  things 
without  making  faces.  The  Japanese  food  is 
not  greasy,  as  is  that  of  other  countries  of' 
which  I have  read,  and  consequently  to  me 
was  never  actually  distasteful.  But  I never 
could  learn  to  use  chopsticks. 

Since  the  relation  of  missionaries  to  each 
other  is  one  often  calling  forth  much  grace 
and  patience,  it  is  well  that  the  missionary  be 
one  with  no  peculiarities  to  be  humored. 
The  mutual  relation  of  missionaries  brings 
our  these  personal  peculiarities  and  idiosyn- 
crasies in  a very  strong  light.  One  long  in  the 
mission-field  says,  “ There  is  always  some  dread 
in  welcoming  new  missionaries.  Sometimes 
they  bring  with  them  sorrow  instead  of  joy. 
It  is  so  important  that  they  be  well  chosen — 
even  chosen  of  God.  Then  they  will  be 
happy  under  all  circumstances,  ‘working  for 
God.’ 

Therefore  let  the  new  missionary — one  “cho- 
sen of  God  ” and  pointed  out  by  him  in  answer 


>^77]  ''The  Christians  Shming  Light i'  361 

to  the  prayers  of  the  Church — go  to  her  field 
prepared  to  wait  to  find  out  just  what  her  place 
is,  or  to  take  that  which  is  designated  for  her 
by  the  older  missionaries,  and,  even  if  not 
satisfied,  be  still  content  to  wait.  And  in  the 
choice  and  occupation  of  her  field,  let  it  be 
with  the  spirit  of  Abraham,  who  said,  If  thou 
wilt  take  the  left  hand,  I will  go  to  the  right ; 
or  if  thou  depart  to  the  right  hand,  then  I will 
go  to  the  left.”  The  work  is  one — “ you  in  your 
corner,  and  I in  mine no  rivalry,  no  discus- 
sion of  diverse  interests  as  such.  Consider 
the  words  of  John  the  Baptist  in  his  deep  hu- 
mility : “ He  must  increase,  while  I must  de- 
crease and  the  beloved  disciple  speaks  only 
of  love. 

The  missionary,  then,  needs  patience,  know- 
ledge, faith,  habits  of  method  and  regularity,  so 
that  one  duty  will  not  press  upon  another;  and 
if  she  come  as  teacher,  she  should  be  acquaint- 
ed with  the  best  modes  of  instruction  at  home, 
and  a good  disciplinarian,  or,  what  is  better  still, 
one  who  rules  by  love. 

It  is  important  that  at  least  one  in  a school 
should  have  a good  knowledge  of  music,  and, 
indeed,  every  accomplishment  can  be  made 
helpful  in  bringing  scholars  to  the  school,  and 
so  under  our  influence.  Some  knowledge  of 
medicine  is  also  a desirable  qualification  for  a 

31 


362  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

missionary.  And  in  the  Church  we  need  those 
not  easily  discouraged,  not  disposed  to  find  fault 
readily,  and  who  will  know  how  to  utilize  every 
spark  of  native  talent.  We  need  the  very  spirit 
of  the  Lord  Jesus,  who  ever  looked  with  pitying 
eye  upon  the  “multitudes” — who  loved  peo- 
ple. To  me  one  of  the  most  beautiful  of  all  the 
gospel  narratives  is  the  one  recorded  in  Mark 
vi.  31-34.  The  Lord  had  said  to  his  disciples, 
“ Come  ye  yourselves  into  a desert  place,  and 
rest  a while,”  for  “they  had  no  leisure  so  much 
as  to  eat.”  But  when  they  came  to  the  “desert 
place,”  there  before  them  were  the  “multitudes,” 
and  Jesus  “ was  moved  with  compassion.”  How 
this  comes  home  to  our  hearts  as  we  are  press- 
ed and  called  on  every  side,  and  find  so  little 
leisure  ! 

But  just  as  the  ears  are  sometimes  opened  to 
hear  sweet  melody  in  what  at  first  seemed  all 
discord,  so,  as  the  years  of  missionary-life  go 
on  and  we  come  nearer  to  our  Lord’s  side,  fol- 
lowing him  in  work  among  the  poor  and  lowly, 
and  going  down  with  him  into  the  depths  of 
misery,  are  the  eyes  opened  to  see  the  exceed- 
ing beauty  of  the  human  soul.  In  our  work  we 
find  the  very  essence  of  beauty,  and  a light  has 
poured  into  our  own  souls  which  we  never  knew 
before.  “If  any  one  will  do  my  will,  he  shall 
know  of  the  doctrine.” 


1877]  "'The  Christian's  Shining  Light!'  363 

These  characteristics,  these  acquirements, 
these  tempers  of  mind  and  soul,  are  not  mere 
theories  nor  wild  vagaries ; they  are  just  what 
we  have  felt  ourselves  to  need  in  this  land. 
Therefore  let  the  one  who  possesses  them,  or 
most  of  them,  consecrate  them  unto  the  Lord. 
Not  all  are  really  fitted  for  the  missionary- work 
who  may  be  devoted  servants  of  the  Lord. 


“ With  a pure  clear  light 
Jesus  bids  us  shine, 

You  in  your  small  corner, 
And  I in  mine.” 


The  heathen  see  the  clear  shining  of  that 

light.  When  D first  came  to  the  mission- 

house,  she  brought  her  idols  with  her,  but 
long  before  any  one  spoke  to  her  on  religious 
subjects  she  threw  them  away:  “I  watched 

the  Christians  as  they  spent  their  time  from 
morning  until  night  in  working  for  others,  and 
I never  saw  anything  like  it  before,  so  I threw 
my  idols  into  the  bay.”  O Ka  san  said,  “ I 
never  knew  anything  like  the  care  of  these 
Christian  teachers  in  the  school.  It  is  wonder- 
ful.”— “ Grandma,”  said  little  four-year-old  Sen- 
ki  to  old  Hisa,  “ the  love  of  the  Christians  is  not 
like  the  love  of  the  Japanese.”  And  said  one 
of  the  girls,  “The  love  of  the  Christian  is  deep- 
er than  ours.” — “We  thought  our  teacher  would 


364  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1877 

be  sick,”  said  the  girls,  alluding  to  a grief  of 
which  they  knew.  But  no  ; the  teacher  showed 
them  that  God  was  her  strength  and  her  refuge. 
Endurance  in  trial,  courage  in  danger,  self-for- 
getfulness in  life,  patience  in  sickness,  triumph 
in  death, — all  these  can  be  shown  to  the  hea- 
then by  Christian  women. 

I wish  to  testify  to  the  happiness  of  a mis- 
sionary devoted  to  her  work.  There  is  no  one’ 
happier  in  the  world.  And  we  who  are  here 
acknowledge  that  in  the  gospel  we  find  a vigor, 
a freshness  and  a joyousness  never  before  expe- 
rienced in  such  degree.  From  the  home-land 
come  the  evidences  that  some  do  depart  from 
the  faith,  that  some  are  doubting,  that  some 
deem  themselves  too  wise  for  the  gospel,  but 
in  our  “Morning  Land,”  in  our  “Sunrise  King- 
dom,” we  find  rest  and  peace  and  strength  and 
joy  in  Jesus.  We  are  glad  to  be  here. 


CHAPTER  III. 


THE  REGIONS  BEYOND. 


“ Pray  ye  therefore  the  Lord  of  the  harvest,  that  he  will  send  forth 
laborers  into  his  hai'vest.” 


IFE  here  is  earnest  and  practical.  We 


have  no  time  for  theory  or  dreams.  Day 
after  day  goes  on  in  the  same  busy  routine  ; 
every  hour  brings  its  own  employment.  There 
are  little  simple  every-day  duties  in  the  house, 
the  teaching  and  governing  of  children  in  the 
schoolroom,  attending  to  some  sick  one’s  wants, 
or  going  out  with  Deguchi  san  or  one  of  the 
girls  to  Gen-ske-cho,  or  to  sow  the  seed  else- 
where. And  all  this  is  sweetened  and  glorified 
by  the  fact  that  we  are  serving  the  Lord,  and 
are  receiving  the  “ hundred  fold.” 

But  we  are  never  so  busy  that  we  cannot 
often  “lift  up  our  eyes”  to  the  hills  far  away; 
and  on  bright  Saturday  afternoons,  when  the 
week’s  work  is  done,  we  can  take  jin-ri-ki-shas 
and  go  to  O-ji’s  fountains,  or  to  Mu-ko-ji-ma’s 
pleasant,  flowery  walks,  or  to  Shi-ba’s  quiet 
woods,  where  no  one  would  guess  that  we 

31  * 3f)5 


366  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

were  in  the  heart  of  a great  city.  How  many 
such  hours  we  have  spent  there,  when  the 
sunlight  trickled  through  the  trees  down  upon 
the  violet-beds  and  brightened  the  moss  and 
fern  and  ivy ! 

In  these  times  of  resting  there  comes  often 
a beautiful  vision.  A great  wind  has  swept 
over  Japan,  and  the  idols  have  all  been  carried 
away — yes,  even  the  beautiful  images  of  Buddha 
have  gone,  or  remain  to  be  admired  only  as 
works  of  art.  Instead  of  the  pagan  temples  on 
the  hills  and  in  the  villages  and  dotting  the 
broad  plains  are  houses  dedicated  to  the  ser- 
vice of  the  true  God.  The  pilgrims  have 
learned  that  neither  on  “ this  mountain  ” nor 
“at  Jerusalem”  need  the  Father  be  worshiped, 
but  everywhere  may  he  be  found  by  those  who 
call  upon  him  “ in  spirit  and  in  truth.”  They 
know  of  heights  of  holiness  and  wells  of  salva- 
tion higher  and  deeper  than  those  of  Fu-ji’s 
top:  “Beautiful  upon  the  mountains  are  the 
feet  of  him  that  bringeth  good  tidings,  that 
publisheth  peace.”  In  all  the  homes  the  word 
of  God  is  read,  and  from  them  all  prayer  as- 
cends. Every  one  speaks  and  understands  the 
language  of  Canaan,  and  the  “ new  song,” 
which  has  been  sung  in  such  feeble  strains 
only  here  and  there  hitherto,  has  now  swelled 
into  a grand  chorus : “ Hallelujah,  hallelujah  ! 


1 877]  The  Regions  Beyond.  367 

The  kingdoms  of  this  world  are  become  the 
kingdoms  of  our  Lord  and  of  his  Christ.” 

Shall  my  vision  ever  be  fulfilled?  Not  by 
dreaming  of  it,  surely ; but  this  is  the  end  to 
which  we  are  to  bend  our  energies.  Then  how 
must  we  go  to  work  ? It  will  never  be  accom- 
plished by  the  foreign  missionaries  alone.  We 
are  too  few  in  number  and  too  weak  in  the  flesh. 
Were  our  days  as  Methuselah’s,  or  our  strength 
as  Samson’s,  or  our  numbers  as  the  hosts  of 
Israel,  we  might  indeed  expect  to  accomplish 
something.  But  our  days  are  few  and  evil — 
few  at  the  best,  and  made  fewer  still  by  the 
time  we  have  to  wait  before  we  can  go  to 
work,  and  by  the  changes  which  come  to  us ; 
and  evil  by  reason  of  the  infirmities  of  the 
flesh  and  the  mistakes  to  which  we,  as  erring 
human  souls,  are  liable.  And  here  in  Japan 
our  boundaries  are  restricted,  and  we  may 
not  go  where  we  like. 

Only  a short  time  ago  I was  at  Kanagawa, 
the  little  town  opposite  Yokohama.  The  em- 
peror had  just  come  home  from  a northern 
trip,  and  we  watched  the  ornamented  ships  in 
the  harbor  and  heard  the  guns  which  were 
fired  in  honor  of  his  return.  Then  we  saw  him 
as  he  passed  through  Kanagawa  in  his  open  car. 
There  was  a great  display  of  flags  and  the  peo- 
ple were  not  wanting  in  demonstration,  but  they 


368 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


did  not  fall  on  their  faces  before  him  as  formerly. 
After  the  car  had  passed,  some  of  those  in  the 
hotel  went  up  to  the  temple  to  worship.  They 
had  heard  of  Jesus,  and  some  of  them  sang 
“Jesus  loves  me.” 

When  the  emperor  had  passed,  we  decided 
to  go  up  the  Tokaido  to  Tokio.  Not  since  the 
days  of  railroading  in  Japan  have  we  been  over 
the  old  road  between  Kanagawa  and  Tokio. 
We  passed  many  people  on  the  road,  and 
they  all  seemed  as  they  did  six  years  ago.  We 
stopped  at  the  old  hotel  where  we  always  took 
dinner  in  the  days  of  stages,  but  there  was  lit- 
tle sign  of  change  there  (except  that  no  beg- 
gars were  visible),  and  the  people  still  knew 
nothing  of  God.  We  stopped  at  a temple  and 
saw  crowds  going  up  to  worship,  and  we  went 
to  Plum  Ya-shi-ki  and  wandered  about  the  beau- 
tiful grounds.  There  seemed  no  change  in  that 
part  of  the  Tokaido,  and  we  came  home,  sad 
and  conscience-stricken,  to  devise  new  plans. 
And  yet  our  work  seemed  fully  up  to  our 
measure  of  strength. 

Another  day  we  went  out  in  the  suburbs  of 
the  city  to  the  north  and  crossed  the  Sumida 
on  a bridge,  getting  thus  beyond  the  foreign 
limits.  All  was  darkness  there.  On  the  way 
back  we  passed  a little  boy  standing  on  a stone 
and  talking  to  the  setting  sun.  He  did  not 


1877] 


The  Regions  Beyond. 


369 


seem  to  be  praying,  except  as  he  repeated  the 
words  “ O Tento  Saina  ! O Teiito  Sama  P'  (“  Mr. 
Sun”),  just  as  they  repeat  "'Amida  Dai  Butsu  ! 
Dai  Butsu!'"  (‘'The  Great  Buddha”). 

How  can  missionaries  ever  boast  of  their 
work?  No  class  of  workers  feel  themselves 
more  absolutely  nothing.  But  our  chief  de- 
pendence is  not  on  foreign  missionaries,  nei- 
ther is  it  our  object  to  fill  Japan  with  them. 
It  is  rather  to  bring  so  large  a force  of  native 
preachers,  evangelical  colporteurs,  teachers  and 
Bible-readers,  both  male  and  female,  into  the  ser- 
vice that  foreigners  will  no  longer  be  needed, 
essential  as  their  presence  and  their  work  are 
now,  and  will  doubtless  be  for  years  and  years 
to  come. 

I fear  that  when  we  pray  the  Lord  of  the 
harvest  to  send  forth  laborers  into  his  field  we 
think  too  much  of  the  foreign  missionary  and 
not  enough  of  the  native  helpers.  The  evan- 
gelization of  a country  depends  upon  its  own 
people,  and  from  them  must  the  laborers  come. 
The  great  white  fields  can  be  occupied  in  no 
other  way.  I would  that  all  the  Church  of  God 
would  unite  in  earnest  prayer  to  this  end.  Pray 
that  India’s  sons  and  daughters  may  labor  for 
India;  that  Persia’s  church-people  may  work 
for  Persia,  and  the  Chinese  for  China,  and  the 
Japanese  for  Japan  ; that  in  every  missionary- 

Y 


370  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

land  the  hearts  of  the  native  Christians  may 
burn  with  desire  to  carry,  the  truth  to  the 
“ regions  beyond.”  But  we  deal  not  with  the- 
ory and  indulge  not  in  visions ; and  compara- 
tively new  as  this  mission  is,  I think  we  can 
see  that  in  the  people  which  leads  us  to  hope 
for  great  results — even  that  the  grand  consum- 
mation above  described  may  be  reached. 

I do  not  wish  to  keep  back  from  any  one  the 
discouraging  features  of  the  work.  Some  of 
those  of  whom  we  had  brightest  hopes  have 
utterly  failed  us.  Some  have  heard  the  gospel 
with  joy  at  first,  but  are  of  those  who  have  not 
root  and  soon  are  “ offended.”  But  that  so 
many  have  persevered  is  more  to  be  wonder- 
ed at  than  that  some  have  turned  back. 

Of  the  four  Christians  whom  we  found  in 
Yokohama  in  1869,  old  Baba  (O  Ba  san)  is 
dead.  Kojiro  and  Ajiki  have  never,  to  my 
knowledge,  entirely  renounced  their  faith,  but 
they  are  not  working  actively  with  any  of  the 
bodies  of  native  Christians.  But  Ogawa,  the 
elder,  soon  to  be  ordained  a minister,*  has 
through  all  times  of  sorrow  and  danger  been 
faithful,  and  to-day  is  giving  true  evidence  of 
his  faith  in  his  works.  His  is  the  “ bright  and 
shining  light,  shining  more  and  more  unto  the 
perfect  day.”  His  wife  has  long  been  a mem- 

* In  1878  pastor  of  a native  church. 


877] 


The  Regions  Beyond. 


371 


ber  of  the  native  church  (Union),  and  they  are 
united  in  the  Lord.  When  he  is  ordained  he 
will  have  the  charge  of  native  churches.  Here 
is  one  at  least  who  is  ready  to  work  well  among 
his  countrymen.  But  he  is  not  the  only  efficient 
native  worker.  We  have  already  noticed  his 
association  some  years  ago  with  the  Yokoha- 
ma elder  Okuno,  and  remember  their  first  mis- 
sionary-tour together.  In  our  church  we  have 
seen  how  soon  it  was  organized,  and  even  be- 
fore that  those  who  were  baptized  invited 
friends  to  hear  quickly  the  good  news  of  the 
kingdom. 

At  Toda  san’s,  on  the  Ginza,  at  Chimura 
san’s,  in  the  vicinity  of  Shi-ba,  at  Iseki  san’s, 
in  a distant  quarter  of  the  city,  sekiyo  bas 
(“preaching-places”)  were  established.  And 
all  through  the  winter,  in  spite  of  wind  and 
cold  and  storm,  have  the  men  gone  out  heart- 
ily to  the  work. 

In  Shi-na-ga-wa,  a town  in  the  suburbs,  there 
has  been  preaching  at  the  house  of  an  old 
doctor  who  has  a daughter  noted  in  all  that  re- 
gion for  her  filial  piety.  One  bitterly  cold  day 
we  all  went  out  to  a service  near  Hara  san’s 
“ Willow  Island.”  Two  large  rooms  were 
thrown  together,  and  they  were  filled  with 
listeners.  Some  of  the  women  sat  far  back 
and  warmed  themselves  by  the  hi-ba-chis,  but 


372  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

all  could  hear,  and  they  listened  attentively. 
The  native  evangelists  have  been  far  out  in 
the  country,  and  probably  churches  will  soon 
be  organized  in  the  vicinity  of  Tokio  with 
native  pastors  over  them. 

Our  own  church  prayer-meetings  are  usually 
conducted  by  the  Japanese.  One  of  the  licen- 
tiates preaches  every  Sunday  in  the  church, 
and  they  are  faithful  teachers  in  the  Sabbath- 
school.  It  is  delightful  to  hear  them  giving  in 
their  reports  at  our  monthly  concerts,  where 
each  one  tells  where  he  has  been,  and  with 
whom  he  has  conversed,  and  how  gladly  the 
people  have  listened ; and  we  believe  they  will 
gradually  push  forward  until  the  truth  is  pro- 
claimed throughout  all  the  land. 

But  I think  I hear  some  eager  questioning 
about  the  women  : “ How  are  the  women  work- 
ing? Will  Japanese  women  take  up  with  zeal 
the  work  for  women  in  Japan  ?”  Often  we  are 
tried  by  their  shallow  and  frivolous  natures 
and  by  the  indolence  which  they  show.  Yet 
these  very  things,  when  they  are  in  a degree 
overcome,  make  the  power  of  divine  grace 
manifest  in  them.  The  woman  Deguchi  san 
goes  day  after  day  to  her  work  in  the  city, 
always  refusing  to  ride,  walking  miles  in  the 
wind  and  rain  and  snow  or  in  the  summer  heat. 
She  comes  home  often,  triumphant  in  her  joy, 


1877]  The  Regions  Beyond.  373 

to  tell  how  gladly  this  one  or  that  one  has 
listened  or  has  become  a believer.  She  knows 
where  every  child  in  the  school  lives,  and  if 
one  is  absent  more  than  two  days  goes  to  find 
out  the  cause.  She  does  a great  deal  of  copy- 
ing, being  a good  writer,  and  is  always  busy. 
Often  at  night,  when  the  house  is  quiet,  I hear 
her  voice  in  prayer. 

Old  Hisa,  under  careful  direction,  although 
weak  in  some  respects  and  often  trying,  has 
kept  patiently  at  her  work  month  after  month. 
She  and  Deguchi  san  went  out  in  the  country 
to  O Rin  san’s  house  one  cold  day,  walking 
eight  or  ten  miles  on  a bad  road,  and  teach- 
ing the  people  all  the  evening.  Fifteen  peo- 
ple assembled  to  hear. 

I have  great  hope,  too,  of  our  girls.  They 
come  to  school  in  weather  that  would  keep 
many  a child  at  home  in  our  country.  The 
little  ones  are  brought  on  the  backs  of  ser- 
vants. Never  once,  in  all  the  days  of  appre- 
hended trouble  from  the  ya-cu-nins,  have  they 
all  at  the  same  time  kept  away  from  school. 
Every  Sabbath  some  one — often  a number  of 
them — has  been  here,  even  in  most  troublous 
days.  At  the  time  of  the  first  baptisms  among 
the  scholars  we  saw  evidences  of  great  strength 
of  character,  and  they  have  been  earnest,  con- 
sistent Christians  ever  since.  Their  attendance 

32 


374  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

at  church  and  Sabbath-school  seems  no  forced 
thing. 

One  of  the  pleasantest  hours  in  all  the  busy 
week  is  that  one  on  the  Sabbath  evening  when 
the  others  go  to  church  and  I am  left  with  the 
little  ones  to  have  a talk  about  the  services  of 
the  day  and  to  hear  what  they  have  to  say 
about  the  sermon.  Their  prayers  are  simple, 
child-like  petitions,  and  their  faith  is  beautiful 
to  witness. 

The  Christian  girls  take  turns  in  conducting 
the  morning  devotions  in  the  school-room,  and 
even  the  little  ones  lead  in  prayer.  But  some 
extracts  from  letters  will  give  an  idea  of  what 
religion  is  to  them,  better  than  anything  I can 
say.  “ I pray  to  God  for  you  every  day,”  writes 
one  to  her  absent  teacher,  “and  our  heavenly 
Father  will  hear  the  prayer  of  your  dear  friend.” 
One,  whose  mother  was  sick,  writes : “ I could 
not  go  to  church  on  Sunday  for  a long  time. 
Every  day  I live  in  the  house  quietly,  and  it 
seems  as  if  I had  lost  my  dear  friends,  and  I 
seem  to  live  alone  among  the  heathen  people, 
but  it  is  not  so.  We  have  the  great  Friend, 
and  he  will  help  us  when  we  are  weak  and  lead 
us  when  we  wander.  He  loves  those  who  love 
him.  I am  very  happy  when  I think  that  I love 
him,  and  he  blesses  me  all  the  time.  My  hope 
is  in  Jesus  Christ.” 


1877] 


The  Regions  Beyond. 


375 


“ I heard  a strange  story,”  says  another.  “ It 
is  that  in  a city  of  Shiushiu  twenty-four  men  be- 
came believers  without  any  teaching.  Some 
one  got  a Chinese  Bible,  and  they  read  it  and 
thought  about  it,  and  they  discovered  that  there 
is  one  God,  who  made  heaven  and  earth,  and 
they  became  believers.  This  is  a proof  that 
God  has  blessed  my  country. 

“ I went  to  church  on  Sunday.  The  minister 
preached  about  faith,  and  it  was  very  interest- 
ing. Now  I am  thinking  about  faith  every  day. 
How  precious  and  how  important  faith  is  ! All 
things  which  are  done  on  the  earth  are  by  God’s 
will.  I must  try  to  break  any  chains  that  bind 
me.  I am  glad  that  you  have  a class  of  young 
men  on  Sundays.  I hope  at  last  they  will  be- 
come Christians  and  our  brethren.  I pray  for 
you  and  for  those  whom  you  teach  on  Sunday. 

“To-day  is  Friday,  and  it  is  very  pleasant 
weather,  but  a little  wind  blows.  To-day’s 
prayer-meeting  was  very  interesting,  and  O 
I-ne  san  led  ; and  she  talked  about  ‘ Love  your 
enemies.’  The  older  girls  talked  about  verses 
which  they  chose  themselves,  and  the  little  ones' 
recited.  Our  teacher  asked  us  to  bring,  each 
one,  one  girl  to  the  Sabbath-school.  Almost 
all  of  the  girls  have  led  one  or  two  girls  to  the 
Sunday-school.  Sometimes  I 'catch'  boys  and 
girls  on  the  way,  so  the  Sunday-school  is  very 


376 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


large.  All  of  the  girls  are  poor  and  dirty,  with 
babies  on  their  backs.  We  have  no  power  to 
lead  them,  but  God  can  show  us  how.  I am 
very  glad  to  see  them  come  to  the  Sunday- 
school.  Now  we  must  try  to  love  them.  Last 
Sunday,  Miss  Nui  and  Miss  I-ne  received  bap- 
tism. And  now  our  little  O I-ne  san  has  be- 
come a member  of  the  Church  of  Christ  in 
Japan,  and  we  all  rejoice. 

“ I must  try  to  be  hopeful  and  cheerful. 
Sometimes  the  way  which  we  are  traveling 
seems  dark  by  reason  of  weakness  in  heart 
or  disease  of  body,  but  Christ  is  our  Light  in 
the  way.  A Christian’s  life  is  not  always  peace- 
ful. God  has  not  promised  us  so.  Jesus  says, 
‘Take  up  my  cross  daily  and  follow  me.’  ” 

These  letters  are  written  in  English,  plainly 
and  intelligibly,  showing  proficiency  and  skill 
in  the  use  of  our  language. 

These  extracts  will  serve  to  show  something 
of  the  hearts  of  these  girls.  I believe  that,  with 
all  their  apparent  frivolity  and  running  after 
things  new  and  exciting,  the  Japanese  are  pa- 
tient and  endowed  with  great  powers  of  en- 
durance. May  we  not,  with  the  evidences  al- 
ready given,  look  forward  to  a bright  day  for 
Japan,  when  the  country  will  be  filled  with 
laborers  from  their  own  land  ? 

And  this  brings  forward  in  strong  light  the 


i877]  The  Regions  Beyond, 


377 


self-abnegation  of  the  foreign  missionary.  Our 
place  is  to  bide,  as  it  were,  behind  our  work,  to 
be  constantly  putting  the  fields  which  we  have 
ploughed  and  sowed  into  the  hands  of  others  to 
reap — to  make  no  name  or  fame  for  ourselves, 
but  to  seek  to  be  “ nothing.” 

“ One  soweth  and  another  reapeth,”  saith  the 
Lord.  And  to  what  end  ? “ That  both  he  that 

soweth  and  he  that  reapeth  may  rejoice  togeth- 
er.” Then  again  I beg  all  the  Church  of  God 
to  “ pray  therefore  the  Lord  of  the  harvest  that 
he  will  send  forth  laborers  into  his  harvest 
and  while  you  pray,  remember  from  whence 
those  laborers  must  come — principally  from  the 
people  themselves.  I repeat  it : on  native  work- 
ers depends,  under  God,  the  chief  and  abiding 
success  of  missionary-work. 

One  object  in  each  separate  field  should  be 
to  make  it  as  independent  as  possible  of  the 
foreign  missionary,  and  to  reduce  rather  than 
increase  the  expenses  of  the  Board  at  home. 
We  must  be  careful,  therefore,  how  we  give  our 
help.  If  self-denial  and  a sense  of  need  are  the 
life  of  the  Church  and  the  soul  of  prayer  with 
us,  so  it  is  with  the  heathen.  They  must  be 
trusted  to  depend  upon  their  own  resources,  to 
build  their  own  churches,  take  care  of  their  own 
schools  and  support  their  own  pastors.  And 
they  can  do  it.  Do  not  let  us  imagine  that  the 

32 


378 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


heathen  are  going  to  sit  still  to  be  converted. 
We  care  not  for  numbers,  except  as  interesting 
statistics  in  comparing  one  year  with  another, 
for  they  may  be  doubled,  trebled,  quadrupled, 
in  a year.  Give  the  gospel  to  one,  and  that 
one  may  be  the  instrument  of  leading  thousands 
to  Christ.  So  let  us  pray,  so  let  us  direct  our 
work,  that  all  missionary-lands  may  soon  be 
filled  with  laborers  from  among  their  own 
people. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  LORD  SHOWED  HIM  ALL  THE  LANDT 

“ So  they  went  up  to  the  mountains  to  behold  the  gardens  and 
orchards,  the  vineyards  and  fountains  of  water. 

“ The  pilgrims  therefore  went  up  to  them  (the  Shepherds),  and 
asked.  Whose  Delectable  Mountains  are  these? 

“ Shepherds. — These  mountains  are  Emmanuel’s  land,  and  they 
are  within  sight  of  his  city.” 

The  time  comes  when  the  laborer  in  the 
harvest-field  can  go  forth  to  work  no 
more : strength  fails.  Then  it  is  as  if  the 
angels  of  God  carried  the  weak  and  suffering 
one  up  to  an  exceeding  high  place — so  high 
that  we  can  look  down  over  all  the  land  upon 
the  sowers  and  reapers  that  are  yet  at  work ; 
so  high  that  we  can  almost  look  into  heaven 
and  stretch  out  our  hands  to  take  our  crown. 
I fear  that  we  down  in  the  harvest-fields,  busy 
with  our  own  work,  do  not  often  enough  take 
views  from  high  places.  If  we  did,  there  would 
be  less  danger  of  growing  narrow-minded  or 
selfish  in  our  work. 

It  is  very  important — indeed,  necessary  to 
our  success — that  we  attend  diligently  to  our 

379 


380  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1877 

own  portion  of  the  field,  but  in  digging  and 
ploughing,  in  planting  and  sowing,  and  in 
watching  the  ripening  grain,  we  sometimes 
keep  our  eyes  down  too  long,  forgetting  to 
climb  to  heights  from  which  we  can  look  over 
all  the  land.  We  can  go  up  at  times  of  mis- 
sionary-meetings and  conventions,  and  we  can 
ascend  smaller  hills  every  week  at  our  prayer- 
meetings,  when  we  speak  to  each  other  of  our 
work,  and  ask,  “ Is  it  thus  or  so  with  you  ?” 
Let  us  as  from  a mountain  take  a view  of 
Japan,  which  we  are  now  seeking  to  win  for 
Christ. 

The  empire  of  Japan  comprises  a group  of 
islands  lying  to  the  east  of  China,  Corea  and 
Siberia.  Of  these  islands  Niphon  (or  Hondo), 
Yeso,  Kiusiu  and  Shikoku  are  the  chief.  Be- 
sides these,  there  are  thousands  of.  smaller 
isles,  some  of  which  are  nameless,  or  merely 
numbered,  while  others,  such  as  Eno-Shima  and 
Miajima,  are  famous  throughout  the  whole 
land  for  the  rare  beauty  of  their  scenery.  The 
combined  area  of  the  islands  is  estimated  at 
one  hundred  and  fifty  thousand  square  miles, 
and  the  population  at  thirty-three  million.  The 
country  lies  mostly  between  thirty  and  forty 
degrees  north  latitude,  and  embraces  quite 
a variety  of  climate.  In  the  North  snow  covers 
the  ground  during  most  of  the  winter,  while  in 


i877]  ^'The  Lord  showed  him  the  LandL  381 

the  South  the  change  from  winter  to  spring  is 
scarcely  perceptible. 

The  origin  of  the  Japanese  nation  is  not 
certainly  known,  nor  is  it  necessary  to  discuss 
it  here.  There  seems  to  be  a general  impres- 
sion among  themselves  that  they  are  Mongo- 
lian ; in  which  they  are  no  doubt  correct,  but 
whether  purely  so,  without  admixture  of  other 
blood,  is  questionable.  They  are  not  an  in- 
ventive people : their  minds  are  rather  recep- 
tive and  imitative.  Whence  they  obtained 
their  ideas  originally  no  one  certainly  knows, 
but  they  have  gone  on  for  hundreds  of  years 
livinor  in  the  same  low  wooden  houses,  eating 
the  same  food,  using  the  same  implements  and 
utensils,  and  cutting  their  clothes  after  the 
same  fashion,  without  any  apparent  desire  for 
improvement.  But  when  foreigners,  after  much 
difficulty,  had  once  gained  access  to  the  people 
and  were  permitted  to  make  homes  for  them- 
selves in  some  of  the  ports,  the  whole  nation 
ran  eagerly  after  our  Western  science  and 
civilization ; and  so  rapid  have  been  the 
changes  that  all  the  world  has  looked  on 
with  amazement,  while  to  us  who  are  here  it 
seems  as  though  a century  of  change  had 
passed  over  the  land  in  but  a few  years  of 
time. 

I am  not  aware  that  any  great  change  has 


382  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

been  made  in  the  political  divisions  of  the 
country  or  in  the  general  policy  of  the  gov- 
ernment with  regard  to  its  own  internal  ap- 
plication, but  there  are  evidences  of  progress 
which  deserve  special  notice. 

The  agricultural  department  {Kai-ta-ku-shiu) 
has  done  much  to  improve  the  fertility  of  the 
soil,  and  the  introduction  of  foreign  seeds, 
bulbs  and  slips  has  proved  that  Japan  is  ca- 
pable of  bearing  fruits  and  vegetables  equal  to 
those  of  our  own  land.  Delicious  pears  have 
been  raised,  and  strawberries,  currants  and 
gooseberries  are  now  abundant  and  good  in 
Tokio  and  Yokohama,  while  tomatoes  and 
other  once-foreign  vegetables  are  raised  in 
perfection.  Some  of  the  chief  experiments 
of  the  Kai-ta-ku-shiu  have  been  in  the  island 
of  Yeso,  which  lies  to  the  north,  and  a great 
deal  has  been  done  toward  reclaiming  its  bar- 
ren soil,  as  well  as  that  of  other  islands. 

The  Japanese  government  has  met  in  a time- 
ly manner,  and  solved,  what  is  so  puzzling  a 
problem  just  now  in  some  other  lands — “What 
shall  be  done  with  the  tramps  — by  sending  the 
beggars  of  the  empire  to  the  island  of  Yeso, 
where  all  who  are  able-bodied  are  compelled 
to  aid  in  the  agricultural  labors  of  that  country. 
The  result  is  that  you  may  travel  the  empire 
over  and  not  meet  with  a regular  beggar  or 


i877]  ^^The  Lord  showed  him  the  Land!'  383 

tramp — a marked  contrast  to  what  existed  when 
we  first  came  here.  Beggary  was  then  a pro- 
fession. 

There  is  some  talk  of  new  grasses  being  in- 
troduced in  order  that  proper  pasturage  may 
be  afforded  for  sheep  and  cattle.  The  exceed- 
ing coarseness  and  roughness  of  the  native 
grass  have  precluded  the  possibility  of  raising 
these  animals  in  any  number,  and  the  strange 
anomaly  presents  itself  to  a foreigner  traveling 
through  that  otherwise  beautiful  country,  that 
neither  sheep,  cow,  goat,  nor  even  pig,  can  be 
seen  in  all  the  land.  Now,  however,  we  may 
perhaps  have  our  old  desire  realized  in  seeing 
sheep  feeding  upon  the  hillsides  and  cattle 
grazing  in  the  valleys. 

The  railroads  of  Japan  are  two ; or,  more 
properly,  there  is  but  one  railroad,  finished  at 
each  end.  So  far  as  now  completed,  this  line 
connects  the  eastern  seaport  of  Yokohama 
with  Tokio,  and  the  south-western  port  of  Ko- 
be with  Osaca  and  Kiyoto.  It  is  expected — at 
least,  hoped — that  the  railroad  will  be  com- 
pleted down  the  whole  length  of  the  To-kai-do, 
thus  connecting  the  two  capitals  and  the  two 
great  seaports  of  the  island  of  Niphon.  The 
railroad  “ stations  ” — as  called  by  the  foreigners 
and  Japanese  here — or  depots  are  fine  foreign 
buildings,  and  the  greatest  care  is  taken  to  pre- 


3^4 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

vent  accidents,  people  not  being  allowed  to 
cross  the  tracks  when  a train  is  anywhere  in 
sight. 

The  telegraph  is  in  operation  all  through  the 
empire. 

The  school-system  of  Japan  has  undergone 
a complete  change  in  late  years.*  Besides 
the  Kai-sei  gakko,  or  imperial  college,  at  Tokio, 
and  the  academies  connected  with  the  govern- 
mental departments  of  engineering,  mining,  ag- 
riculture, army,  navy,  etc.,  there  are  at  certain 
points  in  the  empire  what  are  called  Eigo 
gakkos,  where  English  is  taught  and  foreign- 
ers employed.  There  is  a lack  of  system  and 
a crowding  of  studies  in  these  schools  which  we 
regret,  but  hope  that  in  time  these  errors  will 
be  rectified.  There  are  normal  schools  through 
the  country,  where  scholars  are  taught  as  in  the 
one  at  Tokio.  The  system  has  been  given  them 
by  an  American,  and  they  have  graded  Readers, 
object- cards  and  maps  prepared  expressly  for 
them.  Teachers  from  all  parts  of  the  country 
come  to  Tokio  and  study  the  system  there. 
Other  open  ports  have  become  centres  of 
learning,  and  thus  the  children  throughout  all 

* There  is  now  (1878)  a regular  bureau  of  education  connected  with 
the  government,  and  great  pains  have  been  taken,  by  special  embassy 
and  other  means,  to  investigate  the  methods  and  appliances  of  other 
countries,  with  a view  of  incorporating  what  is  in  their  opinion  good 
in  them  into  their  own  national  system. 


1877]  ''The  Lord  showed  him  the  LandL  385 

the  empire  are  being  taught  much  more  thor- 
oughly and  wisely  than  were  their  fathers  and 
' mothers. 

The  school-buildings  are  mostly  of  a partly 
foreign  style.  We  were  surprised  by  their 
number  and  neat  appearance  as  we  traveled 
through  the  country.  Many  Japanese  young 
men  are  studying  medicine  with  foreign  physi- 
cians; at  U-ye-no  is  a fine  hospital.  For  educa- 
tional purposes  in  science,  law  and  medicine,  as 
well  as  for  the  general  benefit  of  travel,  Japan- 
ese students  are  frequently  sent  to  America  and 
Europe. 

The  expediency  of  beginning  a school  ex- 
pressly for  the  education  of  the  blind  is  being 
discussed.  It  is  greatly  needed. 

The  normal  school  for  girls  in  Tokio  was 
opened  in  the  fall  of  1875.  The  empress  her- 
self was  present.  The  first  girls’  school,  opened 
in  1872  in  connection  with  the  Kai-sei  gakko,  is 
still  in  existence.  Five  girls  were  sent  to  Amer- 
ica in  1872. 

Books  of  all  nations,  on  all  subjects,  are  be- 
ing translated.  We  hope  some  one  will  be 
raised  up  in  Japan  who  will  reduce  the  lan- 
guage to  a system,  discarding  in  large  measure 
the  Chinese,  but  this  work  does  not  yet  seem 
to  have  received  much  attention. 

Newspapers  are  being  circulated  very  gen- 
33  z 


386  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1877 

erally,  some  in  easy  colloquial,  as  the  Ichi  nichi 
shimbu,  or  “ Daily  Gazette^  in  Tokio. 

Prison  reform  has  occupied  the  attention  of 
the  government  to  a considerable  degree.  In 
some  places,  even,  the  missionaries  have  been 
allowed  to  go  into  the  prisons.  Whipping  has 
been  prohibited.  The  heads  of  criminals  are 
no  longer  exposed  on  the  highways,  nor  are 
barbarous  modes  of  punishment  resorted  to 
— at  least,  so  far  as  we  have  opportunity  of 
knowing. 

The  currency  has  been  changed.  Now  we 
have  the  yen  (dollar)  and  the  sen  (cent),  and  so 
fifty  sen,  twenty  sen  and  ten  sen,  the  decimal 
currency  having  been  generally  adopted. 

Japan  has  a regular  standing  army.  The 
vessels  of  war  are  but  few  and  the  naval  force 
is  as  yet  insignificant.  Both  military  and  naval 
schools  have  been  established,  and  are  carried  on 
with  thoroughness.  Foreign  officers  have  been 
at  the  head  of  these,  but  are  now  being  gradu3,l- 
ly  displaced  as  native  ability  comes  to  the  front. 

In  looking  upon  the  people,  it  is  interesting 
to  observe  how  far  these  foreign  innovations 
have  affected  them  individually  or  as  families 
in  regard  to  language,  houses,  food  and  dress. 
In  many  parts  of  the  empire,  and  among  many 
of  the  people,  we  notice  no  apparent  change  as 
yet,  but  here  and  there,  especially  in  the  open 


i877]  ^"The  Lord  showed  him  the  LandL  387 

ports  and  at  the  seat  of  government  itself,  we 
discover  considerable  difference.  As  new  ob- 
jects have  been  brought  before  them  and  new 
ideas  introduced,  they  have  required  new  words, 
and  have  generally  drawn  upon  the  Chinese  lan- 
guage for  them. 

Many  of  the  Japanese  are  now  building  houses 
partly  in  foreign  style,  although  they  usually  pre- 
fer to  live  in  the  Japanese  part  of  the  establish- 
ment. We  may  see  in  almost  every  house  in 
Tokio  something  foreign,  tables,  chairs  or 
pieces  of  drugget,  which  they  find  more  com- 
fortable in  winter  than  their  own  mats.  The 
natives  are  beginning  to  use  meat  and  milk 
to  some  extent,  quickly  recognizing  their  nour- 
ishing qualities. 

Many  of  the  men  appear  in  foreign  dress, 
but  there  is  little  change  in  women’s  apparel. 
Some  of  the  costumes  of  the  men,  half  native 
and  half  foreign,  look  very  curious,  and  it  is 
odd  to  see  some  with  bath-towels  around  their 
necks  as  comforters,  and  coolies  wrapped  up  in 
bed-spreads.  But  such  incongruities  are  disap- 
pearing. One  great  advance  in  civilization  is 
that  the  coolies  are  obliged  to  wear  clothes, 
and  no  longer  appear  in  an  almost  nude  state 
— at  least,  this  is  the  case  in  or  near  the  great 
cities.  They  have,  or  pretend  to  have,  in  their 
bath-houses  separate  apartments  for  men  and 


388 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom, 


[1877 


women,  and  the  people  now  usually  dress 
before  they  go  out  on  the  streets. 

The  old  Yoshiwarra  system — the  jo-ro-reis 
— has  been  virtually  abolished.  These  wom- 
en are  not  supported  or  countenanced  by 
the  government,  as  formerly,  though  in  some 
parts  of  the  country  too  much  indulgence  is 
still  shown. 

We  think  that,  amid  all  fluctuations,  changes 
and  mistakes,  progress  in  Japan  is  marked  and 
sure.  As  missionaries,  we  do  not  care  to 
Americanize  or  Anglicize  the  people,  unless 
as  a natural  development.  Indeed,  we  are 
very  careful  in  our  girls’  school  to  have,  so 
far  as  practicable,  everything  in  native  style, 
that  we  may  not  educate  them  away  from  their 
own  people. 

I shall  never  forget  how  I was.  struck,  one 
day,  picking  up  a Chinese  copy  of  the  Pilgrim's 
Progress,  to  see  in  the  cuts  Christian  as  a China- 
man with  a long  cue.  I think  I always  had.  an 
idea  before  that  Christian  was  an  Englishman. 
Happy  for  the  world  is  it  that  “ Christian,” 
either  as  a Japanese  or  Chinese  or  Hindoo, 
or  as  a citizen  of  any  country,  without  chang- 
ing his  clothes,  food  or  distinctive  habits  of 
life,  may  journey  on  the  heavenly  way,  and 
at  last  find  entrance  through  the  gates  into 
the  city. 


i877]  '^The  Loi'd  showed  him  the  Land!'  389 

The  seven  open  ports  of  Japan — Yokohama, 
Tokio,  Ko-be,  Osaca,  Niigata,  Hakodadi  and 
Nagasaki — are  interesting  to  us  chiefly  as  mis- 
sionary centres,  and  as  such  we  will  briefly  view 
them. 

Yokohama. — This  city  is  still  the  great  sea- 
port of  Japan,  and  has  the  largest  foreign  pop- 
ulation, which  last  fact  is,  alas ! in  nowise  of 
any  advantage  to  the  missionaries.  For  here, 
as  in  all  other  missionary-lands,  we  must  admit 
that  the  hardest  thing  we  have  to  contend  with  is 
the  ungodly  conduct  of  our  own  countrymen,  and 
of  those  who  come  as  the  representatives  of  other 
nominally  Christian  nations.  The  Japanese  un- 
derstand no  distinctions  at  first.  They  call  us 
all  Christians ; and  the  lawlessness,  reckless- 
ness, intemperance  and  licentiousness  of  Amer- 
ican and  British  seamen,  as  well  as  those  of 
other  countries,  bring  continual  reproach  upon 
the  cause  of  Christ  in  this  land.  And  many 
other  foreigners,  by  their  disregard  of  the 
Sabbath  and  shameful  conduct  in  many  re- 
spects, prove  sad  hindrances  to  our  work. 
What  an  impetus  might  be  given  to  the  work 
if  only  the  representatives  of  the  two  great 
Christian  nations  who  speak  the  same  language 
would  by  their  lives  and  by  their  expressed 
sympathy  aid  the  missionaries  in  their  work ! 

But  we  have  found  among  the  foreigners 
33  * 


390  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1877 

outside  of  our  missionary  circles  many  warm 
and  sympathizing  friends  whose  whole  course 
has  been  most  kind  and  helpful,  and  some  who 
have  proved  themselves  true  lovers  of  God 
and  earnest  promoters  of  Christ’s  work  in 
this  land. 

Mission- Boards. — The  mission-boards  repre- 
sented in  Yokohama  are  the  Reformed  (Dutchb 
the  American  Presbyterian,  which  occupied  the 
field  about  the  same  time  as  the  Reformed,  the 
Baptist,  the  Methodist,  and  the  Woman’s  Union 
Missionary  Society. 

The  Reformed  Board  has  six  missionaries  in 
Yokohama.  The  first  native  church  was  organ- 
ized under  the  name  of  the  Union  church,  the 
converts  being  those  who  had  been  under  the 
instruction  of  both  the  Reformed  and  the  Pres- 
byterian missionaries.  There  is  a large  girls’ 
school  under  the  care  of  this  Board. 

The  American  Presbyterian  mission  is  the 
only  one  which  has  its  buildings  in  the  settle- 
ment, the  buildings  of  the  other  missions  being 
on  the  bluff.  On  the  compound  are  two  mis- 
sion-houses, a dispensary,  which  is  used  also  as 
a chapel,  a school  for  boys,  and  a Sabbath-school 
room,  besides  a building  used  for  a girls’  day- 
school. 

Of  the  medical  work  done  in  connection  with 
this  mission  too  much  cannot  be  said.  It  is  only 


1 877]  ''The  Lo7'd  showed  him  the  Land!'  391 

necessary  here,  however,  to  mention  the  name 
of  the  noble  veteran  in  that  department.  Dr.  J. 
C.  Hepburn,  whose  labors  have  been  so  unre- 
mitting and  crowned  with  such  wondrous  suc- 
cess. His  name  and  his  work  are  known  in  all 
the  churches.  The  Dictionary,  which  has  been 
of  so  much  use  to  all  foreigners,  is  the  work  of 
this  same  member  of  the  Presbyterian  mission. 

Besides  the  meetings  in  the  dispensary,  ser- 
vices are  held  in  a house  in  the  native  city  on 
Sabbath  evenings.  The  number  of  mission- 
aries belonging  to  the  Presbyterian  Board  is 
seven. 

The  Baptist  and  Methodist  missions  are  at 
this  date  comparatively  new.  The  missionaries 
are  learning  the  language  and  teaching. 

The  “American  Home  for  Girls,”  under  the 
auspices  of  the  Woman’s  Union  Missionary 
Society,  is  a centre,  of  light  and  influence 
known  and  felt  through  all  the  country  round 
about  Yokohama  and  Tokio.  Besides  the 
Japanese,  Eurasian  and  destitute  children  of 
all  nations  there  find  a home  and  receive 
loving  care.  A newspaper  in  Japanese  for 
children  is  published  by  this  society. 

The  work  which  is  carried  on  among  foreign- 
ers in  the  hospitals  and  on  ship-board,  and  the 
temperance  movement,  deserve  special  men- 
tion and  consideration. 


392 


The  Smu'ise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


But  the  great  work  conducted  at  present  in 
Yokohama  is  the  translation  of  the  Scriptures 
as  a whole.  This  is  done  by  the  labor  and 
under  the  supervision  of  a committee  chosen 
from  all  the  Boards.  They  have  nearly  com- 
pleted the  New  Testament,  and  will  soon  begin 
on  the  Old. 

I cannot  turn  away  my  eyes  from  Yokoha- 
ma without  taking  one  glance  at  the  cemetery 
where  our  missionary  dead  are  sleeping.  The 
first  who  was  laid  there  was  the  little  daughter 
of  a Baptist  missionary,  and  for  a long  time 
she  slept  alone.  Then,  by  a strange,  sudden 
calamity — the  bursting  of  the  boiler  of  a little 
steamer  in  which  they  were  traveling — two 
members  of  our  own  mission,  with  their  little 
“Eddie  boy,”  were  taken  from  us,  leaving  us 
dumb  with  amazement  and  sorrow.  Only  a 
few  days  before,  we  had  had  our  last  excursion 
together,  going  in  a house-boat  up  the  river 
Sumida.  As  we  stopped  and  moored  the  boat 
for  a time  near  Adzuma  Bashi,  the  natives 
gathered  around,  and  Eddie’s  papa  lifted  him 
to  the  top  of  the  boat  and  said  that  he  should 
be  a missionary.  We  saw  them  late  Saturday 
evening,  bade  them  “ Good-night their  car- 
riage turned  the  corner,  and  they  were  gone 
from  our  sight  until  in* the  better  country  we 
shall  bid  them  “ Good-morning.”  The  little 


i877]  '^The  Lord  showed  him  the  LandL  393 

infant  of  three  months,  the  only  surviving 
member  of  the  family,  was  soon  after  taken 
to  America,  where  he  now  is  with  his  grand- 
parents. 

A little  missionary  baby  who  never  saw  the 
light  was  next  laid  near  them,  and  a mission- 
ary brother  from  China  found  his  resting-place 
under  the  same  trees  which  overshadow  their 
graves.  Then  one  of  the  brightest  of  our 
mission-band  in  Tokio,  of  the  Scotch  Pres- 
byterian Mission — one  who  had  labored  with  us 
scarcely  one  year — went  home  after  only  a few 
days  of  illness.  Her  last  message  to  the  Jap- 
anese was,  “ Tell  all  these  people  that  I did 
want  to  teach  them  about  their  Saviour.” 
Her  baby-daughter  followed  her  in  two  short 
weeks,  and  was  buried  in  the  same  grave. 
Then  a beautiful  little  daughter  of  friends  in 
the  Methodist  mission  closed  her  eyes  to  this 
world,  and  she  too  was  laid  to  rest  in  the 
cemetery  at  Yokohama.  These  are  our  mis- 
sionary dead.  Pleasant  were  their  lives — 
sweet  is  their  memory. 

Many  foreigners  now  sleep  here,  a large 
number  of  whom  died  from  violence  or  found 
a watery  grave.  Kind  hands  have  placed  a 
monument  in  a prominent  spot  in  memory 
of  those  who  perished  in  the  Oneida,  an  Amer- 
ican war-vessel  that  collided  with  the  British 


394 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


vessel,  the  Bombay,  in  1870.  One  of  them, 
the  assistant-surgeon  of  the  Oneida,  young 
Frothingham,  had  greatly  endeared  himself  to 
the  foreign  missionaries  by  his  kind  sympathy 
and  timely  help.  He  was  a teacher  in  the 
Sabbath-school  while  the  vessel  lay  in  port. 

Tokio. — Tokio,  our  city  of  the  plain,  the  cen- 
tre of  political,  literary  and  scientific  life  in  Japan, 
is  also  one  of  its  finest  centres  for  missionary- 
work.  The  great  drawback  here  is  that  the 
Concession  is  small  and  all  the  missionaries  are 
obliged  to  live  on  it.  In  some  instances  mis- 
sionaries, by  taking  charge  of  schools  in  some 
way  nominally  under  Japanese  care,  have  been 
allowed  to  live  in  the  city ; but  the  government 
is  becoming  more  strict  rather  than  more  leni- 
ent  on  that  point,  and  it  is  feared  that  all  will 
be  driven  into  the  Concession. 

The  mission-boards  represented  in  Tokio  are 
the  American  Presbyterian,  the  Scotch  Presby- 
terian, the  Methodist,  the  Baptist,  the  Amer- 
ican Episcopal,  the  Church  of  England  and 
the  Society  for  the  Propagation  of  the  Gos- 
pel (English).  All  of  these  missions  have 
churches  or  preaching-places  and  schools  un- 
der their  care. 

In  connection  with  the  Scotch  Presbyterian 
mission  is  a large  dispensary.  The  American 
Presbyterian  has  one  large  school  for  girls. 


1877]  “ The  Lord  showed  him  the  LandL  395 

the  Methodist  one,  and  the  Scotch  Presbyte- 
rian one. 

A union  has  lately  been  formed  of  all  the 
churches  of  the  Presbyterian  family,  Scotch 
and  American  (including  the  Reformed),  in 
church-work  and  organization  among  the  na- 
tives. The  missionaries  of  these  Boards,  with 
their  native  helpers,  make  a large  and  effi- 
cient force. 

On  Sabbath-days  now  all  over  the  city  peo- 
ple can  be  seen  going  up  to  worship.  From 
one  place  and  another  comes  the  sound  of  an 
organ,  and  the  voices  of  native  Christians  as- 
cend to  God  in  prayer  and  praise.  The  Bible 
is  in  many  a home,  and,  better  still,  its  truths 
are  written  on  many  hearts. 

It  is  proper  to  state  that  the  Greek  Church 
has  a mission  and  a magnificent  building,  reck- 
oned among  the  finest  in  the  city.  A number 
of  Roman  Catholic  priests  are  here,  and  the 
Sisters  have  a school  for  orphans. 

Ko-be. — This  beautiful  little  seaport  lies  at  the 
entrance  to  the  inland  sea  in  the  south-eastern 
part  of  the  island  of  Niphon.  The  land  rises 
rapidly  from  the  bay,  swelling  into  high  hills 
back  of  the  city.  These  hills  make  Ko-be  the 
great  sanitarium  of  Japan.  The  foreign  settle- 
ment here  is  quite  large,  and  some  of  the  build- 
ings are  very  fine.  The  city  is  connected  by  a 


39 6 The  Sunrise  Kmgdom.  [1877 

railroad  with  Osaca  and  Kiyoto,  the  distance  be- 
ing forty  miles. 

The  principal  attraction  of  Ko-be  is  the  water- 
fall. There  are  two  falls,  the  upper  and  the 
lower.  The  Japanese  think  their  O Taki  a 
wonderful  thing. 

The  mission-work  in  Ko-be  is  carried  on  al- 
most entirely  under  the  auspices  of  the  Amer- 
ican Board  of  Commissioners  for  Foreign  Mis- 
sions. The  missionaries  and  native  helpers 
move  down  toward  the  southern  part  of  the 
island  and  to  Shikoku.  The  girls’  school  in 
this  mission  is  large  and  flourishing;  pupils 
come  from  all  the  country  round  about.  Many 
of  them  are  members  of  the  native  church.  A 
newspaper  is  published  by  one  of  the  members 
of  this  mission.  In  regard  to  the  work  among 
the  women,  which  is  very  encouraging  in  Ko-be, 
one  of  the  missionaries  writes : “ Two  of  the 
women  have  been  down  twice  lately  to  Akashi 
to  stay  a few  days,  with  apparently  much  suc- 
cess from  their  work.  One  woman  from  there 
was  up  here  to-da3^  and  said  she  did  not  really 
understand  much  about  Christianity  until  those 
women  came.  ‘Now,’  she  says,  ‘a  few  of  us 
women  down  there  have  been  thinking  that, 
since  women  have  so  much  more  patience  than 
men,  we  must  get  together  between  the  Sab- 
baths, and  if  we  can’t  get  anybody  to  teach  us 


1 8; 7]  ''The  Lord  showed  him  the  LandL  397 

we  must  study  together  and  try  to  get  ready 
to  teach  these  blessed  truths.’  ” 

Osaca. — This  city,  like  Tokio,  is  on  a plain, 
but  there  is  no  bay,  and  the  summer  heat  is  op- 
pressive. It  is  a city  of  bridges,  some  of  which 
are  really  wonderful  in  their  construction.  The 
mint,  where  the  new  money  is  coined,  is  in  this 
city.  The  railroad-station  and  the  city-hall  are 
fine  buildings. 

The  castle,  with  its  magnificent  masonry,  is 
the  principal  object  of  attraction  in  Osaca. 
When  we  visited  it,  two  years  ago,  we  were 
escorted  through  by  a soldier,  and  looked  with 
wonder  at  the  huge  stones  and  high  battlements 
from  which  we  gazed  upon  the  city.  On  the 
Concession  are  many  fine  buildings,  and  a river 
passing  through  it  makes  it  pleasant. 

The  mission-boards  represented  here  are  the 
American  Board,  the  English  Church  and  the 
American  Episcopal.  The  mission-work  for  a 
time  was  very  slow,  but  considerable  impetus 
has  been  given  to  it  lately.  There  is  a girls’ 
school  in  connection  with  the  Episcopal  mis- 
sion, and  one  under  the  American  Board. 
This  latter  is  not  a boarding-school,  the  la- 
dies preferring  to  devote  most  of  their  ener- 
gies to  outside  work  among  the  women. 

Kiyoto. — This  is  not  an  “ open  ” city,  but  mis- 
sionaries are  allowed  to  live  here.  Sometimes 


39B 


The  Sunrise  Kingdom. 


[1877 


a little  apprehension  is  felt  concerning  the  per- 
manence of  the  mission,  which  belongs  to  the 
American  Board,  but  as  yet  nothing  has  oc- 
curred to  interrupt  the  labors  of  those  engaged 
in  the  work.  It  is  a very  interesting  station, 
being  in  former  times  the  very  centre  of  pa- 
ganism. 

It  is  a gay  city,  too,  as  we  who  have  seen  the 
people  going  up  to  the  theatres  and  watched 
the  gay  crowd  at  their  Susume  can  testify. 
Never  shall  we  forget  the  brilliant  scene  which 
we  witnessed  there  one  night.  Little  platforms 
were  built  right  over  the  shallow  but  rapid  river 
which  passes  through  the  city.  The  platforms 
were  lighted  by  lamps  and  torches,  and  on  them 
people  were  gathered  for  entertainment.  Eat- 
ing, drinking,  dancing  with  hands  instead  of  feet, 
and  singing  were  the  principal  amusements.  It 
was  an  exceedingly  gay,  animated  scene,  and  we 
enjoyed  looking  upon  it  from  the  bridge  so  much 
that  we  joined  the  crowd  and  sat  down  on  one 
of  the  platforms  to  eat  watermelon  and  drink 
tea. 

One  of  the  first  at  Kiyoto  who  became  inter- 
ested in  the  truth  was  a woman,  now  the  wife 
of  Nesima,  a native  Christian  educated  in 
America.  We  noticed  her  on  a boat  going 
from  Kiyoto  to  Osaca.  She  had  an  English 
Bible  in  her  hands,  and  was  going  to  Osaca  to 


i877]  ''The  Lord  showed  him  the  Land!'  399 

study  with  one  of  the  missionaries.  She  is  a 
woman  of  great  strength  of  character.  The 
missionaries  are  about  to  put  up  a building 
for  a girls’  school.  So  this  great  centre  has 
the  gospel  given  to  it  also. 

Niigata. — This  city  lies  on  the  Sea  of  Japan, 
to  the  north-west  of  Tokio.  Foreigners  are  al- 
lowed to  live  in  any  part  of  it,  but  it  is  not  yet 
occupied  very  strongly  by  any  mission-board, 
although  the  Scotch  and  American  Episcopal 
Boards  have  stations  there,  and  we  have  good 
accounts  of  the  progress  of  the  work.  The 
journey  is  made  overland  from  Tokio.  Many 
Bibles  have  been  sent  to  the  missionaries  there. 

Hakodadi. — This  city  is  on  the  island  of 
Yeso,  which  lies  to  the  north  of  Niphon.  It 
is  a cold,  rather  barren,  country,  but  lately,  has 
been  much  improved  by  the  efforts  of  the  Ka-ta- 
ku-shiu.  Steamers  run  between  Hakodadi  and 
Yokohama.  On  the  island  is  a volcano. 

The  people  are  somewhat  rough,  being  main- 
ly uncivilized  Ainos,  who  are  considered  the 
aborigines  of  the  country,  and  convicts  and 
tramps  from  the  other  islands.  Some  of  the 
Ainos  have  been  in  Tokio,  and  attempts  are 
being  made  to  civilize  them. 

In  connection  with  the  Ka-ta-ku-shiu,  there 
has  been  in  Shi-ba  a girls’  school  for  the  chil- 
dren of  the  Ainos,  which  it  was  proposed  to 


400  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1877 

remove  to  Yeso.  Whether  this  plan  has  been 
carried  out  or  not  I cannot  say ; but  we  hope 
that  before  long  there  will  be  schools  for  girls 
in  Yeso. 

Two  mission-boards  have  stations  in  Hako- 
dadi — the  Methodist  and  American  Episcopal. 
Accounts  of  work  are  interesting,  and  the 
following  extract  from  a letter  will  tell  of  a 
work  done  outside  of  the  missions : “We  have 
heard  of  Dr.  Clarke’s  work  in  Sapporo,  Yeso. 
He  has  just  gone  home,  after  a year  spent  in 
getting  the  agricultural  college  started.  He 
was  president  of  the  agricultural  department 
in  Amherst  College,  Massachusetts ; was  told 
when  he  came,  by  the  Christian  teachers  in  the 
Kai-sei  gakko  that  he  must  not  expect  to  teach 
Christianity  in  connection  with  his  work : it 
would  not  be  allowed.  But  he  took  some 
Bibles  with  him,  and  on  his  way  up,  being  ac- 
companied by  Gen.  Kuroda,  in  command  of 
that  department,  he  inquired  if  he  might  teach 
the  Bible.  The  general  said  ‘No’ — not  that 
he  supposed  it  was  a bad  book,  but  the  govern- 
ment did  not  tolerate  Christianity  yet,  and  he 
could  not  allow  the  Bible  to  be  used  in  the 
school. 

“Shortly  afterward,  on  Gen.  Kuroda’s  re- 
marking that  Dr.  Clarke  was  to  teach  morality, 
the  doctor  replied,  ‘ I cannot ; you  have  forbid- 


i877]  ^'‘The  Lord  showed  him  the  Land!'  401 

den  me  the  only  text-book  I know.’  The  mat- 
ter was  dropped  there,  but  again  and  again  it 
came  up,  until  Kuroda  said,  T do  not  know 
as  much  about  text* books  as  you  do;  you 
must  select  your  own.  Only  teach  morality.’ 

“ So  the  Bibles  were  put  into  the  hands  of 
the  sixteen  young  men — picked  men  from  the 
Kai-sei  gakko — and  without  comment  they  were 
required  to  commit  to  memory  portions  select- 
ed from  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  until 
finally  they  began  to  ask  questions  which  Dr. 
Clarke  was  glad  to  answer,  and  a Bible  class 
was  speedily  formed.  The  result,  so  far  as 
appears  now.  Dr.  Clarke  thinks,  is  that  the 
sixteen  young  men  are  all  Christians ; and 
even  if  the  Bibles  are  taken  away,  they  have 
the  word  hidden  in  their  hearts.” 

Nagasaki. — No  one  who  has  seen  it  will  ever 
forget  the  beautiful  entrance  to  the  land- 
locked harbor  of  Nagasaki,  in  the  island  of 
Kiusiu.  High  islands  rise  out  of  the  sea, 
conspicuous  among  which  is  Shimabara,  the 
rock  from  which  the  Christians  were  thrown 
in  the  old  days  of  persecution.  Nagasaki  is 
all  shut  in  by  hills.  We  felt  as  though  we 
were  treading  on  historic  ground  as  we  wan- 
dered through  Desima^  where  the  Dutch  were 
confined  so  long  and  suffered  such  indignities 
for  the  sake  of  trade,  being  the  only  nation 
34  2 A 


402  The  Sunrise  Kingdom,  [1877 

which  would  submit  to  Japanese  terms.  Here 
is  the  new  Methodist  chapel.  The  Methodist 
and  the  Reformed  are  the  only  churches  which 
have  stations  in  Nagasaki.  The  houses  of  the 
missionaries,  on  the  hills,  are  very  beautiful, 
but  the  climate  is  much  warmer  than  in  Tokio. 
The  work  progresses  more  slowly  there,  as  the 
people  seem  more  prejudiced. 

These  are  at  present  the  great  mission-cen- 
tres of  Japan.  From  them  go  forth  the  labor- 
ers, both  foreign  and  native,  to  all  parts  of  the 
land.  Around  them,  in  the  little  villages  and 
larger  towns,  are  native  churches  and  preach- 
ing-stations, and  new  ones  are  constantly  be- 
ing formed. 

The  missionaries  have  been  on  the  Ha-ko-ne 
Mountains,  and  the  children  there'  sing  “Jesus 
loves  me.”  They  visit  Nikko’s  beautiful  tem- 
ples and  teach  the  word  and  leave  Bibles  and 
tracts.  And  in  the  summer  vacation,  when  they 
leave  their  homes  and  go  out  into  the  country  or 
by  the  seashore,  they  gather  in  the  children,  and 
through  them  interest  the  parents. 

Is  not  the  view  from  over  the  mountain-top 
full  of  hope  and  cheer?  What  seemed,  down 
below,  like  broken  plans,  frustrated  purposes, 
shattered  hopes  and  grievous  disappointments, 
up  here  are  seen  to  be  only  parts  of  God’s  plan 
in  scattering  the  truth  over  all  the  land. 


CHAPTER  V. 

SAI-O-NA-RA. 

**  Let  the  fiery,  cloudy  pillar 
Lead  me  all  the  journey  through.” 

‘‘Whether  it  was  by  day  or  by  night  that  the  cloud  was  taken  up, 
they  journeyed.  Or  whether  it  were  two  days  or  a month  or  a year 
that  the  cloud  tarried  upon  the  tabernacle,  remaining  thereon,  the 
children  of  Israel  abode  in  their  tents  and  journeyed  not;  but  when 
it  was  taken  up  they  journeyed.” 

UNCERTAINTY  and  change  are  amongst 
the  most  trying  things  of  missionary-life. 
We  must  hold  ourselves  ready  for  constant 
meetings  and  partings,  for  continual  comings 
and  goings.  We  in  Japan  live  right  on  the 
very  highway  of  travel  to  the  Orient.  One  of 
the  privileged  duties  of  our  life  is  the  entertain- 
ment of  missionaries  going  to  ahd  from  their 
stations.  Right  glad  are  we  to  welcome  them 
when  they  come  or  sympathize  with  them  as 
they  go,  for  leaving  the  work  is  the  hardest 
trial  of  the  missionary.  Some  we  only  see 
once ; we  bid  them  “ Godspeed,”  and  they  go 
on  their  way ; but  our  lives  are  enriched  by 
them  all. 


403 


404  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

Then  the  time  comes  when  for  us  too  the 
fiery,  cloudy  pillar  is  lifted  and  we  must  “arise” 
and  go  elsewhere.  I wonder  how  it  was  in  the 
Hebrew  camp  during  that  wonderful  journey 
through  the  wilderness  into  Canaan  ? When 
the  cloud  rested  for  “ one  year,”  did  they  forget 
that  they  were  only  travelers,  and  did  they  try 
to  make  a home  for  themselves  in  the  wilder- 
ness? Were  their  tent-pins  ever  driven  so 
deeply  in  the  sand  that  they  had  trouble  in 
taking  them  out  ? or  were  they  always  ready  to 
strike  their  tents  and  march  away  ? When  the 
cloud  was  lifted  at  night,  was  there  much  hurry 
or  confusion  in  the  camp  ? Did  the  people 
complain  when  they  left  Elim’s  fountains  and 
palms,  and  were  their  mouths  filled  with  mur- 
murings  when  they  encamped  by  Marah’s  bitter 
waters — when  they  knew  that  at  any  moment 
the  cloud  might  be  lifted  and  they  permitted  to 
journey  on?  “Dear  Lord,  thou  knowest  how 
hard  it  is  to  leave  the  warmth  and  shelter  of 
the  tent  to  journey  forth  into  the  desert.” 

How  like  is  our  journey  to  that  of  the  chil- 
dren of  Israel  through  the  desert ! Clearly  as 
Hebrew  women  saw  while  in  their  tent  or  on 
their  march  the  mysterious  pillar,  now  resting, 
now  going  before  the  mighty  host,  so  can  the 
child  of  God  whose  eyes  are  fixed  upon  the 
pillar  of  his  providences  fully  know  when  to 


1877] 


Sai-o-na-ra. 


405 


journey  on  and  when  to  tarry.  Yet  how  much 
better  off  are  we  than  they ! True,  the  same 
One  was  with  them  who  is  with  us,  but  they 
knew  him  only  afar  off  and  as  the  “ Angel  ” 
— the  “ Angel  of  the  covenant  ” — while  to  us 
he  is  Jesus,  the  crucified,  risen  Saviour,  Em- 
manuel, Christ  the  Lord. 

I have  had  a long  talk  with  Takejiro.  He  is 
under  Christian  influence,  and  is  thinking  seri- 
ously of  becoming  a Christian  himself.  The 
woman  Hayashi  and  her  two  little  boys  are  in 
a northern  province  with  the  husband  and 
father.  She  sent  her  farewell  by  a letter,  with 
a picture  of  herself.  She  has  been  ever  a 
comfort  and  a help  to  us  since  she  joined 
us.  Before  her  husband  returned  to  Tokio  last 
summer  she  was  troubled  a little,  and  begged 
that  we  would  pray  that  he  might  not  be  angry 
with  her  for  uniting  with  the  church.  This  sim- 
ple request  was  gladly  complied  with,  and  she 
came  to  Sabbath-school,  smiling  and  happy,  to 
tell  us  that  he  was  not  angry,  but  was  coming 
to  church  himself  in  the  afternoon.  She  whis- 
pered in  my  ear  as  she  was  leaving  the  room, 
“ I wish  to  work  for  God.” 

Deguchi  san  and  Mitsuye  san  have  been  my 
companions  in  a distant  province  of  the  South. 
The  latter  has  been  a devoted  nurse  through  a 
long  illness.  These  people  are  most  faithful 


4o6  The  Sunrise  Kingdom.  [1877 

to-  those  they  love.  The  little  O Nui  san, 
who  wrote  to  tell  of  her  baptism,  is  the  sis- 
ter of  O Shi-ge  san.  The  father  had  known 
of  his  eldest  daughter’s  baptism  for  a long 
while,  and  though  not  manifesting  anger  refused 
permission  to  O Nui  san  at  first.  But  they  all 
prayed  (and  prayer  is  a real  thing  to  them),  so 
that  at  last  O Nui  san’s  request  for  baptism 
was  granted,  and  she  and  O I-ne  san  were 
baptized  the  same  day.  The  latter’s  Chris- 
tian character  is  developing  beautifully,  says 
her  teacher.  Does  any  one  remember  the 
tiny  child  of  six  years  whom  we  first  saw 
asleep  upon  her  pallet  in  the  little  house 
near  Gizo  bridge  ? The  “ young  rice  ” has 
been  carefully  watched  and  tended. 

A very  large  proportion  of  the  girls  who 
have  been  members  of  the  school  from  its 
beginning  are  either  professors  of  religion  or 
still  under  Christian  ’influence ; and  we  leave 
them  all  working — all  the  native  Christians 
in  every  school  and  every  church  that  we 
have  known.  And  still  the  number  increases, 
so  that  we  can  scarcely  tell  accurately  the  num- 
ber of  native  Christians,  churches  or  schools. 

O Ka  san  came  to  say  “ Good-bye.”  She 
had  in  her  hand  a beautiful  piece  of  crape, 
her  parting  gift  to  O I-ne  san’s  teacher.  “You 
are  s^oino-  home,”  she  said,  and  then  sobs 

00' 


1877] 


Sai-o-na-ra. 


407 


choked  her  utterance.  How  I wish  that  I 
could  go  away  knowing  that  her  feet  too 
were  walking  in  the  way  to  the  better  coun- 
try ! But  we  shall  still  hope  and  pray  that 
the  mother  may  be  led  by  her  daughter  to 
Christ. 

The  girls  came  from  Tokio  to  Yokohama  to 
say  “ Good-bye  ” before  the  ship  sailed.  The 
parting  was  sad,  for  we  knew  not  for  how  long 
it  might  be.  But  we ' sang  our  little  hymn 
together  that  we  had  sung  so  often  in  the 
school  and  church  at  Tokio : 


“Jesus  loves  me,  loves  me  still, 
Though  I'm  very  weak  and  ill; 
From  his  shining  throne  on  high 
Comes  to  watch  me  where  I lie. 

“ Jesus  loves  me  ! He  will  stay 
Close  beside  me  all  the  way ; 

If  I love  him,  when  I die 
He  will  take  me  home  on  high.” 


Then  the  girls  knelt  together  whilst  O Chiye 
san  prayed ; and  we  parted  thus  strong  in  the 
faith  of  the  Lord.  O Tama  san  crept  back  to 
the  bedside  after  the  others  had  gone,  and  said, 
“We  have  sung  that  hymn  and  prayed  that 
prayer.  I shall  never  forget  it — never !” 

Feb.  28,  1877. — A bright  morning  has  broken 
over  Japan.  Earth,  sea  and  sky  are  glorious  in 
the  winter  sunshine.  The  great  steamer  is 
35 


4o8  The  Sunrise  Kmgdom.  [1877 

moving  rapidly.  The  engines  are  working, 
the  sails  are  spread,  and  around  us  fly  the 
sea-gulls.  We  are  “homeward  bound.” 

But  our  eyes  are  not  turned  toward  the  home- 
land to-day.  They  are  fixed  upon  the  fast-re- 
ceding shores  of  Japan — fixed  upon  Fu-ji,  all 
white  and  glittering.  Nearly  eight  years  ago, 
as  the  rays  of  the  early  sun  brightened  those 
beautiful  islands,  I said  in  gladness  “O  hayo!" 
— “Good-morning!”  And  now  the  blest  morn- 
ing of  a new  life  has  spread  its  cheering  light 
over  the  land  just  waking  from  the  spiritual 
sleep  of  centuries,  and  still  I may  say  “ O 
hayo  r as  the  Sun  of  righteousness  ascends 
to  meridian  height.  May  darkness  nevermore 
come  over  japan!  May  its  light  shine  “more 
and  more  unto  the  perfect  day”! 

But  as  parting  from  earth  precedes  the  en- 
trance into  heaven,  so  must  I say  “Good-night” 
where  but  a short  time  ago  I said  “ Good-morn- 
ing.” Yes,  to  the  country  I love  I must  say 
“ Sai-o-na-ra  ” — “ Good-bye  ” — if  it  must  be  so. 
If  never  to  see  thee  again  in  this  life,  when  we 
wake  from  sleep  may  we  meet  thy  people  again 
and  mingle  our  joyous  “6^  kayos'"  with  glad 
“ Hallelujahs”! 


THE  END. 


‘ 7‘-' 


w.  / ^:^::^■^,l^.r-^  ■ 

- fCK*'. 


rSnbhs 

n« 

. • p: 

9jfc  \Fi 

; 

' 

''ft:  \ ,. 

;,^%65r.. 

-3’3- 

■ ,t^ 

'.  m". 

'*  -:.. 

t 

i/-. 

•Sl  t 


'S  ^s5g3  ii’  - .■■•^'  M '.  ■ t 'i'i  ■ 

^ ■ -'-^«lCf’  -■fr.-r--^---'  ■*  - *■'■’■ 

■ vP*  ,>>(■  , ..,/  -i4r  - 

' <1  v'-/  r 'f  - 

: -i  "^  -‘  ■ 4,-'“  : ■ . 

-.'  -', -.i  .'  - . 

-,•>9  ?rl  '4-  .-  ‘ ?V3^  ,'-:4r  >^.- 

^ i • Vj*». 


i ' •:/  -0<'!  '^.if  .. 


'4lfe- 


v1i^«f-4iR  tfvu  m 


Y^.v  ',«  *->  ^^.v; 

/ 'JP 


- -56;  .'i 


fl- 


' i ’ ' 


y i 


“ ' ; r M. '. 


IN  U.  S.  A. 


PRINTED 


DS809.C31 

The  sunrise  kingdom, 

Princeton  Theological  Semina^ 


1 1012  00023  5509 


